jfmcarreira/calyp
1
0 Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Projects Releases Wiki Activity
Files
69a1e2f03edb9f86063dfdb36402d4de61ad02b2
calyp/app/external/qcustomplot.cpp
T

25336 lines
795 KiB
C++
Raw Blame History

/***************************************************************************
** **
** QCustomPlot, an easy to use, modern plotting widget for Qt **
** Copyright (C) 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014 Emanuel Eichhammer **
** **
** This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify **
** it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by **
** the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or **
** (at your option) any later version. **
** **
** This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, **
** but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of **
** MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the **
** GNU General Public License for more details. **
** **
** You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License **
** along with this program. If not, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/. **
** **
****************************************************************************
** Author: Emanuel Eichhammer **
** Website/Contact: http://www.qcustomplot.com/ **
** Date: 07.04.14 **
** Version: 1.2.1 **
****************************************************************************/
#include "qcustomplot.h"
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPPainter
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPPainter
\brief QPainter subclass used internally
This QPainter subclass is used to provide some extended functionality e.g. for
tweaking position
consistency between antialiased and non-antialiased painting. Further it
provides workarounds
for QPainter quirks.
\warning This class intentionally hides non-virtual functions of QPainter,
e.g. setPen, save and
restore. So while it is possible to pass a QCPPainter instance to a function
that expects a
QPainter pointer, some of the workarounds and tweaks will be unavailable to
the function (because
it will call the base class implementations of the functions actually hidden
by QCPPainter).
*/
/*!
Creates a new QCPPainter instance and sets default values
*/
QCPPainter::QCPPainter() : QPainter(), mModes( pmDefault ), mIsAntialiasing( false )
{
// don't setRenderHint(QPainter::NonCosmeticDefautPen) here, because painter
// isn't active yet and
// a call to begin() will follow
}
/*!
Creates a new QCPPainter instance on the specified paint \a device and sets
default values. Just
like the analogous QPainter constructor, begins painting on \a device
immediately.
Like \ref begin, this method sets QPainter::NonCosmeticDefaultPen in Qt
versions before Qt5.
*/
QCPPainter::QCPPainter( QPaintDevice* device )
: QPainter( device ), mModes( pmDefault ), mIsAntialiasing( false )
{
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK( 5, 0, 0 ) // before Qt5, default pens used to
// be cosmetic if
// NonCosmeticDefaultPen
// flag isn't set. So we set it to get consistency across Qt versions.
if( isActive() )
setRenderHint( QPainter::NonCosmeticDefaultPen );
#endif
}
QCPPainter::~QCPPainter() {}
/*!
Sets the pen of the painter and applies certain fixes to it, depending on the
mode of this
QCPPainter.
\note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
*/
void QCPPainter::setPen( const QPen& pen )
{
QPainter::setPen( pen );
if( mModes.testFlag( pmNonCosmetic ) )
makeNonCosmetic();
}
/*! \overload
Sets the pen (by color) of the painter and applies certain fixes to it,
depending on the mode of
this QCPPainter.
\note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
*/
void QCPPainter::setPen( const QColor& color )
{
QPainter::setPen( color );
if( mModes.testFlag( pmNonCosmetic ) )
makeNonCosmetic();
}
/*! \overload
Sets the pen (by style) of the painter and applies certain fixes to it,
depending on the mode of
this QCPPainter.
\note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
*/
void QCPPainter::setPen( Qt::PenStyle penStyle )
{
QPainter::setPen( penStyle );
if( mModes.testFlag( pmNonCosmetic ) )
makeNonCosmetic();
}
/*! \overload
Works around a Qt bug introduced with Qt 4.8 which makes drawing QLineF
unpredictable when
antialiasing is disabled. Thus when antialiasing is disabled, it rounds the \a
line to
integer coordinates and then passes it to the original drawLine.
\note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
*/
void QCPPainter::drawLine( const QLineF& line )
{
if( mIsAntialiasing || mModes.testFlag( pmVectorized ) )
QPainter::drawLine( line );
else
QPainter::drawLine( line.toLine() );
}
/*!
Sets whether painting uses antialiasing or not. Use this method instead of
using setRenderHint
with QPainter::Antialiasing directly, as it allows QCPPainter to regain pixel
exactness between
antialiased and non-antialiased painting (Since Qt < 5.0 uses slightly
different coordinate systems for
AA/Non-AA painting).
*/
void QCPPainter::setAntialiasing( bool enabled )
{
setRenderHint( QPainter::Antialiasing, enabled );
if( mIsAntialiasing != enabled )
{
mIsAntialiasing = enabled;
if( !mModes.testFlag( pmVectorized ) ) // antialiasing half-pixel shift only
// needed for rasterized outputs
{
if( mIsAntialiasing )
translate( 0.5, 0.5 );
else
translate( -0.5, -0.5 );
}
}
}
/*!
Sets the mode of the painter. This controls whether the painter shall adjust
its
fixes/workarounds optimized for certain output devices.
*/
void QCPPainter::setModes( QCPPainter::PainterModes modes )
{
mModes = modes;
}
/*!
Sets the QPainter::NonCosmeticDefaultPen in Qt versions before Qt5 after
beginning painting on \a
device. This is necessary to get cosmetic pen consistency across Qt versions,
because since Qt5,
all pens are non-cosmetic by default, and in Qt4 this render hint must be set
to get that
behaviour.
The Constructor \ref QCPPainter(QPaintDevice *device) which directly starts
painting also sets
the render hint as appropriate.
\note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
*/
bool QCPPainter::begin( QPaintDevice* device )
{
bool result = QPainter::begin( device );
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK( 5, 0, 0 ) // before Qt5, default pens used to
// be cosmetic if
// NonCosmeticDefaultPen
// flag isn't set. So we set it to get consistency across Qt versions.
if( result )
setRenderHint( QPainter::NonCosmeticDefaultPen );
#endif
return result;
}
/*! \overload
Sets the mode of the painter. This controls whether the painter shall adjust
its
fixes/workarounds optimized for certain output devices.
*/
void QCPPainter::setMode( QCPPainter::PainterMode mode, bool enabled )
{
if( !enabled && mModes.testFlag( mode ) )
mModes &= ~mode;
else if( enabled && !mModes.testFlag( mode ) )
mModes |= mode;
}
/*!
Saves the painter (see QPainter::save). Since QCPPainter adds some new
internal state to
QPainter, the save/restore functions are reimplemented to also save/restore
those members.
\note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
\see restore
*/
void QCPPainter::save()
{
mAntialiasingStack.push( mIsAntialiasing );
QPainter::save();
}
/*!
Restores the painter (see QPainter::restore). Since QCPPainter adds some new
internal state to
QPainter, the save/restore functions are reimplemented to also save/restore
those members.
\note this function hides the non-virtual base class implementation.
\see save
*/
void QCPPainter::restore()
{
if( !mAntialiasingStack.isEmpty() )
mIsAntialiasing = mAntialiasingStack.pop();
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Unbalanced save/restore";
QPainter::restore();
}
/*!
Changes the pen width to 1 if it currently is 0. This function is called in
the \ref setPen
overrides when the \ref pmNonCosmetic mode is set.
*/
void QCPPainter::makeNonCosmetic()
{
if( qFuzzyIsNull( pen().widthF() ) )
{
QPen p = pen();
p.setWidth( 1 );
QPainter::setPen( p );
}
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPScatterStyle
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPScatterStyle
\brief Represents the visual appearance of scatter points
This class holds information about shape, color and size of scatter points. In
plottables like
QCPGraph it is used to store how scatter points shall be drawn. For example,
\ref
QCPGraph::setScatterStyle takes a QCPScatterStyle instance.
A scatter style consists of a shape (\ref setShape), a line color (\ref
setPen) and possibly a
fill (\ref setBrush), if the shape provides a fillable area. Further, the size
of the shape can
be controlled with \ref setSize.
\section QCPScatterStyle-defining Specifying a scatter style
You can set all these configurations either by calling the respective
functions on an instance:
\code
QCPScatterStyle myScatter;
myScatter.setShape(QCPScatterStyle::ssCircle);
myScatter.setPen(Qt::blue);
myScatter.setBrush(Qt::white);
myScatter.setSize(5);
customPlot->graph(0)->setScatterStyle(myScatter);
\endcode
Or you can use one of the various constructors that take different parameter
combinations, making
it easy to specify a scatter style in a single call, like so:
\code
customPlot->graph(0)->setScatterStyle(QCPScatterStyle(QCPScatterStyle::ssCircle,
Qt::blue, Qt::white, 5));
\endcode
\section QCPScatterStyle-undefinedpen Leaving the color/pen up to the
plottable
There are two constructors which leave the pen undefined: \ref
QCPScatterStyle() and \ref
QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, double size). If those constructors are
used, a call to \ref
isPenDefined will return false. It leads to scatter points that inherit the
pen from the
plottable that uses the scatter style. Thus, if such a scatter style is passed
to QCPGraph, the line
color of the graph (\ref QCPGraph::setPen) will be used by the scatter points.
This makes
it very convenient to set up typical scatter settings:
\code
customPlot->graph(0)->setScatterStyle(QCPScatterStyle::ssPlus);
\endcode
Notice that it wasn't even necessary to explicitly call a QCPScatterStyle
constructor. This works
because QCPScatterStyle provides a constructor that can transform a \ref
ScatterShape directly
into a QCPScatterStyle instance (that's the \ref QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape
shape, double size)
constructor with a default for \a size). In those cases, C++ allows directly
supplying a \ref
ScatterShape, where actually a QCPScatterStyle is expected.
\section QCPScatterStyle-custompath-and-pixmap Custom shapes and pixmaps
QCPScatterStyle supports drawing custom shapes and arbitrary pixmaps as
scatter points.
For custom shapes, you can provide a QPainterPath with the desired shape to
the \ref
setCustomPath function or call the constructor that takes a painter path. The
scatter shape will
automatically be set to \ref ssCustom.
For pixmaps, you call \ref setPixmap with the desired QPixmap. Alternatively
you can use the
constructor that takes a QPixmap. The scatter shape will automatically be set
to \ref ssPixmap.
Note that \ref setSize does not influence the appearance of the pixmap.
*/
/* start documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn bool QCPScatterStyle::isNone() const
Returns whether the scatter shape is \ref ssNone.
\see setShape
*/
/*! \fn bool QCPScatterStyle::isPenDefined() const
Returns whether a pen has been defined for this scatter style.
The pen is undefined if a constructor is called that does not carry \a pen as
parameter. Those are
\ref QCPScatterStyle() and \ref QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, double
size). If the pen is
left undefined, the scatter color will be inherited from the plottable that
uses this scatter
style.
\see setPen
*/
/* end documentation of inline functions */
/*!
Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with size set to 6. No shape, pen or
brush is defined.
Since the pen is undefined (\ref isPenDefined returns false), the scatter
color will be inherited
from the plottable that uses this scatter style.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle()
: mSize( 6 ), mShape( ssNone ), mPen( Qt::NoPen ), mBrush( Qt::NoBrush ), mPenDefined( false )
{
}
/*!
Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with shape set to \a shape and size to
\a size. No pen or
brush is defined.
Since the pen is undefined (\ref isPenDefined returns false), the scatter
color will be inherited
from the plottable that uses this scatter style.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle( ScatterShape shape, double size )
: mSize( size ), mShape( shape ), mPen( Qt::NoPen ), mBrush( Qt::NoBrush ), mPenDefined( false )
{
}
/*!
Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with shape set to \a shape, the pen
color set to \a color,
and size to \a size. No brush is defined, i.e. the scatter point will not be
filled.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle( ScatterShape shape, const QColor& color, double size )
: mSize( size )
, mShape( shape )
, mPen( QPen( color ) )
, mBrush( Qt::NoBrush )
, mPenDefined( true )
{
}
/*!
Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with shape set to \a shape, the pen
color set to \a color,
the brush color to \a fill (with a solid pattern), and size to \a size.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle( ScatterShape shape,
const QColor& color,
const QColor& fill,
double size )
: mSize( size )
, mShape( shape )
, mPen( QPen( color ) )
, mBrush( QBrush( fill ) )
, mPenDefined( true )
{
}
/*!
Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with shape set to \a shape, the pen set
to \a pen, the
brush to \a brush, and size to \a size.
\warning In some cases it might be tempting to directly use a pen style like
<tt>Qt::NoPen</tt> as \a pen
and a color like <tt>Qt::blue</tt> as \a brush. Notice however, that the
corresponding call\n
<tt>QCPScatterStyle(QCPScatterShape::ssCircle, Qt::NoPen, Qt::blue, 5)</tt>\n
doesn't necessarily lead C++ to use this constructor in some cases, but might
mistake
<tt>Qt::NoPen</tt> for a QColor and use the
\ref QCPScatterStyle(ScatterShape shape, const QColor &color, const QColor
&fill, double size)
constructor instead (which will lead to an unexpected look of the scatter
points). To prevent
this, be more explicit with the parameter types. For example, use
<tt>QBrush(Qt::blue)</tt>
instead of just <tt>Qt::blue</tt>, to clearly point out to the compiler that
this constructor is
wanted.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle( ScatterShape shape,
const QPen& pen,
const QBrush& brush,
double size )
: mSize( size )
, mShape( shape )
, mPen( pen )
, mBrush( brush )
, mPenDefined( pen.style() != Qt::NoPen )
{
}
/*!
Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance which will show the specified \a
pixmap. The scatter shape
is set to \ref ssPixmap.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle( const QPixmap& pixmap )
: mSize( 5 )
, mShape( ssPixmap )
, mPen( Qt::NoPen )
, mBrush( Qt::NoBrush )
, mPixmap( pixmap )
, mPenDefined( false )
{
}
/*!
Creates a new QCPScatterStyle instance with a custom shape that is defined via
\a customPath. The
scatter shape is set to \ref ssCustom.
The custom shape line will be drawn with \a pen and filled with \a brush. The
size has a slightly
different meaning than for built-in scatter points: The custom path will be
drawn scaled by a
factor of \a size/6.0. Since the default \a size is 6, the custom path will
appear at a its
natural size by default. To double the size of the path for example, set \a
size to 12.
*/
QCPScatterStyle::QCPScatterStyle( const QPainterPath& customPath,
const QPen& pen,
const QBrush& brush,
double size )
: mSize( size )
, mShape( ssCustom )
, mPen( pen )
, mBrush( brush )
, mCustomPath( customPath )
, mPenDefined( false )
{
}
/*!
Sets the size (pixel diameter) of the drawn scatter points to \a size.
\see setShape
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::setSize( double size )
{
mSize = size;
}
/*!
Sets the shape to \a shape.
Note that the calls \ref setPixmap and \ref setCustomPath automatically set
the shape to \ref
ssPixmap and \ref ssCustom, respectively.
\see setSize
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::setShape( QCPScatterStyle::ScatterShape shape )
{
mShape = shape;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw scatter points to \a pen.
If the pen was previously undefined (see \ref isPenDefined), the pen is
considered defined after
a call to this function, even if \a pen is <tt>Qt::NoPen</tt>.
\see setBrush
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::setPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mPenDefined = true;
mPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the brush that will be used to fill scatter points to \a brush. Note that
not all scatter
shapes have fillable areas. For example, \ref ssPlus does not while \ref
ssCircle does.
\see setPen
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::setBrush( const QBrush& brush )
{
mBrush = brush;
}
/*!
Sets the pixmap that will be drawn as scatter point to \a pixmap.
Note that \ref setSize does not influence the appearance of the pixmap.
The scatter shape is automatically set to \ref ssPixmap.
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::setPixmap( const QPixmap& pixmap )
{
setShape( ssPixmap );
mPixmap = pixmap;
}
/*!
Sets the custom shape that will be drawn as scatter point to \a customPath.
The scatter shape is automatically set to \ref ssCustom.
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::setCustomPath( const QPainterPath& customPath )
{
setShape( ssCustom );
mCustomPath = customPath;
}
/*!
Applies the pen and the brush of this scatter style to \a painter. If this
scatter style has an
undefined pen (\ref isPenDefined), sets the pen of \a painter to \a defaultPen
instead.
This function is used by plottables (or any class that wants to draw scatters)
just before a
number of scatters with this style shall be drawn with the \a painter.
\see drawShape
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::applyTo( QCPPainter* painter, const QPen& defaultPen ) const
{
painter->setPen( mPenDefined ? mPen : defaultPen );
painter->setBrush( mBrush );
}
/*!
Draws the scatter shape with \a painter at position \a pos.
This function does not modify the pen or the brush on the painter, as \ref
applyTo is meant to be
called before scatter points are drawn with \ref drawShape.
\see applyTo
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::drawShape( QCPPainter* painter, QPointF pos ) const
{
drawShape( painter, pos.x(), pos.y() );
}
/*! \overload
Draws the scatter shape with \a painter at position \a x and \a y.
*/
void QCPScatterStyle::drawShape( QCPPainter* painter, double x, double y ) const
{
double w = mSize / 2.0;
switch( mShape )
{
case ssNone:
break;
case ssDot:
{
painter->drawLine( QPointF( x, y ), QPointF( x + 0.0001, y ) );
break;
}
case ssCross:
{
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w, y - w, x + w, y + w ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w, y + w, x + w, y - w ) );
break;
}
case ssPlus:
{
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w, y, x + w, y ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, y + w, x, y - w ) );
break;
}
case ssCircle:
{
painter->drawEllipse( QPointF( x, y ), w, w );
break;
}
case ssDisc:
{
QBrush b = painter->brush();
painter->setBrush( painter->pen().color() );
painter->drawEllipse( QPointF( x, y ), w, w );
painter->setBrush( b );
break;
}
case ssSquare:
{
painter->drawRect( QRectF( x - w, y - w, mSize, mSize ) );
break;
}
case ssDiamond:
{
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w, y, x, y - w ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, y - w, x + w, y ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x + w, y, x, y + w ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, y + w, x - w, y ) );
break;
}
case ssStar:
{
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w, y, x + w, y ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, y + w, x, y - w ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w * 0.707, y - w * 0.707, x + w * 0.707, y + w * 0.707 ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w * 0.707, y + w * 0.707, x + w * 0.707, y - w * 0.707 ) );
break;
}
case ssTriangle:
{
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w, y + 0.755 * w, x + w, y + 0.755 * w ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x + w, y + 0.755 * w, x, y - 0.977 * w ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, y - 0.977 * w, x - w, y + 0.755 * w ) );
break;
}
case ssTriangleInverted:
{
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w, y - 0.755 * w, x + w, y - 0.755 * w ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x + w, y - 0.755 * w, x, y + 0.977 * w ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, y + 0.977 * w, x - w, y - 0.755 * w ) );
break;
}
case ssCrossSquare:
{
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w, y - w, x + w * 0.95, y + w * 0.95 ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w, y + w * 0.95, x + w * 0.95, y - w ) );
painter->drawRect( QRectF( x - w, y - w, mSize, mSize ) );
break;
}
case ssPlusSquare:
{
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w, y, x + w * 0.95, y ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, y + w, x, y - w ) );
painter->drawRect( QRectF( x - w, y - w, mSize, mSize ) );
break;
}
case ssCrossCircle:
{
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w * 0.707, y - w * 0.707, x + w * 0.670, y + w * 0.670 ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w * 0.707, y + w * 0.670, x + w * 0.670, y - w * 0.707 ) );
painter->drawEllipse( QPointF( x, y ), w, w );
break;
}
case ssPlusCircle:
{
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - w, y, x + w, y ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, y + w, x, y - w ) );
painter->drawEllipse( QPointF( x, y ), w, w );
break;
}
case ssPeace:
{
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, y - w, x, y + w ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, y, x - w * 0.707, y + w * 0.707 ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, y, x + w * 0.707, y + w * 0.707 ) );
painter->drawEllipse( QPointF( x, y ), w, w );
break;
}
case ssPixmap:
{
painter->drawPixmap( x - mPixmap.width() * 0.5, y - mPixmap.height() * 0.5, mPixmap );
break;
}
case ssCustom:
{
QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform();
painter->translate( x, y );
painter->scale( mSize / 6.0, mSize / 6.0 );
painter->drawPath( mCustomPath );
painter->setTransform( oldTransform );
break;
}
}
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLayer
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPLayer
\brief A layer that may contain objects, to control the rendering order
The Layering system of QCustomPlot is the mechanism to control the rendering
order of the
elements inside the plot.
It is based on the two classes QCPLayer and QCPLayerable. QCustomPlot holds an
ordered list of
one or more instances of QCPLayer (see QCustomPlot::addLayer,
QCustomPlot::layer,
QCustomPlot::moveLayer, etc.). When replotting, QCustomPlot goes through the
list of layers
bottom to top and successively draws the layerables of the layers.
A QCPLayer contains an ordered list of QCPLayerable instances. QCPLayerable is
an abstract base
class from which almost all visible objects derive, like axes, grids, graphs,
items, etc.
Initially, QCustomPlot has five layers: "background", "grid", "main", "axes"
and "legend" (in
that order). The top two layers "axes" and "legend" contain the default axes
and legend, so they
will be drawn on top. In the middle, there is the "main" layer. It is
initially empty and set as
the current layer (see QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer). This means, all new
plottables, items etc.
are created on this layer by default. Then comes the "grid" layer which
contains the QCPGrid
instances (which belong tightly to QCPAxis, see \ref QCPAxis::grid). The Axis
rect background
shall be drawn behind everything else, thus the default QCPAxisRect instance
is placed on the
"background" layer. Of course, the layer affiliation of the individual objects
can be changed as
required (\ref QCPLayerable::setLayer).
Controlling the ordering of objects is easy: Create a new layer in the
position you want it to
be, e.g. above "main", with QCustomPlot::addLayer. Then set the current layer
with
QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer to that new layer and finally create the objects
normally. They will
be placed on the new layer automatically, due to the current layer setting.
Alternatively you
could have also ignored the current layer setting and just moved the objects
with
QCPLayerable::setLayer to the desired layer after creating them.
It is also possible to move whole layers. For example, If you want the grid to
be shown in front
of all plottables/items on the "main" layer, just move it above "main" with
QCustomPlot::moveLayer.
The rendering order within one layer is simply by order of creation or
insertion. The item
created last (or added last to the layer), is drawn on top of all other
objects on that layer.
When a layer is deleted, the objects on it are not deleted with it, but fall
on the layer below
the deleted layer, see QCustomPlot::removeLayer.
*/
/* start documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn QList<QCPLayerable*> QCPLayer::children() const
Returns a list of all layerables on this layer. The order corresponds to the
rendering order:
layerables with higher indices are drawn above layerables with lower indices.
*/
/*! \fn int QCPLayer::index() const
Returns the index this layer has in the QCustomPlot. The index is the integer
number by which this layer can be
accessed via \ref QCustomPlot::layer.
Layers with higher indices will be drawn above layers with lower indices.
*/
/* end documentation of inline functions */
/*!
Creates a new QCPLayer instance.
Normally you shouldn't directly instantiate layers, use \ref
QCustomPlot::addLayer instead.
\warning It is not checked that \a layerName is actually a unique layer name
in \a parentPlot.
This check is only performed by \ref QCustomPlot::addLayer.
*/
QCPLayer::QCPLayer( QCustomPlot* parentPlot, const QString& layerName )
: QObject( parentPlot )
, mParentPlot( parentPlot )
, mName( layerName )
, mIndex( -1 )
, // will be set to a proper value by the QCustomPlot layer
// creation function
mVisible( true )
{
// Note: no need to make sure layerName is unique, because layer
// management is done with QCustomPlot functions.
}
QCPLayer::~QCPLayer()
{
// If child layerables are still on this layer, detach them, so they don't try
// to reach back to this
// then invalid layer once they get deleted/moved themselves. This only
// happens when layers are deleted
// directly, like in the QCustomPlot destructor. (The regular layer removal
// procedure for the user is to
// call QCustomPlot::removeLayer, which moves all layerables off this layer
// before deleting it.)
while( !mChildren.isEmpty() )
mChildren.last()->setLayer( 0 ); // removes itself from mChildren via removeChild()
if( mParentPlot->currentLayer() == this )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "The parent plot's mCurrentLayer will be a "
"dangling pointer. Should have been set to a "
"valid layer or 0 beforehand.";
}
/*!
Sets whether this layer is visible or not. If \a visible is set to false, all
layerables on this
layer will be invisible.
This function doesn't change the visibility property of the layerables (\ref
QCPLayerable::setVisible), but the \ref QCPLayerable::realVisibility of each
layerable takes the
visibility of the parent layer into account.
*/
void QCPLayer::setVisible( bool visible )
{
mVisible = visible;
}
/*! \internal
Adds the \a layerable to the list of this layer. If \a prepend is set to true,
the layerable will
be prepended to the list, i.e. be drawn beneath the other layerables already
in the list.
This function does not change the \a mLayer member of \a layerable to this
layer. (Use
QCPLayerable::setLayer to change the layer of an object, not this function.)
\see removeChild
*/
void QCPLayer::addChild( QCPLayerable* layerable, bool prepend )
{
if( !mChildren.contains( layerable ) )
{
if( prepend )
mChildren.prepend( layerable );
else
mChildren.append( layerable );
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layerable is already child of this layer"
<< reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( layerable );
}
/*! \internal
Removes the \a layerable from the list of this layer.
This function does not change the \a mLayer member of \a layerable. (Use
QCPLayerable::setLayer
to change the layer of an object, not this function.)
\see addChild
*/
void QCPLayer::removeChild( QCPLayerable* layerable )
{
if( !mChildren.removeOne( layerable ) )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layerable is not child of this layer"
<< reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( layerable );
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLayerable
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPLayerable
\brief Base class for all drawable objects
This is the abstract base class most visible objects derive from, e.g.
plottables, axes, grid
etc.
Every layerable is on a layer (QCPLayer) which allows controlling the
rendering order by stacking
the layers accordingly.
For details about the layering mechanism, see the QCPLayer documentation.
*/
/* start documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn QCPLayerable *QCPLayerable::parentLayerable() const
Returns the parent layerable of this layerable. The parent layerable is used
to provide
visibility hierarchies in conjunction with the method \ref realVisibility.
This way, layerables
only get drawn if their parent layerables are visible, too.
Note that a parent layerable is not necessarily also the QObject parent for
memory management.
Further, a layerable doesn't always have a parent layerable, so this function
may return 0.
A parent layerable is set implicitly with when placed inside layout elements
and doesn't need to be
set manually by the user.
*/
/* end documentation of inline functions */
/* start documentation of pure virtual functions */
/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayerable::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint(QCPPainter
*painter) const = 0
\internal
This function applies the default antialiasing setting to the specified \a
painter, using the
function \ref applyAntialiasingHint. It is the antialiasing state the painter
is put in, when
\ref draw is called on the layerable. If the layerable has multiple entities
whose antialiasing
setting may be specified individually, this function should set the
antialiasing state of the
most prominent entity. In this case however, the \ref draw function usually
calls the specialized
versions of this function before drawing each entity, effectively overriding
the setting of the
default antialiasing hint.
<b>First example:</b> QCPGraph has multiple entities that have an antialiasing
setting: The graph
line, fills, scatters and error bars. Those can be configured via
QCPGraph::setAntialiased,
QCPGraph::setAntialiasedFill, QCPGraph::setAntialiasedScatters etc.
Consequently, there isn't
only the QCPGraph::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint function (which corresponds to
the graph line's
antialiasing), but specialized ones like QCPGraph::applyFillAntialiasingHint
and
QCPGraph::applyScattersAntialiasingHint. So before drawing one of those
entities, QCPGraph::draw
calls the respective specialized applyAntialiasingHint function.
<b>Second example:</b> QCPItemLine consists only of a line so there is only
one antialiasing
setting which can be controlled with QCPItemLine::setAntialiased. (This
function is inherited by
all layerables. The specialized functions, as seen on QCPGraph, must be added
explicitly to the
respective layerable subclass.) Consequently it only has the normal
QCPItemLine::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint. The \ref QCPItemLine::draw function
doesn't need to
care about setting any antialiasing states, because the default antialiasing
hint is already set
on the painter when the \ref draw function is called, and that's the state it
wants to draw the
line with.
*/
/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayerable::draw(QCPPainter *painter) const = 0
\internal
This function draws the layerable with the specified \a painter. It is only
called by
QCustomPlot, if the layerable is visible (\ref setVisible).
Before this function is called, the painter's antialiasing state is set via
\ref
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint, see the documentation there. Further, the
clipping rectangle was
set to \ref clipRect.
*/
/* end documentation of pure virtual functions */
/* start documentation of signals */
/*! \fn void QCPLayerable::layerChanged(QCPLayer *newLayer);
This signal is emitted when the layer of this layerable changes, i.e. this
layerable is moved to
a different layer.
\see setLayer
*/
/* end documentation of signals */
/*!
Creates a new QCPLayerable instance.
Since QCPLayerable is an abstract base class, it can't be instantiated
directly. Use one of the
derived classes.
If \a plot is provided, it automatically places itself on the layer named \a
targetLayer. If \a
targetLayer is an empty string, it places itself on the current layer of the
plot (see \ref
QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer).
It is possible to provide 0 as \a plot. In that case, you should assign a
parent plot at a later
time with \ref initializeParentPlot.
The layerable's parent layerable is set to \a parentLayerable, if provided.
Direct layerable parents
are mainly used to control visibility in a hierarchy of layerables. This means
a layerable is
only drawn, if all its ancestor layerables are also visible. Note that \a
parentLayerable does
not become the QObject-parent (for memory management) of this layerable, \a
plot does.
*/
QCPLayerable::QCPLayerable( QCustomPlot* plot, QString targetLayer, QCPLayerable* parentLayerable )
: QObject( plot )
, mVisible( true )
, mParentPlot( plot )
, mParentLayerable( parentLayerable )
, mLayer( 0 )
, mAntialiased( true )
{
if( mParentPlot )
{
if( targetLayer.isEmpty() )
setLayer( mParentPlot->currentLayer() );
else if( !setLayer( targetLayer ) )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "setting QCPlayerable initial layer to" << targetLayer
<< "failed.";
}
}
QCPLayerable::~QCPLayerable()
{
if( mLayer )
{
mLayer->removeChild( this );
mLayer = 0;
}
}
/*!
Sets the visibility of this layerable object. If an object is not visible, it
will not be drawn
on the QCustomPlot surface, and user interaction with it (e.g. click and
selection) is not
possible.
*/
void QCPLayerable::setVisible( bool on )
{
mVisible = on;
}
/*!
Sets the \a layer of this layerable object. The object will be placed on top
of the other objects
already on \a layer.
Returns true on success, i.e. if \a layer is a valid layer.
*/
bool QCPLayerable::setLayer( QCPLayer* layer )
{
return moveToLayer( layer, false );
}
/*! \overload
Sets the layer of this layerable object by name
Returns true on success, i.e. if \a layerName is a valid layer name.
*/
bool QCPLayerable::setLayer( const QString& layerName )
{
if( !mParentPlot )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no parent QCustomPlot set";
return false;
}
if( QCPLayer* layer = mParentPlot->layer( layerName ) )
{
return setLayer( layer );
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "there is no layer with name" << layerName;
return false;
}
}
/*!
Sets whether this object will be drawn antialiased or not.
Note that antialiasing settings may be overridden by
QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
*/
void QCPLayerable::setAntialiased( bool enabled )
{
mAntialiased = enabled;
}
/*!
Returns whether this layerable is visible, taking the visibility of the
layerable parent and the
visibility of the layer this layerable is on into account. This is the method
that is consulted
to decide whether a layerable shall be drawn or not.
If this layerable has a direct layerable parent (usually set via hierarchies
implemented in
subclasses, like in the case of QCPLayoutElement), this function returns true
only if this
layerable has its visibility set to true and the parent layerable's \ref
realVisibility returns
true.
If this layerable doesn't have a direct layerable parent, returns the state of
this layerable's
visibility.
*/
bool QCPLayerable::realVisibility() const
{
return mVisible && ( !mLayer || mLayer->visible() ) &&
( !mParentLayerable || mParentLayerable.data()->realVisibility() );
}
/*!
This function is used to decide whether a click hits a layerable object or
not.
\a pos is a point in pixel coordinates on the QCustomPlot surface. This
function returns the
shortest pixel distance of this point to the object. If the object is either
invisible or the
distance couldn't be determined, -1.0 is returned. Further, if \a
onlySelectable is true and the
object is not selectable, -1.0 is returned, too.
If the item is represented not by single lines but by an area like QCPItemRect
or QCPItemText, a
click inside the area returns a constant value greater zero (typically the
selectionTolerance of
the parent QCustomPlot multiplied by 0.99). If the click lies outside the
area, this function
returns -1.0.
Providing a constant value for area objects allows selecting line objects even
when they are
obscured by such area objects, by clicking close to the lines (i.e. closer
than
0.99*selectionTolerance).
The actual setting of the selection state is not done by this function. This
is handled by the
parent QCustomPlot when the mouseReleaseEvent occurs, and the finally selected
object is notified
via the selectEvent/deselectEvent methods.
\a details is an optional output parameter. Every layerable subclass may place
any information
in \a details. This information will be passed to \ref selectEvent when the
parent QCustomPlot
decides on the basis of this selectTest call, that the object was successfully
selected. The
subsequent call to \ref selectEvent will carry the \a details. This is useful
for multi-part
objects (like QCPAxis). This way, a possibly complex calculation to decide
which part was clicked
is only done once in \ref selectTest. The result (i.e. the actually clicked
part) can then be
placed in \a details. So in the subsequent \ref selectEvent, the decision
which part was
selected doesn't have to be done a second time for a single selection
operation.
You may pass 0 as \a details to indicate that you are not interested in those
selection details.
\see selectEvent, deselectEvent, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
double QCPLayerable::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( pos )
Q_UNUSED( onlySelectable )
Q_UNUSED( details )
return -1.0;
}
/*! \internal
Sets the parent plot of this layerable. Use this function once to set the
parent plot if you have
passed 0 in the constructor. It can not be used to move a layerable from one
QCustomPlot to
another one.
Note that, unlike when passing a non-null parent plot in the constructor, this
function does not
make \a parentPlot the QObject-parent of this layerable. If you want this,
call
QObject::setParent(\a parentPlot) in addition to this function.
Further, you will probably want to set a layer (\ref setLayer) after calling
this function, to
make the layerable appear on the QCustomPlot.
The parent plot change will be propagated to subclasses via a call to \ref
parentPlotInitialized
so they can react accordingly (e.g. also initialize the parent plot of child
layerables, like
QCPLayout does).
*/
void QCPLayerable::initializeParentPlot( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
{
if( mParentPlot )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "called with mParentPlot already initialized";
return;
}
if( !parentPlot )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "called with parentPlot zero";
mParentPlot = parentPlot;
parentPlotInitialized( mParentPlot );
}
/*! \internal
Sets the parent layerable of this layerable to \a parentLayerable. Note that
\a parentLayerable does not
become the QObject-parent (for memory management) of this layerable.
The parent layerable has influence on the return value of the \ref
realVisibility method. Only
layerables with a fully visible parent tree will return true for \ref
realVisibility, and thus be
drawn.
\see realVisibility
*/
void QCPLayerable::setParentLayerable( QCPLayerable* parentLayerable )
{
mParentLayerable = parentLayerable;
}
/*! \internal
Moves this layerable object to \a layer. If \a prepend is true, this object
will be prepended to
the new layer's list, i.e. it will be drawn below the objects already on the
layer. If it is
false, the object will be appended.
Returns true on success, i.e. if \a layer is a valid layer.
*/
bool QCPLayerable::moveToLayer( QCPLayer* layer, bool prepend )
{
if( layer && !mParentPlot )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no parent QCustomPlot set";
return false;
}
if( layer && layer->parentPlot() != mParentPlot )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layer" << layer->name()
<< "is not in same QCustomPlot as this layerable";
return false;
}
QCPLayer* oldLayer = mLayer;
if( mLayer )
mLayer->removeChild( this );
mLayer = layer;
if( mLayer )
mLayer->addChild( this, prepend );
if( mLayer != oldLayer )
emit layerChanged( mLayer );
return true;
}
/*! \internal
Sets the QCPainter::setAntialiasing state on the provided \a painter,
depending on the \a
localAntialiased value as well as the overrides \ref
QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements. Which override enum this function
takes into account is
controlled via \a overrideElement.
*/
void QCPLayerable::applyAntialiasingHint( QCPPainter* painter,
bool localAntialiased,
QCP::AntialiasedElement overrideElement ) const
{
if( mParentPlot && mParentPlot->notAntialiasedElements().testFlag( overrideElement ) )
painter->setAntialiasing( false );
else if( mParentPlot && mParentPlot->antialiasedElements().testFlag( overrideElement ) )
painter->setAntialiasing( true );
else
painter->setAntialiasing( localAntialiased );
}
/*! \internal
This function is called by \ref initializeParentPlot, to allow subclasses to
react on the setting
of a parent plot. This is the case when 0 was passed as parent plot in the
constructor, and the
parent plot is set at a later time.
For example, QCPLayoutElement/QCPLayout hierarchies may be created
independently of any
QCustomPlot at first. When they are then added to a layout inside the
QCustomPlot, the top level
element of the hierarchy gets its parent plot initialized with \ref
initializeParentPlot. To
propagate the parent plot to all the children of the hierarchy, the top level
element then uses
this function to pass the parent plot on to its child elements.
The default implementation does nothing.
\see initializeParentPlot
*/
void QCPLayerable::parentPlotInitialized( QCustomPlot* parentPlot ){Q_UNUSED( parentPlot )}
/*! \internal
Returns the selection category this layerable shall belong to. The selection
category is used in
conjunction with \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions to control which objects
are selectable and
which aren't.
Subclasses that don't fit any of the normal \ref QCP::Interaction values can
use \ref
QCP::iSelectOther. This is what the default implementation returns.
\see QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
QCP::Interaction QCPLayerable::selectionCategory() const
{
return QCP::iSelectOther;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the clipping rectangle of this layerable object. By default, this is
the viewport of the
parent QCustomPlot. Specific subclasses may reimplement this function to
provide different
clipping rects.
The returned clipping rect is set on the painter before the draw function of
the respective
object is called.
*/
QRect QCPLayerable::clipRect() const
{
if( mParentPlot )
return mParentPlot->viewport();
else
return QRect();
}
/*! \internal
This event is called when the layerable shall be selected, as a consequence of
a click by the
user. Subclasses should react to it by setting their selection state
appropriately. The default
implementation does nothing.
\a event is the mouse event that caused the selection. \a additive indicates,
whether the user
was holding the multi-select-modifier while performing the selection (see \ref
QCustomPlot::setMultiSelectModifier). if \a additive is true, the selection
state must be toggled
(i.e. become selected when unselected and unselected when selected).
Every selectEvent is preceded by a call to \ref selectTest, which has returned
positively (i.e.
returned a value greater than 0 and less than the selection tolerance of the
parent QCustomPlot).
The \a details data you output from \ref selectTest is fed back via \a details
here. You may
use it to transport any kind of information from the selectTest to the
possibly subsequent
selectEvent. Usually \a details is used to transfer which part was clicked, if
it is a layerable
that has multiple individually selectable parts (like QCPAxis). This way
selectEvent doesn't need
to do the calculation again to find out which part was actually clicked.
\a selectionStateChanged is an output parameter. If the pointer is non-null,
this function must
set the value either to true or false, depending on whether the selection
state of this layerable
was actually changed. For layerables that only are selectable as a whole and
not in parts, this
is simple: if \a additive is true, \a selectionStateChanged must also be set
to true, because the
selection toggles. If \a additive is false, \a selectionStateChanged is only
set to true, if the
layerable was previously unselected and now is switched to the selected state.
\see selectTest, deselectEvent
*/
void QCPLayerable::selectEvent( QMouseEvent* event,
bool additive,
const QVariant& details,
bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
Q_UNUSED( event )
Q_UNUSED( additive )
Q_UNUSED( details )
Q_UNUSED( selectionStateChanged )
}
/*! \internal
This event is called when the layerable shall be deselected, either as
consequence of a user
interaction or a call to \ref QCustomPlot::deselectAll. Subclasses should
react to it by
unsetting their selection appropriately.
just as in \ref selectEvent, the output parameter \a selectionStateChanged (if
non-null), must
return true or false when the selection state of this layerable has changed or
not changed,
respectively.
\see selectTest, selectEvent
*/
void QCPLayerable::deselectEvent( bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
Q_UNUSED( selectionStateChanged )
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPRange
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPRange
\brief Represents the range an axis is encompassing.
contains a \a lower and \a upper double value and provides convenience input,
output and
modification functions.
\see QCPAxis::setRange
*/
/*!
Minimum range size (\a upper - \a lower) the range changing functions will
accept. Smaller
intervals would cause errors due to the 11-bit exponent of double precision
numbers,
corresponding to a minimum magnitude of roughly 1e-308.
\see validRange, maxRange
*/
const double QCPRange::minRange = 1e-280;
/*!
Maximum values (negative and positive) the range will accept in range-changing
functions.
Larger absolute values would cause errors due to the 11-bit exponent of double
precision numbers,
corresponding to a maximum magnitude of roughly 1e308.
Since the number of planck-volumes in the entire visible universe is only
~1e183, this should
be enough.
\see validRange, minRange
*/
const double QCPRange::maxRange = 1e250;
/*!
Constructs a range with \a lower and \a upper set to zero.
*/
QCPRange::QCPRange() : lower( 0 ), upper( 0 ) {}
/*! \overload
Constructs a range with the specified \a lower and \a upper values.
*/
QCPRange::QCPRange( double lower, double upper ) : lower( lower ), upper( upper )
{
normalize();
}
/*!
Returns the size of the range, i.e. \a upper-\a lower
*/
double QCPRange::size() const
{
return upper - lower;
}
/*!
Returns the center of the range, i.e. (\a upper+\a lower)*0.5
*/
double QCPRange::center() const
{
return ( upper + lower ) * 0.5;
}
/*!
Makes sure \a lower is numerically smaller than \a upper. If this is not the
case, the values
are swapped.
*/
void QCPRange::normalize()
{
if( lower > upper )
qSwap( lower, upper );
}
/*!
Expands this range such that \a otherRange is contained in the new range. It
is assumed that both
this range and \a otherRange are normalized (see \ref normalize).
If \a otherRange is already inside the current range, this function does
nothing.
\see expanded
*/
void QCPRange::expand( const QCPRange& otherRange )
{
if( lower > otherRange.lower )
lower = otherRange.lower;
if( upper < otherRange.upper )
upper = otherRange.upper;
}
/*!
Returns an expanded range that contains this and \a otherRange. It is assumed
that both this
range and \a otherRange are normalized (see \ref normalize).
\see expand
*/
QCPRange QCPRange::expanded( const QCPRange& otherRange ) const
{
QCPRange result = *this;
result.expand( otherRange );
return result;
}
/*!
Returns a sanitized version of the range. Sanitized means for logarithmic
scales, that
the range won't span the positive and negative sign domain, i.e. contain zero.
Further
\a lower will always be numerically smaller (or equal) to \a upper.
If the original range does span positive and negative sign domains or contains
zero,
the returned range will try to approximate the original range as good as
possible.
If the positive interval of the original range is wider than the negative
interval, the
returned range will only contain the positive interval, with lower bound set
to \a rangeFac or
\a rangeFac *\a upper, whichever is closer to zero. Same procedure is used if
the negative interval
is wider than the positive interval, this time by changing the \a upper bound.
*/
QCPRange QCPRange::sanitizedForLogScale() const
{
double rangeFac = 1e-3;
QCPRange sanitizedRange( lower, upper );
sanitizedRange.normalize();
// can't have range spanning negative and positive values in log plot, so
// change range to fix it
// if (qFuzzyCompare(sanitizedRange.lower+1, 1) &&
// !qFuzzyCompare(sanitizedRange.upper+1, 1))
if( sanitizedRange.lower == 0.0 && sanitizedRange.upper != 0.0 )
{
// case lower is 0
if( rangeFac < sanitizedRange.upper * rangeFac )
sanitizedRange.lower = rangeFac;
else
sanitizedRange.lower = sanitizedRange.upper * rangeFac;
} // else if (!qFuzzyCompare(lower+1, 1) && qFuzzyCompare(upper+1, 1))
else if( sanitizedRange.lower != 0.0 && sanitizedRange.upper == 0.0 )
{
// case upper is 0
if( -rangeFac > sanitizedRange.lower * rangeFac )
sanitizedRange.upper = -rangeFac;
else
sanitizedRange.upper = sanitizedRange.lower * rangeFac;
}
else if( sanitizedRange.lower < 0 && sanitizedRange.upper > 0 )
{
// find out whether negative or positive interval is wider to decide which
// sign domain will be chosen
if( -sanitizedRange.lower > sanitizedRange.upper )
{
// negative is wider, do same as in case upper is 0
if( -rangeFac > sanitizedRange.lower * rangeFac )
sanitizedRange.upper = -rangeFac;
else
sanitizedRange.upper = sanitizedRange.lower * rangeFac;
}
else
{
// positive is wider, do same as in case lower is 0
if( rangeFac < sanitizedRange.upper * rangeFac )
sanitizedRange.lower = rangeFac;
else
sanitizedRange.lower = sanitizedRange.upper * rangeFac;
}
}
// due to normalization, case lower>0 && upper<0 should never occur, because
// that implies upper<lower
return sanitizedRange;
}
/*!
Returns a sanitized version of the range. Sanitized means for linear scales,
that
\a lower will always be numerically smaller (or equal) to \a upper.
*/
QCPRange QCPRange::sanitizedForLinScale() const
{
QCPRange sanitizedRange( lower, upper );
sanitizedRange.normalize();
return sanitizedRange;
}
/*!
Returns true when \a value lies within or exactly on the borders of the range.
*/
bool QCPRange::contains( double value ) const
{
return value >= lower && value <= upper;
}
/*!
Checks, whether the specified range is within valid bounds, which are defined
as QCPRange::maxRange and QCPRange::minRange.
A valid range means:
\li range bounds within -maxRange and maxRange
\li range size above minRange
\li range size below maxRange
*/
bool QCPRange::validRange( double lower, double upper )
{
/*
return (lower > -maxRange &&
upper < maxRange &&
qAbs(lower-upper) > minRange &&
(lower < -minRange || lower > minRange) &&
(upper < -minRange || upper > minRange));
*/
return ( lower > -maxRange && upper < maxRange && qAbs( lower - upper ) > minRange &&
qAbs( lower - upper ) < maxRange );
}
/*!
\overload
Checks, whether the specified range is within valid bounds, which are defined
as QCPRange::maxRange and QCPRange::minRange.
A valid range means:
\li range bounds within -maxRange and maxRange
\li range size above minRange
\li range size below maxRange
*/
bool QCPRange::validRange( const QCPRange& range )
{
/*
return (range.lower > -maxRange &&
range.upper < maxRange &&
qAbs(range.lower-range.upper) > minRange &&
qAbs(range.lower-range.upper) < maxRange &&
(range.lower < -minRange || range.lower > minRange) &&
(range.upper < -minRange || range.upper > minRange));
*/
return ( range.lower > -maxRange && range.upper < maxRange &&
qAbs( range.lower - range.upper ) > minRange &&
qAbs( range.lower - range.upper ) < maxRange );
}
/*! \page thelayoutsystem The Layout System
The layout system is responsible for positioning and scaling layout elements
such as axis rects,
legends and plot titles in a QCustomPlot.
\section layoutsystem-classesandmechanisms Classes and mechanisms
The layout system is based on the abstract base class \ref QCPLayoutElement.
All objects that
take part in the layout system derive from this class, either directly or
indirectly.
Since QCPLayoutElement itself derives from \ref QCPLayerable, a layout element
may draw its own
content. However, it is perfectly possible for a layout element to only serve
as a structuring
and/or positioning element, not drawing anything on its own.
\subsection layoutsystem-rects Rects of a layout element
A layout element is a rectangular object described by two rects: the inner
rect (\ref
QCPLayoutElement::rect) and the outer rect (\ref
QCPLayoutElement::setOuterRect). The inner rect
is calculated automatically by applying the margin (\ref
QCPLayoutElement::setMargins) inward
from the outer rect. The inner rect is meant for main content while the margin
area may either be
left blank or serve for displaying peripheral graphics. For example, \ref
QCPAxisRect positions
the four main axes at the sides of the inner rect, so graphs end up inside it
and the axis labels
and tick labels are in the margin area.
\subsection layoutsystem-margins Margins
Each layout element may provide a mechanism to automatically determine its
margins. Internally,
this is realized with the \ref QCPLayoutElement::calculateAutoMargin function
which takes a \ref
QCP::MarginSide and returns an integer value which represents the ideal margin
for the specified
side. The automatic margin will be used on the sides specified in \ref
QCPLayoutElement::setAutoMargins. By default, it is set to \ref QCP::msAll
meaning automatic
margin calculation is enabled for all four sides. In this case, a minimum
margin may be set with
\ref QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumMargins, to prevent the automatic margin
mechanism from setting
margins smaller than desired for a specific situation. If automatic margin
calculation is unset
for a specific side, the margin of that side can be controlled directy via
\ref
QCPLayoutElement::setMargins.
If multiple layout ements are arranged next to or beneath each other, it may
be desirable to
align their inner rects on certain sides. Since they all might have different
automatic margins,
this usually isn't the case. The class \ref QCPMarginGroup and \ref
QCPLayoutElement::setMarginGroup fix this by allowing to synchronize multiple
margins. See the
documentation there for details.
\subsection layoutsystem-layout Layouts
As mentioned, a QCPLayoutElement may have an arbitrary number of child layout
elements and in
princple can have the only purpose to manage/arrange those child elements.
This is what the
subclass \ref QCPLayout specializes on. It is a QCPLayoutElement itself but
has no visual
representation. It defines an interface to add, remove and manage child layout
elements.
QCPLayout isn't a usable layout though, it's an abstract base class that
concrete layouts derive
from, like \ref QCPLayoutGrid which arranges its child elements in a grid and
\ref QCPLayoutInset
which allows placing child elements freely inside its rect.
Since a QCPLayout is a layout element itself, it may be placed inside other
layouts. This way,
complex hierarchies may be created, offering very flexible arrangements.
\image html LayoutsystemSketch.png
Above is a sketch of the default \ref QCPLayoutGrid accessible via \ref
QCustomPlot::plotLayout.
It shows how two child layout elements are placed inside the grid layout next
to each other in
cells (0, 0) and (0, 1).
\subsection layoutsystem-plotlayout The top level plot layout
Every QCustomPlot has one top level layout of type \ref QCPLayoutGrid. It is
accessible via \ref
QCustomPlot::plotLayout and contains (directly or indirectly via other
sub-layouts) all layout
elements in the QCustomPlot. By default, this top level grid layout contains a
single cell which
holds the main axis rect.
\subsection layoutsystem-examples Examples
<b>Adding a plot title</b> is a typical and simple case to demonstrate basic
workings of the layout system.
\code
// first we create and prepare a plot title layout element:
QCPPlotTitle *title = new QCPPlotTitle(customPlot);
title->setText("Plot Title Example");
title->setFont(QFont("sans", 12, QFont::Bold));
// then we add it to the main plot layout:
customPlot->plotLayout()->insertRow(0); // insert an empty row above the axis
rect
customPlot->plotLayout()->addElement(0, 0, title); // place the title in the
empty cell we've just created
\endcode
\image html layoutsystem-addingplottitle.png
<b>Arranging multiple axis rects</b> actually is the central purpose of the
layout system.
\code
customPlot->plotLayout()->clear(); // let's start from scratch and remove the
default axis rect
// add the first axis rect in second row (row index 1):
QCPAxisRect *topAxisRect = new QCPAxisRect(customPlot);
customPlot->plotLayout()->addElement(1, 0, topAxisRect);
// create a sub layout that we'll place in first row:
QCPLayoutGrid *subLayout = new QCPLayoutGrid;
customPlot->plotLayout()->addElement(0, 0, subLayout);
// add two axis rects in the sub layout next to each other:
QCPAxisRect *leftAxisRect = new QCPAxisRect(customPlot);
QCPAxisRect *rightAxisRect = new QCPAxisRect(customPlot);
subLayout->addElement(0, 0, leftAxisRect);
subLayout->addElement(0, 1, rightAxisRect);
subLayout->setColumnStretchFactor(0, 3); // left axis rect shall have 60% of
width
subLayout->setColumnStretchFactor(1, 2); // right one only 40% (3:2 = 60:40)
// since we've created the axis rects and axes from scratch, we need to place
them on
// according layers, if we don't want the grid to be drawn above the axes etc.
// place the axis on "axes" layer and grids on the "grid" layer, which is
below "axes":
QList<QCPAxis*> allAxes;
allAxes << topAxisRect->axes() << leftAxisRect->axes() <<
rightAxisRect->axes();
foreach (QCPAxis *axis, allAxes)
{
axis->setLayer("axes");
axis->grid()->setLayer("grid");
}
\endcode
\image html layoutsystem-multipleaxisrects.png
*/
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPMarginGroup
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPMarginGroup
\brief A margin group allows synchronization of margin sides if working with
multiple layout elements.
QCPMarginGroup allows you to tie a margin side of two or more layout elements
together, such that
they will all have the same size, based on the largest required margin in the
group.
\n
\image html QCPMarginGroup.png "Demonstration of QCPMarginGroup"
\n
In certain situations it is desirable that margins at specific sides are
synchronized across
layout elements. For example, if one QCPAxisRect is below another one in a
grid layout, it will
provide a cleaner look to the user if the left and right margins of the two
axis rects are of the
same size. The left axis of the top axis rect will then be at the same
horizontal position as the
left axis of the lower axis rect, making them appear aligned. The same applies
for the right
axes. This is what QCPMarginGroup makes possible.
To add/remove a specific side of a layout element to/from a margin group, use
the \ref
QCPLayoutElement::setMarginGroup method. To completely break apart the margin
group, either call
\ref clear, or just delete the margin group.
\section QCPMarginGroup-example Example
First create a margin group:
\code
QCPMarginGroup *group = new QCPMarginGroup(customPlot);
\endcode
Then set this group on the layout element sides:
\code
customPlot->axisRect(0)->setMarginGroup(QCP::msLeft|QCP::msRight, group);
customPlot->axisRect(1)->setMarginGroup(QCP::msLeft|QCP::msRight, group);
\endcode
Here, we've used the first two axis rects of the plot and synchronized their
left margins with
each other and their right margins with each other.
*/
/* start documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn QList<QCPLayoutElement*> QCPMarginGroup::elements(QCP::MarginSide side)
const
Returns a list of all layout elements that have their margin \a side
associated with this margin
group.
*/
/* end documentation of inline functions */
/*!
Creates a new QCPMarginGroup instance in \a parentPlot.
*/
QCPMarginGroup::QCPMarginGroup( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QObject( parentPlot ), mParentPlot( parentPlot )
{
mChildren.insert( QCP::msLeft, QList<QCPLayoutElement*>() );
mChildren.insert( QCP::msRight, QList<QCPLayoutElement*>() );
mChildren.insert( QCP::msTop, QList<QCPLayoutElement*>() );
mChildren.insert( QCP::msBottom, QList<QCPLayoutElement*>() );
}
QCPMarginGroup::~QCPMarginGroup()
{
clear();
}
/*!
Returns whether this margin group is empty. If this function returns true, no
layout elements use
this margin group to synchronize margin sides.
*/
bool QCPMarginGroup::isEmpty() const
{
QHashIterator<QCP::MarginSide, QList<QCPLayoutElement*>> it( mChildren );
while( it.hasNext() )
{
it.next();
if( !it.value().isEmpty() )
return false;
}
return true;
}
/*!
Clears this margin group. The synchronization of the margin sides that use
this margin group is
lifted and they will use their individual margin sizes again.
*/
void QCPMarginGroup::clear()
{
// make all children remove themselves from this margin group:
QHashIterator<QCP::MarginSide, QList<QCPLayoutElement*>> it( mChildren );
while( it.hasNext() )
{
it.next();
const QList<QCPLayoutElement*> elements = it.value();
for( int i = elements.size() - 1; i >= 0; --i )
elements.at( i )->setMarginGroup( it.key(),
0 ); // removes itself from mChildren via removeChild
}
}
/*! \internal
Returns the synchronized common margin for \a side. This is the margin value
that will be used by
the layout element on the respective side, if it is part of this margin group.
The common margin is calculated by requesting the automatic margin (\ref
QCPLayoutElement::calculateAutoMargin) of each element associated with \a side
in this margin
group, and choosing the largest returned value.
(QCPLayoutElement::minimumMargins is taken into
account, too.)
*/
int QCPMarginGroup::commonMargin( QCP::MarginSide side ) const
{
// query all automatic margins of the layout elements in this margin group
// side and find maximum:
int result = 0;
const QList<QCPLayoutElement*> elements = mChildren.value( side );
for( int i = 0; i < elements.size(); ++i )
{
if( !elements.at( i )->autoMargins().testFlag( side ) )
continue;
int m = qMax( elements.at( i )->calculateAutoMargin( side ),
QCP::getMarginValue( elements.at( i )->minimumMargins(), side ) );
if( m > result )
result = m;
}
return result;
}
/*! \internal
Adds \a element to the internal list of child elements, for the margin \a
side.
This function does not modify the margin group property of \a element.
*/
void QCPMarginGroup::addChild( QCP::MarginSide side, QCPLayoutElement* element )
{
if( !mChildren[side].contains( element ) )
mChildren[side].append( element );
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "element is already child of this margin group side"
<< reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( element );
}
/*! \internal
Removes \a element from the internal list of child elements, for the margin \a
side.
This function does not modify the margin group property of \a element.
*/
void QCPMarginGroup::removeChild( QCP::MarginSide side, QCPLayoutElement* element )
{
if( !mChildren[side].removeOne( element ) )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "element is not child of this margin group side"
<< reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( element );
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLayoutElement
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPLayoutElement
\brief The abstract base class for all objects that form \ref thelayoutsystem
"the layout system".
This is an abstract base class. As such, it can't be instantiated directly,
rather use one of its subclasses.
A Layout element is a rectangular object which can be placed in layouts. It
has an outer rect
(QCPLayoutElement::outerRect) and an inner rect (\ref QCPLayoutElement::rect).
The difference
between outer and inner rect is called its margin. The margin can either be
set to automatic or
manual (\ref setAutoMargins) on a per-side basis. If a side is set to manual,
that margin can be
set explicitly with \ref setMargins and will stay fixed at that value. If it's
set to automatic,
the layout element subclass will control the value itself (via \ref
calculateAutoMargin).
Layout elements can be placed in layouts (base class QCPLayout) like
QCPLayoutGrid. The top level
layout is reachable via \ref QCustomPlot::plotLayout, and is a \ref
QCPLayoutGrid. Since \ref
QCPLayout itself derives from \ref QCPLayoutElement, layouts can be nested.
Thus in QCustomPlot one can divide layout elements into two categories: The
ones that are
invisible by themselves, because they don't draw anything. Their only purpose
is to manage the
position and size of other layout elements. This category of layout elements
usually use
QCPLayout as base class. Then there is the category of layout elements which
actually draw
something. For example, QCPAxisRect, QCPLegend and QCPPlotTitle are of this
category. This does
not necessarily mean that the latter category can't have child layout
elements. QCPLegend for
instance, actually derives from QCPLayoutGrid and the individual legend items
are child layout
elements in the grid layout.
*/
/* start documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn QCPLayout *QCPLayoutElement::layout() const
Returns the parent layout of this layout element.
*/
/*! \fn QRect QCPLayoutElement::rect() const
Returns the inner rect of this layout element. The inner rect is the outer
rect (\ref
setOuterRect) shrinked by the margins (\ref setMargins, \ref setAutoMargins).
In some cases, the area between outer and inner rect is left blank. In other
cases the margin
area is used to display peripheral graphics while the main content is in the
inner rect. This is
where automatic margin calculation becomes interesting because it allows the
layout element to
adapt the margins to the peripheral graphics it wants to draw. For example,
\ref QCPAxisRect
draws the axis labels and tick labels in the margin area, thus needs to adjust
the margins (if
\ref setAutoMargins is enabled) according to the space required by the labels
of the axes.
*/
/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayoutElement::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
This event is called, if the mouse was pressed while being inside the outer
rect of this layout
element.
*/
/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayoutElement::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
This event is called, if the mouse is moved inside the outer rect of this
layout element.
*/
/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayoutElement::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
This event is called, if the mouse was previously pressed inside the outer
rect of this layout
element and is now released.
*/
/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayoutElement::mouseDoubleClickEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
This event is called, if the mouse is double-clicked inside the outer rect of
this layout
element.
*/
/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayoutElement::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event)
This event is called, if the mouse wheel is scrolled while the cursor is
inside the rect of this
layout element.
*/
/* end documentation of inline functions */
/*!
Creates an instance of QCPLayoutElement and sets default values.
*/
QCPLayoutElement::QCPLayoutElement( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QCPLayerable( parentPlot )
, // parenthood is changed as soon as layout
// element gets inserted into a layout
// (except for top level layout)
mParentLayout( 0 )
, mMinimumSize()
, mMaximumSize( QWIDGETSIZE_MAX, QWIDGETSIZE_MAX )
, mRect( 0, 0, 0, 0 )
, mOuterRect( 0, 0, 0, 0 )
, mMargins( 0, 0, 0, 0 )
, mMinimumMargins( 0, 0, 0, 0 )
, mAutoMargins( QCP::msAll )
{
}
QCPLayoutElement::~QCPLayoutElement()
{
setMarginGroup( QCP::msAll, 0 ); // unregister at margin groups, if there are any
// unregister at layout:
if( qobject_cast<QCPLayout*>( mParentLayout ) ) // the qobject_cast is just a
// safeguard in case the layout
// forgets to
// call clear() in its dtor and this dtor is called by QObject dtor
mParentLayout->take( this );
}
/*!
Sets the outer rect of this layout element. If the layout element is inside a
layout, the layout
sets the position and size of this layout element using this function.
Calling this function externally has no effect, since the layout will
overwrite any changes to
the outer rect upon the next replot.
The layout element will adapt its inner \ref rect by applying the margins
inward to the outer rect.
\see rect
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setOuterRect( const QRect& rect )
{
if( mOuterRect != rect )
{
mOuterRect = rect;
mRect = mOuterRect.adjusted( mMargins.left(), mMargins.top(), -mMargins.right(),
-mMargins.bottom() );
}
}
/*!
Sets the margins of this layout element. If \ref setAutoMargins is disabled
for some or all
sides, this function is used to manually set the margin on those sides. Sides
that are still set
to be handled automatically are ignored and may have any value in \a margins.
The margin is the distance between the outer rect (controlled by the parent
layout via \ref
setOuterRect) and the inner \ref rect (which usually contains the main content
of this layout
element).
\see setAutoMargins
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMargins( const QMargins& margins )
{
if( mMargins != margins )
{
mMargins = margins;
mRect = mOuterRect.adjusted( mMargins.left(), mMargins.top(), -mMargins.right(),
-mMargins.bottom() );
}
}
/*!
If \ref setAutoMargins is enabled on some or all margins, this function is
used to provide
minimum values for those margins.
The minimum values are not enforced on margin sides that were set to be under
manual control via
\ref setAutoMargins.
\see setAutoMargins
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumMargins( const QMargins& margins )
{
if( mMinimumMargins != margins )
{
mMinimumMargins = margins;
}
}
/*!
Sets on which sides the margin shall be calculated automatically. If a side is
calculated
automatically, a minimum margin value may be provided with \ref
setMinimumMargins. If a side is
set to be controlled manually, the value may be specified with \ref
setMargins.
Margin sides that are under automatic control may participate in a \ref
QCPMarginGroup (see \ref
setMarginGroup), to synchronize (align) it with other layout elements in the
plot.
\see setMinimumMargins, setMargins
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setAutoMargins( QCP::MarginSides sides )
{
mAutoMargins = sides;
}
/*!
Sets the minimum size for the inner \ref rect of this layout element. A parent
layout tries to
respect the \a size here by changing row/column sizes in the layout
accordingly.
If the parent layout size is not sufficient to satisfy all minimum size
constraints of its child
layout elements, the layout may set a size that is actually smaller than \a
size. QCustomPlot
propagates the layout's size constraints to the outside by setting its own
minimum QWidget size
accordingly, so violations of \a size should be exceptions.
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize( const QSize& size )
{
if( mMinimumSize != size )
{
mMinimumSize = size;
if( mParentLayout )
mParentLayout->sizeConstraintsChanged();
}
}
/*! \overload
Sets the minimum size for the inner \ref rect of this layout element.
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize( int width, int height )
{
setMinimumSize( QSize( width, height ) );
}
/*!
Sets the maximum size for the inner \ref rect of this layout element. A parent
layout tries to
respect the \a size here by changing row/column sizes in the layout
accordingly.
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize( const QSize& size )
{
if( mMaximumSize != size )
{
mMaximumSize = size;
if( mParentLayout )
mParentLayout->sizeConstraintsChanged();
}
}
/*! \overload
Sets the maximum size for the inner \ref rect of this layout element.
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize( int width, int height )
{
setMaximumSize( QSize( width, height ) );
}
/*!
Sets the margin \a group of the specified margin \a sides.
Margin groups allow synchronizing specified margins across layout elements,
see the documentation
of \ref QCPMarginGroup.
To unset the margin group of \a sides, set \a group to 0.
Note that margin groups only work for margin sides that are set to automatic
(\ref
setAutoMargins).
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::setMarginGroup( QCP::MarginSides sides, QCPMarginGroup* group )
{
QVector<QCP::MarginSide> sideVector;
if( sides.testFlag( QCP::msLeft ) )
sideVector.append( QCP::msLeft );
if( sides.testFlag( QCP::msRight ) )
sideVector.append( QCP::msRight );
if( sides.testFlag( QCP::msTop ) )
sideVector.append( QCP::msTop );
if( sides.testFlag( QCP::msBottom ) )
sideVector.append( QCP::msBottom );
for( int i = 0; i < sideVector.size(); ++i )
{
QCP::MarginSide side = sideVector.at( i );
if( marginGroup( side ) != group )
{
QCPMarginGroup* oldGroup = marginGroup( side );
if( oldGroup ) // unregister at old group
oldGroup->removeChild( side, this );
if( !group ) // if setting to 0, remove hash entry. Else set hash entry to
// new group and register there
{
mMarginGroups.remove( side );
}
else // setting to a new group
{
mMarginGroups[side] = group;
group->addChild( side, this );
}
}
}
}
/*!
Updates the layout element and sub-elements. This function is automatically
called before every
replot by the parent layout element. It is called multiple times, once for
every \ref
UpdatePhase. The phases are run through in the order of the enum values. For
details about what
happens at the different phases, see the documentation of \ref UpdatePhase.
Layout elements that have child elements should call the \ref update method of
their child
elements, and pass the current \a phase unchanged.
The default implementation executes the automatic margin mechanism in the \ref
upMargins phase.
Subclasses should make sure to call the base class implementation.
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::update( UpdatePhase phase )
{
if( phase == upMargins )
{
if( mAutoMargins != QCP::msNone )
{
// set the margins of this layout element according to automatic margin
// calculation, either directly or via a
// margin group:
QMargins newMargins = mMargins;
foreach( QCP::MarginSide side, QList<QCP::MarginSide>() << QCP::msLeft << QCP::msRight
<< QCP::msTop << QCP::msBottom )
{
if( mAutoMargins.testFlag( side ) ) // this side's margin shall be calculated automatically
{
if( mMarginGroups.contains( side ) )
QCP::setMarginValue(
newMargins, side,
mMarginGroups[side]->commonMargin( side ) ); // this side is part of a margin
// group, so get the margin value
// from that group
else
QCP::setMarginValue( newMargins, side,
calculateAutoMargin( side ) ); // this side is not
// part of a group,
// so calculate the
// value directly
// apply minimum margin restrictions:
if( QCP::getMarginValue( newMargins, side ) <
QCP::getMarginValue( mMinimumMargins, side ) )
QCP::setMarginValue( newMargins, side, QCP::getMarginValue( mMinimumMargins, side ) );
}
}
setMargins( newMargins );
}
}
}
/*!
Returns the minimum size this layout element (the inner \ref rect) may be
compressed to.
if a minimum size (\ref setMinimumSize) was not set manually, parent layouts
consult this
function to determine the minimum allowed size of this layout element. (A
manual minimum size is
considered set if it is non-zero.)
*/
QSize QCPLayoutElement::minimumSizeHint() const
{
return mMinimumSize;
}
/*!
Returns the maximum size this layout element (the inner \ref rect) may be
expanded to.
if a maximum size (\ref setMaximumSize) was not set manually, parent layouts
consult this
function to determine the maximum allowed size of this layout element. (A
manual maximum size is
considered set if it is smaller than Qt's QWIDGETSIZE_MAX.)
*/
QSize QCPLayoutElement::maximumSizeHint() const
{
return mMaximumSize;
}
/*!
Returns a list of all child elements in this layout element. If \a recursive
is true, all
sub-child elements are included in the list, too.
\warning There may be entries with value 0 in the returned list. (For example,
QCPLayoutGrid may have
empty cells which yield 0 at the respective index.)
*/
QList<QCPLayoutElement*> QCPLayoutElement::elements( bool recursive ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( recursive )
return QList<QCPLayoutElement*>();
}
/*!
Layout elements are sensitive to events inside their outer rect. If \a pos is
within the outer
rect, this method returns a value corresponding to 0.99 times the parent
plot's selection
tolerance. However, layout elements are not selectable by default. So if \a
onlySelectable is
true, -1.0 is returned.
See \ref QCPLayerable::selectTest for a general explanation of this virtual
method.
QCPLayoutElement subclasses may reimplement this method to provide more
specific selection test
behaviour.
*/
double QCPLayoutElement::selectTest( const QPointF& pos,
bool onlySelectable,
QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable )
return -1;
if( QRectF( mOuterRect ).contains( pos ) )
{
if( mParentPlot )
return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99;
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "parent plot not defined";
return -1;
}
}
else
return -1;
}
/*! \internal
propagates the parent plot initialization to all child elements, by calling
\ref
QCPLayerable::initializeParentPlot on them.
*/
void QCPLayoutElement::parentPlotInitialized( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
{
foreach( QCPLayoutElement* el, elements( false ) )
{
if( !el->parentPlot() )
el->initializeParentPlot( parentPlot );
}
}
/*! \internal
Returns the margin size for this \a side. It is used if automatic margins is
enabled for this \a
side (see \ref setAutoMargins). If a minimum margin was set with \ref
setMinimumMargins, the
returned value will not be smaller than the specified minimum margin.
The default implementation just returns the respective manual margin (\ref
setMargins) or the
minimum margin, whichever is larger.
*/
int QCPLayoutElement::calculateAutoMargin( QCP::MarginSide side )
{
return qMax( QCP::getMarginValue( mMargins, side ),
QCP::getMarginValue( mMinimumMargins, side ) );
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLayout
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPLayout
\brief The abstract base class for layouts
This is an abstract base class for layout elements whose main purpose is to
define the position
and size of other child layout elements. In most cases, layouts don't draw
anything themselves
(but there are exceptions to this, e.g. QCPLegend).
QCPLayout derives from QCPLayoutElement, and thus can itself be nested in
other layouts.
QCPLayout introduces a common interface for accessing and manipulating the
child elements. Those
functions are most notably \ref elementCount, \ref elementAt, \ref takeAt,
\ref take, \ref
simplify, \ref removeAt, \ref remove and \ref clear. Individual subclasses may
add more functions
to this interface which are more specialized to the form of the layout. For
example, \ref
QCPLayoutGrid adds functions that take row and column indices to access cells
of the layout grid
more conveniently.
Since this is an abstract base class, you can't instantiate it directly.
Rather use one of its
subclasses like QCPLayoutGrid or QCPLayoutInset.
For a general introduction to the layout system, see the dedicated
documentation page \ref
thelayoutsystem "The Layout System".
*/
/* start documentation of pure virtual functions */
/*! \fn virtual int QCPLayout::elementCount() const = 0
Returns the number of elements/cells in the layout.
\see elements, elementAt
*/
/*! \fn virtual QCPLayoutElement* QCPLayout::elementAt(int index) const = 0
Returns the element in the cell with the given \a index. If \a index is
invalid, returns 0.
Note that even if \a index is valid, the respective cell may be empty in some
layouts (e.g.
QCPLayoutGrid), so this function may return 0 in those cases. You may use this
function to check
whether a cell is empty or not.
\see elements, elementCount, takeAt
*/
/*! \fn virtual QCPLayoutElement* QCPLayout::takeAt(int index) = 0
Removes the element with the given \a index from the layout and returns it.
If the \a index is invalid or the cell with that index is empty, returns 0.
Note that some layouts don't remove the respective cell right away but leave
an empty cell after
successful removal of the layout element. To collapse empty cells, use \ref
simplify.
\see elementAt, take
*/
/*! \fn virtual bool QCPLayout::take(QCPLayoutElement* element) = 0
Removes the specified \a element from the layout and returns true on success.
If the \a element isn't in this layout, returns false.
Note that some layouts don't remove the respective cell right away but leave
an empty cell after
successful removal of the layout element. To collapse empty cells, use \ref
simplify.
\see takeAt
*/
/* end documentation of pure virtual functions */
/*!
Creates an instance of QCPLayout and sets default values. Note that since
QCPLayout
is an abstract base class, it can't be instantiated directly.
*/
QCPLayout::QCPLayout() {}
/*!
First calls the QCPLayoutElement::update base class implementation to update
the margins on this
layout.
Then calls \ref updateLayout which subclasses reimplement to reposition and
resize their cells.
Finally, \ref update is called on all child elements.
*/
void QCPLayout::update( UpdatePhase phase )
{
QCPLayoutElement::update( phase );
// set child element rects according to layout:
if( phase == upLayout )
updateLayout();
// propagate update call to child elements:
const int elCount = elementCount();
for( int i = 0; i < elCount; ++i )
{
if( QCPLayoutElement* el = elementAt( i ) )
el->update( phase );
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QList<QCPLayoutElement*> QCPLayout::elements( bool recursive ) const
{
const int c = elementCount();
QList<QCPLayoutElement*> result;
#if QT_VERSION >= QT_VERSION_CHECK( 4, 7, 0 )
result.reserve( c );
#endif
for( int i = 0; i < c; ++i )
result.append( elementAt( i ) );
if( recursive )
{
for( int i = 0; i < c; ++i )
{
if( result.at( i ) )
result << result.at( i )->elements( recursive );
}
}
return result;
}
/*!
Simplifies the layout by collapsing empty cells. The exact behavior depends on
subclasses, the
default implementation does nothing.
Not all layouts need simplification. For example, QCPLayoutInset doesn't use
explicit
simplification while QCPLayoutGrid does.
*/
void QCPLayout::simplify() {}
/*!
Removes and deletes the element at the provided \a index. Returns true on
success. If \a index is
invalid or points to an empty cell, returns false.
This function internally uses \ref takeAt to remove the element from the
layout and then deletes
the returned element.
\see remove, takeAt
*/
bool QCPLayout::removeAt( int index )
{
if( QCPLayoutElement* el = takeAt( index ) )
{
delete el;
return true;
}
else
return false;
}
/*!
Removes and deletes the provided \a element. Returns true on success. If \a
element is not in the
layout, returns false.
This function internally uses \ref takeAt to remove the element from the
layout and then deletes
the element.
\see removeAt, take
*/
bool QCPLayout::remove( QCPLayoutElement* element )
{
if( take( element ) )
{
delete element;
return true;
}
else
return false;
}
/*!
Removes and deletes all layout elements in this layout.
\see remove, removeAt
*/
void QCPLayout::clear()
{
for( int i = elementCount() - 1; i >= 0; --i )
{
if( elementAt( i ) )
removeAt( i );
}
simplify();
}
/*!
Subclasses call this method to report changed (minimum/maximum) size
constraints.
If the parent of this layout is again a QCPLayout, forwards the call to the
parent's \ref
sizeConstraintsChanged. If the parent is a QWidget (i.e. is the \ref
QCustomPlot::plotLayout of
QCustomPlot), calls QWidget::updateGeometry, so if the QCustomPlot widget is
inside a Qt QLayout,
it may update itself and resize cells accordingly.
*/
void QCPLayout::sizeConstraintsChanged() const
{
if( QWidget* w = qobject_cast<QWidget*>( parent() ) )
w->updateGeometry();
else if( QCPLayout* l = qobject_cast<QCPLayout*>( parent() ) )
l->sizeConstraintsChanged();
}
/*! \internal
Subclasses reimplement this method to update the position and sizes of the
child elements/cells
via calling their \ref QCPLayoutElement::setOuterRect. The default
implementation does nothing.
The geometry used as a reference is the inner \ref rect of this layout. Child
elements should stay
within that rect.
\ref getSectionSizes may help with the reimplementation of this function.
\see update
*/
void QCPLayout::updateLayout() {}
/*! \internal
Associates \a el with this layout. This is done by setting the \ref
QCPLayoutElement::layout, the
\ref QCPLayerable::parentLayerable and the QObject parent to this layout.
Further, if \a el didn't previously have a parent plot, calls \ref
QCPLayerable::initializeParentPlot on \a el to set the paret plot.
This method is used by subclass specific methods that add elements to the
layout. Note that this
method only changes properties in \a el. The removal from the old layout and
the insertion into
the new layout must be done additionally.
*/
void QCPLayout::adoptElement( QCPLayoutElement* el )
{
if( el )
{
el->mParentLayout = this;
el->setParentLayerable( this );
el->setParent( this );
if( !el->parentPlot() )
el->initializeParentPlot( mParentPlot );
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Null element passed";
}
/*! \internal
Disassociates \a el from this layout. This is done by setting the \ref
QCPLayoutElement::layout
and the \ref QCPLayerable::parentLayerable to zero. The QObject parent is set
to the parent
QCustomPlot.
This method is used by subclass specific methods that remove elements from the
layout (e.g. \ref
take or \ref takeAt). Note that this method only changes properties in \a el.
The removal from
the old layout must be done additionally.
*/
void QCPLayout::releaseElement( QCPLayoutElement* el )
{
if( el )
{
el->mParentLayout = 0;
el->setParentLayerable( 0 );
el->setParent( mParentPlot );
// Note: Don't initializeParentPlot(0) here, because layout element will
// stay in same parent plot
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Null element passed";
}
/*! \internal
This is a helper function for the implementation of \ref updateLayout in
subclasses.
It calculates the sizes of one-dimensional sections with provided constraints
on maximum section
sizes, minimum section sizes, relative stretch factors and the final total
size of all sections.
The QVector entries refer to the sections. Thus all QVectors must have the
same size.
\a maxSizes gives the maximum allowed size of each section. If there shall be
no maximum size
imposed, set all vector values to Qt's QWIDGETSIZE_MAX.
\a minSizes gives the minimum allowed size of each section. If there shall be
no minimum size
imposed, set all vector values to zero. If the \a minSizes entries add up to a
value greater than
\a totalSize, sections will be scaled smaller than the proposed minimum sizes.
(In other words,
not exceeding the allowed total size is taken to be more important than not
going below minimum
section sizes.)
\a stretchFactors give the relative proportions of the sections to each other.
If all sections
shall be scaled equally, set all values equal. If the first section shall be
double the size of
each individual other section, set the first number of \a stretchFactors to
double the value of
the other individual values (e.g. {2, 1, 1, 1}).
\a totalSize is the value that the final section sizes will add up to. Due to
rounding, the
actual sum may differ slightly. If you want the section sizes to sum up to
exactly that value,
you could distribute the remaining difference on the sections.
The return value is a QVector containing the section sizes.
*/
QVector<int> QCPLayout::getSectionSizes( QVector<int> maxSizes,
QVector<int> minSizes,
QVector<double> stretchFactors,
int totalSize ) const
{
if( maxSizes.size() != minSizes.size() || minSizes.size() != stretchFactors.size() )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Passed vector sizes aren't equal:" << maxSizes << minSizes
<< stretchFactors;
return QVector<int>();
}
if( stretchFactors.isEmpty() )
return QVector<int>();
int sectionCount = stretchFactors.size();
QVector<double> sectionSizes( sectionCount );
// if provided total size is forced smaller than total minimum size, ignore
// minimum sizes (squeeze sections):
int minSizeSum = 0;
for( int i = 0; i < sectionCount; ++i )
minSizeSum += minSizes.at( i );
if( totalSize < minSizeSum )
{
// new stretch factors are minimum sizes and minimum sizes are set to zero:
for( int i = 0; i < sectionCount; ++i )
{
stretchFactors[i] = minSizes.at( i );
minSizes[i] = 0;
}
}
QList<int> minimumLockedSections;
QList<int> unfinishedSections;
for( int i = 0; i < sectionCount; ++i )
unfinishedSections.append( i );
double freeSize = totalSize;
int outerIterations = 0;
while( !unfinishedSections.isEmpty() &&
outerIterations < sectionCount * 2 ) // the iteration check ist just a
// failsafe in case something
// really strange happens
{
++outerIterations;
int innerIterations = 0;
while( !unfinishedSections.isEmpty() &&
innerIterations < sectionCount * 2 ) // the iteration check ist just a
// failsafe in case something
// really strange happens
{
++innerIterations;
// find section that hits its maximum next:
int nextId = -1;
double nextMax = 1e12;
for( int i = 0; i < unfinishedSections.size(); ++i )
{
int secId = unfinishedSections.at( i );
double hitsMaxAt =
( maxSizes.at( secId ) - sectionSizes.at( secId ) ) / stretchFactors.at( secId );
if( hitsMaxAt < nextMax )
{
nextMax = hitsMaxAt;
nextId = secId;
}
}
// check if that maximum is actually within the bounds of the total size
// (i.e. can we stretch all remaining
// sections so far that the found section
// actually hits its maximum, without exceeding the total size when we add
// up all sections)
double stretchFactorSum = 0;
for( int i = 0; i < unfinishedSections.size(); ++i )
stretchFactorSum += stretchFactors.at( unfinishedSections.at( i ) );
double nextMaxLimit = freeSize / stretchFactorSum;
if( nextMax < nextMaxLimit ) // next maximum is actually hit, move forward
// to that point and fix the size of that
// section
{
for( int i = 0; i < unfinishedSections.size(); ++i )
{
sectionSizes[unfinishedSections.at( i )] +=
nextMax * stretchFactors.at( unfinishedSections.at( i ) ); // increment all sections
freeSize -= nextMax * stretchFactors.at( unfinishedSections.at( i ) );
}
unfinishedSections.removeOne( nextId ); // exclude the section that is now
// at maximum from further changes
}
else // next maximum isn't hit, just distribute rest of free space on
// remaining sections
{
for( int i = 0; i < unfinishedSections.size(); ++i )
sectionSizes[unfinishedSections.at( i )] +=
nextMaxLimit *
stretchFactors.at( unfinishedSections.at( i ) ); // increment all sections
unfinishedSections.clear();
}
}
if( innerIterations == sectionCount * 2 )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "Exceeded maximum expected inner iteration "
"count, layouting aborted. Input was:"
<< maxSizes << minSizes << stretchFactors << totalSize;
// now check whether the resulting section sizes violate minimum
// restrictions:
bool foundMinimumViolation = false;
for( int i = 0; i < sectionSizes.size(); ++i )
{
if( minimumLockedSections.contains( i ) )
continue;
if( sectionSizes.at( i ) < minSizes.at( i ) ) // section violates minimum
{
sectionSizes[i] = minSizes.at( i ); // set it to minimum
foundMinimumViolation = true; // make sure we repeat the whole optimization process
minimumLockedSections.append( i );
}
}
if( foundMinimumViolation )
{
freeSize = totalSize;
for( int i = 0; i < sectionCount; ++i )
{
if( !minimumLockedSections.contains( i ) ) // only put sections that
// haven't hit their minimum
// back into the pool
unfinishedSections.append( i );
else
freeSize -= sectionSizes.at( i ); // remove size of minimum locked
// sections from available space in
// next round
}
// reset all section sizes to zero that are in unfinished sections (all
// others have been set to their minimum):
for( int i = 0; i < unfinishedSections.size(); ++i )
sectionSizes[unfinishedSections.at( i )] = 0;
}
}
if( outerIterations == sectionCount * 2 )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "Exceeded maximum expected outer iteration "
"count, layouting aborted. Input was:"
<< maxSizes << minSizes << stretchFactors << totalSize;
QVector<int> result( sectionCount );
for( int i = 0; i < sectionCount; ++i )
result[i] = qRound( sectionSizes.at( i ) );
return result;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLayoutGrid
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPLayoutGrid
\brief A layout that arranges child elements in a grid
Elements are laid out in a grid with configurable stretch factors (\ref
setColumnStretchFactor,
\ref setRowStretchFactor) and spacing (\ref setColumnSpacing, \ref
setRowSpacing).
Elements can be added to cells via \ref addElement. The grid is expanded if
the specified row or
column doesn't exist yet. Whether a cell contains a valid layout element can
be checked with \ref
hasElement, that element can be retrieved with \ref element. If rows and
columns that only have
empty cells shall be removed, call \ref simplify. Removal of elements is
either done by just
adding the element to a different layout or by using the QCPLayout interface
\ref take or \ref
remove.
Row and column insertion can be performed with \ref insertRow and \ref
insertColumn.
*/
/*!
Creates an instance of QCPLayoutGrid and sets default values.
*/
QCPLayoutGrid::QCPLayoutGrid() : mColumnSpacing( 5 ), mRowSpacing( 5 ) {}
QCPLayoutGrid::~QCPLayoutGrid()
{
// clear all child layout elements. This is important because only the
// specific layouts know how
// to handle removing elements (clear calls virtual removeAt method to do
// that).
clear();
}
/*!
Returns the element in the cell in \a row and \a column.
Returns 0 if either the row/column is invalid or if the cell is empty. In
those cases, a qDebug
message is printed. To check whether a cell exists and isn't empty, use \ref
hasElement.
\see addElement, hasElement
*/
QCPLayoutElement* QCPLayoutGrid::element( int row, int column ) const
{
if( row >= 0 && row < mElements.size() )
{
if( column >= 0 && column < mElements.first().size() )
{
if( QCPLayoutElement* result = mElements.at( row ).at( column ) )
return result;
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Requested cell is empty. Row:" << row << "Column:" << column;
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid column. Row:" << row << "Column:" << column;
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid row. Row:" << row << "Column:" << column;
return 0;
}
/*!
Returns the number of rows in the layout.
\see columnCount
*/
int QCPLayoutGrid::rowCount() const
{
return mElements.size();
}
/*!
Returns the number of columns in the layout.
\see rowCount
*/
int QCPLayoutGrid::columnCount() const
{
if( mElements.size() > 0 )
return mElements.first().size();
else
return 0;
}
/*!
Adds the \a element to cell with \a row and \a column. If \a element is
already in a layout, it
is first removed from there. If \a row or \a column don't exist yet, the
layout is expanded
accordingly.
Returns true if the element was added successfully, i.e. if the cell at \a row
and \a column
didn't already have an element.
\see element, hasElement, take, remove
*/
bool QCPLayoutGrid::addElement( int row, int column, QCPLayoutElement* element )
{
if( element )
{
if( !hasElement( row, column ) )
{
if( element->layout() ) // remove from old layout first
element->layout()->take( element );
expandTo( row + 1, column + 1 );
mElements[row][column] = element;
adoptElement( element );
return true;
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "There is already an element in the specified row/column:" << row
<< column;
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Can't add null element to row/column:" << row << column;
return false;
}
/*!
Returns whether the cell at \a row and \a column exists and contains a valid
element, i.e. isn't
empty.
\see element
*/
bool QCPLayoutGrid::hasElement( int row, int column )
{
if( row >= 0 && row < rowCount() && column >= 0 && column < columnCount() )
return mElements.at( row ).at( column );
else
return false;
}
/*!
Sets the stretch \a factor of \a column.
Stretch factors control the relative sizes of rows and columns. Cells will not
be resized beyond
their minimum and maximum widths/heights (\ref
QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref
QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize), regardless of the stretch factor.
The default stretch factor of newly created rows/columns is 1.
\see setColumnStretchFactors, setRowStretchFactor
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setColumnStretchFactor( int column, double factor )
{
if( column >= 0 && column < columnCount() )
{
if( factor > 0 )
mColumnStretchFactors[column] = factor;
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid stretch factor, must be positive:" << factor;
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid column:" << column;
}
/*!
Sets the stretch \a factors of all columns. \a factors must have the size \ref
columnCount.
Stretch factors control the relative sizes of rows and columns. Cells will not
be resized beyond
their minimum and maximum widths/heights (\ref
QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref
QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize), regardless of the stretch factor.
The default stretch factor of newly created rows/columns is 1.
\see setColumnStretchFactor, setRowStretchFactors
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setColumnStretchFactors( const QList<double>& factors )
{
if( factors.size() == mColumnStretchFactors.size() )
{
mColumnStretchFactors = factors;
for( int i = 0; i < mColumnStretchFactors.size(); ++i )
{
if( mColumnStretchFactors.at( i ) <= 0 )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "Invalid stretch factor, must be positive:" << mColumnStretchFactors.at( i );
mColumnStretchFactors[i] = 1;
}
}
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Column count not equal to passed stretch factor count:" << factors;
}
/*!
Sets the stretch \a factor of \a row.
Stretch factors control the relative sizes of rows and columns. Cells will not
be resized beyond
their minimum and maximum widths/heights (\ref
QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref
QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize), regardless of the stretch factor.
The default stretch factor of newly created rows/columns is 1.
\see setColumnStretchFactors, setRowStretchFactor
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setRowStretchFactor( int row, double factor )
{
if( row >= 0 && row < rowCount() )
{
if( factor > 0 )
mRowStretchFactors[row] = factor;
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid stretch factor, must be positive:" << factor;
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid row:" << row;
}
/*!
Sets the stretch \a factors of all rows. \a factors must have the size \ref
rowCount.
Stretch factors control the relative sizes of rows and columns. Cells will not
be resized beyond
their minimum and maximum widths/heights (\ref
QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref
QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize), regardless of the stretch factor.
The default stretch factor of newly created rows/columns is 1.
\see setRowStretchFactor, setColumnStretchFactors
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setRowStretchFactors( const QList<double>& factors )
{
if( factors.size() == mRowStretchFactors.size() )
{
mRowStretchFactors = factors;
for( int i = 0; i < mRowStretchFactors.size(); ++i )
{
if( mRowStretchFactors.at( i ) <= 0 )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "Invalid stretch factor, must be positive:" << mRowStretchFactors.at( i );
mRowStretchFactors[i] = 1;
}
}
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Row count not equal to passed stretch factor count:" << factors;
}
/*!
Sets the gap that is left blank between columns to \a pixels.
\see setRowSpacing
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setColumnSpacing( int pixels )
{
mColumnSpacing = pixels;
}
/*!
Sets the gap that is left blank between rows to \a pixels.
\see setColumnSpacing
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::setRowSpacing( int pixels )
{
mRowSpacing = pixels;
}
/*!
Expands the layout to have \a newRowCount rows and \a newColumnCount columns.
So the last valid
row index will be \a newRowCount-1, the last valid column index will be \a
newColumnCount-1.
If the current column/row count is already larger or equal to \a
newColumnCount/\a newRowCount,
this function does nothing in that dimension.
Newly created cells are empty, new rows and columns have the stretch factor 1.
Note that upon a call to \ref addElement, the layout is expanded automatically
to contain the
specified row and column, using this function.
\see simplify
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::expandTo( int newRowCount, int newColumnCount )
{
// add rows as necessary:
while( rowCount() < newRowCount )
{
mElements.append( QList<QCPLayoutElement*>() );
mRowStretchFactors.append( 1 );
}
// go through rows and expand columns as necessary:
int newColCount = qMax( columnCount(), newColumnCount );
for( int i = 0; i < rowCount(); ++i )
{
while( mElements.at( i ).size() < newColCount )
mElements[i].append( 0 );
}
while( mColumnStretchFactors.size() < newColCount )
mColumnStretchFactors.append( 1 );
}
/*!
Inserts a new row with empty cells at the row index \a newIndex. Valid values
for \a newIndex
range from 0 (inserts a row at the top) to \a rowCount (appends a row at the
bottom).
\see insertColumn
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::insertRow( int newIndex )
{
if( mElements.isEmpty() ||
mElements.first().isEmpty() ) // if grid is completely empty, add first cell
{
expandTo( 1, 1 );
return;
}
if( newIndex < 0 )
newIndex = 0;
if( newIndex > rowCount() )
newIndex = rowCount();
mRowStretchFactors.insert( newIndex, 1 );
QList<QCPLayoutElement*> newRow;
for( int col = 0; col < columnCount(); ++col )
newRow.append( (QCPLayoutElement*)0 );
mElements.insert( newIndex, newRow );
}
/*!
Inserts a new column with empty cells at the column index \a newIndex. Valid
values for \a
newIndex range from 0 (inserts a row at the left) to \a rowCount (appends a
row at the right).
\see insertRow
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::insertColumn( int newIndex )
{
if( mElements.isEmpty() ||
mElements.first().isEmpty() ) // if grid is completely empty, add first cell
{
expandTo( 1, 1 );
return;
}
if( newIndex < 0 )
newIndex = 0;
if( newIndex > columnCount() )
newIndex = columnCount();
mColumnStretchFactors.insert( newIndex, 1 );
for( int row = 0; row < rowCount(); ++row )
mElements[row].insert( newIndex, (QCPLayoutElement*)0 );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPLayoutGrid::updateLayout()
{
QVector<int> minColWidths, minRowHeights, maxColWidths, maxRowHeights;
getMinimumRowColSizes( &minColWidths, &minRowHeights );
getMaximumRowColSizes( &maxColWidths, &maxRowHeights );
int totalRowSpacing = ( rowCount() - 1 ) * mRowSpacing;
int totalColSpacing = ( columnCount() - 1 ) * mColumnSpacing;
QVector<int> colWidths =
getSectionSizes( maxColWidths, minColWidths, mColumnStretchFactors.toVector(),
mRect.width() - totalColSpacing );
QVector<int> rowHeights =
getSectionSizes( maxRowHeights, minRowHeights, mRowStretchFactors.toVector(),
mRect.height() - totalRowSpacing );
// go through cells and set rects accordingly:
int yOffset = mRect.top();
for( int row = 0; row < rowCount(); ++row )
{
if( row > 0 )
yOffset += rowHeights.at( row - 1 ) + mRowSpacing;
int xOffset = mRect.left();
for( int col = 0; col < columnCount(); ++col )
{
if( col > 0 )
xOffset += colWidths.at( col - 1 ) + mColumnSpacing;
if( mElements.at( row ).at( col ) )
mElements.at( row ).at( col )->setOuterRect(
QRect( xOffset, yOffset, colWidths.at( col ), rowHeights.at( row ) ) );
}
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
int QCPLayoutGrid::elementCount() const
{
return rowCount() * columnCount();
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPLayoutElement* QCPLayoutGrid::elementAt( int index ) const
{
if( index >= 0 && index < elementCount() )
return mElements.at( index / columnCount() ).at( index % columnCount() );
else
return 0;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPLayoutElement* QCPLayoutGrid::takeAt( int index )
{
if( QCPLayoutElement* el = elementAt( index ) )
{
releaseElement( el );
mElements[index / columnCount()][index % columnCount()] = 0;
return el;
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Attempt to take invalid index:" << index;
return 0;
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
bool QCPLayoutGrid::take( QCPLayoutElement* element )
{
if( element )
{
for( int i = 0; i < elementCount(); ++i )
{
if( elementAt( i ) == element )
{
takeAt( i );
return true;
}
}
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Element not in this layout, couldn't take";
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Can't take null element";
return false;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QList<QCPLayoutElement*> QCPLayoutGrid::elements( bool recursive ) const
{
QList<QCPLayoutElement*> result;
int colC = columnCount();
int rowC = rowCount();
#if QT_VERSION >= QT_VERSION_CHECK( 4, 7, 0 )
result.reserve( colC * rowC );
#endif
for( int row = 0; row < rowC; ++row )
{
for( int col = 0; col < colC; ++col )
{
result.append( mElements.at( row ).at( col ) );
}
}
if( recursive )
{
int c = result.size();
for( int i = 0; i < c; ++i )
{
if( result.at( i ) )
result << result.at( i )->elements( recursive );
}
}
return result;
}
/*!
Simplifies the layout by collapsing rows and columns which only contain empty
cells.
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::simplify()
{
// remove rows with only empty cells:
for( int row = rowCount() - 1; row >= 0; --row )
{
bool hasElements = false;
for( int col = 0; col < columnCount(); ++col )
{
if( mElements.at( row ).at( col ) )
{
hasElements = true;
break;
}
}
if( !hasElements )
{
mRowStretchFactors.removeAt( row );
mElements.removeAt( row );
if( mElements.isEmpty() ) // removed last element, also remove stretch
// factor (wouldn't happen below because also
// columnCount changed to 0 now)
mColumnStretchFactors.clear();
}
}
// remove columns with only empty cells:
for( int col = columnCount() - 1; col >= 0; --col )
{
bool hasElements = false;
for( int row = 0; row < rowCount(); ++row )
{
if( mElements.at( row ).at( col ) )
{
hasElements = true;
break;
}
}
if( !hasElements )
{
mColumnStretchFactors.removeAt( col );
for( int row = 0; row < rowCount(); ++row )
mElements[row].removeAt( col );
}
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QSize QCPLayoutGrid::minimumSizeHint() const
{
QVector<int> minColWidths, minRowHeights;
getMinimumRowColSizes( &minColWidths, &minRowHeights );
QSize result( 0, 0 );
for( int i = 0; i < minColWidths.size(); ++i )
result.rwidth() += minColWidths.at( i );
for( int i = 0; i < minRowHeights.size(); ++i )
result.rheight() += minRowHeights.at( i );
result.rwidth() +=
qMax( 0, columnCount() - 1 ) * mColumnSpacing + mMargins.left() + mMargins.right();
result.rheight() += qMax( 0, rowCount() - 1 ) * mRowSpacing + mMargins.top() + mMargins.bottom();
return result;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QSize QCPLayoutGrid::maximumSizeHint() const
{
QVector<int> maxColWidths, maxRowHeights;
getMaximumRowColSizes( &maxColWidths, &maxRowHeights );
QSize result( 0, 0 );
for( int i = 0; i < maxColWidths.size(); ++i )
result.setWidth( qMin( result.width() + maxColWidths.at( i ), QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ) );
for( int i = 0; i < maxRowHeights.size(); ++i )
result.setHeight( qMin( result.height() + maxRowHeights.at( i ), QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ) );
result.rwidth() +=
qMax( 0, columnCount() - 1 ) * mColumnSpacing + mMargins.left() + mMargins.right();
result.rheight() += qMax( 0, rowCount() - 1 ) * mRowSpacing + mMargins.top() + mMargins.bottom();
return result;
}
/*! \internal
Places the minimum column widths and row heights into \a minColWidths and \a
minRowHeights
respectively.
The minimum height of a row is the largest minimum height of any element in
that row. The minimum
width of a column is the largest minimum width of any element in that column.
This is a helper function for \ref updateLayout.
\see getMaximumRowColSizes
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::getMinimumRowColSizes( QVector<int>* minColWidths,
QVector<int>* minRowHeights ) const
{
*minColWidths = QVector<int>( columnCount(), 0 );
*minRowHeights = QVector<int>( rowCount(), 0 );
for( int row = 0; row < rowCount(); ++row )
{
for( int col = 0; col < columnCount(); ++col )
{
if( mElements.at( row ).at( col ) )
{
QSize minHint = mElements.at( row ).at( col )->minimumSizeHint();
QSize min = mElements.at( row ).at( col )->minimumSize();
QSize final( min.width() > 0 ? min.width() : minHint.width(),
min.height() > 0 ? min.height() : minHint.height() );
if( minColWidths->at( col ) < final.width() )
( *minColWidths )[col] = final.width();
if( minRowHeights->at( row ) < final.height() )
( *minRowHeights )[row] = final.height();
}
}
}
}
/*! \internal
Places the maximum column widths and row heights into \a maxColWidths and \a
maxRowHeights
respectively.
The maximum height of a row is the smallest maximum height of any element in
that row. The
maximum width of a column is the smallest maximum width of any element in that
column.
This is a helper function for \ref updateLayout.
\see getMinimumRowColSizes
*/
void QCPLayoutGrid::getMaximumRowColSizes( QVector<int>* maxColWidths,
QVector<int>* maxRowHeights ) const
{
*maxColWidths = QVector<int>( columnCount(), QWIDGETSIZE_MAX );
*maxRowHeights = QVector<int>( rowCount(), QWIDGETSIZE_MAX );
for( int row = 0; row < rowCount(); ++row )
{
for( int col = 0; col < columnCount(); ++col )
{
if( mElements.at( row ).at( col ) )
{
QSize maxHint = mElements.at( row ).at( col )->maximumSizeHint();
QSize max = mElements.at( row ).at( col )->maximumSize();
QSize final( max.width() < QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ? max.width() : maxHint.width(),
max.height() < QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ? max.height() : maxHint.height() );
if( maxColWidths->at( col ) > final.width() )
( *maxColWidths )[col] = final.width();
if( maxRowHeights->at( row ) > final.height() )
( *maxRowHeights )[row] = final.height();
}
}
}
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLayoutInset
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPLayoutInset
\brief A layout that places child elements aligned to the border or
arbitrarily positioned
Elements are placed either aligned to the border or at arbitrary position in
the area of the
layout. Which placement applies is controlled with the \ref InsetPlacement
(\ref
setInsetPlacement).
Elements are added via \ref addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element,
Qt::Alignment alignment) or
addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, const QRectF &rect). If the first method
is used, the inset
placement will default to \ref ipBorderAligned and the element will be aligned
according to the
\a alignment parameter. The second method defaults to \ref ipFree and allows
placing elements at
arbitrary position and size, defined by \a rect.
The alignment or rect can be set via \ref setInsetAlignment or \ref
setInsetRect, respectively.
This is the layout that every QCPAxisRect has as \ref
QCPAxisRect::insetLayout.
*/
/* start documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn virtual void QCPLayoutInset::simplify()
The QCPInsetLayout does not need simplification since it can never have empty
cells due to its
linear index structure. This method does nothing.
*/
/* end documentation of inline functions */
/*!
Creates an instance of QCPLayoutInset and sets default values.
*/
QCPLayoutInset::QCPLayoutInset() {}
QCPLayoutInset::~QCPLayoutInset()
{
// clear all child layout elements. This is important because only the
// specific layouts know how
// to handle removing elements (clear calls virtual removeAt method to do
// that).
clear();
}
/*!
Returns the placement type of the element with the specified \a index.
*/
QCPLayoutInset::InsetPlacement QCPLayoutInset::insetPlacement( int index ) const
{
if( elementAt( index ) )
return mInsetPlacement.at( index );
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index;
return ipFree;
}
}
/*!
Returns the alignment of the element with the specified \a index. The
alignment only has a
meaning, if the inset placement (\ref setInsetPlacement) is \ref
ipBorderAligned.
*/
Qt::Alignment QCPLayoutInset::insetAlignment( int index ) const
{
if( elementAt( index ) )
return mInsetAlignment.at( index );
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index;
return 0;
}
}
/*!
Returns the rect of the element with the specified \a index. The rect only has
a
meaning, if the inset placement (\ref setInsetPlacement) is \ref ipFree.
*/
QRectF QCPLayoutInset::insetRect( int index ) const
{
if( elementAt( index ) )
return mInsetRect.at( index );
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index;
return QRectF();
}
}
/*!
Sets the inset placement type of the element with the specified \a index to \a
placement.
\see InsetPlacement
*/
void QCPLayoutInset::setInsetPlacement( int index, QCPLayoutInset::InsetPlacement placement )
{
if( elementAt( index ) )
mInsetPlacement[index] = placement;
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index;
}
/*!
If the inset placement (\ref setInsetPlacement) is \ref ipBorderAligned, this
function
is used to set the alignment of the element with the specified \a index to \a
alignment.
\a alignment is an or combination of the following alignment flags:
Qt::AlignLeft,
Qt::AlignHCenter, Qt::AlighRight, Qt::AlignTop, Qt::AlignVCenter,
Qt::AlignBottom. Any other
alignment flags will be ignored.
*/
void QCPLayoutInset::setInsetAlignment( int index, Qt::Alignment alignment )
{
if( elementAt( index ) )
mInsetAlignment[index] = alignment;
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index;
}
/*!
If the inset placement (\ref setInsetPlacement) is \ref ipFree, this function
is used to set the
position and size of the element with the specified \a index to \a rect.
\a rect is given in fractions of the whole inset layout rect. So an inset with
rect (0, 0, 1, 1)
will span the entire layout. An inset with rect (0.6, 0.1, 0.35, 0.35) will be
in the top right
corner of the layout, with 35% width and height of the parent layout.
Note that the minimum and maximum sizes of the embedded element (\ref
QCPLayoutElement::setMinimumSize, \ref QCPLayoutElement::setMaximumSize) are
enforced.
*/
void QCPLayoutInset::setInsetRect( int index, const QRectF& rect )
{
if( elementAt( index ) )
mInsetRect[index] = rect;
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid element index:" << index;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPLayoutInset::updateLayout()
{
for( int i = 0; i < mElements.size(); ++i )
{
QRect insetRect;
QSize finalMinSize, finalMaxSize;
QSize minSizeHint = mElements.at( i )->minimumSizeHint();
QSize maxSizeHint = mElements.at( i )->maximumSizeHint();
finalMinSize.setWidth( mElements.at( i )->minimumSize().width() > 0
? mElements.at( i )->minimumSize().width()
: minSizeHint.width() );
finalMinSize.setHeight( mElements.at( i )->minimumSize().height() > 0
? mElements.at( i )->minimumSize().height()
: minSizeHint.height() );
finalMaxSize.setWidth( mElements.at( i )->maximumSize().width() < QWIDGETSIZE_MAX
? mElements.at( i )->maximumSize().width()
: maxSizeHint.width() );
finalMaxSize.setHeight( mElements.at( i )->maximumSize().height() < QWIDGETSIZE_MAX
? mElements.at( i )->maximumSize().height()
: maxSizeHint.height() );
if( mInsetPlacement.at( i ) == ipFree )
{
insetRect = QRect( rect().x() + rect().width() * mInsetRect.at( i ).x(),
rect().y() + rect().height() * mInsetRect.at( i ).y(),
rect().width() * mInsetRect.at( i ).width(),
rect().height() * mInsetRect.at( i ).height() );
if( insetRect.size().width() < finalMinSize.width() )
insetRect.setWidth( finalMinSize.width() );
if( insetRect.size().height() < finalMinSize.height() )
insetRect.setHeight( finalMinSize.height() );
if( insetRect.size().width() > finalMaxSize.width() )
insetRect.setWidth( finalMaxSize.width() );
if( insetRect.size().height() > finalMaxSize.height() )
insetRect.setHeight( finalMaxSize.height() );
}
else if( mInsetPlacement.at( i ) == ipBorderAligned )
{
insetRect.setSize( finalMinSize );
Qt::Alignment al = mInsetAlignment.at( i );
if( al.testFlag( Qt::AlignLeft ) )
insetRect.moveLeft( rect().x() );
else if( al.testFlag( Qt::AlignRight ) )
insetRect.moveRight( rect().x() + rect().width() );
else
insetRect.moveLeft( rect().x() + rect().width() * 0.5 -
finalMinSize.width() * 0.5 ); // default to Qt::AlignHCenter
if( al.testFlag( Qt::AlignTop ) )
insetRect.moveTop( rect().y() );
else if( al.testFlag( Qt::AlignBottom ) )
insetRect.moveBottom( rect().y() + rect().height() );
else
insetRect.moveTop( rect().y() + rect().height() * 0.5 -
finalMinSize.height() * 0.5 ); // default to Qt::AlignVCenter
}
mElements.at( i )->setOuterRect( insetRect );
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
int QCPLayoutInset::elementCount() const
{
return mElements.size();
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPLayoutElement* QCPLayoutInset::elementAt( int index ) const
{
if( index >= 0 && index < mElements.size() )
return mElements.at( index );
else
return 0;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPLayoutElement* QCPLayoutInset::takeAt( int index )
{
if( QCPLayoutElement* el = elementAt( index ) )
{
releaseElement( el );
mElements.removeAt( index );
mInsetPlacement.removeAt( index );
mInsetAlignment.removeAt( index );
mInsetRect.removeAt( index );
return el;
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Attempt to take invalid index:" << index;
return 0;
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
bool QCPLayoutInset::take( QCPLayoutElement* element )
{
if( element )
{
for( int i = 0; i < elementCount(); ++i )
{
if( elementAt( i ) == element )
{
takeAt( i );
return true;
}
}
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Element not in this layout, couldn't take";
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Can't take null element";
return false;
}
/*!
The inset layout is sensitive to events only at areas where its (visible)
child elements are
sensitive. If the selectTest method of any of the child elements returns a
positive number for \a
pos, this method returns a value corresponding to 0.99 times the parent plot's
selection
tolerance. The inset layout is not selectable itself by default. So if \a
onlySelectable is true,
-1.0 is returned.
See \ref QCPLayerable::selectTest for a general explanation of this virtual
method.
*/
double QCPLayoutInset::selectTest( const QPointF& pos,
bool onlySelectable,
QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable )
return -1;
for( int i = 0; i < mElements.size(); ++i )
{
// inset layout shall only return positive selectTest, if actually an inset
// object is at pos
// else it would block the entire underlying QCPAxisRect with its surface.
if( mElements.at( i )->realVisibility() &&
mElements.at( i )->selectTest( pos, onlySelectable ) >= 0 )
return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99;
}
return -1;
}
/*!
Adds the specified \a element to the layout as an inset aligned at the border
(\ref
setInsetAlignment is initialized with \ref ipBorderAligned). The alignment is
set to \a
alignment.
\a alignment is an or combination of the following alignment flags:
Qt::AlignLeft,
Qt::AlignHCenter, Qt::AlighRight, Qt::AlignTop, Qt::AlignVCenter,
Qt::AlignBottom. Any other
alignment flags will be ignored.
\see addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, const QRectF &rect)
*/
void QCPLayoutInset::addElement( QCPLayoutElement* element, Qt::Alignment alignment )
{
if( element )
{
if( element->layout() ) // remove from old layout first
element->layout()->take( element );
mElements.append( element );
mInsetPlacement.append( ipBorderAligned );
mInsetAlignment.append( alignment );
mInsetRect.append( QRectF( 0.6, 0.6, 0.4, 0.4 ) );
adoptElement( element );
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Can't add null element";
}
/*!
Adds the specified \a element to the layout as an inset with free
positioning/sizing (\ref
setInsetAlignment is initialized with \ref ipFree). The position and size is
set to \a
rect.
\a rect is given in fractions of the whole inset layout rect. So an inset with
rect (0, 0, 1, 1)
will span the entire layout. An inset with rect (0.6, 0.1, 0.35, 0.35) will be
in the top right
corner of the layout, with 35% width and height of the parent layout.
\see addElement(QCPLayoutElement *element, Qt::Alignment alignment)
*/
void QCPLayoutInset::addElement( QCPLayoutElement* element, const QRectF& rect )
{
if( element )
{
if( element->layout() ) // remove from old layout first
element->layout()->take( element );
mElements.append( element );
mInsetPlacement.append( ipFree );
mInsetAlignment.append( Qt::AlignRight | Qt::AlignTop );
mInsetRect.append( rect );
adoptElement( element );
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Can't add null element";
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLineEnding
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPLineEnding
\brief Handles the different ending decorations for line-like items
\image html QCPLineEnding.png "The various ending styles currently supported"
For every ending a line-like item has, an instance of this class exists. For
example, QCPItemLine
has two endings which can be set with QCPItemLine::setHead and
QCPItemLine::setTail.
The styles themselves are defined via the enum QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle.
Most decorations can
be modified regarding width and length, see \ref setWidth and \ref setLength.
The direction of
the ending decoration (e.g. direction an arrow is pointing) is controlled by
the line-like item.
For example, when both endings of a QCPItemLine are set to be arrows, they
will point to opposite
directions, e.g. "outward". This can be changed by \ref setInverted, which
would make the
respective arrow point inward.
Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly
specify a
QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle where actually a QCPLineEnding is expected, e.g.
\code
myItemLine->setHead(QCPLineEnding::esSpikeArrow) \endcode
*/
/*!
Creates a QCPLineEnding instance with default values (style \ref esNone).
*/
QCPLineEnding::QCPLineEnding() : mStyle( esNone ), mWidth( 8 ), mLength( 10 ), mInverted( false ) {}
/*!
Creates a QCPLineEnding instance with the specified values.
*/
QCPLineEnding::QCPLineEnding( QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle style,
double width,
double length,
bool inverted )
: mStyle( style ), mWidth( width ), mLength( length ), mInverted( inverted )
{
}
/*!
Sets the style of the ending decoration.
*/
void QCPLineEnding::setStyle( QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle style )
{
mStyle = style;
}
/*!
Sets the width of the ending decoration, if the style supports it. On arrows,
for example, the
width defines the size perpendicular to the arrow's pointing direction.
\see setLength
*/
void QCPLineEnding::setWidth( double width )
{
mWidth = width;
}
/*!
Sets the length of the ending decoration, if the style supports it. On arrows,
for example, the
length defines the size in pointing direction.
\see setWidth
*/
void QCPLineEnding::setLength( double length )
{
mLength = length;
}
/*!
Sets whether the ending decoration shall be inverted. For example, an arrow
decoration will point
inward when \a inverted is set to true.
Note that also the \a width direction is inverted. For symmetrical ending
styles like arrows or
discs, this doesn't make a difference. However, asymmetric styles like \ref
esHalfBar are
affected by it, which can be used to control to which side the half bar points
to.
*/
void QCPLineEnding::setInverted( bool inverted )
{
mInverted = inverted;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the maximum pixel radius the ending decoration might cover, starting
from the position
the decoration is drawn at (typically a line ending/\ref QCPItemPosition of an
item).
This is relevant for clipping. Only omit painting of the decoration when the
position where the
decoration is supposed to be drawn is farther away from the clipping rect than
the returned
distance.
*/
double QCPLineEnding::boundingDistance() const
{
switch( mStyle )
{
case esNone:
return 0;
case esFlatArrow:
case esSpikeArrow:
case esLineArrow:
case esSkewedBar:
return qSqrt( mWidth * mWidth + mLength * mLength ); // items that have width and length
case esDisc:
case esSquare:
case esDiamond:
case esBar:
case esHalfBar:
return mWidth * 1.42; // items that only have a width -> width*sqrt(2)
}
return 0;
}
/*!
Starting from the origin of this line ending (which is style specific),
returns the length
covered by the line ending symbol, in backward direction.
For example, the \ref esSpikeArrow has a shorter real length than a \ref
esFlatArrow, even if
both have the same \ref setLength value, because the spike arrow has an inward
curved back, which
reduces the length along its center axis (the drawing origin for arrows is at
the tip).
This function is used for precise, style specific placement of line endings,
for example in
QCPAxes.
*/
double QCPLineEnding::realLength() const
{
switch( mStyle )
{
case esNone:
case esLineArrow:
case esSkewedBar:
case esBar:
case esHalfBar:
return 0;
case esFlatArrow:
return mLength;
case esDisc:
case esSquare:
case esDiamond:
return mWidth * 0.5;
case esSpikeArrow:
return mLength * 0.8;
}
return 0;
}
/*! \internal
Draws the line ending with the specified \a painter at the position \a pos.
The direction of the
line ending is controlled with \a dir.
*/
void QCPLineEnding::draw( QCPPainter* painter, const QVector2D& pos, const QVector2D& dir ) const
{
if( mStyle == esNone )
return;
QVector2D lengthVec( dir.normalized() );
if( lengthVec.isNull() )
lengthVec = QVector2D( 1, 0 );
QVector2D widthVec( -lengthVec.y(), lengthVec.x() );
lengthVec *= (float)( mLength * ( mInverted ? -1 : 1 ) );
widthVec *= (float)( mWidth * 0.5 * ( mInverted ? -1 : 1 ) );
QPen penBackup = painter->pen();
QBrush brushBackup = painter->brush();
QPen miterPen = penBackup;
miterPen.setJoinStyle( Qt::MiterJoin ); // to make arrow heads spikey
QBrush brush( painter->pen().color(), Qt::SolidPattern );
switch( mStyle )
{
case esNone:
break;
case esFlatArrow:
{
QPointF points[3] = {pos.toPointF(), ( pos - lengthVec + widthVec ).toPointF(),
( pos - lengthVec - widthVec ).toPointF()};
painter->setPen( miterPen );
painter->setBrush( brush );
painter->drawConvexPolygon( points, 3 );
painter->setBrush( brushBackup );
painter->setPen( penBackup );
break;
}
case esSpikeArrow:
{
QPointF points[4] = {pos.toPointF(), ( pos - lengthVec + widthVec ).toPointF(),
( pos - lengthVec * 0.8f ).toPointF(),
( pos - lengthVec - widthVec ).toPointF()};
painter->setPen( miterPen );
painter->setBrush( brush );
painter->drawConvexPolygon( points, 4 );
painter->setBrush( brushBackup );
painter->setPen( penBackup );
break;
}
case esLineArrow:
{
QPointF points[3] = {( pos - lengthVec + widthVec ).toPointF(), pos.toPointF(),
( pos - lengthVec - widthVec ).toPointF()};
painter->setPen( miterPen );
painter->drawPolyline( points, 3 );
painter->setPen( penBackup );
break;
}
case esDisc:
{
painter->setBrush( brush );
painter->drawEllipse( pos.toPointF(), mWidth * 0.5, mWidth * 0.5 );
painter->setBrush( brushBackup );
break;
}
case esSquare:
{
QVector2D widthVecPerp( -widthVec.y(), widthVec.x() );
QPointF points[4] = {( pos - widthVecPerp + widthVec ).toPointF(),
( pos - widthVecPerp - widthVec ).toPointF(),
( pos + widthVecPerp - widthVec ).toPointF(),
( pos + widthVecPerp + widthVec ).toPointF()};
painter->setPen( miterPen );
painter->setBrush( brush );
painter->drawConvexPolygon( points, 4 );
painter->setBrush( brushBackup );
painter->setPen( penBackup );
break;
}
case esDiamond:
{
QVector2D widthVecPerp( -widthVec.y(), widthVec.x() );
QPointF points[4] = {( pos - widthVecPerp ).toPointF(), ( pos - widthVec ).toPointF(),
( pos + widthVecPerp ).toPointF(), ( pos + widthVec ).toPointF()};
painter->setPen( miterPen );
painter->setBrush( brush );
painter->drawConvexPolygon( points, 4 );
painter->setBrush( brushBackup );
painter->setPen( penBackup );
break;
}
case esBar:
{
painter->drawLine( ( pos + widthVec ).toPointF(), ( pos - widthVec ).toPointF() );
break;
}
case esHalfBar:
{
painter->drawLine( ( pos + widthVec ).toPointF(), pos.toPointF() );
break;
}
case esSkewedBar:
{
if( qFuzzyIsNull( painter->pen().widthF() ) &&
!painter->modes().testFlag( QCPPainter::pmNonCosmetic ) )
{
// if drawing with cosmetic pen (perfectly thin stroke, happens only in
// vector exports), draw bar exactly on tip
// of line
painter->drawLine(
( pos + widthVec + lengthVec * 0.2f * ( mInverted ? -1 : 1 ) ).toPointF(),
( pos - widthVec - lengthVec * 0.2f * ( mInverted ? -1 : 1 ) ).toPointF() );
}
else
{
// if drawing with thick (non-cosmetic) pen, shift bar a little in line
// direction to prevent line from sticking
// through bar slightly
painter->drawLine(
( pos + widthVec + lengthVec * 0.2f * ( mInverted ? -1 : 1 ) +
dir.normalized() * qMax( 1.0f, (float)painter->pen().widthF() ) * 0.5f )
.toPointF(),
( pos - widthVec - lengthVec * 0.2f * ( mInverted ? -1 : 1 ) +
dir.normalized() * qMax( 1.0f, (float)painter->pen().widthF() ) * 0.5f )
.toPointF() );
}
break;
}
}
}
/*! \internal
\overload
Draws the line ending. The direction is controlled with the \a angle parameter
in radians.
*/
void QCPLineEnding::draw( QCPPainter* painter, const QVector2D& pos, double angle ) const
{
draw( painter, pos, QVector2D( qCos( angle ), qSin( angle ) ) );
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPGrid
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPGrid
\brief Responsible for drawing the grid of a QCPAxis.
This class is tightly bound to QCPAxis. Every axis owns a grid instance and
uses it to draw the
grid lines, sub grid lines and zero-line. You can interact with the grid of an
axis via \ref
QCPAxis::grid. Normally, you don't need to create an instance of QCPGrid
yourself.
The axis and grid drawing was split into two classes to allow them to be
placed on different
layers (both QCPAxis and QCPGrid inherit from QCPLayerable). Thus it is
possible to have the grid
in the background and the axes in the foreground, and any plottables/items in
between. This
described situation is the default setup, see the QCPLayer documentation.
*/
/*!
Creates a QCPGrid instance and sets default values.
You shouldn't instantiate grids on their own, since every QCPAxis brings its
own QCPGrid.
*/
QCPGrid::QCPGrid( QCPAxis* parentAxis )
: QCPLayerable( parentAxis->parentPlot(), "", parentAxis ), mParentAxis( parentAxis )
{
// warning: this is called in QCPAxis constructor, so parentAxis members
// should not be accessed/called
setParent( parentAxis );
setPen( QPen( QColor( 200, 200, 200 ), 0, Qt::DotLine ) );
setSubGridPen( QPen( QColor( 220, 220, 220 ), 0, Qt::DotLine ) );
setZeroLinePen( QPen( QColor( 200, 200, 200 ), 0, Qt::SolidLine ) );
setSubGridVisible( false );
setAntialiased( false );
setAntialiasedSubGrid( false );
setAntialiasedZeroLine( false );
}
/*!
Sets whether grid lines at sub tick marks are drawn.
\see setSubGridPen
*/
void QCPGrid::setSubGridVisible( bool visible )
{
mSubGridVisible = visible;
}
/*!
Sets whether sub grid lines are drawn antialiased.
*/
void QCPGrid::setAntialiasedSubGrid( bool enabled )
{
mAntialiasedSubGrid = enabled;
}
/*!
Sets whether zero lines are drawn antialiased.
*/
void QCPGrid::setAntialiasedZeroLine( bool enabled )
{
mAntialiasedZeroLine = enabled;
}
/*!
Sets the pen with which (major) grid lines are drawn.
*/
void QCPGrid::setPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen with which sub grid lines are drawn.
*/
void QCPGrid::setSubGridPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSubGridPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen with which zero lines are drawn.
Zero lines are lines at value coordinate 0 which may be drawn with a different
pen than other grid
lines. To disable zero lines and just draw normal grid lines at zero, set \a
pen to Qt::NoPen.
*/
void QCPGrid::setZeroLinePen( const QPen& pen )
{
mZeroLinePen = pen;
}
/*! \internal
A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the
provided \a painter
before drawing the major grid lines.
This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is
in by default.
This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as
well as the
overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
\see setAntialiased
*/
void QCPGrid::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
applyAntialiasingHint( painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeGrid );
}
/*! \internal
Draws grid lines and sub grid lines at the positions of (sub) ticks of the
parent axis, spanning
over the complete axis rect. Also draws the zero line, if appropriate (\ref
setZeroLinePen).
*/
void QCPGrid::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
if( !mParentAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid parent axis";
return;
}
if( mSubGridVisible )
drawSubGridLines( painter );
drawGridLines( painter );
}
/*! \internal
Draws the main grid lines and possibly a zero line with the specified painter.
This is a helper function called by \ref draw.
*/
void QCPGrid::drawGridLines( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
if( !mParentAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid parent axis";
return;
}
int lowTick = mParentAxis->mLowestVisibleTick;
int highTick = mParentAxis->mHighestVisibleTick;
double t; // helper variable, result of coordinate-to-pixel transforms
if( mParentAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
// draw zeroline:
int zeroLineIndex = -1;
if( mZeroLinePen.style() != Qt::NoPen && mParentAxis->mRange.lower < 0 &&
mParentAxis->mRange.upper > 0 )
{
applyAntialiasingHint( painter, mAntialiasedZeroLine, QCP::aeZeroLine );
painter->setPen( mZeroLinePen );
double epsilon = mParentAxis->range().size() * 1E-6; // for comparing double to zero
for( int i = lowTick; i <= highTick; ++i )
{
if( qAbs( mParentAxis->mTickVector.at( i ) ) < epsilon )
{
zeroLineIndex = i;
t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel( mParentAxis->mTickVector.at( i ) ); // x
painter->drawLine(
QLineF( t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->bottom(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->top() ) );
break;
}
}
}
// draw grid lines:
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( mPen );
for( int i = lowTick; i <= highTick; ++i )
{
if( i == zeroLineIndex )
continue; // don't draw a gridline on top of the zeroline
t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel( mParentAxis->mTickVector.at( i ) ); // x
painter->drawLine(
QLineF( t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->bottom(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->top() ) );
}
}
else
{
// draw zeroline:
int zeroLineIndex = -1;
if( mZeroLinePen.style() != Qt::NoPen && mParentAxis->mRange.lower < 0 &&
mParentAxis->mRange.upper > 0 )
{
applyAntialiasingHint( painter, mAntialiasedZeroLine, QCP::aeZeroLine );
painter->setPen( mZeroLinePen );
double epsilon = mParentAxis->mRange.size() * 1E-6; // for comparing double to zero
for( int i = lowTick; i <= highTick; ++i )
{
if( qAbs( mParentAxis->mTickVector.at( i ) ) < epsilon )
{
zeroLineIndex = i;
t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel( mParentAxis->mTickVector.at( i ) ); // y
painter->drawLine(
QLineF( mParentAxis->mAxisRect->left(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->right(), t ) );
break;
}
}
}
// draw grid lines:
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( mPen );
for( int i = lowTick; i <= highTick; ++i )
{
if( i == zeroLineIndex )
continue; // don't draw a gridline on top of the zeroline
t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel( mParentAxis->mTickVector.at( i ) ); // y
painter->drawLine(
QLineF( mParentAxis->mAxisRect->left(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->right(), t ) );
}
}
}
/*! \internal
Draws the sub grid lines with the specified painter.
This is a helper function called by \ref draw.
*/
void QCPGrid::drawSubGridLines( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
if( !mParentAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid parent axis";
return;
}
applyAntialiasingHint( painter, mAntialiasedSubGrid, QCP::aeSubGrid );
double t; // helper variable, result of coordinate-to-pixel transforms
painter->setPen( mSubGridPen );
if( mParentAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
for( int i = 0; i < mParentAxis->mSubTickVector.size(); ++i )
{
t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel( mParentAxis->mSubTickVector.at( i ) ); // x
painter->drawLine(
QLineF( t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->bottom(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->top() ) );
}
}
else
{
for( int i = 0; i < mParentAxis->mSubTickVector.size(); ++i )
{
t = mParentAxis->coordToPixel( mParentAxis->mSubTickVector.at( i ) ); // y
painter->drawLine(
QLineF( mParentAxis->mAxisRect->left(), t, mParentAxis->mAxisRect->right(), t ) );
}
}
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAxis
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPAxis
\brief Manages a single axis inside a QCustomPlot.
Usually doesn't need to be instantiated externally. Access %QCustomPlot's
default four axes via
QCustomPlot::xAxis (bottom), QCustomPlot::yAxis (left), QCustomPlot::xAxis2
(top) and
QCustomPlot::yAxis2 (right).
Axes are always part of an axis rect, see QCPAxisRect.
\image html AxisNamesOverview.png
<center>Naming convention of axis parts</center>
\n
\image html AxisRectSpacingOverview.png
<center>Overview of the spacings and paddings that define the geometry of an
axis. The dashed gray line
on the left represents the QCustomPlot widget border.</center>
*/
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn Qt::Orientation QCPAxis::orientation() const
Returns the orientation of this axis. The axis orientation (horizontal or
vertical) is deduced
from the axis type (left, top, right or bottom).
\see orientation(AxisType type)
*/
/*! \fn QCPGrid *QCPAxis::grid() const
Returns the \ref QCPGrid instance belonging to this axis. Access it to set
details about the way the
grid is displayed.
*/
/*! \fn static Qt::Orientation QCPAxis::orientation(AxisType type)
Returns the orientation of the specified axis type
\see orientation()
*/
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
/* start of documentation of signals */
/*! \fn void QCPAxis::ticksRequest()
This signal is emitted when \ref setAutoTicks is false and the axis is about
to generate tick
labels for a replot.
Modifying the tick positions can be done with \ref setTickVector. If you also
want to control the
tick labels, set \ref setAutoTickLabels to false and also provide the labels
with \ref
setTickVectorLabels.
If you only want static ticks you probably don't need this signal, since you
can just set the
tick vector (and possibly tick label vector) once. However, if you want to
provide ticks (and
maybe labels) dynamically, e.g. depending on the current axis range, connect a
slot to this
signal and set the vector/vectors there.
*/
/*! \fn void QCPAxis::rangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange)
This signal is emitted when the range of this axis has changed. You can
connect it to the \ref
setRange slot of another axis to communicate the new range to the other axis,
in order for it to
be synchronized.
*/
/*! \fn void QCPAxis::rangeChanged(const QCPRange &newRange, const QCPRange
&oldRange)
\overload
Additionally to the new range, this signal also provides the previous range
held by the axis as
\a oldRange.
*/
/*! \fn void QCPAxis::scaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType);
This signal is emitted when the scale type changes, by calls to \ref
setScaleType
*/
/*! \fn void QCPAxis::selectionChanged(QCPAxis::SelectableParts selection)
This signal is emitted when the selection state of this axis has changed,
either by user interaction
or by a direct call to \ref setSelectedParts.
*/
/*! \fn void QCPAxis::selectableChanged(const QCPAxis::SelectableParts &parts);
This signal is emitted when the selectability changes, by calls to \ref
setSelectableParts
*/
/* end of documentation of signals */
/*!
Constructs an Axis instance of Type \a type for the axis rect \a parent.
You shouldn't instantiate axes directly, rather use \ref QCPAxisRect::addAxis.
*/
QCPAxis::QCPAxis( QCPAxisRect* parent, AxisType type )
: QCPLayerable( parent->parentPlot(), "", parent )
,
// axis base:
mAxisType( type )
, mAxisRect( parent )
, mPadding( 5 )
, mOrientation( orientation( type ) )
, mSelectableParts( spAxis | spTickLabels | spAxisLabel )
, mSelectedParts( spNone )
, mBasePen( QPen( Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap ) )
, mSelectedBasePen( QPen( Qt::blue, 2 ) )
,
// axis label:
mLabel( "" )
, mLabelFont( mParentPlot->font() )
, mSelectedLabelFont( QFont( mLabelFont.family(), mLabelFont.pointSize(), QFont::Bold ) )
, mLabelColor( Qt::black )
, mSelectedLabelColor( Qt::blue )
,
// tick labels:
mTickLabels( true )
, mAutoTickLabels( true )
, mTickLabelType( ltNumber )
, mTickLabelFont( mParentPlot->font() )
, mSelectedTickLabelFont(
QFont( mTickLabelFont.family(), mTickLabelFont.pointSize(), QFont::Bold ) )
, mTickLabelColor( Qt::black )
, mSelectedTickLabelColor( Qt::blue )
, mDateTimeFormat( "hh:mm:ss\ndd.MM.yy" )
, mDateTimeSpec( Qt::LocalTime )
, mNumberPrecision( 6 )
, mNumberFormatChar( 'g' )
, mNumberBeautifulPowers( true )
,
// ticks and subticks:
mTicks( true )
, mTickStep( 1 )
, mSubTickCount( 4 )
, mAutoTickCount( 6 )
, mAutoTicks( true )
, mAutoTickStep( true )
, mAutoSubTicks( true )
, mTickPen( QPen( Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap ) )
, mSelectedTickPen( QPen( Qt::blue, 2 ) )
, mSubTickPen( QPen( Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap ) )
, mSelectedSubTickPen( QPen( Qt::blue, 2 ) )
,
// scale and range:
mRange( 0, 5 )
, mRangeReversed( false )
, mScaleType( stLinear )
, mScaleLogBase( 10 )
, mScaleLogBaseLogInv( 1.0 / qLn( mScaleLogBase ) )
,
// internal members:
mGrid( new QCPGrid( this ) )
, mAxisPainter( new QCPAxisPainterPrivate( parent->parentPlot() ) )
, mLowestVisibleTick( 0 )
, mHighestVisibleTick( -1 )
, mCachedMarginValid( false )
, mCachedMargin( 0 )
{
mGrid->setVisible( false );
setAntialiased( false );
setLayer( mParentPlot->currentLayer() ); // it's actually on that layer already,
// but we want it in front of the grid,
// so we place it on there again
if( type == atTop )
{
setTickLabelPadding( 3 );
setLabelPadding( 6 );
}
else if( type == atRight )
{
setTickLabelPadding( 7 );
setLabelPadding( 12 );
}
else if( type == atBottom )
{
setTickLabelPadding( 3 );
setLabelPadding( 3 );
}
else if( type == atLeft )
{
setTickLabelPadding( 5 );
setLabelPadding( 10 );
}
}
QCPAxis::~QCPAxis()
{
delete mAxisPainter;
}
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::tickLabelPadding() const
{
return mAxisPainter->tickLabelPadding;
}
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
double QCPAxis::tickLabelRotation() const
{
return mAxisPainter->tickLabelRotation;
}
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
QString QCPAxis::numberFormat() const
{
QString result;
result.append( mNumberFormatChar );
if( mNumberBeautifulPowers )
{
result.append( "b" );
if( mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross )
result.append( "c" );
}
return result;
}
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::tickLengthIn() const
{
return mAxisPainter->tickLengthIn;
}
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::tickLengthOut() const
{
return mAxisPainter->tickLengthOut;
}
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::subTickLengthIn() const
{
return mAxisPainter->subTickLengthIn;
}
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::subTickLengthOut() const
{
return mAxisPainter->subTickLengthOut;
}
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::labelPadding() const
{
return mAxisPainter->labelPadding;
}
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
int QCPAxis::offset() const
{
return mAxisPainter->offset;
}
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
QCPLineEnding QCPAxis::lowerEnding() const
{
return mAxisPainter->lowerEnding;
}
/* No documentation as it is a property getter */
QCPLineEnding QCPAxis::upperEnding() const
{
return mAxisPainter->upperEnding;
}
/*!
Sets whether the axis uses a linear scale or a logarithmic scale. If \a type
is set to \ref
stLogarithmic, the logarithm base can be set with \ref setScaleLogBase. In
logarithmic axis
scaling, major tick marks appear at all powers of the logarithm base.
Properties like tick step
(\ref setTickStep) don't apply in logarithmic scaling. If you wish a decimal
base but less major
ticks, consider choosing a logarithm base of 100, 1000 or even higher.
If \a type is \ref stLogarithmic and the number format (\ref setNumberFormat)
uses the 'b' option
(beautifully typeset decimal powers), the display usually is "1
[multiplication sign] 10
[superscript] n", which looks unnatural for logarithmic scaling (the "1
[multiplication sign]"
part). To only display the decimal power, set the number precision to zero
with
\ref setNumberPrecision.
*/
void QCPAxis::setScaleType( QCPAxis::ScaleType type )
{
if( mScaleType != type )
{
mScaleType = type;
if( mScaleType == stLogarithmic )
setRange( mRange.sanitizedForLogScale() );
mCachedMarginValid = false;
emit scaleTypeChanged( mScaleType );
}
}
/*!
If \ref setScaleType is set to \ref stLogarithmic, \a base will be the
logarithm base of the
scaling. In logarithmic axis scaling, major tick marks appear at all powers of
\a base.
Properties like tick step (\ref setTickStep) don't apply in logarithmic
scaling. If you wish a decimal base but
less major ticks, consider choosing \a base 100, 1000 or even higher.
*/
void QCPAxis::setScaleLogBase( double base )
{
if( base > 1 )
{
mScaleLogBase = base;
mScaleLogBaseLogInv = 1.0 / qLn( mScaleLogBase ); // buffer for faster baseLog() calculation
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid logarithmic scale base (must be greater 1):" << base;
}
/*!
Sets the range of the axis.
This slot may be connected with the \ref rangeChanged signal of another axis
so this axis
is always synchronized with the other axis range, when it changes.
To invert the direction of an axis, use \ref setRangeReversed.
*/
void QCPAxis::setRange( const QCPRange& range )
{
if( range.lower == mRange.lower && range.upper == mRange.upper )
return;
if( !QCPRange::validRange( range ) )
return;
QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
if( mScaleType == stLogarithmic )
{
mRange = range.sanitizedForLogScale();
}
else
{
mRange = range.sanitizedForLinScale();
}
mCachedMarginValid = false;
emit rangeChanged( mRange );
emit rangeChanged( mRange, oldRange );
}
/*!
Sets whether the user can (de-)select the parts in \a selectable by clicking
on the QCustomPlot surface.
(When \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectAxes.)
However, even when \a selectable is set to a value not allowing the selection
of a specific part,
it is still possible to set the selection of this part manually, by calling
\ref setSelectedParts
directly.
\see SelectablePart, setSelectedParts
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectableParts( const SelectableParts& selectable )
{
if( mSelectableParts != selectable )
{
mSelectableParts = selectable;
emit selectableChanged( mSelectableParts );
}
}
/*!
Sets the selected state of the respective axis parts described by \ref
SelectablePart. When a part
is selected, it uses a different pen/font.
The entire selection mechanism for axes is handled automatically when \ref
QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectAxes. You only need to call this
function when you
wish to change the selection state manually.
This function can change the selection state of a part, independent of the
\ref setSelectableParts setting.
emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the
previous selection state.
\see SelectablePart, setSelectableParts, selectTest, setSelectedBasePen,
setSelectedTickPen, setSelectedSubTickPen,
setSelectedTickLabelFont, setSelectedLabelFont, setSelectedTickLabelColor,
setSelectedLabelColor
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedParts( const SelectableParts& selected )
{
if( mSelectedParts != selected )
{
mSelectedParts = selected;
emit selectionChanged( mSelectedParts );
}
}
/*!
\overload
Sets the lower and upper bound of the axis range.
To invert the direction of an axis, use \ref setRangeReversed.
There is also a slot to set a range, see \ref setRange(const QCPRange &range).
*/
void QCPAxis::setRange( double lower, double upper )
{
if( lower == mRange.lower && upper == mRange.upper )
return;
if( !QCPRange::validRange( lower, upper ) )
return;
QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
mRange.lower = lower;
mRange.upper = upper;
if( mScaleType == stLogarithmic )
{
mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
}
else
{
mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
}
mCachedMarginValid = false;
emit rangeChanged( mRange );
emit rangeChanged( mRange, oldRange );
}
/*!
\overload
Sets the range of the axis.
The \a position coordinate indicates together with the \a alignment parameter,
where the new
range will be positioned. \a size defines the size of the new axis range. \a
alignment may be
Qt::AlignLeft, Qt::AlignRight or Qt::AlignCenter. This will cause the left
border, right border,
or center of the range to be aligned with \a position. Any other values of \a
alignment will
default to Qt::AlignCenter.
*/
void QCPAxis::setRange( double position, double size, Qt::AlignmentFlag alignment )
{
if( alignment == Qt::AlignLeft )
setRange( position, position + size );
else if( alignment == Qt::AlignRight )
setRange( position - size, position );
else // alignment == Qt::AlignCenter
setRange( position - size / 2.0, position + size / 2.0 );
}
/*!
Sets the lower bound of the axis range. The upper bound is not changed.
\see setRange
*/
void QCPAxis::setRangeLower( double lower )
{
if( mRange.lower == lower )
return;
QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
mRange.lower = lower;
if( mScaleType == stLogarithmic )
{
mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
}
else
{
mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
}
mCachedMarginValid = false;
emit rangeChanged( mRange );
emit rangeChanged( mRange, oldRange );
}
/*!
Sets the upper bound of the axis range. The lower bound is not changed.
\see setRange
*/
void QCPAxis::setRangeUpper( double upper )
{
if( mRange.upper == upper )
return;
QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
mRange.upper = upper;
if( mScaleType == stLogarithmic )
{
mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
}
else
{
mRange = mRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
}
mCachedMarginValid = false;
emit rangeChanged( mRange );
emit rangeChanged( mRange, oldRange );
}
/*!
Sets whether the axis range (direction) is displayed reversed. Normally, the
values on horizontal
axes increase left to right, on vertical axes bottom to top. When \a reversed
is set to true, the
direction of increasing values is inverted.
Note that the range and data interface stays the same for reversed axes, e.g.
the \a lower part
of the \ref setRange interface will still reference the mathematically smaller
number than the \a
upper part.
*/
void QCPAxis::setRangeReversed( bool reversed )
{
if( mRangeReversed != reversed )
{
mRangeReversed = reversed;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets whether the tick positions should be calculated automatically (either
from an automatically
generated tick step or a tick step provided manually via \ref setTickStep, see
\ref setAutoTickStep).
If \a on is set to false, you must provide the tick positions manually via
\ref setTickVector.
For these manual ticks you may let QCPAxis generate the appropriate labels
automatically by
leaving \ref setAutoTickLabels set to true. If you also wish to control the
displayed labels
manually, set \ref setAutoTickLabels to false and provide the label strings
with \ref
setTickVectorLabels.
If you need dynamically calculated tick vectors (and possibly tick label
vectors), set the
vectors in a slot connected to the \ref ticksRequest signal.
\see setAutoTickLabels, setAutoSubTicks, setAutoTickCount, setAutoTickStep
*/
void QCPAxis::setAutoTicks( bool on )
{
if( mAutoTicks != on )
{
mAutoTicks = on;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
When \ref setAutoTickStep is true, \a approximateCount determines how many
ticks should be
generated in the visible range, approximately.
It's not guaranteed that this number of ticks is met exactly, but
approximately within a
tolerance of about two.
Only values greater than zero are accepted as \a approximateCount.
\see setAutoTickStep, setAutoTicks, setAutoSubTicks
*/
void QCPAxis::setAutoTickCount( int approximateCount )
{
if( mAutoTickCount != approximateCount )
{
if( approximateCount > 0 )
{
mAutoTickCount = approximateCount;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "approximateCount must be greater than zero:" << approximateCount;
}
}
/*!
Sets whether the tick labels are generated automatically. Depending on the
tick label type (\ref
ltNumber or \ref ltDateTime), the labels will either show the coordinate as
floating point
number (\ref setNumberFormat), or a date/time formatted according to \ref
setDateTimeFormat.
If \a on is set to false, you should provide the tick labels via \ref
setTickVectorLabels. This
is usually used in a combination with \ref setAutoTicks set to false for
complete control over
tick positions and labels, e.g. when the ticks should be at multiples of pi
and show "2pi", "3pi"
etc. as tick labels.
If you need dynamically calculated tick vectors (and possibly tick label
vectors), set the
vectors in a slot connected to the \ref ticksRequest signal.
\see setAutoTicks
*/
void QCPAxis::setAutoTickLabels( bool on )
{
if( mAutoTickLabels != on )
{
mAutoTickLabels = on;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets whether the tick step, i.e. the interval between two (major) ticks, is
calculated
automatically. If \a on is set to true, the axis finds a tick step that is
reasonable for human
readable plots.
The number of ticks the algorithm aims for within the visible range can be
specified with \ref
setAutoTickCount.
If \a on is set to false, you may set the tick step manually with \ref
setTickStep.
\see setAutoTicks, setAutoSubTicks, setAutoTickCount
*/
void QCPAxis::setAutoTickStep( bool on )
{
if( mAutoTickStep != on )
{
mAutoTickStep = on;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets whether the number of sub ticks in one tick interval is determined
automatically. This
works, as long as the tick step mantissa is a multiple of 0.5. When \ref
setAutoTickStep is
enabled, this is always the case.
When \a on is set to false, you may set the sub tick count with \ref
setSubTickCount manually.
\see setAutoTickCount, setAutoTicks, setAutoTickStep
*/
void QCPAxis::setAutoSubTicks( bool on )
{
if( mAutoSubTicks != on )
{
mAutoSubTicks = on;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets whether tick marks are displayed.
Note that setting \a show to false does not imply that tick labels are
invisible, too. To achieve
that, see \ref setTickLabels.
*/
void QCPAxis::setTicks( bool show )
{
if( mTicks != show )
{
mTicks = show;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets whether tick labels are displayed. Tick labels are the numbers drawn next
to tick marks.
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLabels( bool show )
{
if( mTickLabels != show )
{
mTickLabels = show;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets the distance between the axis base line (including any outward ticks) and
the tick labels.
\see setLabelPadding, setPadding
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLabelPadding( int padding )
{
if( mAxisPainter->tickLabelPadding != padding )
{
mAxisPainter->tickLabelPadding = padding;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets whether the tick labels display numbers or dates/times.
If \a type is set to \ref ltNumber, the format specifications of \ref
setNumberFormat apply.
If \a type is set to \ref ltDateTime, the format specifications of \ref
setDateTimeFormat apply.
In QCustomPlot, date/time coordinates are <tt>double</tt> numbers representing
the seconds since
1970-01-01T00:00:00 UTC. This format can be retrieved from QDateTime objects
with the
QDateTime::toTime_t() function. Since this only gives a resolution of one
second, there is also
the QDateTime::toMSecsSinceEpoch() function which returns the timespan
described above in
milliseconds. Divide its return value by 1000.0 to get a value with the format
needed for
date/time plotting, with a resolution of one millisecond.
Using the toMSecsSinceEpoch function allows dates that go back to 2nd January
4713 B.C.
(represented by a negative number), unlike the toTime_t function, which works
with unsigned
integers and thus only goes back to 1st January 1970. So both for range and
accuracy, use of
toMSecsSinceEpoch()/1000.0 should be preferred as key coordinate for date/time
axes.
\see setTickLabels
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLabelType( LabelType type )
{
if( mTickLabelType != type )
{
mTickLabelType = type;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets the font of the tick labels.
\see setTickLabels, setTickLabelColor
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLabelFont( const QFont& font )
{
if( font != mTickLabelFont )
{
mTickLabelFont = font;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets the color of the tick labels.
\see setTickLabels, setTickLabelFont
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLabelColor( const QColor& color )
{
if( color != mTickLabelColor )
{
mTickLabelColor = color;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets the rotation of the tick labels. If \a degrees is zero, the labels are
drawn normally. Else,
the tick labels are drawn rotated by \a degrees clockwise. The specified angle
is bound to values
from -90 to 90 degrees.
If \a degrees is exactly -90, 0 or 90, the tick labels are centered on the
tick coordinate. For
other angles, the label is drawn with an offset such that it seems to point
toward or away from
the tick mark.
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLabelRotation( double degrees )
{
if( !qFuzzyIsNull( degrees - mAxisPainter->tickLabelRotation ) )
{
mAxisPainter->tickLabelRotation = qBound( -90.0, degrees, 90.0 );
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets the format in which dates and times are displayed as tick labels, if \ref
setTickLabelType is \ref ltDateTime.
for details about the \a format string, see the documentation of
QDateTime::toString().
Newlines can be inserted with "\n".
\see setDateTimeSpec
*/
void QCPAxis::setDateTimeFormat( const QString& format )
{
if( mDateTimeFormat != format )
{
mDateTimeFormat = format;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets the time spec that is used for the date time values when \ref
setTickLabelType is \ref
ltDateTime.
The default value of QDateTime objects (and also QCustomPlot) is
<tt>Qt::LocalTime</tt>. However,
if the date time values passed to QCustomPlot are given in the UTC spec, set
\a
timeSpec to <tt>Qt::UTC</tt> to get the correct axis labels.
\see setDateTimeFormat
*/
void QCPAxis::setDateTimeSpec( const Qt::TimeSpec& timeSpec )
{
mDateTimeSpec = timeSpec;
}
/*!
Sets the number format for the numbers drawn as tick labels (if tick label
type is \ref
ltNumber). This \a formatCode is an extended version of the format code used
e.g. by
QString::number() and QLocale::toString(). For reference about that, see the
"Argument Formats"
section in the detailed description of the QString class. \a formatCode is a
string of one, two
or three characters. The first character is identical to the normal format
code used by Qt. In
short, this means: 'e'/'E' scientific format, 'f' fixed format, 'g'/'G'
scientific or fixed,
whichever is shorter.
The second and third characters are optional and specific to QCustomPlot:\n
If the first char was 'e' or 'g', numbers are/might be displayed in the
scientific format, e.g.
"5.5e9", which is ugly in a plot. So when the second char of \a formatCode is
set to 'b' (for
"beautiful"), those exponential numbers are formatted in a more natural way,
i.e. "5.5
[multiplication sign] 10 [superscript] 9". By default, the multiplication sign
is a centered dot.
If instead a cross should be shown (as is usual in the USA), the third char of
\a formatCode can
be set to 'c'. The inserted multiplication signs are the UTF-8 characters 215
(0xD7) for the
cross and 183 (0xB7) for the dot.
If the scale type (\ref setScaleType) is \ref stLogarithmic and the \a
formatCode uses the 'b'
option (beautifully typeset decimal powers), the display usually is "1
[multiplication sign] 10
[superscript] n", which looks unnatural for logarithmic scaling (the "1
[multiplication sign]"
part). To only display the decimal power, set the number precision to zero
with \ref
setNumberPrecision.
Examples for \a formatCode:
\li \c g normal format code behaviour. If number is small, fixed format is
used, if number is large,
normal scientific format is used
\li \c gb If number is small, fixed format is used, if number is large,
scientific format is used with
beautifully typeset decimal powers and a dot as multiplication sign
\li \c ebc All numbers are in scientific format with beautifully typeset
decimal power and a cross as
multiplication sign
\li \c fb illegal format code, since fixed format doesn't support (or need)
beautifully typeset decimal
powers. Format code will be reduced to 'f'.
\li \c hello illegal format code, since first char is not 'e', 'E', 'f', 'g'
or 'G'. Current format
code will not be changed.
*/
void QCPAxis::setNumberFormat( const QString& formatCode )
{
if( formatCode.isEmpty() )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Passed formatCode is empty";
return;
}
mCachedMarginValid = false;
// interpret first char as number format char:
QString allowedFormatChars = "eEfgG";
if( allowedFormatChars.contains( formatCode.at( 0 ) ) )
{
mNumberFormatChar = formatCode.at( 0 ).toLatin1();
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "Invalid number format code (first char not in 'eEfgG'):" << formatCode;
return;
}
if( formatCode.length() < 2 )
{
mNumberBeautifulPowers = false;
mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross = false;
return;
}
// interpret second char as indicator for beautiful decimal powers:
if( formatCode.at( 1 ) == 'b' && ( mNumberFormatChar == 'e' || mNumberFormatChar == 'g' ) )
{
mNumberBeautifulPowers = true;
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "Invalid number format code (second char not "
"'b' or first char neither 'e' nor 'g'):"
<< formatCode;
return;
}
if( formatCode.length() < 3 )
{
mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross = false;
return;
}
// interpret third char as indicator for dot or cross multiplication symbol:
if( formatCode.at( 2 ) == 'c' )
{
mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross = true;
}
else if( formatCode.at( 2 ) == 'd' )
{
mAxisPainter->numberMultiplyCross = false;
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "Invalid number format code (third char neither 'c' nor 'd'):" << formatCode;
return;
}
}
/*!
Sets the precision of the tick label numbers. See QLocale::toString(double i,
char f, int prec)
for details. The effect of precisions are most notably for number Formats
starting with 'e', see
\ref setNumberFormat
If the scale type (\ref setScaleType) is \ref stLogarithmic and the number
format (\ref
setNumberFormat) uses the 'b' format code (beautifully typeset decimal
powers), the display
usually is "1 [multiplication sign] 10 [superscript] n", which looks unnatural
for logarithmic
scaling (the redundant "1 [multiplication sign]" part). To only display the
decimal power "10
[superscript] n", set \a precision to zero.
*/
void QCPAxis::setNumberPrecision( int precision )
{
if( mNumberPrecision != precision )
{
mNumberPrecision = precision;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
If \ref setAutoTickStep is set to false, use this function to set the tick
step manually.
The tick step is the interval between (major) ticks, in plot coordinates.
\see setSubTickCount
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickStep( double step )
{
if( mTickStep != step )
{
mTickStep = step;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
If you want full control over what ticks (and possibly labels) the axes show,
this function is
used to set the coordinates at which ticks will appear.\ref setAutoTicks must
be disabled, else
the provided tick vector will be overwritten with automatically generated tick
coordinates upon
replot. The labels of the ticks can be generated automatically when \ref
setAutoTickLabels is
left enabled. If it is disabled, you can set the labels manually with \ref
setTickVectorLabels.
\a vec is a vector containing the positions of the ticks, in plot coordinates.
\warning \a vec must be sorted in ascending order, no additional checks are
made to ensure this.
\see setTickVectorLabels
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickVector( const QVector<double>& vec )
{
// don't check whether mTickVector != vec here, because it takes longer than
// we would save
mTickVector = vec;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
/*!
If you want full control over what ticks and labels the axes show, this
function is used to set a
number of QStrings that will be displayed at the tick positions which you need
to provide with
\ref setTickVector. These two vectors should have the same size. (Note that
you need to disable
\ref setAutoTicks and \ref setAutoTickLabels first.)
\a vec is a vector containing the labels of the ticks. The entries correspond
to the respective
indices in the tick vector, passed via \ref setTickVector.
\see setTickVector
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickVectorLabels( const QVector<QString>& vec )
{
// don't check whether mTickVectorLabels != vec here, because it takes longer
// than we would save
mTickVectorLabels = vec;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
/*!
Sets the length of the ticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the ticks will
reach inside the
plot and \a outside is the length they will reach outside the plot. If \a
outside is greater than
zero, the tick labels and axis label will increase their distance to the axis
accordingly, so
they won't collide with the ticks.
\see setSubTickLength, setTickLengthIn, setTickLengthOut
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLength( int inside, int outside )
{
setTickLengthIn( inside );
setTickLengthOut( outside );
}
/*!
Sets the length of the inward ticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the
ticks will reach
inside the plot.
\see setTickLengthOut, setTickLength, setSubTickLength
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLengthIn( int inside )
{
if( mAxisPainter->tickLengthIn != inside )
{
mAxisPainter->tickLengthIn = inside;
}
}
/*!
Sets the length of the outward ticks in pixels. \a outside is the length the
ticks will reach
outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than zero, the tick labels and axis
label will
increase their distance to the axis accordingly, so they won't collide with
the ticks.
\see setTickLengthIn, setTickLength, setSubTickLength
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickLengthOut( int outside )
{
if( mAxisPainter->tickLengthOut != outside )
{
mAxisPainter->tickLengthOut = outside;
mCachedMarginValid = false; // only outside tick length can change margin
}
}
/*!
Sets the number of sub ticks in one (major) tick step. A sub tick count of
three for example,
divides the tick intervals in four sub intervals.
By default, the number of sub ticks is chosen automatically in a reasonable
manner as long as the
mantissa of the tick step is a multiple of 0.5. When \ref setAutoTickStep is
enabled, this is
always the case.
If you want to disable automatic sub tick count and use this function to set
the count manually,
see \ref setAutoSubTicks.
*/
void QCPAxis::setSubTickCount( int count )
{
mSubTickCount = count;
}
/*!
Sets the length of the subticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the
subticks will reach inside
the plot and \a outside is the length they will reach outside the plot. If \a
outside is greater
than zero, the tick labels and axis label will increase their distance to the
axis accordingly,
so they won't collide with the ticks.
\see setTickLength, setSubTickLengthIn, setSubTickLengthOut
*/
void QCPAxis::setSubTickLength( int inside, int outside )
{
setSubTickLengthIn( inside );
setSubTickLengthOut( outside );
}
/*!
Sets the length of the inward subticks in pixels. \a inside is the length the
subticks will reach inside
the plot.
\see setSubTickLengthOut, setSubTickLength, setTickLength
*/
void QCPAxis::setSubTickLengthIn( int inside )
{
if( mAxisPainter->subTickLengthIn != inside )
{
mAxisPainter->subTickLengthIn = inside;
}
}
/*!
Sets the length of the outward subticks in pixels. \a outside is the length
the subticks will reach
outside the plot. If \a outside is greater than zero, the tick labels will
increase their
distance to the axis accordingly, so they won't collide with the ticks.
\see setSubTickLengthIn, setSubTickLength, setTickLength
*/
void QCPAxis::setSubTickLengthOut( int outside )
{
if( mAxisPainter->subTickLengthOut != outside )
{
mAxisPainter->subTickLengthOut = outside;
mCachedMarginValid = false; // only outside tick length can change margin
}
}
/*!
Sets the pen, the axis base line is drawn with.
\see setTickPen, setSubTickPen
*/
void QCPAxis::setBasePen( const QPen& pen )
{
mBasePen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen, tick marks will be drawn with.
\see setTickLength, setBasePen
*/
void QCPAxis::setTickPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mTickPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen, subtick marks will be drawn with.
\see setSubTickCount, setSubTickLength, setBasePen
*/
void QCPAxis::setSubTickPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSubTickPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the font of the axis label.
\see setLabelColor
*/
void QCPAxis::setLabelFont( const QFont& font )
{
if( mLabelFont != font )
{
mLabelFont = font;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets the color of the axis label.
\see setLabelFont
*/
void QCPAxis::setLabelColor( const QColor& color )
{
mLabelColor = color;
}
/*!
Sets the text of the axis label that will be shown below/above or next to the
axis, depending on
its orientation. To disable axis labels, pass an empty string as \a str.
*/
void QCPAxis::setLabel( const QString& str )
{
if( mLabel != str )
{
mLabel = str;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets the distance between the tick labels and the axis label.
\see setTickLabelPadding, setPadding
*/
void QCPAxis::setLabelPadding( int padding )
{
if( mAxisPainter->labelPadding != padding )
{
mAxisPainter->labelPadding = padding;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets the padding of the axis.
When \ref QCPAxisRect::setAutoMargins is enabled, the padding is the
additional outer most space,
that is left blank.
The axis padding has no meaning if \ref QCPAxisRect::setAutoMargins is
disabled.
\see setLabelPadding, setTickLabelPadding
*/
void QCPAxis::setPadding( int padding )
{
if( mPadding != padding )
{
mPadding = padding;
mCachedMarginValid = false;
}
}
/*!
Sets the offset the axis has to its axis rect side.
If an axis rect side has multiple axes and automatic margin calculation is
enabled for that side,
only the offset of the inner most axis has meaning (even if it is set to be
invisible). The
offset of the other, outer axes is controlled automatically, to place them at
appropriate
positions.
*/
void QCPAxis::setOffset( int offset )
{
mAxisPainter->offset = offset;
}
/*!
Sets the font that is used for tick labels when they are selected.
\see setTickLabelFont, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts,
QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedTickLabelFont( const QFont& font )
{
if( font != mSelectedTickLabelFont )
{
mSelectedTickLabelFont = font;
// don't set mCachedMarginValid to false here because margin calculation is
// always done with non-selected fonts
}
}
/*!
Sets the font that is used for the axis label when it is selected.
\see setLabelFont, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts,
QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedLabelFont( const QFont& font )
{
mSelectedLabelFont = font;
// don't set mCachedMarginValid to false here because margin calculation is
// always done with non-selected fonts
}
/*!
Sets the color that is used for tick labels when they are selected.
\see setTickLabelColor, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts,
QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedTickLabelColor( const QColor& color )
{
if( color != mSelectedTickLabelColor )
{
mSelectedTickLabelColor = color;
}
}
/*!
Sets the color that is used for the axis label when it is selected.
\see setLabelColor, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts,
QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedLabelColor( const QColor& color )
{
mSelectedLabelColor = color;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that is used to draw the axis base line when selected.
\see setBasePen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts,
QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedBasePen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedBasePen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that is used to draw the (major) ticks when selected.
\see setTickPen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts,
QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedTickPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedTickPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that is used to draw the subticks when selected.
\see setSubTickPen, setSelectableParts, setSelectedParts,
QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAxis::setSelectedSubTickPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedSubTickPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the style for the lower axis ending. See the documentation of
QCPLineEnding for available
styles.
For horizontal axes, this method refers to the left ending, for vertical axes
the bottom ending.
Note that this meaning does not change when the axis range is reversed with
\ref
setRangeReversed.
\see setUpperEnding
*/
void QCPAxis::setLowerEnding( const QCPLineEnding& ending )
{
mAxisPainter->lowerEnding = ending;
}
/*!
Sets the style for the upper axis ending. See the documentation of
QCPLineEnding for available
styles.
For horizontal axes, this method refers to the right ending, for vertical axes
the top ending.
Note that this meaning does not change when the axis range is reversed with
\ref
setRangeReversed.
\see setLowerEnding
*/
void QCPAxis::setUpperEnding( const QCPLineEnding& ending )
{
mAxisPainter->upperEnding = ending;
}
/*!
If the scale type (\ref setScaleType) is \ref stLinear, \a diff is added to
the lower and upper
bounds of the range. The range is simply moved by \a diff.
If the scale type is \ref stLogarithmic, the range bounds are multiplied by \a
diff. This
corresponds to an apparent "linear" move in logarithmic scaling by a distance
of log(diff).
*/
void QCPAxis::moveRange( double diff )
{
QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
if( mScaleType == stLinear )
{
mRange.lower += diff;
mRange.upper += diff;
}
else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
{
mRange.lower *= diff;
mRange.upper *= diff;
}
mCachedMarginValid = false;
emit rangeChanged( mRange );
emit rangeChanged( mRange, oldRange );
}
/*!
Scales the range of this axis by \a factor around the coordinate \a center.
For example, if \a
factor is 2.0, \a center is 1.0, then the axis range will double its size, and
the point at
coordinate 1.0 won't have changed its position in the QCustomPlot widget (i.e.
coordinates
around 1.0 will have moved symmetrically closer to 1.0).
*/
void QCPAxis::scaleRange( double factor, double center )
{
QCPRange oldRange = mRange;
if( mScaleType == stLinear )
{
QCPRange newRange;
newRange.lower = ( mRange.lower - center ) * factor + center;
newRange.upper = ( mRange.upper - center ) * factor + center;
if( QCPRange::validRange( newRange ) )
mRange = newRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
}
else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
{
if( ( mRange.upper < 0 && center < 0 ) ||
( mRange.upper > 0 && center > 0 ) ) // make sure center has same sign as range
{
QCPRange newRange;
newRange.lower = pow( mRange.lower / center, factor ) * center;
newRange.upper = pow( mRange.upper / center, factor ) * center;
if( QCPRange::validRange( newRange ) )
mRange = newRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "Center of scaling operation doesn't lie in "
"same logarithmic sign domain as range:"
<< center;
}
mCachedMarginValid = false;
emit rangeChanged( mRange );
emit rangeChanged( mRange, oldRange );
}
/*!
Scales the range of this axis to have a certain scale \a ratio to \a
otherAxis. The scaling will
be done around the center of the current axis range.
For example, if \a ratio is 1, this axis is the \a yAxis and \a otherAxis is
\a xAxis, graphs
plotted with those axes will appear in a 1:1 aspect ratio, independent of the
aspect ratio the
axis rect has.
This is an operation that changes the range of this axis once, it doesn't fix
the scale ratio
indefinitely. Note that calling this function in the constructor of the
QCustomPlot's parent
won't have the desired effect, since the widget dimensions aren't defined yet,
and a resizeEvent
will follow.
*/
void QCPAxis::setScaleRatio( const QCPAxis* otherAxis, double ratio )
{
int otherPixelSize, ownPixelSize;
if( otherAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
otherPixelSize = otherAxis->axisRect()->width();
else
otherPixelSize = otherAxis->axisRect()->height();
if( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
ownPixelSize = axisRect()->width();
else
ownPixelSize = axisRect()->height();
double newRangeSize = ratio * otherAxis->range().size() * ownPixelSize / (double)otherPixelSize;
setRange( range().center(), newRangeSize, Qt::AlignCenter );
}
/*!
Changes the axis range such that all plottables associated with this axis are
fully visible in
that dimension.
\see QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleAxes, QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes
*/
void QCPAxis::rescale( bool onlyVisiblePlottables )
{
QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> p = plottables();
QCPRange newRange;
bool haveRange = false;
for( int i = 0; i < p.size(); ++i )
{
if( !p.at( i )->realVisibility() && onlyVisiblePlottables )
continue;
QCPRange plottableRange;
bool currentFoundRange;
QCPAbstractPlottable::SignDomain signDomain = QCPAbstractPlottable::sdBoth;
if( mScaleType == stLogarithmic )
signDomain = ( mRange.upper < 0 ? QCPAbstractPlottable::sdNegative
: QCPAbstractPlottable::sdPositive );
if( p.at( i )->keyAxis() == this )
plottableRange = p.at( i )->getKeyRange( currentFoundRange, signDomain );
else
plottableRange = p.at( i )->getValueRange( currentFoundRange, signDomain );
if( currentFoundRange )
{
if( !haveRange )
newRange = plottableRange;
else
newRange.expand( plottableRange );
haveRange = true;
}
}
if( haveRange )
{
if( !QCPRange::validRange( newRange ) ) // likely due to range being zero
// (plottable has only constant data in
// this
// axis dimension), shift current range to at least center the plottable
{
double center = ( newRange.lower + newRange.upper ) *
0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to
// make sure, incase validRange returned false for
// other reason
if( mScaleType == stLinear )
{
newRange.lower = center - mRange.size() / 2.0;
newRange.upper = center + mRange.size() / 2.0;
}
else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
{
newRange.lower = center / qSqrt( mRange.upper / mRange.lower );
newRange.upper = center * qSqrt( mRange.upper / mRange.lower );
}
}
setRange( newRange );
}
}
/*!
Transforms \a value, in pixel coordinates of the QCustomPlot widget, to axis
coordinates.
*/
double QCPAxis::pixelToCoord( double value ) const
{
if( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
if( mScaleType == stLinear )
{
if( !mRangeReversed )
return ( value - mAxisRect->left() ) / (double)mAxisRect->width() * mRange.size() +
mRange.lower;
else
return -( value - mAxisRect->left() ) / (double)mAxisRect->width() * mRange.size() +
mRange.upper;
}
else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
{
if( !mRangeReversed )
return pow( mRange.upper / mRange.lower,
( value - mAxisRect->left() ) / (double)mAxisRect->width() ) *
mRange.lower;
else
return pow( mRange.upper / mRange.lower,
( mAxisRect->left() - value ) / (double)mAxisRect->width() ) *
mRange.upper;
}
}
else // orientation() == Qt::Vertical
{
if( mScaleType == stLinear )
{
if( !mRangeReversed )
return ( mAxisRect->bottom() - value ) / (double)mAxisRect->height() * mRange.size() +
mRange.lower;
else
return -( mAxisRect->bottom() - value ) / (double)mAxisRect->height() * mRange.size() +
mRange.upper;
}
else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
{
if( !mRangeReversed )
return pow( mRange.upper / mRange.lower,
( mAxisRect->bottom() - value ) / (double)mAxisRect->height() ) *
mRange.lower;
else
return pow( mRange.upper / mRange.lower,
( value - mAxisRect->bottom() ) / (double)mAxisRect->height() ) *
mRange.upper;
}
}
}
/*!
Transforms \a value, in coordinates of the axis, to pixel coordinates of the
QCustomPlot widget.
*/
double QCPAxis::coordToPixel( double value ) const
{
if( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
if( mScaleType == stLinear )
{
if( !mRangeReversed )
return ( value - mRange.lower ) / mRange.size() * mAxisRect->width() + mAxisRect->left();
else
return ( mRange.upper - value ) / mRange.size() * mAxisRect->width() + mAxisRect->left();
}
else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
{
if( value >= 0 && mRange.upper < 0 ) // invalid value for logarithmic
// scale, just draw it outside visible
// range
return !mRangeReversed ? mAxisRect->right() + 200 : mAxisRect->left() - 200;
else if( value <= 0 && mRange.upper > 0 ) // invalid value for logarithmic
// scale, just draw it outside
// visible range
return !mRangeReversed ? mAxisRect->left() - 200 : mAxisRect->right() + 200;
else
{
if( !mRangeReversed )
return baseLog( value / mRange.lower ) / baseLog( mRange.upper / mRange.lower ) *
mAxisRect->width() +
mAxisRect->left();
else
return baseLog( mRange.upper / value ) / baseLog( mRange.upper / mRange.lower ) *
mAxisRect->width() +
mAxisRect->left();
}
}
}
else // orientation() == Qt::Vertical
{
if( mScaleType == stLinear )
{
if( !mRangeReversed )
return mAxisRect->bottom() - ( value - mRange.lower ) / mRange.size() * mAxisRect->height();
else
return mAxisRect->bottom() - ( mRange.upper - value ) / mRange.size() * mAxisRect->height();
}
else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
{
if( value >= 0 && mRange.upper < 0 ) // invalid value for logarithmic
// scale, just draw it outside visible
// range
return !mRangeReversed ? mAxisRect->top() - 200 : mAxisRect->bottom() + 200;
else if( value <= 0 && mRange.upper > 0 ) // invalid value for logarithmic
// scale, just draw it outside
// visible range
return !mRangeReversed ? mAxisRect->bottom() + 200 : mAxisRect->top() - 200;
else
{
if( !mRangeReversed )
return mAxisRect->bottom() - baseLog( value / mRange.lower ) /
baseLog( mRange.upper / mRange.lower ) *
mAxisRect->height();
else
return mAxisRect->bottom() - baseLog( mRange.upper / value ) /
baseLog( mRange.upper / mRange.lower ) *
mAxisRect->height();
}
}
}
}
/*!
Returns the part of the axis that is hit by \a pos (in pixels). The return
value of this function
is independent of the user-selectable parts defined with \ref
setSelectableParts. Further, this
function does not change the current selection state of the axis.
If the axis is not visible (\ref setVisible), this function always returns
\ref spNone.
\see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
QCPAxis::SelectablePart QCPAxis::getPartAt( const QPointF& pos ) const
{
if( !mVisible )
return spNone;
if( mAxisPainter->axisSelectionBox().contains( pos.toPoint() ) )
return spAxis;
else if( mAxisPainter->tickLabelsSelectionBox().contains( pos.toPoint() ) )
return spTickLabels;
else if( mAxisPainter->labelSelectionBox().contains( pos.toPoint() ) )
return spAxisLabel;
else
return spNone;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPAxis::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
if( !mParentPlot )
return -1;
SelectablePart part = getPartAt( pos );
if( ( onlySelectable && !mSelectableParts.testFlag( part ) ) || part == spNone )
return -1;
if( details )
details->setValue( part );
return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99;
}
/*!
Returns a list of all the plottables that have this axis as key or value axis.
If you are only interested in plottables of type QCPGraph, see \ref graphs.
\see graphs, items
*/
QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> QCPAxis::plottables() const
{
QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> result;
if( !mParentPlot )
return result;
for( int i = 0; i < mParentPlot->mPlottables.size(); ++i )
{
if( mParentPlot->mPlottables.at( i )->keyAxis() == this ||
mParentPlot->mPlottables.at( i )->valueAxis() == this )
result.append( mParentPlot->mPlottables.at( i ) );
}
return result;
}
/*!
Returns a list of all the graphs that have this axis as key or value axis.
\see plottables, items
*/
QList<QCPGraph*> QCPAxis::graphs() const
{
QList<QCPGraph*> result;
if( !mParentPlot )
return result;
for( int i = 0; i < mParentPlot->mGraphs.size(); ++i )
{
if( mParentPlot->mGraphs.at( i )->keyAxis() == this ||
mParentPlot->mGraphs.at( i )->valueAxis() == this )
result.append( mParentPlot->mGraphs.at( i ) );
}
return result;
}
/*!
Returns a list of all the items that are associated with this axis. An item is
considered
associated with an axis if at least one of its positions uses the axis as key
or value axis.
\see plottables, graphs
*/
QList<QCPAbstractItem*> QCPAxis::items() const
{
QList<QCPAbstractItem*> result;
if( !mParentPlot )
return result;
for( int itemId = 0; itemId < mParentPlot->mItems.size(); ++itemId )
{
QList<QCPItemPosition*> positions = mParentPlot->mItems.at( itemId )->positions();
for( int posId = 0; posId < positions.size(); ++posId )
{
if( positions.at( posId )->keyAxis() == this || positions.at( posId )->valueAxis() == this )
{
result.append( mParentPlot->mItems.at( itemId ) );
break;
}
}
}
return result;
}
/*!
Transforms a margin side to the logically corresponding axis type.
(QCP::msLeft to
QCPAxis::atLeft, QCP::msRight to QCPAxis::atRight, etc.)
*/
QCPAxis::AxisType QCPAxis::marginSideToAxisType( QCP::MarginSide side )
{
switch( side )
{
case QCP::msLeft:
return atLeft;
case QCP::msRight:
return atRight;
case QCP::msTop:
return atTop;
case QCP::msBottom:
return atBottom;
default:
break;
}
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid margin side passed:" << (int)side;
return atLeft;
}
/*!
Returns the axis type that describes the opposite axis of an axis with the
specified \a type.
*/
QCPAxis::AxisType QCPAxis::opposite( QCPAxis::AxisType type )
{
switch( type )
{
case atLeft:
return atRight;
break;
case atRight:
return atLeft;
break;
case atBottom:
return atTop;
break;
case atTop:
return atBottom;
break;
default:
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis type";
return atLeft;
break;
}
}
/*! \internal
This function is called to prepare the tick vector, sub tick vector and tick
label vector. If
\ref setAutoTicks is set to true, appropriate tick values are determined
automatically via \ref
generateAutoTicks. If it's set to false, the signal ticksRequest is emitted,
which can be used to
provide external tick positions. Then the sub tick vectors and tick label
vectors are created.
*/
void QCPAxis::setupTickVectors()
{
if( !mParentPlot )
return;
if( ( !mTicks && !mTickLabels && !mGrid->visible() ) || mRange.size() <= 0 )
return;
// fill tick vectors, either by auto generating or by notifying user to fill
// the vectors himself
if( mAutoTicks )
{
generateAutoTicks();
}
else
{
emit ticksRequest();
}
visibleTickBounds( mLowestVisibleTick, mHighestVisibleTick );
if( mTickVector.isEmpty() )
{
mSubTickVector.clear();
return;
}
// generate subticks between ticks:
mSubTickVector.resize( ( mTickVector.size() - 1 ) * mSubTickCount );
if( mSubTickCount > 0 )
{
double subTickStep = 0;
double subTickPosition = 0;
int subTickIndex = 0;
bool done = false;
int lowTick = mLowestVisibleTick > 0 ? mLowestVisibleTick - 1 : mLowestVisibleTick;
int highTick = mHighestVisibleTick < mTickVector.size() - 1 ? mHighestVisibleTick + 1
: mHighestVisibleTick;
for( int i = lowTick + 1; i <= highTick; ++i )
{
subTickStep =
( mTickVector.at( i ) - mTickVector.at( i - 1 ) ) / (double)( mSubTickCount + 1 );
for( int k = 1; k <= mSubTickCount; ++k )
{
subTickPosition = mTickVector.at( i - 1 ) + k * subTickStep;
if( subTickPosition < mRange.lower )
continue;
if( subTickPosition > mRange.upper )
{
done = true;
break;
}
mSubTickVector[subTickIndex] = subTickPosition;
subTickIndex++;
}
if( done )
break;
}
mSubTickVector.resize( subTickIndex );
}
// generate tick labels according to tick positions:
if( mAutoTickLabels )
{
int vecsize = mTickVector.size();
mTickVectorLabels.resize( vecsize );
if( mTickLabelType == ltNumber )
{
for( int i = mLowestVisibleTick; i <= mHighestVisibleTick; ++i )
mTickVectorLabels[i] = mParentPlot->locale().toString(
mTickVector.at( i ), mNumberFormatChar, mNumberPrecision );
}
else if( mTickLabelType == ltDateTime )
{
for( int i = mLowestVisibleTick; i <= mHighestVisibleTick; ++i )
{
#if QT_VERSION < QT_VERSION_CHECK( 4, 7, 0 ) // use fromMSecsSinceEpoch function
// if available, to gain sub-second
// accuracy on tick labels (e.g. for format "hh:mm:ss:zzz")
mTickVectorLabels[i] = mParentPlot->locale().toString(
QDateTime::fromTime_t( mTickVector.at( i ) ).toTimeSpec( mDateTimeSpec ),
mDateTimeFormat );
#else
mTickVectorLabels[i] = mParentPlot->locale().toString(
QDateTime::fromMSecsSinceEpoch( mTickVector.at( i ) * 1000 )
.toTimeSpec( mDateTimeSpec ),
mDateTimeFormat );
#endif
}
}
}
else // mAutoTickLabels == false
{
if( mAutoTicks ) // ticks generated automatically, but not ticklabels, so
// emit ticksRequest here for labels
{
emit ticksRequest();
}
// make sure provided tick label vector has correct (minimal) length:
if( mTickVectorLabels.size() < mTickVector.size() )
mTickVectorLabels.resize( mTickVector.size() );
}
}
/*! \internal
If \ref setAutoTicks is set to true, this function is called by \ref
setupTickVectors to
generate reasonable tick positions (and subtick count). The algorithm tries to
create
approximately <tt>mAutoTickCount</tt> ticks (set via \ref setAutoTickCount).
If the scale is logarithmic, \ref setAutoTickCount is ignored, and one tick is
generated at every
power of the current logarithm base, set via \ref setScaleLogBase.
*/
void QCPAxis::generateAutoTicks()
{
if( mScaleType == stLinear )
{
if( mAutoTickStep )
{
// Generate tick positions according to linear scaling:
mTickStep = mRange.size() /
(double)( mAutoTickCount + 1e-10 ); // mAutoTickCount ticks on average, the small
// addition is to prevent jitter on exact
// integers
double magnitudeFactor =
qPow( 10.0, qFloor( qLn( mTickStep ) /
qLn( 10.0 ) ) ); // get magnitude factor e.g. 0.01, 1, 10, 1000 etc.
double tickStepMantissa = mTickStep / magnitudeFactor;
if( tickStepMantissa < 5 )
{
// round digit after decimal point to 0.5
mTickStep = (int)( tickStepMantissa * 2 ) / 2.0 * magnitudeFactor;
}
else
{
// round to first digit in multiples of 2
mTickStep = (int)( tickStepMantissa / 2.0 ) * 2.0 * magnitudeFactor;
}
}
if( mAutoSubTicks )
mSubTickCount = calculateAutoSubTickCount( mTickStep );
// Generate tick positions according to mTickStep:
qint64 firstStep = floor( mRange.lower / mTickStep );
qint64 lastStep = ceil( mRange.upper / mTickStep );
int tickcount = lastStep - firstStep + 1;
if( tickcount < 0 )
tickcount = 0;
mTickVector.resize( tickcount );
for( int i = 0; i < tickcount; ++i )
mTickVector[i] = ( firstStep + i ) * mTickStep;
}
else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
{
// Generate tick positions according to logbase scaling:
if( mRange.lower > 0 && mRange.upper > 0 ) // positive range
{
double lowerMag = basePow( (int)floor( baseLog( mRange.lower ) ) );
double currentMag = lowerMag;
mTickVector.clear();
mTickVector.append( currentMag );
while( currentMag < mRange.upper && currentMag > 0 ) // currentMag might be
// zero for ranges
// ~1e-300, just
// cancel in that case
{
currentMag *= mScaleLogBase;
mTickVector.append( currentMag );
}
}
else if( mRange.lower < 0 && mRange.upper < 0 ) // negative range
{
double lowerMag = -basePow( (int)ceil( baseLog( -mRange.lower ) ) );
double currentMag = lowerMag;
mTickVector.clear();
mTickVector.append( currentMag );
while( currentMag < mRange.upper && currentMag < 0 ) // currentMag might be
// zero for ranges
// ~1e-300, just
// cancel in that case
{
currentMag /= mScaleLogBase;
mTickVector.append( currentMag );
}
}
else // invalid range for logarithmic scale, because lower and upper have
// different sign
{
mTickVector.clear();
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Invalid range for logarithmic plot: " << mRange.lower << "-"
<< mRange.upper;
}
}
}
/*! \internal
Called by generateAutoTicks when \ref setAutoSubTicks is set to true.
Depending on the \a
tickStep between two major ticks on the axis, a different number of sub ticks
is appropriate. For
Example taking 4 sub ticks for a \a tickStep of 1 makes more sense than taking
5 sub ticks,
because this corresponds to a sub tick step of 0.2, instead of the less
intuitive 0.16667. Note
that a subtick count of 4 means dividing the major tick step into 5 sections.
This is implemented by a hand made lookup for integer tick steps as well as
fractional tick steps
with a fractional part of (approximately) 0.5. If a tick step is different
(i.e. has no
fractional part close to 0.5), the currently set sub tick count (\ref
setSubTickCount) is
returned.
*/
int QCPAxis::calculateAutoSubTickCount( double tickStep ) const
{
int result = mSubTickCount; // default to current setting, if no proper value
// can be found
// get mantissa of tickstep:
double magnitudeFactor =
qPow( 10.0, qFloor( qLn( tickStep ) /
qLn( 10.0 ) ) ); // get magnitude factor e.g. 0.01, 1, 10, 1000 etc.
double tickStepMantissa = tickStep / magnitudeFactor;
// separate integer and fractional part of mantissa:
double epsilon = 0.01;
double intPartf;
int intPart;
double fracPart = modf( tickStepMantissa, &intPartf );
intPart = intPartf;
// handle cases with (almost) integer mantissa:
if( fracPart < epsilon || 1.0 - fracPart < epsilon )
{
if( 1.0 - fracPart < epsilon )
++intPart;
switch( intPart )
{
case 1:
result = 4;
break; // 1.0 -> 0.2 substep
case 2:
result = 3;
break; // 2.0 -> 0.5 substep
case 3:
result = 2;
break; // 3.0 -> 1.0 substep
case 4:
result = 3;
break; // 4.0 -> 1.0 substep
case 5:
result = 4;
break; // 5.0 -> 1.0 substep
case 6:
result = 2;
break; // 6.0 -> 2.0 substep
case 7:
result = 6;
break; // 7.0 -> 1.0 substep
case 8:
result = 3;
break; // 8.0 -> 2.0 substep
case 9:
result = 2;
break; // 9.0 -> 3.0 substep
}
}
else
{
// handle cases with significantly fractional mantissa:
if( qAbs( fracPart - 0.5 ) < epsilon ) // *.5 mantissa
{
switch( intPart )
{
case 1:
result = 2;
break; // 1.5 -> 0.5 substep
case 2:
result = 4;
break; // 2.5 -> 0.5 substep
case 3:
result = 4;
break; // 3.5 -> 0.7 substep
case 4:
result = 2;
break; // 4.5 -> 1.5 substep
case 5:
result = 4;
break; // 5.5 -> 1.1 substep (won't occur with autoTickStep from here
// on)
case 6:
result = 4;
break; // 6.5 -> 1.3 substep
case 7:
result = 2;
break; // 7.5 -> 2.5 substep
case 8:
result = 4;
break; // 8.5 -> 1.7 substep
case 9:
result = 4;
break; // 9.5 -> 1.9 substep
}
}
// if mantissa fraction isnt 0.0 or 0.5, don't bother finding good sub tick
// marks, leave default
}
return result;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAxis::selectEvent( QMouseEvent* event,
bool additive,
const QVariant& details,
bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
Q_UNUSED( event )
SelectablePart part = details.value<SelectablePart>();
if( mSelectableParts.testFlag( part ) )
{
SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts;
setSelectedParts( additive ? mSelectedParts ^ part : part );
if( selectionStateChanged )
*selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore;
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAxis::deselectEvent( bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts;
setSelectedParts( mSelectedParts & ~mSelectableParts );
if( selectionStateChanged )
*selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore;
}
/*! \internal
A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the
provided \a painter
before drawing axis lines.
This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is
in by default.
This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as
well as the
overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
\see setAntialiased
*/
void QCPAxis::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
applyAntialiasingHint( painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeAxes );
}
/*! \internal
Draws the axis with the specified \a painter, using the internal
QCPAxisPainterPrivate instance.
*/
void QCPAxis::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
const int lowTick = mLowestVisibleTick;
const int highTick = mHighestVisibleTick;
QVector<double> subTickPositions; // the final coordToPixel transformed vector
// passed to QCPAxisPainter
QVector<double> tickPositions; // the final coordToPixel transformed vector
// passed to QCPAxisPainter
QVector<QString> tickLabels; // the final vector passed to QCPAxisPainter
tickPositions.reserve( highTick - lowTick + 1 );
tickLabels.reserve( highTick - lowTick + 1 );
subTickPositions.reserve( mSubTickVector.size() );
if( mTicks )
{
for( int i = lowTick; i <= highTick; ++i )
{
tickPositions.append( coordToPixel( mTickVector.at( i ) ) );
if( mTickLabels )
tickLabels.append( mTickVectorLabels.at( i ) );
}
if( mSubTickCount > 0 )
{
const int subTickCount = mSubTickVector.size();
for( int i = 0; i < subTickCount; ++i ) // no need to check bounds because
// subticks are always only created
// inside current mRange
subTickPositions.append( coordToPixel( mSubTickVector.at( i ) ) );
}
}
// transfer all properties of this axis to QCPAxisPainterPrivate which it
// needs to draw the axis.
// Note that some axis painter properties are already set by direct
// feed-through with QCPAxis setters
mAxisPainter->type = mAxisType;
mAxisPainter->basePen = getBasePen();
mAxisPainter->labelFont = getLabelFont();
mAxisPainter->labelColor = getLabelColor();
mAxisPainter->label = mLabel;
mAxisPainter->substituteExponent =
mAutoTickLabels && mNumberBeautifulPowers && mTickLabelType == ltNumber;
mAxisPainter->tickPen = getTickPen();
mAxisPainter->subTickPen = getSubTickPen();
mAxisPainter->tickLabelFont = getTickLabelFont();
mAxisPainter->tickLabelColor = getTickLabelColor();
mAxisPainter->alignmentRect = mAxisRect->rect();
mAxisPainter->viewportRect = mParentPlot->viewport();
mAxisPainter->abbreviateDecimalPowers = mScaleType == stLogarithmic;
mAxisPainter->reversedEndings = mRangeReversed;
mAxisPainter->tickPositions = tickPositions;
mAxisPainter->tickLabels = tickLabels;
mAxisPainter->subTickPositions = subTickPositions;
mAxisPainter->draw( painter );
}
/*! \internal
Returns via \a lowIndex and \a highIndex, which ticks in the current tick
vector are visible in
the current range. The return values are indices of the tick vector, not the
positions of the
ticks themselves.
The actual use of this function is when an external tick vector is provided,
since it might
exceed far beyond the currently displayed range, and would cause unnecessary
calculations e.g. of
subticks.
If all ticks are outside the axis range, an inverted range is returned, i.e.
highIndex will be
smaller than lowIndex. There is one case, where this function returns indices
that are not really
visible in the current axis range: When the tick spacing is larger than the
axis range size and
one tick is below the axis range and the next tick is already above the axis
range. Because in
such cases it is usually desirable to know the tick pair, to draw proper
subticks.
*/
void QCPAxis::visibleTickBounds( int& lowIndex, int& highIndex ) const
{
bool lowFound = false;
bool highFound = false;
lowIndex = 0;
highIndex = -1;
for( int i = 0; i < mTickVector.size(); ++i )
{
if( mTickVector.at( i ) >= mRange.lower )
{
lowFound = true;
lowIndex = i;
break;
}
}
for( int i = mTickVector.size() - 1; i >= 0; --i )
{
if( mTickVector.at( i ) <= mRange.upper )
{
highFound = true;
highIndex = i;
break;
}
}
if( !lowFound && highFound )
lowIndex = highIndex + 1;
else if( lowFound && !highFound )
highIndex = lowIndex - 1;
}
/*! \internal
A log function with the base mScaleLogBase, used mostly for coordinate
transforms in logarithmic
scales with arbitrary log base. Uses the buffered mScaleLogBaseLogInv for
faster calculation.
This is set to <tt>1.0/qLn(mScaleLogBase)</tt> in \ref setScaleLogBase.
\see basePow, setScaleLogBase, setScaleType
*/
double QCPAxis::baseLog( double value ) const
{
return qLn( value ) * mScaleLogBaseLogInv;
}
/*! \internal
A power function with the base mScaleLogBase, used mostly for coordinate
transforms in
logarithmic scales with arbitrary log base.
\see baseLog, setScaleLogBase, setScaleType
*/
double QCPAxis::basePow( double value ) const
{
return qPow( mScaleLogBase, value );
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that is used to draw the axis base line. Depending on the
selection state, this
is either mSelectedBasePen or mBasePen.
*/
QPen QCPAxis::getBasePen() const
{
return mSelectedParts.testFlag( spAxis ) ? mSelectedBasePen : mBasePen;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that is used to draw the (major) ticks. Depending on the
selection state, this
is either mSelectedTickPen or mTickPen.
*/
QPen QCPAxis::getTickPen() const
{
return mSelectedParts.testFlag( spAxis ) ? mSelectedTickPen : mTickPen;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that is used to draw the subticks. Depending on the selection
state, this
is either mSelectedSubTickPen or mSubTickPen.
*/
QPen QCPAxis::getSubTickPen() const
{
return mSelectedParts.testFlag( spAxis ) ? mSelectedSubTickPen : mSubTickPen;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the font that is used to draw the tick labels. Depending on the
selection state, this
is either mSelectedTickLabelFont or mTickLabelFont.
*/
QFont QCPAxis::getTickLabelFont() const
{
return mSelectedParts.testFlag( spTickLabels ) ? mSelectedTickLabelFont : mTickLabelFont;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the font that is used to draw the axis label. Depending on the
selection state, this
is either mSelectedLabelFont or mLabelFont.
*/
QFont QCPAxis::getLabelFont() const
{
return mSelectedParts.testFlag( spAxisLabel ) ? mSelectedLabelFont : mLabelFont;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the color that is used to draw the tick labels. Depending on the
selection state, this
is either mSelectedTickLabelColor or mTickLabelColor.
*/
QColor QCPAxis::getTickLabelColor() const
{
return mSelectedParts.testFlag( spTickLabels ) ? mSelectedTickLabelColor : mTickLabelColor;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the color that is used to draw the axis label. Depending on the
selection state, this
is either mSelectedLabelColor or mLabelColor.
*/
QColor QCPAxis::getLabelColor() const
{
return mSelectedParts.testFlag( spAxisLabel ) ? mSelectedLabelColor : mLabelColor;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the appropriate outward margin for this axis. It is needed if \ref
QCPAxisRect::setAutoMargins is set to true on the parent axis rect. An axis
with axis type \ref
atLeft will return an appropriate left margin, \ref atBottom will return an
appropriate bottom
margin and so forth. For the calculation, this function goes through similar
steps as \ref draw,
so changing one function likely requires the modification of the other one as
well.
The margin consists of the outward tick length, tick label padding, tick label
size, label
padding, label size, and padding.
The margin is cached internally, so repeated calls while leaving the axis
range, fonts, etc.
unchanged are very fast.
*/
int QCPAxis::calculateMargin()
{
if( !mVisible ) // if not visible, directly return 0, don't cache 0 because we
// can't react to setVisible in QCPAxis
return 0;
if( mCachedMarginValid )
return mCachedMargin;
// run through similar steps as QCPAxis::draw, and caluclate margin needed to
// fit axis and its labels
int margin = 0;
int lowTick, highTick;
visibleTickBounds( lowTick, highTick );
QVector<double> tickPositions; // the final coordToPixel transformed vector
// passed to QCPAxisPainter
QVector<QString> tickLabels; // the final vector passed to QCPAxisPainter
tickPositions.reserve( highTick - lowTick + 1 );
tickLabels.reserve( highTick - lowTick + 1 );
if( mTicks )
{
for( int i = lowTick; i <= highTick; ++i )
{
tickPositions.append( coordToPixel( mTickVector.at( i ) ) );
if( mTickLabels )
tickLabels.append( mTickVectorLabels.at( i ) );
}
}
// transfer all properties of this axis to QCPAxisPainterPrivate which it
// needs to calculate the size.
// Note that some axis painter properties are already set by direct
// feed-through with QCPAxis setters
mAxisPainter->type = mAxisType;
mAxisPainter->labelFont = getLabelFont();
mAxisPainter->label = mLabel;
mAxisPainter->tickLabelFont = mTickLabelFont;
mAxisPainter->alignmentRect = mAxisRect->rect();
mAxisPainter->viewportRect = mParentPlot->viewport();
mAxisPainter->tickPositions = tickPositions;
mAxisPainter->tickLabels = tickLabels;
margin += mAxisPainter->size();
margin += mPadding;
mCachedMargin = margin;
mCachedMarginValid = true;
return margin;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCP::Interaction QCPAxis::selectionCategory() const
{
return QCP::iSelectAxes;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAxisPainterPrivate
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPAxisPainterPrivate
\internal
\brief (Private)
This is a private class and not part of the public QCustomPlot interface.
It is used by QCPAxis to do the low-level drawing of axis backbone, tick
marks, tick labels and
axis label. It also buffers the labels to reduce replot times. The parameters
are configured by
directly accessing the public member variables.
*/
/*!
Constructs a QCPAxisPainterPrivate instance. Make sure to not create a new
instance on every
redraw, to utilize the caching mechanisms.
*/
QCPAxisPainterPrivate::QCPAxisPainterPrivate( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: type( QCPAxis::atLeft )
, basePen( QPen( Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap ) )
, lowerEnding( QCPLineEnding::esNone )
, upperEnding( QCPLineEnding::esNone )
, labelPadding( 0 )
, tickLabelPadding( 0 )
, tickLabelRotation( 0 )
, substituteExponent( true )
, numberMultiplyCross( false )
, tickLengthIn( 5 )
, tickLengthOut( 0 )
, subTickLengthIn( 2 )
, subTickLengthOut( 0 )
, tickPen( QPen( Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap ) )
, subTickPen( QPen( Qt::black, 0, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::SquareCap ) )
, offset( 0 )
, abbreviateDecimalPowers( false )
, reversedEndings( false )
, mParentPlot( parentPlot )
, mLabelCache( 16 ) // cache at most 16 (tick) labels
{
}
QCPAxisPainterPrivate::~QCPAxisPainterPrivate() {}
/*! \internal
Draws the axis with the specified \a painter.
The selection boxes (mAxisSelectionBox, mTickLabelsSelectionBox,
mLabelSelectionBox) are set
here, too.
*/
void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
QByteArray newHash = generateLabelParameterHash();
if( newHash != mLabelParameterHash )
{
mLabelCache.clear();
mLabelParameterHash = newHash;
}
QPoint origin;
switch( type )
{
case QCPAxis::atLeft:
origin = alignmentRect.bottomLeft() + QPoint( -offset, 0 );
break;
case QCPAxis::atRight:
origin = alignmentRect.bottomRight() + QPoint( +offset, 0 );
break;
case QCPAxis::atTop:
origin = alignmentRect.topLeft() + QPoint( 0, -offset );
break;
case QCPAxis::atBottom:
origin = alignmentRect.bottomLeft() + QPoint( 0, +offset );
break;
}
double xCor = 0, yCor = 0; // paint system correction, for pixel exact matches (affects
// baselines and ticks of top/right axes)
switch( type )
{
case QCPAxis::atTop:
yCor = -1;
break;
case QCPAxis::atRight:
xCor = 1;
break;
default:
break;
}
int margin = 0;
// draw baseline:
QLineF baseLine;
painter->setPen( basePen );
if( QCPAxis::orientation( type ) == Qt::Horizontal )
baseLine.setPoints( origin + QPointF( xCor, yCor ),
origin + QPointF( alignmentRect.width() + xCor, yCor ) );
else
baseLine.setPoints( origin + QPointF( xCor, yCor ),
origin + QPointF( xCor, -alignmentRect.height() + yCor ) );
if( reversedEndings )
baseLine = QLineF( baseLine.p2(), baseLine.p1() ); // won't make a difference
// for line itself, but for
// line endings later
painter->drawLine( baseLine );
// draw ticks:
if( !tickPositions.isEmpty() )
{
painter->setPen( tickPen );
int tickDir = ( type == QCPAxis::atBottom || type == QCPAxis::atRight )
? -1
: 1; // direction of ticks ("inward" is right for left
// axis and left for right axis)
if( QCPAxis::orientation( type ) == Qt::Horizontal )
{
for( int i = 0; i < tickPositions.size(); ++i )
painter->drawLine(
QLineF( tickPositions.at( i ) + xCor, origin.y() - tickLengthOut * tickDir + yCor,
tickPositions.at( i ) + xCor, origin.y() + tickLengthIn * tickDir + yCor ) );
}
else
{
for( int i = 0; i < tickPositions.size(); ++i )
painter->drawLine(
QLineF( origin.x() - tickLengthOut * tickDir + xCor, tickPositions.at( i ) + yCor,
origin.x() + tickLengthIn * tickDir + xCor, tickPositions.at( i ) + yCor ) );
}
}
// draw subticks:
if( !subTickPositions.isEmpty() )
{
painter->setPen( subTickPen );
// direction of ticks ("inward" is right for left axis and left for right
// axis)
int tickDir = ( type == QCPAxis::atBottom || type == QCPAxis::atRight ) ? -1 : 1;
if( QCPAxis::orientation( type ) == Qt::Horizontal )
{
for( int i = 0; i < subTickPositions.size(); ++i )
painter->drawLine( QLineF(
subTickPositions.at( i ) + xCor, origin.y() - subTickLengthOut * tickDir + yCor,
subTickPositions.at( i ) + xCor, origin.y() + subTickLengthIn * tickDir + yCor ) );
}
else
{
for( int i = 0; i < subTickPositions.size(); ++i )
painter->drawLine( QLineF(
origin.x() - subTickLengthOut * tickDir + xCor, subTickPositions.at( i ) + yCor,
origin.x() + subTickLengthIn * tickDir + xCor, subTickPositions.at( i ) + yCor ) );
}
}
margin += qMax( 0, qMax( tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut ) );
// draw axis base endings:
bool antialiasingBackup = painter->antialiasing();
painter->setAntialiasing( true ); // always want endings to be antialiased, even
// if base and ticks themselves aren't
painter->setBrush( QBrush( basePen.color() ) );
QVector2D baseLineVector( baseLine.dx(), baseLine.dy() );
if( lowerEnding.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone )
lowerEnding.draw( painter,
QVector2D( baseLine.p1() ) - baseLineVector.normalized() *
lowerEnding.realLength() *
( lowerEnding.inverted() ? -1 : 1 ),
-baseLineVector );
if( upperEnding.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone )
upperEnding.draw( painter,
QVector2D( baseLine.p2() ) + baseLineVector.normalized() *
upperEnding.realLength() *
( upperEnding.inverted() ? -1 : 1 ),
baseLineVector );
painter->setAntialiasing( antialiasingBackup );
// tick labels:
QSize tickLabelsSize( 0, 0 ); // size of largest tick label, for offset calculation of axis label
if( !tickLabels.isEmpty() )
{
margin += tickLabelPadding;
painter->setFont( tickLabelFont );
painter->setPen( QPen( tickLabelColor ) );
const int maxLabelIndex = qMin( tickPositions.size(), tickLabels.size() );
for( int i = 0; i < maxLabelIndex; ++i )
placeTickLabel( painter, tickPositions.at( i ), margin, tickLabels.at( i ), &tickLabelsSize );
if( QCPAxis::orientation( type ) == Qt::Horizontal )
margin += tickLabelsSize.height();
else
margin += tickLabelsSize.width();
}
// axis label:
QRect labelBounds;
if( !label.isEmpty() )
{
margin += labelPadding;
painter->setFont( labelFont );
painter->setPen( QPen( labelColor ) );
labelBounds = painter->fontMetrics().boundingRect( 0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, label );
if( type == QCPAxis::atLeft )
{
QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform();
painter->translate( ( origin.x() - margin - labelBounds.height() ), origin.y() );
painter->rotate( -90 );
painter->drawText( 0, 0, alignmentRect.height(), labelBounds.height(),
Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignCenter, label );
painter->setTransform( oldTransform );
}
else if( type == QCPAxis::atRight )
{
QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform();
painter->translate( ( origin.x() + margin + labelBounds.height() ),
origin.y() - alignmentRect.height() );
painter->rotate( 90 );
painter->drawText( 0, 0, alignmentRect.height(), labelBounds.height(),
Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignCenter, label );
painter->setTransform( oldTransform );
}
else if( type == QCPAxis::atTop )
painter->drawText( origin.x(), origin.y() - margin - labelBounds.height(),
alignmentRect.width(), labelBounds.height(),
Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignCenter, label );
else if( type == QCPAxis::atBottom )
painter->drawText( origin.x(), origin.y() + margin, alignmentRect.width(),
labelBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignCenter, label );
}
// set selection boxes:
int selectionTolerance = 0;
if( mParentPlot )
selectionTolerance = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance();
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "mParentPlot is null";
int selAxisOutSize = qMax( qMax( tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut ), selectionTolerance );
int selAxisInSize = selectionTolerance;
int selTickLabelSize =
( QCPAxis::orientation( type ) == Qt::Horizontal ? tickLabelsSize.height()
: tickLabelsSize.width() );
int selTickLabelOffset = qMax( tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut ) + tickLabelPadding;
int selLabelSize = labelBounds.height();
int selLabelOffset = selTickLabelOffset + selTickLabelSize + labelPadding;
if( type == QCPAxis::atLeft )
{
mAxisSelectionBox.setCoords( origin.x() - selAxisOutSize, alignmentRect.top(),
origin.x() + selAxisInSize, alignmentRect.bottom() );
mTickLabelsSelectionBox.setCoords( origin.x() - selTickLabelOffset - selTickLabelSize,
alignmentRect.top(), origin.x() - selTickLabelOffset,
alignmentRect.bottom() );
mLabelSelectionBox.setCoords( origin.x() - selLabelOffset - selLabelSize, alignmentRect.top(),
origin.x() - selLabelOffset, alignmentRect.bottom() );
}
else if( type == QCPAxis::atRight )
{
mAxisSelectionBox.setCoords( origin.x() - selAxisInSize, alignmentRect.top(),
origin.x() + selAxisOutSize, alignmentRect.bottom() );
mTickLabelsSelectionBox.setCoords( origin.x() + selTickLabelOffset + selTickLabelSize,
alignmentRect.top(), origin.x() + selTickLabelOffset,
alignmentRect.bottom() );
mLabelSelectionBox.setCoords( origin.x() + selLabelOffset + selLabelSize, alignmentRect.top(),
origin.x() + selLabelOffset, alignmentRect.bottom() );
}
else if( type == QCPAxis::atTop )
{
mAxisSelectionBox.setCoords( alignmentRect.left(), origin.y() - selAxisOutSize,
alignmentRect.right(), origin.y() + selAxisInSize );
mTickLabelsSelectionBox.setCoords( alignmentRect.left(),
origin.y() - selTickLabelOffset - selTickLabelSize,
alignmentRect.right(), origin.y() - selTickLabelOffset );
mLabelSelectionBox.setCoords( alignmentRect.left(), origin.y() - selLabelOffset - selLabelSize,
alignmentRect.right(), origin.y() - selLabelOffset );
}
else if( type == QCPAxis::atBottom )
{
mAxisSelectionBox.setCoords( alignmentRect.left(), origin.y() - selAxisInSize,
alignmentRect.right(), origin.y() + selAxisOutSize );
mTickLabelsSelectionBox.setCoords( alignmentRect.left(),
origin.y() + selTickLabelOffset + selTickLabelSize,
alignmentRect.right(), origin.y() + selTickLabelOffset );
mLabelSelectionBox.setCoords( alignmentRect.left(), origin.y() + selLabelOffset + selLabelSize,
alignmentRect.right(), origin.y() + selLabelOffset );
}
// draw hitboxes for debug purposes:
// painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
// painter->drawRects(QVector<QRect>() << mAxisSelectionBox <<
// mTickLabelsSelectionBox << mLabelSelectionBox);
}
/*! \internal
Returns the size ("margin" in QCPAxisRect context, so measured perpendicular
to the axis backbone
direction) needed to fit the axis.
*/
int QCPAxisPainterPrivate::size() const
{
int result = 0;
// get length of tick marks pointing outwards:
if( !tickPositions.isEmpty() )
result += qMax( 0, qMax( tickLengthOut, subTickLengthOut ) );
// calculate size of tick labels:
QSize tickLabelsSize( 0, 0 );
if( !tickLabels.isEmpty() )
{
for( int i = 0; i < tickLabels.size(); ++i )
getMaxTickLabelSize( tickLabelFont, tickLabels.at( i ), &tickLabelsSize );
result += QCPAxis::orientation( type ) == Qt::Horizontal ? tickLabelsSize.height()
: tickLabelsSize.width();
result += tickLabelPadding;
}
// calculate size of axis label (only height needed, because left/right labels
// are rotated by 90 degrees):
if( !label.isEmpty() )
{
QFontMetrics fontMetrics( labelFont );
QRect bounds;
bounds = fontMetrics.boundingRect(
0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignHCenter | Qt::AlignVCenter, label );
result += bounds.height() + labelPadding;
}
return result;
}
/*! \internal
Clears the internal label cache. Upon the next \ref draw, all labels will be
created new. This
method is called automatically in \ref draw, if any parameters have changed
that invalidate the
cached labels, such as font, color, etc.
*/
void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::clearCache()
{
mLabelCache.clear();
}
/*! \internal
Returns a hash that allows uniquely identifying whether the label parameters
have changed such
that the cached labels must be refreshed (\ref clearCache). It is used in \ref
draw. If the
return value of this method hasn't changed since the last redraw, the
respective label parameters
haven't changed and cached labels may be used.
*/
QByteArray QCPAxisPainterPrivate::generateLabelParameterHash() const
{
QByteArray result;
result.append( QByteArray::number( tickLabelRotation ) );
result.append( QByteArray::number( (int)substituteExponent ) );
result.append( QByteArray::number( (int)numberMultiplyCross ) );
result.append( tickLabelColor.name() + QByteArray::number( tickLabelColor.alpha(), 16 ) );
result.append( tickLabelFont.toString() );
return result;
}
/*! \internal
Draws a single tick label with the provided \a painter, utilizing the internal
label cache to
significantly speed up drawing of labels that were drawn in previous calls.
The tick label is
always bound to an axis, the distance to the axis is controllable via \a
distanceToAxis in
pixels. The pixel position in the axis direction is passed in the \a position
parameter. Hence
for the bottom axis, \a position would indicate the horizontal pixel position
(not coordinate),
at which the label should be drawn.
In order to later draw the axis label in a place that doesn't overlap with the
tick labels, the
largest tick label size is needed. This is acquired by passing a \a
tickLabelsSize to the \ref
drawTickLabel calls during the process of drawing all tick labels of one axis.
In every call, \a
tickLabelsSize is expanded, if the drawn label exceeds the value \a
tickLabelsSize currently
holds.
The label is drawn with the font and pen that are currently set on the \a
painter. To draw
superscripted powers, the font is temporarily made smaller by a fixed factor
(see \ref
getTickLabelData).
*/
void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::placeTickLabel( QCPPainter* painter,
double position,
int distanceToAxis,
const QString& text,
QSize* tickLabelsSize )
{
// warning: if you change anything here, also adapt getMaxTickLabelSize()
// accordingly!
if( text.isEmpty() )
return;
QSize finalSize;
QPointF labelAnchor;
switch( type )
{
case QCPAxis::atLeft:
labelAnchor = QPointF( alignmentRect.left() - distanceToAxis - offset, position );
break;
case QCPAxis::atRight:
labelAnchor = QPointF( alignmentRect.right() + distanceToAxis + offset, position );
break;
case QCPAxis::atTop:
labelAnchor = QPointF( position, alignmentRect.top() - distanceToAxis - offset );
break;
case QCPAxis::atBottom:
labelAnchor = QPointF( position, alignmentRect.bottom() + distanceToAxis + offset );
break;
}
if( mParentPlot->plottingHints().testFlag( QCP::phCacheLabels ) &&
!painter->modes().testFlag( QCPPainter::pmNoCaching ) ) // label caching enabled
{
if( !mLabelCache.contains( text ) ) // no cached label exists, create it
{
CachedLabel* newCachedLabel = new CachedLabel;
TickLabelData labelData = getTickLabelData( painter->font(), text );
QPointF drawOffset = getTickLabelDrawOffset( labelData );
newCachedLabel->offset = drawOffset + labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.topLeft();
newCachedLabel->pixmap = QPixmap( labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size() );
newCachedLabel->pixmap.fill( Qt::transparent );
QCPPainter cachePainter( &newCachedLabel->pixmap );
cachePainter.setPen( painter->pen() );
drawTickLabel( &cachePainter, -labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.topLeft().x(),
-labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.topLeft().y(), labelData );
mLabelCache.insert( text, newCachedLabel, 1 );
}
// draw cached label:
const CachedLabel* cachedLabel = mLabelCache.object( text );
// if label would be partly clipped by widget border on sides, don't draw
// it:
if( QCPAxis::orientation( type ) == Qt::Horizontal )
{
if( labelAnchor.x() + cachedLabel->offset.x() + cachedLabel->pixmap.width() >
viewportRect.right() ||
labelAnchor.x() + cachedLabel->offset.x() < viewportRect.left() )
return;
}
else
{
if( labelAnchor.y() + cachedLabel->offset.y() + cachedLabel->pixmap.height() >
viewportRect.bottom() ||
labelAnchor.y() + cachedLabel->offset.y() < viewportRect.top() )
return;
}
painter->drawPixmap( labelAnchor + cachedLabel->offset, cachedLabel->pixmap );
finalSize = cachedLabel->pixmap.size();
}
else // label caching disabled, draw text directly on surface:
{
TickLabelData labelData = getTickLabelData( painter->font(), text );
QPointF finalPosition = labelAnchor + getTickLabelDrawOffset( labelData );
// if label would be partly clipped by widget border on sides, don't draw
// it:
if( QCPAxis::orientation( type ) == Qt::Horizontal )
{
if( finalPosition.x() +
( labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.width() + labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.left() ) >
viewportRect.right() ||
finalPosition.x() + labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.left() < viewportRect.left() )
return;
}
else
{
if( finalPosition.y() +
( labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.height() + labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.top() ) >
viewportRect.bottom() ||
finalPosition.y() + labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.top() < viewportRect.top() )
return;
}
drawTickLabel( painter, finalPosition.x(), finalPosition.y(), labelData );
finalSize = labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size();
}
// expand passed tickLabelsSize if current tick label is larger:
if( finalSize.width() > tickLabelsSize->width() )
tickLabelsSize->setWidth( finalSize.width() );
if( finalSize.height() > tickLabelsSize->height() )
tickLabelsSize->setHeight( finalSize.height() );
}
/*! \internal
This is a \ref placeTickLabel helper function.
Draws the tick label specified in \a labelData with \a painter at the pixel
positions \a x and \a
y. This function is used by \ref placeTickLabel to create new tick labels for
the cache, or to
directly draw the labels on the QCustomPlot surface when label caching is
disabled, i.e. when
QCP::phCacheLabels plotting hint is not set.
*/
void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::drawTickLabel( QCPPainter* painter,
double x,
double y,
const TickLabelData& labelData ) const
{
// backup painter settings that we're about to change:
QTransform oldTransform = painter->transform();
QFont oldFont = painter->font();
// transform painter to position/rotation:
painter->translate( x, y );
if( !qFuzzyIsNull( tickLabelRotation ) )
painter->rotate( tickLabelRotation );
// draw text:
if( !labelData.expPart.isEmpty() ) // indicator that beautiful powers must be used
{
painter->setFont( labelData.baseFont );
painter->drawText( 0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, labelData.basePart );
painter->setFont( labelData.expFont );
painter->drawText( labelData.baseBounds.width() + 1, 0, labelData.expBounds.width(),
labelData.expBounds.height(), Qt::TextDontClip, labelData.expPart );
}
else
{
painter->setFont( labelData.baseFont );
painter->drawText( 0, 0, labelData.totalBounds.width(), labelData.totalBounds.height(),
Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignHCenter, labelData.basePart );
}
// reset painter settings to what it was before:
painter->setTransform( oldTransform );
painter->setFont( oldFont );
}
/*! \internal
This is a \ref placeTickLabel helper function.
Transforms the passed \a text and \a font to a tickLabelData structure that
can then be further
processed by \ref getTickLabelDrawOffset and \ref drawTickLabel. It splits the
text into base and
exponent if necessary (member substituteExponent) and calculates appropriate
bounding boxes.
*/
QCPAxisPainterPrivate::TickLabelData QCPAxisPainterPrivate::getTickLabelData(
const QFont& font,
const QString& text ) const
{
TickLabelData result;
// determine whether beautiful decimal powers should be used
bool useBeautifulPowers = false;
int ePos = -1;
if( substituteExponent )
{
ePos = text.indexOf( 'e' );
if( ePos > -1 )
useBeautifulPowers = true;
}
// calculate text bounding rects and do string preparation for beautiful
// decimal powers:
result.baseFont = font;
if( result.baseFont.pointSizeF() > 0 ) // On some rare systems, this sometimes
// is initialized with -1 (Qt bug?), so
// we check here before possibly setting a negative value in the next line
result.baseFont.setPointSizeF( result.baseFont.pointSizeF() +
0.05 ); // QFontMetrics.boundingRect has a bug for
// exact point sizes that make the results
// oscillate due to internal rounding
if( useBeautifulPowers )
{
// split text into parts of number/symbol that will be drawn normally and
// part that will be drawn as exponent:
result.basePart = text.left( ePos );
// in log scaling, we want to turn "1*10^n" into "10^n", else add
// multiplication sign and decimal base:
if( abbreviateDecimalPowers && result.basePart == "1" )
result.basePart = "10";
else
result.basePart +=
( numberMultiplyCross ? QString( QChar( 215 ) ) : QString( QChar( 183 ) ) ) + "10";
result.expPart = text.mid( ePos + 1 );
// clip "+" and leading zeros off expPart:
while( result.expPart.length() > 2 &&
result.expPart.at( 1 ) ==
'0' ) // length > 2 so we leave one zero when numberFormatChar is 'e'
result.expPart.remove( 1, 1 );
if( !result.expPart.isEmpty() && result.expPart.at( 0 ) == '+' )
result.expPart.remove( 0, 1 );
// prepare smaller font for exponent:
result.expFont = font;
result.expFont.setPointSize( result.expFont.pointSize() * 0.75 );
// calculate bounding rects of base part, exponent part and total one:
result.baseBounds = QFontMetrics( result.baseFont )
.boundingRect( 0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, result.basePart );
result.expBounds =
QFontMetrics( result.expFont ).boundingRect( 0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip, result.expPart );
result.totalBounds = result.baseBounds.adjusted(
0, 0, result.expBounds.width() + 2,
0 ); // +2 consists of the 1 pixel spacing between base and exponent (see
// drawTickLabel) and an extra pixel to include AA
}
else // useBeautifulPowers == false
{
result.basePart = text;
result.totalBounds =
QFontMetrics( result.baseFont )
.boundingRect( 0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip | Qt::AlignHCenter, result.basePart );
}
result.totalBounds.moveTopLeft(
QPoint( 0, 0 ) ); // want bounding box aligned top left at origin, independent of how
// it was created, to make further processing simpler
// calculate possibly different bounding rect after rotation:
result.rotatedTotalBounds = result.totalBounds;
if( !qFuzzyIsNull( tickLabelRotation ) )
{
QTransform transform;
transform.rotate( tickLabelRotation );
result.rotatedTotalBounds = transform.mapRect( result.rotatedTotalBounds );
}
return result;
}
/*! \internal
This is a \ref placeTickLabel helper function.
Calculates the offset at which the top left corner of the specified tick label
shall be drawn.
The offset is relative to a point right next to the tick the label belongs to.
This function is thus responsible for e.g. centering tick labels under ticks
and positioning them
appropriately when they are rotated.
*/
QPointF QCPAxisPainterPrivate::getTickLabelDrawOffset( const TickLabelData& labelData ) const
{
/*
calculate label offset from base point at tick (non-trivial, for best visual
appearance): short
explanation for bottom axis: The anchor, i.e. the point in the label that is
placed
horizontally under the corresponding tick is always on the label side that
is closer to the
axis (e.g. the left side of the text when we're rotating clockwise). On that
side, the height
is halved and the resulting point is defined the anchor. This way, a 90
degree rotated text
will be centered under the tick (i.e. displaced horizontally by half its
height). At the same
time, a 45 degree rotated text will "point toward" its tick, as is typical
for rotated tick
labels.
*/
bool doRotation = !qFuzzyIsNull( tickLabelRotation );
bool flip =
qFuzzyCompare( qAbs( tickLabelRotation ), 90.0 ); // perfect +/-90 degree flip. Indicates
// vertical label centering on vertical axes.
double radians = tickLabelRotation / 180.0 * M_PI;
int x = 0, y = 0;
if( type == QCPAxis::atLeft )
{
if( doRotation )
{
if( tickLabelRotation > 0 )
{
x = -qCos( radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.width();
y = flip ? -labelData.totalBounds.width() / 2.0
: -qSin( radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.width() -
qCos( radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.height() / 2.0;
}
else
{
x = -qCos( -radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.width() -
qSin( -radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.height();
y = flip ? +labelData.totalBounds.width() / 2.0
: +qSin( -radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.width() -
qCos( -radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.height() / 2.0;
}
}
else
{
x = -labelData.totalBounds.width();
y = -labelData.totalBounds.height() / 2.0;
}
}
else if( type == QCPAxis::atRight )
{
if( doRotation )
{
if( tickLabelRotation > 0 )
{
x = +qSin( radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.height();
y = flip ? -labelData.totalBounds.width() / 2.0
: -qCos( radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.height() / 2.0;
}
else
{
x = 0;
y = flip ? +labelData.totalBounds.width() / 2.0
: -qCos( -radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.height() / 2.0;
}
}
else
{
x = 0;
y = -labelData.totalBounds.height() / 2.0;
}
}
else if( type == QCPAxis::atTop )
{
if( doRotation )
{
if( tickLabelRotation > 0 )
{
x = -qCos( radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.width() +
qSin( radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.height() / 2.0;
y = -qSin( radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.width() -
qCos( radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.height();
}
else
{
x = -qSin( -radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.height() / 2.0;
y = -qCos( -radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.height();
}
}
else
{
x = -labelData.totalBounds.width() / 2.0;
y = -labelData.totalBounds.height();
}
}
else if( type == QCPAxis::atBottom )
{
if( doRotation )
{
if( tickLabelRotation > 0 )
{
x = +qSin( radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.height() / 2.0;
y = 0;
}
else
{
x = -qCos( -radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.width() -
qSin( -radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.height() / 2.0;
y = +qSin( -radians ) * labelData.totalBounds.width();
}
}
else
{
x = -labelData.totalBounds.width() / 2.0;
y = 0;
}
}
return QPointF( x, y );
}
/*! \internal
Simulates the steps done by \ref placeTickLabel by calculating bounding boxes
of the text label
to be drawn, depending on number format etc. Since only the largest tick label
is wanted for the
margin calculation, the passed \a tickLabelsSize is only expanded, if it's
currently set to a
smaller width/height.
*/
void QCPAxisPainterPrivate::getMaxTickLabelSize( const QFont& font,
const QString& text,
QSize* tickLabelsSize ) const
{
// note: this function must return the same tick label sizes as the
// placeTickLabel function.
QSize finalSize;
if( mParentPlot->plottingHints().testFlag( QCP::phCacheLabels ) &&
mLabelCache.contains( text ) ) // label caching enabled and have cached label
{
const CachedLabel* cachedLabel = mLabelCache.object( text );
finalSize = cachedLabel->pixmap.size();
}
else // label caching disabled or no label with this text cached:
{
TickLabelData labelData = getTickLabelData( font, text );
finalSize = labelData.rotatedTotalBounds.size();
}
// expand passed tickLabelsSize if current tick label is larger:
if( finalSize.width() > tickLabelsSize->width() )
tickLabelsSize->setWidth( finalSize.width() );
if( finalSize.height() > tickLabelsSize->height() )
tickLabelsSize->setHeight( finalSize.height() );
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAbstractPlottable
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPAbstractPlottable
\brief The abstract base class for all data representing objects in a plot.
It defines a very basic interface like name, pen, brush, visibility etc. Since
this class is
abstract, it can't be instantiated. Use one of the subclasses or create a
subclass yourself to
create new ways of displaying data (see "Creating own plottables" below).
All further specifics are in the subclasses, for example:
\li A normal graph with possibly a line, scatter points and error bars is
displayed by \ref QCPGraph
(typically created with \ref QCustomPlot::addGraph).
\li A parametric curve can be displayed with \ref QCPCurve.
\li A stackable bar chart can be achieved with \ref QCPBars.
\li A box of a statistical box plot is created with \ref QCPStatisticalBox.
\section plottables-subclassing Creating own plottables
To create an own plottable, you implement a subclass of QCPAbstractPlottable.
These are the pure
virtual functions, you must implement:
\li \ref clearData
\li \ref selectTest
\li \ref draw
\li \ref drawLegendIcon
\li \ref getKeyRange
\li \ref getValueRange
See the documentation of those functions for what they need to do.
For drawing your plot, you can use the \ref coordsToPixels functions to
translate a point in plot
coordinates to pixel coordinates. This function is quite convenient, because
it takes the
orientation of the key and value axes into account for you (x and y are
swapped when the key axis
is vertical and the value axis horizontal). If you are worried about
performance (i.e. you need
to translate many points in a loop like QCPGraph), you can directly use \ref
QCPAxis::coordToPixel. However, you must then take care about the orientation
of the axis
yourself.
Here are some important members you inherit from QCPAbstractPlottable:
<table>
<tr>
<td>QCustomPlot *\b mParentPlot</td>
<td>A pointer to the parent QCustomPlot instance. The parent plot is
inferred from the axes that are passed in the
constructor.</td>
</tr><tr>
<td>QString \b mName</td>
<td>The name of the plottable.</td>
</tr><tr>
<td>QPen \b mPen</td>
<td>The generic pen of the plottable. You should use this pen for the most
prominent data representing lines in the
plottable (e.g QCPGraph uses this pen for its graph lines and scatters)</td>
</tr><tr>
<td>QPen \b mSelectedPen</td>
<td>The generic pen that should be used when the plottable is selected
(hint: \ref mainPen gives you the right pen,
depending on selection state).</td>
</tr><tr>
<td>QBrush \b mBrush</td>
<td>The generic brush of the plottable. You should use this brush for the
most prominent fillable structures in the
plottable (e.g. QCPGraph uses this brush to control filling under the
graph)</td>
</tr><tr>
<td>QBrush \b mSelectedBrush</td>
<td>The generic brush that should be used when the plottable is selected
(hint: \ref mainBrush gives you the right
brush, depending on selection state).</td>
</tr><tr>
<td>QPointer<QCPAxis>\b mKeyAxis, \b mValueAxis</td>
<td>The key and value axes this plottable is attached to. Call their
QCPAxis::coordToPixel functions to translate
coordinates to pixels in either the key or value dimension.
Make sure to check whether the pointer is null before using it. If one
of the axes is null, don't draw the
plottable.</td>
</tr><tr>
<td>bool \b mSelected</td>
<td>indicates whether the plottable is selected or not.</td>
</tr>
</table>
*/
/* start of documentation of pure virtual functions */
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractPlottable::clearData() = 0
Clears all data in the plottable.
*/
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractPlottable::drawLegendIcon(QCPPainter *painter, const
QRect &rect) const = 0
\internal
called by QCPLegend::draw (via QCPPlottableLegendItem::draw) to create a
graphical representation
of this plottable inside \a rect, next to the plottable name.
*/
/*! \fn QCPRange QCPAbstractPlottable::getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, SignDomain
inSignDomain) const = 0
\internal
called by rescaleAxes functions to get the full data key bounds. For
logarithmic plots, one can
set \a inSignDomain to either \ref sdNegative or \ref sdPositive in order to
restrict the
returned range to that sign domain. E.g. when only negative range is wanted,
set \a inSignDomain
to \ref sdNegative and all positive points will be ignored for range
calculation. For no
restriction, just set \a inSignDomain to \ref sdBoth (default). \a foundRange
is an output
parameter that indicates whether a range could be found or not. If this is
false, you shouldn't
use the returned range (e.g. no points in data).
Note that \a foundRange is not the same as \ref QCPRange::validRange, since
the range returned by
this function may have size zero, which wouldn't count as a valid range.
\see rescaleAxes, getValueRange
*/
/*! \fn QCPRange QCPAbstractPlottable::getValueRange(bool &foundRange,
SignDomain inSignDomain) const = 0
\internal
called by rescaleAxes functions to get the full data value bounds. For
logarithmic plots, one can
set \a inSignDomain to either \ref sdNegative or \ref sdPositive in order to
restrict the
returned range to that sign domain. E.g. when only negative range is wanted,
set \a inSignDomain
to \ref sdNegative and all positive points will be ignored for range
calculation. For no
restriction, just set \a inSignDomain to \ref sdBoth (default). \a foundRange
is an output
parameter that indicates whether a range could be found or not. If this is
false, you shouldn't
use the returned range (e.g. no points in data).
Note that \a foundRange is not the same as \ref QCPRange::validRange, since
the range returned by
this function may have size zero, which wouldn't count as a valid range.
\see rescaleAxes, getKeyRange
*/
/* end of documentation of pure virtual functions */
/* start of documentation of signals */
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionChanged(bool selected)
This signal is emitted when the selection state of this plottable has changed,
either by user
interaction or by a direct call to \ref setSelected.
*/
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractPlottable::selectableChanged(bool selectable);
This signal is emitted when the selectability of this plottable has changed.
\see setSelectable
*/
/* end of documentation of signals */
/*!
Constructs an abstract plottable which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x")
and \a valueAxis as
its value axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same
QCustomPlot instance
and have perpendicular orientations. If either of these restrictions is
violated, a corresponding
message is printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not
aborted, though.
Since QCPAbstractPlottable is an abstract class that defines the basic
interface to plottables,
it can't be directly instantiated.
You probably want one of the subclasses like \ref QCPGraph or \ref QCPCurve
instead.
*/
QCPAbstractPlottable::QCPAbstractPlottable( QCPAxis* keyAxis, QCPAxis* valueAxis )
: QCPLayerable( keyAxis->parentPlot(), "", keyAxis->axisRect() )
, mName( "" )
, mAntialiasedFill( true )
, mAntialiasedScatters( true )
, mAntialiasedErrorBars( false )
, mPen( Qt::black )
, mSelectedPen( Qt::black )
, mBrush( Qt::NoBrush )
, mSelectedBrush( Qt::NoBrush )
, mKeyAxis( keyAxis )
, mValueAxis( valueAxis )
, mSelectable( true )
, mSelected( false )
{
if( keyAxis->parentPlot() != valueAxis->parentPlot() )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Parent plot of keyAxis is not the same as that of valueAxis.";
if( keyAxis->orientation() == valueAxis->orientation() )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "keyAxis and valueAxis must be orthogonal to each other.";
}
/*!
The name is the textual representation of this plottable as it is displayed
in the legend
(\ref QCPLegend). It may contain any UTF-8 characters, including newlines.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setName( const QString& name )
{
mName = name;
}
/*!
Sets whether fills of this plottable is drawn antialiased or not.
Note that this setting may be overridden by \ref
QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiasedFill( bool enabled )
{
mAntialiasedFill = enabled;
}
/*!
Sets whether the scatter symbols of this plottable are drawn antialiased or
not.
Note that this setting may be overridden by \ref
QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiasedScatters( bool enabled )
{
mAntialiasedScatters = enabled;
}
/*!
Sets whether the error bars of this plottable are drawn antialiased or not.
Note that this setting may be overridden by \ref
QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiasedErrorBars( bool enabled )
{
mAntialiasedErrorBars = enabled;
}
/*!
The pen is used to draw basic lines that make up the plottable representation
in the
plot.
For example, the \ref QCPGraph subclass draws its graph lines and scatter
points
with this pen.
\see setBrush
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mPen = pen;
}
/*!
When the plottable is selected, this pen is used to draw basic lines instead
of the normal
pen set via \ref setPen.
\see setSelected, setSelectable, setSelectedBrush, selectTest
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectedPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedPen = pen;
}
/*!
The brush is used to draw basic fills of the plottable representation in the
plot. The Fill can be a color, gradient or texture, see the usage of QBrush.
For example, the \ref QCPGraph subclass draws the fill under the graph with
this brush, when
it's not set to Qt::NoBrush.
\see setPen
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setBrush( const QBrush& brush )
{
mBrush = brush;
}
/*!
When the plottable is selected, this brush is used to draw fills instead of
the normal
brush set via \ref setBrush.
\see setSelected, setSelectable, setSelectedPen, selectTest
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectedBrush( const QBrush& brush )
{
mSelectedBrush = brush;
}
/*!
The key axis of a plottable can be set to any axis of a QCustomPlot, as long
as it is orthogonal
to the plottable's value axis. This function performs no checks to make sure
this is the case.
The typical mathematical choice is to use the x-axis (QCustomPlot::xAxis) as
key axis and the
y-axis (QCustomPlot::yAxis) as value axis.
Normally, the key and value axes are set in the constructor of the plottable
(or \ref
QCustomPlot::addGraph when working with QCPGraphs through the dedicated graph
interface).
\see setValueAxis
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setKeyAxis( QCPAxis* axis )
{
mKeyAxis = axis;
}
/*!
The value axis of a plottable can be set to any axis of a QCustomPlot, as long
as it is
orthogonal to the plottable's key axis. This function performs no checks to
make sure this is the
case. The typical mathematical choice is to use the x-axis
(QCustomPlot::xAxis) as key axis and
the y-axis (QCustomPlot::yAxis) as value axis.
Normally, the key and value axes are set in the constructor of the plottable
(or \ref
QCustomPlot::addGraph when working with QCPGraphs through the dedicated graph
interface).
\see setKeyAxis
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setValueAxis( QCPAxis* axis )
{
mValueAxis = axis;
}
/*!
Sets whether the user can (de-)select this plottable by clicking on the
QCustomPlot surface.
(When \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectPlottables.)
However, even when \a selectable was set to false, it is possible to set the
selection manually,
by calling \ref setSelected directly.
\see setSelected
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable( bool selectable )
{
if( mSelectable != selectable )
{
mSelectable = selectable;
emit selectableChanged( mSelectable );
}
}
/*!
Sets whether this plottable is selected or not. When selected, it uses a
different pen and brush
to draw its lines and fills, see \ref setSelectedPen and \ref
setSelectedBrush.
The entire selection mechanism for plottables is handled automatically when
\ref
QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains iSelectPlottables. You only need to call
this function when
you wish to change the selection state manually.
This function can change the selection state even when \ref setSelectable was
set to false.
emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the
previous selection state.
\see setSelectable, selectTest
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelected( bool selected )
{
if( mSelected != selected )
{
mSelected = selected;
emit selectionChanged( mSelected );
}
}
/*!
Rescales the key and value axes associated with this plottable to contain all
displayed data, so
the whole plottable is visible. If the scaling of an axis is logarithmic,
rescaleAxes will make
sure not to rescale to an illegal range i.e. a range containing different
signs and/or zero.
Instead it will stay in the current sign domain and ignore all parts of the
plottable that lie
outside of that domain.
\a onlyEnlarge makes sure the ranges are only expanded, never reduced. So it's
possible to show
multiple plottables in their entirety by multiple calls to rescaleAxes where
the first call has
\a onlyEnlarge set to false (the default), and all subsequent set to true.
\see rescaleKeyAxis, rescaleValueAxis, QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes,
QCPAxis::rescale
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleAxes( bool onlyEnlarge ) const
{
rescaleKeyAxis( onlyEnlarge );
rescaleValueAxis( onlyEnlarge );
}
/*!
Rescales the key axis of the plottable so the whole plottable is visible.
See \ref rescaleAxes for detailed behaviour.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleKeyAxis( bool onlyEnlarge ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis";
return;
}
SignDomain signDomain = sdBoth;
if( keyAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic )
signDomain = ( keyAxis->range().upper < 0 ? sdNegative : sdPositive );
bool foundRange;
QCPRange newRange = getKeyRange( foundRange, signDomain );
if( foundRange )
{
if( onlyEnlarge )
newRange.expand( keyAxis->range() );
if( !QCPRange::validRange( newRange ) ) // likely due to range being zero
// (plottable has only constant data in
// this
// axis dimension), shift current range to at least center the plottable
{
double center = ( newRange.lower + newRange.upper ) *
0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to
// make sure, incase validRange returned false for
// other reason
if( keyAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLinear )
{
newRange.lower = center - keyAxis->range().size() / 2.0;
newRange.upper = center + keyAxis->range().size() / 2.0;
}
else // scaleType() == stLogarithmic
{
newRange.lower = center / qSqrt( keyAxis->range().upper / keyAxis->range().lower );
newRange.upper = center * qSqrt( keyAxis->range().upper / keyAxis->range().lower );
}
}
keyAxis->setRange( newRange );
}
}
/*!
Rescales the value axis of the plottable so the whole plottable is visible.
Returns true if the axis was actually scaled. This might not be the case if
this plottable has an
invalid range, e.g. because it has no data points.
See \ref rescaleAxes for detailed behaviour.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleValueAxis( bool onlyEnlarge ) const
{
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid value axis";
return;
}
SignDomain signDomain = sdBoth;
if( valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic )
signDomain = ( valueAxis->range().upper < 0 ? sdNegative : sdPositive );
bool foundRange;
QCPRange newRange = getValueRange( foundRange, signDomain );
if( foundRange )
{
if( onlyEnlarge )
newRange.expand( valueAxis->range() );
if( !QCPRange::validRange( newRange ) ) // likely due to range being zero
// (plottable has only constant data in
// this
// axis dimension), shift current range to at least center the plottable
{
double center = ( newRange.lower + newRange.upper ) *
0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to
// make sure, incase validRange returned false for
// other reason
if( valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLinear )
{
newRange.lower = center - valueAxis->range().size() / 2.0;
newRange.upper = center + valueAxis->range().size() / 2.0;
}
else // scaleType() == stLogarithmic
{
newRange.lower = center / qSqrt( valueAxis->range().upper / valueAxis->range().lower );
newRange.upper = center * qSqrt( valueAxis->range().upper / valueAxis->range().lower );
}
}
valueAxis->setRange( newRange );
}
}
/*!
Adds this plottable to the legend of the parent QCustomPlot
(QCustomPlot::legend).
Normally, a QCPPlottableLegendItem is created and inserted into the legend. If
the plottable
needs a more specialized representation in the legend, this function will take
this into account
and instead create the specialized subclass of QCPAbstractLegendItem.
Returns true on success, i.e. when the legend exists and a legend item
associated with this plottable isn't already in
the legend.
\see removeFromLegend, QCPLegend::addItem
*/
bool QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend()
{
if( !mParentPlot || !mParentPlot->legend )
return false;
if( !mParentPlot->legend->hasItemWithPlottable( this ) )
{
mParentPlot->legend->addItem( new QCPPlottableLegendItem( mParentPlot->legend, this ) );
return true;
}
else
return false;
}
/*!
Removes the plottable from the legend of the parent QCustomPlot. This means
the
QCPAbstractLegendItem (usually a QCPPlottableLegendItem) that is associated
with this plottable
is removed.
Returns true on success, i.e. if the legend exists and a legend item
associated with this
plottable was found and removed.
\see addToLegend, QCPLegend::removeItem
*/
bool QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend() const
{
if( !mParentPlot->legend )
return false;
if( QCPPlottableLegendItem* lip = mParentPlot->legend->itemWithPlottable( this ) )
return mParentPlot->legend->removeItem( lip );
else
return false;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QRect QCPAbstractPlottable::clipRect() const
{
if( mKeyAxis && mValueAxis )
return mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect() & mValueAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect();
else
return QRect();
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCP::Interaction QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionCategory() const
{
return QCP::iSelectPlottables;
}
/*! \internal
Convenience function for transforming a key/value pair to pixels on the
QCustomPlot surface,
taking the orientations of the axes associated with this plottable into
account (e.g. whether key
represents x or y).
\a key and \a value are transformed to the coodinates in pixels and are
written to \a x and \a y.
\see pixelsToCoords, QCPAxis::coordToPixel
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::coordsToPixels( double key, double value, double& x, double& y ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
x = keyAxis->coordToPixel( key );
y = valueAxis->coordToPixel( value );
}
else
{
y = keyAxis->coordToPixel( key );
x = valueAxis->coordToPixel( value );
}
}
/*! \internal
\overload
Returns the input as pixel coordinates in a QPointF.
*/
const QPointF QCPAbstractPlottable::coordsToPixels( double key, double value ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return QPointF();
}
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
return QPointF( keyAxis->coordToPixel( key ), valueAxis->coordToPixel( value ) );
else
return QPointF( valueAxis->coordToPixel( value ), keyAxis->coordToPixel( key ) );
}
/*! \internal
Convenience function for transforming a x/y pixel pair on the QCustomPlot
surface to plot coordinates,
taking the orientations of the axes associated with this plottable into
account (e.g. whether key
represents x or y).
\a x and \a y are transformed to the plot coodinates and are written to \a key
and \a value.
\see coordsToPixels, QCPAxis::coordToPixel
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::pixelsToCoords( double x, double y, double& key, double& value ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
key = keyAxis->pixelToCoord( x );
value = valueAxis->pixelToCoord( y );
}
else
{
key = keyAxis->pixelToCoord( y );
value = valueAxis->pixelToCoord( x );
}
}
/*! \internal
\overload
Returns the pixel input \a pixelPos as plot coordinates \a key and \a value.
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::pixelsToCoords( const QPointF& pixelPos,
double& key,
double& value ) const
{
pixelsToCoords( pixelPos.x(), pixelPos.y(), key, value );
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines of the plottable.
Returns mPen when the
graph is not selected and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPAbstractPlottable::mainPen() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the brush that should be used for drawing fills of the plottable.
Returns mBrush when the
graph is not selected and mSelectedBrush when it is.
*/
QBrush QCPAbstractPlottable::mainBrush() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush;
}
/*! \internal
A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the
provided \a painter
before drawing plottable lines.
This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is
in by default.
This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as
well as the
overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
\see setAntialiased, applyFillAntialiasingHint, applyScattersAntialiasingHint,
applyErrorBarsAntialiasingHint
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
applyAntialiasingHint( painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aePlottables );
}
/*! \internal
A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the
provided \a painter
before drawing plottable fills.
This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as
well as the
overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
\see setAntialiased, applyDefaultAntialiasingHint,
applyScattersAntialiasingHint, applyErrorBarsAntialiasingHint
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::applyFillAntialiasingHint( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
applyAntialiasingHint( painter, mAntialiasedFill, QCP::aeFills );
}
/*! \internal
A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the
provided \a painter
before drawing plottable scatter points.
This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as
well as the
overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
\see setAntialiased, applyFillAntialiasingHint, applyDefaultAntialiasingHint,
applyErrorBarsAntialiasingHint
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::applyScattersAntialiasingHint( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
applyAntialiasingHint( painter, mAntialiasedScatters, QCP::aeScatters );
}
/*! \internal
A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the
provided \a painter
before drawing plottable error bars.
This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as
well as the
overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
\see setAntialiased, applyFillAntialiasingHint, applyScattersAntialiasingHint,
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint
*/
void QCPAbstractPlottable::applyErrorBarsAntialiasingHint( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
applyAntialiasingHint( painter, mAntialiasedErrorBars, QCP::aeErrorBars );
}
/*! \internal
Finds the shortest squared distance of \a point to the line segment defined by
\a start and \a
end.
This function may be used to help with the implementation of the \ref
selectTest function for
specific plottables.
\note This function is identical to QCPAbstractItem::distSqrToLine
*/
double QCPAbstractPlottable::distSqrToLine( const QPointF& start,
const QPointF& end,
const QPointF& point ) const
{
QVector2D a( start );
QVector2D b( end );
QVector2D p( point );
QVector2D v( b - a );
double vLengthSqr = v.lengthSquared();
if( !qFuzzyIsNull( vLengthSqr ) )
{
double mu = QVector2D::dotProduct( p - a, v ) / vLengthSqr;
if( mu < 0 )
return ( a - p ).lengthSquared();
else if( mu > 1 )
return ( b - p ).lengthSquared();
else
return ( ( a + mu * v ) - p ).lengthSquared();
}
else
return ( a - p ).lengthSquared();
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractPlottable::selectEvent( QMouseEvent* event,
bool additive,
const QVariant& details,
bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
Q_UNUSED( event )
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( mSelectable )
{
bool selBefore = mSelected;
setSelected( additive ? !mSelected : true );
if( selectionStateChanged )
*selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractPlottable::deselectEvent( bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
if( mSelectable )
{
bool selBefore = mSelected;
setSelected( false );
if( selectionStateChanged )
*selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
}
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemAnchor
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPItemAnchor
\brief An anchor of an item to which positions can be attached to.
An item (QCPAbstractItem) may have one or more anchors. Unlike
QCPItemPosition, an anchor doesn't
control anything on its item, but provides a way to tie other items via their
positions to the
anchor.
For example, a QCPItemRect is defined by its positions \a topLeft and \a
bottomRight.
Additionally it has various anchors like \a top, \a topRight or \a bottomLeft
etc. So you can
attach the \a start (which is a QCPItemPosition) of a QCPItemLine to one of
the anchors by
calling QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchor on \a start, passing the wanted
anchor of the
QCPItemRect. This way the start of the line will now always follow the
respective anchor location
on the rect item.
Note that QCPItemPosition derives from QCPItemAnchor, so every position can
also serve as an
anchor to other positions.
To learn how to provide anchors in your own item subclasses, see the
subclassing section of the
QCPAbstractItem documentation.
*/
/* start documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn virtual QCPItemPosition *QCPItemAnchor::toQCPItemPosition()
Returns 0 if this instance is merely a QCPItemAnchor, and a valid pointer of
type QCPItemPosition* if
it actually is a QCPItemPosition (which is a subclass of QCPItemAnchor).
This safe downcast functionality could also be achieved with a dynamic_cast.
However, QCustomPlot avoids
dynamic_cast to work with projects that don't have RTTI support enabled (e.g.
-fno-rtti flag with
gcc compiler).
*/
/* end documentation of inline functions */
/*!
Creates a new QCPItemAnchor. You shouldn't create QCPItemAnchor instances
directly, even if
you want to make a new item subclass. Use \ref QCPAbstractItem::createAnchor
instead, as
explained in the subclassing section of the QCPAbstractItem documentation.
*/
QCPItemAnchor::QCPItemAnchor( QCustomPlot* parentPlot,
QCPAbstractItem* parentItem,
const QString name,
int anchorId )
: mName( name ), mParentPlot( parentPlot ), mParentItem( parentItem ), mAnchorId( anchorId )
{
}
QCPItemAnchor::~QCPItemAnchor()
{
// unregister as parent at children:
QList<QCPItemPosition*> currentChildren( mChildren.toList() );
for( int i = 0; i < currentChildren.size(); ++i )
currentChildren.at( i )->setParentAnchor( 0 ); // this acts back on this anchor
// and child removes itself from
// mChildren
}
/*!
Returns the final absolute pixel position of the QCPItemAnchor on the
QCustomPlot surface.
The pixel information is internally retrieved via
QCPAbstractItem::anchorPixelPosition of the
parent item, QCPItemAnchor is just an intermediary.
*/
QPointF QCPItemAnchor::pixelPoint() const
{
if( mParentItem )
{
if( mAnchorId > -1 )
{
return mParentItem->anchorPixelPoint( mAnchorId );
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no valid anchor id set:" << mAnchorId;
return QPointF();
}
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "no parent item set";
return QPointF();
}
}
/*! \internal
Adds \a pos to the child list of this anchor. This is necessary to notify the
children prior to
destruction of the anchor.
Note that this function does not change the parent setting in \a pos.
*/
void QCPItemAnchor::addChild( QCPItemPosition* pos )
{
if( !mChildren.contains( pos ) )
mChildren.insert( pos );
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "provided pos is child already" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( pos );
}
/*! \internal
Removes \a pos from the child list of this anchor.
Note that this function does not change the parent setting in \a pos.
*/
void QCPItemAnchor::removeChild( QCPItemPosition* pos )
{
if( !mChildren.remove( pos ) )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "provided pos isn't child" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( pos );
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemPosition
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPItemPosition
\brief Manages the position of an item.
Every item has at least one public QCPItemPosition member pointer which
provides ways to position the
item on the QCustomPlot surface. Some items have multiple positions, for
example QCPItemRect has two:
\a topLeft and \a bottomRight.
QCPItemPosition has a type (\ref PositionType) that can be set with \ref
setType. This type defines
how coordinates passed to \ref setCoords are to be interpreted, e.g. as
absolute pixel coordinates, as
plot coordinates of certain axes, etc.
Further, QCPItemPosition may have a parent QCPItemAnchor, see \ref
setParentAnchor. (Note that every
QCPItemPosition inherits from QCPItemAnchor and thus can itself be used as
parent anchor for other
positions.) This way you can tie multiple items together. If the
QCPItemPosition has a parent, the
coordinates set with \ref setCoords are considered to be absolute values in
the reference frame of the
parent anchor, where (0, 0) means directly ontop of the parent anchor. For
example, You could attach
the \a start position of a QCPItemLine to the \a bottom anchor of a
QCPItemText to make the starting
point of the line always be centered under the text label, no matter where the
text is moved to, or is
itself tied to.
To set the apparent pixel position on the QCustomPlot surface directly, use
\ref setPixelPoint. This
works no matter what type this QCPItemPosition is or what parent-child
situation it is in, as \ref
setPixelPoint transforms the coordinates appropriately, to make the position
appear at the specified
pixel values.
*/
/*!
Creates a new QCPItemPosition. You shouldn't create QCPItemPosition instances
directly, even if
you want to make a new item subclass. Use \ref QCPAbstractItem::createPosition
instead, as
explained in the subclassing section of the QCPAbstractItem documentation.
*/
QCPItemPosition::QCPItemPosition( QCustomPlot* parentPlot,
QCPAbstractItem* parentItem,
const QString name )
: QCPItemAnchor( parentPlot, parentItem, name )
, mPositionType( ptAbsolute )
, mKey( 0 )
, mValue( 0 )
, mParentAnchor( 0 )
{
}
QCPItemPosition::~QCPItemPosition()
{
// unregister as parent at children:
// Note: this is done in ~QCPItemAnchor again, but it's important
// QCPItemPosition does it itself, because only then
// the setParentAnchor(0) call the correct QCPItemPosition::pixelPoint
// function instead of
// QCPItemAnchor::pixelPoint
QList<QCPItemPosition*> currentChildren( mChildren.toList() );
for( int i = 0; i < currentChildren.size(); ++i )
currentChildren.at( i )->setParentAnchor( 0 ); // this acts back on this anchor
// and child removes itself from
// mChildren
// unregister as child in parent:
if( mParentAnchor )
mParentAnchor->removeChild( this );
}
/* can't make this a header inline function, because QPointer breaks with
* forward declared types, see QTBUG-29588 */
QCPAxisRect* QCPItemPosition::axisRect() const
{
return mAxisRect.data();
}
/*!
Sets the type of the position. The type defines how the coordinates passed to
\ref setCoords
should be handled and how the QCPItemPosition should behave in the plot.
The possible values for \a type can be separated in two main categories:
\li The position is regarded as a point in plot coordinates. This corresponds
to \ref ptPlotCoords
and requires two axes that define the plot coordinate system. They can be
specified with \ref setAxes.
By default, the QCustomPlot's x- and yAxis are used.
\li The position is fixed on the QCustomPlot surface, i.e. independent of axis
ranges. This
corresponds to all other types, i.e. \ref ptAbsolute, \ref ptViewportRatio and
\ref
ptAxisRectRatio. They differ only in the way the absolute position is
described, see the
documentation of \ref PositionType for details. For \ref ptAxisRectRatio, note
that you can specify
the axis rect with \ref setAxisRect. By default this is set to the main axis
rect.
Note that the position type \ref ptPlotCoords is only available (and sensible)
when the position
has no parent anchor (\ref setParentAnchor).
If the type is changed, the apparent pixel position on the plot is preserved.
This means
the coordinates as retrieved with coords() and set with \ref setCoords may
change in the process.
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setType( QCPItemPosition::PositionType type )
{
if( mPositionType != type )
{
// if switching from or to coordinate type that isn't valid (e.g. because
// axes or axis rect
// were deleted), don't try to recover the pixelPoint() because it would
// output a qDebug warning.
bool recoverPixelPosition = true;
if( ( mPositionType == ptPlotCoords || type == ptPlotCoords ) && ( !mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis ) )
recoverPixelPosition = false;
if( ( mPositionType == ptAxisRectRatio || type == ptAxisRectRatio ) && ( !mAxisRect ) )
recoverPixelPosition = false;
QPointF pixelP;
if( recoverPixelPosition )
pixelP = pixelPoint();
mPositionType = type;
if( recoverPixelPosition )
setPixelPoint( pixelP );
}
}
/*!
Sets the parent of this QCPItemPosition to \a parentAnchor. This means the
position will now
follow any position changes of the anchor. The local coordinate system of
positions with a parent
anchor always is absolute with (0, 0) being exactly on top of the parent
anchor. (Hence the type
shouldn't be \ref ptPlotCoords for positions with parent anchors.)
if \a keepPixelPosition is true, the current pixel position of the
QCPItemPosition is preserved
during reparenting. If it's set to false, the coordinates are set to (0, 0),
i.e. the position
will be exactly on top of the parent anchor.
To remove this QCPItemPosition from any parent anchor, set \a parentAnchor to
0.
If the QCPItemPosition previously had no parent and the type is \ref
ptPlotCoords, the type is
set to \ref ptAbsolute, to keep the position in a valid state.
*/
bool QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchor( QCPItemAnchor* parentAnchor, bool keepPixelPosition )
{
// make sure self is not assigned as parent:
if( parentAnchor == this )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't set self as parent anchor"
<< reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( parentAnchor );
return false;
}
// make sure no recursive parent-child-relationships are created:
QCPItemAnchor* currentParent = parentAnchor;
while( currentParent )
{
if( QCPItemPosition* currentParentPos = currentParent->toQCPItemPosition() )
{
// is a QCPItemPosition, might have further parent, so keep iterating
if( currentParentPos == this )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't create recursive parent-child-relationship"
<< reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( parentAnchor );
return false;
}
currentParent = currentParentPos->mParentAnchor;
}
else
{
// is a QCPItemAnchor, can't have further parent. Now make sure the parent
// items aren't the
// same, to prevent a position being child of an anchor which itself
// depends on the position,
// because they're both on the same item:
if( currentParent->mParentItem == mParentItem )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "can't set parent to be an anchor which "
"itself depends on this position"
<< reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( parentAnchor );
return false;
}
break;
}
}
// if previously no parent set and PosType is still ptPlotCoords, set to
// ptAbsolute:
if( !mParentAnchor && mPositionType == ptPlotCoords )
setType( ptAbsolute );
// save pixel position:
QPointF pixelP;
if( keepPixelPosition )
pixelP = pixelPoint();
// unregister at current parent anchor:
if( mParentAnchor )
mParentAnchor->removeChild( this );
// register at new parent anchor:
if( parentAnchor )
parentAnchor->addChild( this );
mParentAnchor = parentAnchor;
// restore pixel position under new parent:
if( keepPixelPosition )
setPixelPoint( pixelP );
else
setCoords( 0, 0 );
return true;
}
/*!
Sets the coordinates of this QCPItemPosition. What the coordinates mean, is
defined by the type
(\ref setType).
For example, if the type is \ref ptAbsolute, \a key and \a value mean the x
and y pixel position
on the QCustomPlot surface. In that case the origin (0, 0) is in the top left
corner of the
QCustomPlot viewport. If the type is \ref ptPlotCoords, \a key and \a value
mean a point in the
plot coordinate system defined by the axes set by \ref setAxes. By default
those are the
QCustomPlot's xAxis and yAxis. See the documentation of \ref setType for other
available
coordinate types and their meaning.
\see setPixelPoint
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setCoords( double key, double value )
{
mKey = key;
mValue = value;
}
/*! \overload
Sets the coordinates as a QPointF \a pos where pos.x has the meaning of \a key
and pos.y the
meaning of \a value of the \ref setCoords(double key, double value) method.
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setCoords( const QPointF& pos )
{
setCoords( pos.x(), pos.y() );
}
/*!
Returns the final absolute pixel position of the QCPItemPosition on the
QCustomPlot surface. It
includes all effects of type (\ref setType) and possible parent anchors (\ref
setParentAnchor).
\see setPixelPoint
*/
QPointF QCPItemPosition::pixelPoint() const
{
switch( mPositionType )
{
case ptAbsolute:
{
if( mParentAnchor )
return QPointF( mKey, mValue ) + mParentAnchor->pixelPoint();
else
return QPointF( mKey, mValue );
}
case ptViewportRatio:
{
if( mParentAnchor )
{
return QPointF( mKey * mParentPlot->viewport().width(),
mValue * mParentPlot->viewport().height() ) +
mParentAnchor->pixelPoint();
}
else
{
return QPointF( mKey * mParentPlot->viewport().width(),
mValue * mParentPlot->viewport().height() ) +
mParentPlot->viewport().topLeft();
}
}
case ptAxisRectRatio:
{
if( mAxisRect )
{
if( mParentAnchor )
{
return QPointF( mKey * mAxisRect.data()->width(), mValue * mAxisRect.data()->height() ) +
mParentAnchor->pixelPoint();
}
else
{
return QPointF( mKey * mAxisRect.data()->width(), mValue * mAxisRect.data()->height() ) +
mAxisRect.data()->topLeft();
}
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "No axis rect defined";
return QPointF( mKey, mValue );
}
}
case ptPlotCoords:
{
double x, y;
if( mKeyAxis && mValueAxis )
{
// both key and value axis are given, translate key/value to x/y
// coordinates:
if( mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
x = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel( mKey );
y = mValueAxis.data()->coordToPixel( mValue );
}
else
{
y = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel( mKey );
x = mValueAxis.data()->coordToPixel( mValue );
}
}
else if( mKeyAxis )
{
// only key axis is given, depending on orientation only transform x or y
// to key coordinate, other stays pixel:
if( mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
x = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel( mKey );
y = mValue;
}
else
{
y = mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel( mKey );
x = mValue;
}
}
else if( mValueAxis )
{
// only value axis is given, depending on orientation only transform x or
// y to value coordinate, other stays
// pixel:
if( mValueAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
x = mValueAxis.data()->coordToPixel( mValue );
y = mKey;
}
else
{
y = mValueAxis.data()->coordToPixel( mValue );
x = mKey;
}
}
else
{
// no axis given, basically the same as if mPositionType were ptAbsolute
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "No axes defined";
x = mKey;
y = mValue;
}
return QPointF( x, y );
}
}
return QPointF();
}
/*!
When \ref setType is \ref ptPlotCoords, this function may be used to specify
the axes the
coordinates set with \ref setCoords relate to. By default they are set to the
initial xAxis and
yAxis of the QCustomPlot.
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setAxes( QCPAxis* keyAxis, QCPAxis* valueAxis )
{
mKeyAxis = keyAxis;
mValueAxis = valueAxis;
}
/*!
When \ref setType is \ref ptAxisRectRatio, this function may be used to
specify the axis rect the
coordinates set with \ref setCoords relate to. By default this is set to the
main axis rect of
the QCustomPlot.
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setAxisRect( QCPAxisRect* axisRect )
{
mAxisRect = axisRect;
}
/*!
Sets the apparent pixel position. This works no matter what type (\ref
setType) this
QCPItemPosition is or what parent-child situation it is in, as coordinates are
transformed
appropriately, to make the position finally appear at the specified pixel
values.
Only if the type is \ref ptAbsolute and no parent anchor is set, this
function's effect is
identical to that of \ref setCoords.
\see pixelPoint, setCoords
*/
void QCPItemPosition::setPixelPoint( const QPointF& pixelPoint )
{
switch( mPositionType )
{
case ptAbsolute:
{
if( mParentAnchor )
setCoords( pixelPoint - mParentAnchor->pixelPoint() );
else
setCoords( pixelPoint );
break;
}
case ptViewportRatio:
{
if( mParentAnchor )
{
QPointF p( pixelPoint - mParentAnchor->pixelPoint() );
p.rx() /= (double)mParentPlot->viewport().width();
p.ry() /= (double)mParentPlot->viewport().height();
setCoords( p );
}
else
{
QPointF p( pixelPoint - mParentPlot->viewport().topLeft() );
p.rx() /= (double)mParentPlot->viewport().width();
p.ry() /= (double)mParentPlot->viewport().height();
setCoords( p );
}
break;
}
case ptAxisRectRatio:
{
if( mAxisRect )
{
if( mParentAnchor )
{
QPointF p( pixelPoint - mParentAnchor->pixelPoint() );
p.rx() /= (double)mAxisRect.data()->width();
p.ry() /= (double)mAxisRect.data()->height();
setCoords( p );
}
else
{
QPointF p( pixelPoint - mAxisRect.data()->topLeft() );
p.rx() /= (double)mAxisRect.data()->width();
p.ry() /= (double)mAxisRect.data()->height();
setCoords( p );
}
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "No axis rect defined";
setCoords( pixelPoint );
}
break;
}
case ptPlotCoords:
{
double newKey, newValue;
if( mKeyAxis && mValueAxis )
{
// both key and value axis are given, translate point to key/value
// coordinates:
if( mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
newKey = mKeyAxis.data()->pixelToCoord( pixelPoint.x() );
newValue = mValueAxis.data()->pixelToCoord( pixelPoint.y() );
}
else
{
newKey = mKeyAxis.data()->pixelToCoord( pixelPoint.y() );
newValue = mValueAxis.data()->pixelToCoord( pixelPoint.x() );
}
}
else if( mKeyAxis )
{
// only key axis is given, depending on orientation only transform x or y
// to key coordinate, other stays pixel:
if( mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
newKey = mKeyAxis.data()->pixelToCoord( pixelPoint.x() );
newValue = pixelPoint.y();
}
else
{
newKey = mKeyAxis.data()->pixelToCoord( pixelPoint.y() );
newValue = pixelPoint.x();
}
}
else if( mValueAxis )
{
// only value axis is given, depending on orientation only transform x or
// y to value coordinate, other stays
// pixel:
if( mValueAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
newKey = pixelPoint.y();
newValue = mValueAxis.data()->pixelToCoord( pixelPoint.x() );
}
else
{
newKey = pixelPoint.x();
newValue = mValueAxis.data()->pixelToCoord( pixelPoint.y() );
}
}
else
{
// no axis given, basically the same as if mPositionType were ptAbsolute
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "No axes defined";
newKey = pixelPoint.x();
newValue = pixelPoint.y();
}
setCoords( newKey, newValue );
break;
}
}
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAbstractItem
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPAbstractItem
\brief The abstract base class for all items in a plot.
In QCustomPlot, items are supplemental graphical elements that are neither
plottables
(QCPAbstractPlottable) nor axes (QCPAxis). While plottables are always tied to
two axes and thus
plot coordinates, items can also be placed in absolute coordinates independent
of any axes. Each
specific item has at least one QCPItemPosition member which controls the
positioning. Some items
are defined by more than one coordinate and thus have two or more
QCPItemPosition members (For
example, QCPItemRect has \a topLeft and \a bottomRight).
This abstract base class defines a very basic interface like visibility and
clipping. Since this
class is abstract, it can't be instantiated. Use one of the subclasses or
create a subclass
yourself to create new items.
The built-in items are:
<table>
<tr><td>QCPItemLine</td><td>A line defined by a start and an end point. May
have different ending styles on each side
(e.g. arrows).</td></tr>
<tr><td>QCPItemStraightLine</td><td>A straight line defined by a start and a
direction point. Unlike QCPItemLine, the
straight line is infinitely long and has no endings.</td></tr>
<tr><td>QCPItemCurve</td><td>A curve defined by start, end and two
intermediate control points. May have different
ending styles on each side (e.g. arrows).</td></tr>
<tr><td>QCPItemRect</td><td>A rectangle</td></tr>
<tr><td>QCPItemEllipse</td><td>An ellipse</td></tr>
<tr><td>QCPItemPixmap</td><td>An arbitrary pixmap</td></tr>
<tr><td>QCPItemText</td><td>A text label</td></tr>
<tr><td>QCPItemBracket</td><td>A bracket which may be used to
reference/highlight certain parts in the plot.</td></tr>
<tr><td>QCPItemTracer</td><td>An item that can be attached to a QCPGraph and
sticks to its data points, given a key
coordinate.</td></tr>
</table>
Items are by default clipped to the main axis rect. To make an item visible
outside that axis
rect, disable clipping via \ref setClipToAxisRect.
\section items-using Using items
First you instantiate the item you want to use and add it to the plot:
\code
QCPItemLine *line = new QCPItemLine(customPlot);
customPlot->addItem(line);
\endcode
by default, the positions of the item are bound to the x- and y-Axis of the
plot. So we can just
set the plot coordinates where the line should start/end:
\code
line->start->setCoords(-0.1, 0.8);
line->end->setCoords(1.1, 0.2);
\endcode
If we don't want the line to be positioned in plot coordinates but a different
coordinate system,
e.g. absolute pixel positions on the QCustomPlot surface, we need to change
the position type like this:
\code
line->start->setType(QCPItemPosition::ptAbsolute);
line->end->setType(QCPItemPosition::ptAbsolute);
\endcode
Then we can set the coordinates, this time in pixels:
\code
line->start->setCoords(100, 200);
line->end->setCoords(450, 320);
\endcode
\section items-subclassing Creating own items
To create an own item, you implement a subclass of QCPAbstractItem. These are
the pure
virtual functions, you must implement:
\li \ref selectTest
\li \ref draw
See the documentation of those functions for what they need to do.
\subsection items-positioning Allowing the item to be positioned
As mentioned, item positions are represented by QCPItemPosition members. Let's
assume the new item shall
have only one point as its position (as opposed to two like a rect or multiple
like a polygon). You then add
a public member of type QCPItemPosition like so:
\code QCPItemPosition * const myPosition;\endcode
the const makes sure the pointer itself can't be modified from the user of
your new item (the QCPItemPosition
instance it points to, can be modified, of course).
The initialization of this pointer is made easy with the \ref createPosition
function. Just assign
the return value of this function to each QCPItemPosition in the constructor
of your item. \ref createPosition
takes a string which is the name of the position, typically this is identical
to the variable name.
For example, the constructor of QCPItemExample could look like this:
\code
QCPItemExample::QCPItemExample(QCustomPlot *parentPlot) :
QCPAbstractItem(parentPlot),
myPosition(createPosition("myPosition"))
{
// other constructor code
}
\endcode
\subsection items-drawing The draw function
To give your item a visual representation, reimplement the \ref draw function
and use the passed
QCPPainter to draw the item. You can retrieve the item position in pixel
coordinates from the
position member(s) via \ref QCPItemPosition::pixelPoint.
To optimize performance you should calculate a bounding rect first (don't
forget to take the pen
width into account), check whether it intersects the \ref clipRect, and only
draw the item at all
if this is the case.
\subsection items-selection The selectTest function
Your implementation of the \ref selectTest function may use the helpers \ref
distSqrToLine and
\ref rectSelectTest. With these, the implementation of the selection test
becomes significantly
simpler for most items. See the documentation of \ref selectTest for what the
function parameters
mean and what the function should return.
\subsection anchors Providing anchors
Providing anchors (QCPItemAnchor) starts off like adding a position. First you
create a public
member, e.g.
\code QCPItemAnchor * const bottom;\endcode
and create it in the constructor with the \ref createAnchor function,
assigning it a name and an
anchor id (an integer enumerating all anchors on the item, you may create an
own enum for this).
Since anchors can be placed anywhere, relative to the item's position(s), your
item needs to
provide the position of every anchor with the reimplementation of the \ref
anchorPixelPoint(int
anchorId) function.
In essence the QCPItemAnchor is merely an intermediary that itself asks your
item for the pixel
position when anything attached to the anchor needs to know the coordinates.
*/
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn QList<QCPItemPosition*> QCPAbstractItem::positions() const
Returns all positions of the item in a list.
\see anchors, position
*/
/*! \fn QList<QCPItemAnchor*> QCPAbstractItem::anchors() const
Returns all anchors of the item in a list. Note that since a position
(QCPItemPosition) is always
also an anchor, the list will also contain the positions of this item.
\see positions, anchor
*/
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
/* start documentation of pure virtual functions */
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractItem::draw(QCPPainter *painter) = 0
\internal
Draws this item with the provided \a painter.
The cliprect of the provided painter is set to the rect returned by \ref
clipRect before this
function is called. The clipRect depends on the clipping settings defined by
\ref
setClipToAxisRect and \ref setClipAxisRect.
*/
/* end documentation of pure virtual functions */
/* start documentation of signals */
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractItem::selectionChanged(bool selected)
This signal is emitted when the selection state of this item has changed,
either by user interaction
or by a direct call to \ref setSelected.
*/
/* end documentation of signals */
/*!
Base class constructor which initializes base class members.
*/
QCPAbstractItem::QCPAbstractItem( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QCPLayerable( parentPlot ), mClipToAxisRect( false ), mSelectable( true ), mSelected( false )
{
QList<QCPAxisRect*> rects = parentPlot->axisRects();
if( rects.size() > 0 )
{
setClipToAxisRect( true );
setClipAxisRect( rects.first() );
}
}
QCPAbstractItem::~QCPAbstractItem()
{
// don't delete mPositions because every position is also an anchor and thus
// in mAnchors
qDeleteAll( mAnchors );
}
/* can't make this a header inline function, because QPointer breaks with
* forward declared types, see QTBUG-29588 */
QCPAxisRect* QCPAbstractItem::clipAxisRect() const
{
return mClipAxisRect.data();
}
/*!
Sets whether the item shall be clipped to an axis rect or whether it shall be
visible on the
entire QCustomPlot. The axis rect can be set with \ref setClipAxisRect.
\see setClipAxisRect
*/
void QCPAbstractItem::setClipToAxisRect( bool clip )
{
mClipToAxisRect = clip;
if( mClipToAxisRect )
setParentLayerable( mClipAxisRect.data() );
}
/*!
Sets the clip axis rect. It defines the rect that will be used to clip the
item when \ref
setClipToAxisRect is set to true.
\see setClipToAxisRect
*/
void QCPAbstractItem::setClipAxisRect( QCPAxisRect* rect )
{
mClipAxisRect = rect;
if( mClipToAxisRect )
setParentLayerable( mClipAxisRect.data() );
}
/*!
Sets whether the user can (de-)select this item by clicking on the QCustomPlot
surface.
(When \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains QCustomPlot::iSelectItems.)
However, even when \a selectable was set to false, it is possible to set the
selection manually,
by calling \ref setSelected.
\see QCustomPlot::setInteractions, setSelected
*/
void QCPAbstractItem::setSelectable( bool selectable )
{
if( mSelectable != selectable )
{
mSelectable = selectable;
emit selectableChanged( mSelectable );
}
}
/*!
Sets whether this item is selected or not. When selected, it might use a
different visual
appearance (e.g. pen and brush), this depends on the specific item though.
The entire selection mechanism for items is handled automatically when \ref
QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains QCustomPlot::iSelectItems. You only need
to call this
function when you wish to change the selection state manually.
This function can change the selection state even when \ref setSelectable was
set to false.
emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the
previous selection state.
\see setSelectable, selectTest
*/
void QCPAbstractItem::setSelected( bool selected )
{
if( mSelected != selected )
{
mSelected = selected;
emit selectionChanged( mSelected );
}
}
/*!
Returns the QCPItemPosition with the specified \a name. If this item doesn't
have a position by
that name, returns 0.
This function provides an alternative way to access item positions. Normally,
you access
positions direcly by their member pointers (which typically have the same
variable name as \a
name).
\see positions, anchor
*/
QCPItemPosition* QCPAbstractItem::position( const QString& name ) const
{
for( int i = 0; i < mPositions.size(); ++i )
{
if( mPositions.at( i )->name() == name )
return mPositions.at( i );
}
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "position with name not found:" << name;
return 0;
}
/*!
Returns the QCPItemAnchor with the specified \a name. If this item doesn't
have an anchor by
that name, returns 0.
This function provides an alternative way to access item anchors. Normally,
you access
anchors direcly by their member pointers (which typically have the same
variable name as \a
name).
\see anchors, position
*/
QCPItemAnchor* QCPAbstractItem::anchor( const QString& name ) const
{
for( int i = 0; i < mAnchors.size(); ++i )
{
if( mAnchors.at( i )->name() == name )
return mAnchors.at( i );
}
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "anchor with name not found:" << name;
return 0;
}
/*!
Returns whether this item has an anchor with the specified \a name.
Note that you can check for positions with this function, too. This is because
every position is
also an anchor (QCPItemPosition inherits from QCPItemAnchor).
\see anchor, position
*/
bool QCPAbstractItem::hasAnchor( const QString& name ) const
{
for( int i = 0; i < mAnchors.size(); ++i )
{
if( mAnchors.at( i )->name() == name )
return true;
}
return false;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the rect the visual representation of this item is clipped to. This
depends on the
current setting of \ref setClipToAxisRect as well as the axis rect set with
\ref setClipAxisRect.
If the item is not clipped to an axis rect, the \ref QCustomPlot::viewport
rect is returned.
\see draw
*/
QRect QCPAbstractItem::clipRect() const
{
if( mClipToAxisRect && mClipAxisRect )
return mClipAxisRect.data()->rect();
else
return mParentPlot->viewport();
}
/*! \internal
A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the
provided \a painter
before drawing item lines.
This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is
in by default.
This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as
well as the
overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
\see setAntialiased
*/
void QCPAbstractItem::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
applyAntialiasingHint( painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeItems );
}
/*! \internal
Finds the shortest squared distance of \a point to the line segment defined by
\a start and \a
end.
This function may be used to help with the implementation of the \ref
selectTest function for
specific items.
\note This function is identical to QCPAbstractPlottable::distSqrToLine
\see rectSelectTest
*/
double QCPAbstractItem::distSqrToLine( const QPointF& start,
const QPointF& end,
const QPointF& point ) const
{
QVector2D a( start );
QVector2D b( end );
QVector2D p( point );
QVector2D v( b - a );
double vLengthSqr = v.lengthSquared();
if( !qFuzzyIsNull( vLengthSqr ) )
{
double mu = QVector2D::dotProduct( p - a, v ) / vLengthSqr;
if( mu < 0 )
return ( a - p ).lengthSquared();
else if( mu > 1 )
return ( b - p ).lengthSquared();
else
return ( ( a + mu * v ) - p ).lengthSquared();
}
else
return ( a - p ).lengthSquared();
}
/*! \internal
A convenience function which returns the selectTest value for a specified \a
rect and a specified
click position \a pos. \a filledRect defines whether a click inside the rect
should also be
considered a hit or whether only the rect border is sensitive to hits.
This function may be used to help with the implementation of the \ref
selectTest function for
specific items.
For example, if your item consists of four rects, call this function four
times, once for each
rect, in your \ref selectTest reimplementation. Finally, return the minimum of
all four returned
values which were greater or equal to zero. (Because this function may return
-1.0 when \a pos
doesn't hit \a rect at all). If all calls returned -1.0, return -1.0, too,
because your item
wasn't hit.
\see distSqrToLine
*/
double QCPAbstractItem::rectSelectTest( const QRectF& rect,
const QPointF& pos,
bool filledRect ) const
{
double result = -1;
// distance to border:
QList<QLineF> lines;
lines << QLineF( rect.topLeft(), rect.topRight() )
<< QLineF( rect.bottomLeft(), rect.bottomRight() )
<< QLineF( rect.topLeft(), rect.bottomLeft() )
<< QLineF( rect.topRight(), rect.bottomRight() );
double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits<double>::max();
for( int i = 0; i < lines.size(); ++i )
{
double distSqr = distSqrToLine( lines.at( i ).p1(), lines.at( i ).p2(), pos );
if( distSqr < minDistSqr )
minDistSqr = distSqr;
}
result = qSqrt( minDistSqr );
// filled rect, allow click inside to count as hit:
if( filledRect && result > mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99 )
{
if( rect.contains( pos ) )
result = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99;
}
return result;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pixel position of the anchor with Id \a anchorId. This function
must be reimplemented in
item subclasses if they want to provide anchors (QCPItemAnchor).
For example, if the item has two anchors with id 0 and 1, this function takes
one of these anchor
ids and returns the respective pixel points of the specified anchor.
\see createAnchor
*/
QPointF QCPAbstractItem::anchorPixelPoint( int anchorId ) const
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "called on item which shouldn't have any anchors "
"(this method not reimplemented). anchorId"
<< anchorId;
return QPointF();
}
/*! \internal
Creates a QCPItemPosition, registers it with this item and returns a pointer
to it. The specified
\a name must be a unique string that is usually identical to the variable name
of the position
member (This is needed to provide the name-based \ref position access to
positions).
Don't delete positions created by this function manually, as the item will
take care of it.
Use this function in the constructor (initialization list) of the specific
item subclass to
create each position member. Don't create QCPItemPositions with \b new
yourself, because they
won't be registered with the item properly.
\see createAnchor
*/
QCPItemPosition* QCPAbstractItem::createPosition( const QString& name )
{
if( hasAnchor( name ) )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "anchor/position with name exists already:" << name;
QCPItemPosition* newPosition = new QCPItemPosition( mParentPlot, this, name );
mPositions.append( newPosition );
mAnchors.append( newPosition ); // every position is also an anchor
newPosition->setAxes( mParentPlot->xAxis, mParentPlot->yAxis );
newPosition->setType( QCPItemPosition::ptPlotCoords );
if( mParentPlot->axisRect() )
newPosition->setAxisRect( mParentPlot->axisRect() );
newPosition->setCoords( 0, 0 );
return newPosition;
}
/*! \internal
Creates a QCPItemAnchor, registers it with this item and returns a pointer to
it. The specified
\a name must be a unique string that is usually identical to the variable name
of the anchor
member (This is needed to provide the name based \ref anchor access to
anchors).
The \a anchorId must be a number identifying the created anchor. It is
recommended to create an
enum (e.g. "AnchorIndex") for this on each item that uses anchors. This id is
used by the anchor
to identify itself when it calls QCPAbstractItem::anchorPixelPoint. That
function then returns
the correct pixel coordinates for the passed anchor id.
Don't delete anchors created by this function manually, as the item will take
care of it.
Use this function in the constructor (initialization list) of the specific
item subclass to
create each anchor member. Don't create QCPItemAnchors with \b new yourself,
because then they
won't be registered with the item properly.
\see createPosition
*/
QCPItemAnchor* QCPAbstractItem::createAnchor( const QString& name, int anchorId )
{
if( hasAnchor( name ) )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "anchor/position with name exists already:" << name;
QCPItemAnchor* newAnchor = new QCPItemAnchor( mParentPlot, this, name, anchorId );
mAnchors.append( newAnchor );
return newAnchor;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractItem::selectEvent( QMouseEvent* event,
bool additive,
const QVariant& details,
bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
Q_UNUSED( event )
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( mSelectable )
{
bool selBefore = mSelected;
setSelected( additive ? !mSelected : true );
if( selectionStateChanged )
*selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractItem::deselectEvent( bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
if( mSelectable )
{
bool selBefore = mSelected;
setSelected( false );
if( selectionStateChanged )
*selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCP::Interaction QCPAbstractItem::selectionCategory() const
{
return QCP::iSelectItems;
}
/*! \file */
/*! \mainpage %QCustomPlot 1.2.1 Documentation
\image html qcp-doc-logo.png
Below is a brief overview of and guide to the classes and their relations. If
you are new to
QCustomPlot and just want to start using it, it's recommended to look at the
tutorials and
examples at
http://www.qcustomplot.com/
This documentation is especially helpful as a reference, when you're familiar
with the basic
concept of how to use %QCustomPlot and you wish to learn more about specific
functionality.
See the \ref classoverview "class overview" for diagrams explaining the
relationships between
the most important classes of the QCustomPlot library.
The central widget which displays the plottables and axes on its surface is
QCustomPlot. Every
QCustomPlot contains four axes by default. They can be accessed via the
members \ref
QCustomPlot::xAxis "xAxis", \ref QCustomPlot::yAxis "yAxis", \ref
QCustomPlot::xAxis2 "xAxis2"
and \ref QCustomPlot::yAxis2 "yAxis2", and are of type QCPAxis. QCustomPlot
supports an arbitrary
number of axes and axis rects, see the documentation of QCPAxisRect for
details.
\section mainpage-plottables Plottables
\a Plottables are classes that display any kind of data inside the
QCustomPlot. They all derive
from QCPAbstractPlottable. For example, the QCPGraph class is a plottable that
displays a graph
inside the plot with different line styles, scatter styles, filling etc.
Since plotting graphs is such a dominant use case, QCustomPlot has a special
interface for working
with QCPGraph plottables, that makes it very easy to handle them:\n
You create a new graph with QCustomPlot::addGraph and access them with
QCustomPlot::graph.
For all other plottables, you need to use the normal plottable interface:\n
First, you create an instance of the plottable you want, e.g.
\code
QCPCurve *newCurve = new QCPCurve(customPlot->xAxis,
customPlot->yAxis);\endcode
add it to the customPlot:
\code
customPlot->addPlottable(newCurve);\endcode
and then modify the properties of the newly created plottable via the
<tt>newCurve</tt> pointer.
Plottables (including graphs) can be retrieved via QCustomPlot::plottable.
Since the return type
of that function is the abstract base class of all plottables,
QCPAbstractPlottable, you will
probably want to qobject_cast the returned pointer to the respective plottable
subclass. (As
usual, if the cast returns zero, the plottable wasn't of that specific
subclass.)
All further interfacing with plottables (e.g how to set data) is specific to
the plottable type.
See the documentations of the subclasses: QCPGraph, QCPCurve, QCPBars,
QCPStatisticalBox,
QCPColorMap.
\section mainpage-axes Controlling the Axes
As mentioned, QCustomPlot has four axes by default: \a xAxis (bottom), \a
yAxis (left), \a xAxis2
(top), \a yAxis2 (right).
Their range is handled by the simple QCPRange class. You can set the range
with the
QCPAxis::setRange function. By default, the axes represent a linear scale. To
set a logarithmic
scale, set \ref QCPAxis::setScaleType to \ref QCPAxis::stLogarithmic. The
logarithm base can be set freely
with \ref QCPAxis::setScaleLogBase.
By default, an axis automatically creates and labels ticks in a sensible
manner. See the
following functions for tick manipulation:\n QCPAxis::setTicks,
QCPAxis::setAutoTicks,
QCPAxis::setAutoTickCount, QCPAxis::setAutoTickStep, QCPAxis::setTickLabels,
QCPAxis::setTickLabelType, QCPAxis::setTickLabelRotation,
QCPAxis::setTickStep,
QCPAxis::setTickLength,...
Each axis can be given an axis label (e.g. "Voltage (mV)") with
QCPAxis::setLabel.
The distance of an axis backbone to the respective viewport border is called
its margin.
Normally, the margins are calculated automatically. To change this, set
\ref QCPAxisRect::setAutoMargins to exclude the respective margin sides, set
the margins manually with
\ref QCPAxisRect::setMargins. The main axis rect can be reached with \ref
QCustomPlot::axisRect().
\section mainpage-legend Plot Legend
Every QCustomPlot has one QCPLegend (as \ref QCustomPlot::legend) by default.
A legend is a small
layout element inside the plot which lists the plottables with an icon of the
plottable
line/symbol and a name (QCPAbstractPlottable::setName). Plottables can be
added and removed from
the main legend via \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend and \ref
QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend. By default, adding a plottable to
QCustomPlot
automatically adds it to the legend, too. This behaviour can be modified with
the
QCustomPlot::setAutoAddPlottableToLegend property.
The QCPLegend provides an interface to access, add and remove legend items
directly, too. See
QCPLegend::item, QCPLegend::itemWithPlottable, QCPLegend::addItem,
QCPLegend::removeItem for
example.
Multiple legends are supported via the \link thelayoutsystem layout
system\endlink (as a
QCPLegend simply is a normal layout element).
\section mainpage-userinteraction User Interactions
QCustomPlot supports dragging axis ranges with the mouse (\ref
QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag), zooming axis ranges with the mouse wheel (\ref
QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoom) and a complete selection mechanism.
The availability of these interactions is controlled with \ref
QCustomPlot::setInteractions. For
details about the interaction system, see the documentation there.
Further, QCustomPlot always emits corresponding signals, when objects are
clicked or
doubleClicked. See \ref QCustomPlot::plottableClick, \ref
QCustomPlot::plottableDoubleClick
and \ref QCustomPlot::axisClick for example.
\section mainpage-items Items
Apart from plottables there is another category of plot objects that are
important: Items. The
base class of all items is QCPAbstractItem. An item sets itself apart from
plottables in that
it's not necessarily bound to any axes. This means it may also be positioned
in absolute pixel
coordinates or placed at a relative position on an axis rect. Further, it
usually doesn't
represent data directly, but acts as decoration, emphasis, description etc.
Multiple items can be arranged in a parent-child-hierarchy allowing for
dynamical behaviour. For
example, you could place the head of an arrow at a fixed plot coordinate, so
it always points to
some important area in the plot. The tail of the arrow can be anchored to a
text item which
always resides in the top center of the axis rect, independent of where the
user drags the axis
ranges. This way the arrow stretches and turns so it always points from the
label to the
specified plot coordinate, without any further code necessary.
For a more detailed introduction, see the QCPAbstractItem documentation, and
from there the
documentations of the individual built-in items, to find out how to use them.
\section mainpage-layoutelements Layout elements and layouts
QCustomPlot uses an internal layout system to provide dynamic sizing and
positioning of objects like
the axis rect(s), legends and the plot title. They are all based on \ref
QCPLayoutElement and are arranged by
placing them inside a \ref QCPLayout.
Details on this topic are given on the dedicated page about \link
thelayoutsystem the layout system\endlink.
\section mainpage-performancetweaks Performance Tweaks
Although QCustomPlot is quite fast, some features like translucent fills,
antialiasing and thick
lines can cause a significant slow down. If you notice this in your
application, here are some
thoughts on how to increase performance. By far the most time is spent in the
drawing functions,
specifically the drawing of graphs. For maximum performance, consider the
following (most
recommended/effective measures first):
\li use Qt 4.8.0 and up. Performance has doubled or tripled with respect to Qt
4.7.4. However
QPainter was broken and drawing pixel precise things, e.g. scatters, isn't
possible with Qt >=
4.8.0. So it's a performance vs. plot quality tradeoff when switching to Qt
4.8.
\li To increase responsiveness during dragging, consider setting \ref
QCustomPlot::setNoAntialiasingOnDrag to true.
\li On X11 (GNU/Linux), avoid the slow native drawing system, use raster by
supplying
"-graphicssystem raster" as command line argument or calling
QApplication::setGraphicsSystem("raster")
before creating the QApplication object. (Only available for Qt versions
before 5.0)
\li On all operating systems, use OpenGL hardware acceleration by supplying
"-graphicssystem
opengl" as command line argument or calling
QApplication::setGraphicsSystem("opengl") (Only
available for Qt versions before 5.0). If OpenGL is available, this will
slightly decrease the
quality of antialiasing, but extremely increase performance especially with
alpha
(semi-transparent) fills, much antialiasing and a large QCustomPlot drawing
surface. Note
however, that the maximum frame rate might be constrained by the vertical sync
frequency of your
monitor (VSync can be disabled in the graphics card driver configuration). So
for simple plots
(where the potential framerate is far above 60 frames per second), OpenGL
acceleration might
achieve numerically lower frame rates than the other graphics systems, because
they are not
capped at the VSync frequency.
\li Avoid any kind of alpha (transparency), especially in fills
\li Avoid lines with a pen width greater than one
\li Avoid any kind of antialiasing, especially in graph lines (see \ref
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements)
\li Avoid repeatedly setting the complete data set with \ref
QCPGraph::setData. Use \ref QCPGraph::addData instead, if
most
data points stay unchanged, e.g. in a running measurement.
\li Set the \a copy parameter of the setData functions to false, so only
pointers get
transferred. (Relevant only if preparing data maps with a large number of
points, i.e. over 10000)
\section mainpage-flags Preprocessor Define Flags
QCustomPlot understands some preprocessor defines that are useful for
debugging and compilation:
<dl>
<dt>\c QCUSTOMPLOT_COMPILE_LIBRARY
<dd>Define this flag when you compile QCustomPlot as a shared library
(.so/.dll)
<dt>\c QCUSTOMPLOT_USE_LIBRARY
<dd>Define this flag before including the header, when using QCustomPlot as a
shared library
<dt>\c QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA
<dd>If this flag is defined, the QCustomPlot plottables will perform data
validity checks on every redraw.
This means they will give qDebug output when you plot \e inf or \e nan
values, they will not
fix your data.
</dl>
*/
/*! \page classoverview Class Overview
The following diagrams may help to gain a deeper understanding of the
relationships between classes that make up
the QCustomPlot library. The diagrams are not exhaustive, so only the classes
deemed most relevant are shown.
\section classoverview-relations Class Relationship Diagram
\image html RelationOverview.png "Overview of most important classes and their
relations"
\section classoverview-inheritance Class Inheritance Tree
\image html InheritanceOverview.png "Inheritance tree of most important
classes"
*/
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCustomPlot
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCustomPlot
\brief The central class of the library. This is the QWidget which displays
the plot and
interacts with the user.
For tutorials on how to use QCustomPlot, see the website\n
http://www.qcustomplot.com/
*/
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn QRect QCustomPlot::viewport() const
Returns the viewport rect of this QCustomPlot instance. The viewport is the
area the plot is
drawn in, all mechanisms, e.g. margin caluclation take the viewport to be the
outer border of the
plot. The viewport normally is the rect() of the QCustomPlot widget, i.e. a
rect with top left
(0, 0) and size of the QCustomPlot widget.
Don't confuse the viewport with the axis rect (QCustomPlot::axisRect). An axis
rect is typically
an area enclosed by four axes, where the graphs/plottables are drawn in. The
viewport is larger
and contains also the axes themselves, their tick numbers, their labels, the
plot title etc.
Only when saving to a file (see \ref savePng, savePdf etc.) the viewport is
temporarily modified
to allow saving plots with sizes independent of the current widget size.
*/
/*! \fn QCPLayoutGrid *QCustomPlot::plotLayout() const
Returns the top level layout of this QCustomPlot instance. It is a \ref
QCPLayoutGrid, initially containing just
one cell with the main QCPAxisRect inside.
*/
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
/* start of documentation of signals */
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mouseDoubleClick(QMouseEvent *event)
This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse double click
event.
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mousePress(QMouseEvent *event)
This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse press event.
It is emitted before QCustomPlot handles any other mechanism like range
dragging. So a slot
connected to this signal can still influence the behaviour e.g. with \ref
QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag or \ref
QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes.
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mouseMove(QMouseEvent *event)
This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse move event.
It is emitted before QCustomPlot handles any other mechanism like range
dragging. So a slot
connected to this signal can still influence the behaviour e.g. with \ref
QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag or \ref
QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes.
\warning It is discouraged to change the drag-axes with \ref
QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes here,
because the dragging starting point was saved the moment the mouse was
pressed. Thus it only has
a meaning for the range drag axes that were set at that moment. If you want to
change the drag
axes, consider doing this in the \ref mousePress signal instead.
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mouseRelease(QMouseEvent *event)
This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse release event.
It is emitted before QCustomPlot handles any other mechanisms like object
selection. So a
slot connected to this signal can still influence the behaviour e.g. with \ref
setInteractions or
\ref QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable.
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::mouseWheel(QMouseEvent *event)
This signal is emitted when the QCustomPlot receives a mouse wheel event.
It is emitted before QCustomPlot handles any other mechanisms like range
zooming. So a slot
connected to this signal can still influence the behaviour e.g. with \ref
QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoom, \ref
QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes or \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomFactor.
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::plottableClick(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable,
QMouseEvent *event)
This signal is emitted when a plottable is clicked.
\a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a plottable is the
plottable that received
the click.
\see plottableDoubleClick
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::plottableDoubleClick(QCPAbstractPlottable *plottable,
QMouseEvent *event)
This signal is emitted when a plottable is double clicked.
\a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a plottable is the
plottable that received
the click.
\see plottableClick
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::itemClick(QCPAbstractItem *item, QMouseEvent *event)
This signal is emitted when an item is clicked.
\a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a item is the item that
received the
click.
\see itemDoubleClick
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::itemDoubleClick(QCPAbstractItem *item, QMouseEvent
*event)
This signal is emitted when an item is double clicked.
\a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a item is the item that
received the
click.
\see itemClick
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::axisClick(QCPAxis *axis, QCPAxis::SelectablePart part,
QMouseEvent *event)
This signal is emitted when an axis is clicked.
\a event is the mouse event that caused the click, \a axis is the axis that
received the click and
\a part indicates the part of the axis that was clicked.
\see axisDoubleClick
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::axisDoubleClick(QCPAxis *axis, QCPAxis::SelectablePart
part, QMouseEvent *event)
This signal is emitted when an axis is double clicked.
\a event is the mouse event that caused the click, \a axis is the axis that
received the click and
\a part indicates the part of the axis that was clicked.
\see axisClick
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::legendClick(QCPLegend *legend, QCPAbstractLegendItem
*item, QMouseEvent *event)
This signal is emitted when a legend (item) is clicked.
\a event is the mouse event that caused the click, \a legend is the legend
that received the
click and \a item is the legend item that received the click. If only the
legend and no item is
clicked, \a item is 0. This happens for a click inside the legend padding or
the space between
two items.
\see legendDoubleClick
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::legendDoubleClick(QCPLegend *legend,
QCPAbstractLegendItem *item, QMouseEvent *event)
This signal is emitted when a legend (item) is double clicked.
\a event is the mouse event that caused the click, \a legend is the legend
that received the
click and \a item is the legend item that received the click. If only the
legend and no item is
clicked, \a item is 0. This happens for a click inside the legend padding or
the space between
two items.
\see legendClick
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot:: titleClick(QMouseEvent *event, QCPPlotTitle *title)
This signal is emitted when a plot title is clicked.
\a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a title is the plot
title that received
the click.
\see titleDoubleClick
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::titleDoubleClick(QMouseEvent *event, QCPPlotTitle
*title)
This signal is emitted when a plot title is double clicked.
\a event is the mouse event that caused the click and \a title is the plot
title that received
the click.
\see titleClick
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::selectionChangedByUser()
This signal is emitted after the user has changed the selection in the
QCustomPlot, e.g. by
clicking. It is not emitted when the selection state of an object has changed
programmatically by
a direct call to setSelected() on an object or by calling \ref deselectAll.
In addition to this signal, selectable objects also provide individual
signals, for example
QCPAxis::selectionChanged or QCPAbstractPlottable::selectionChanged. Note that
those signals are
emitted even if the selection state is changed programmatically.
See the documentation of \ref setInteractions for details about the selection
mechanism.
\see selectedPlottables, selectedGraphs, selectedItems, selectedAxes,
selectedLegends
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::beforeReplot()
This signal is emitted immediately before a replot takes place (caused by a
call to the slot \ref
replot).
It is safe to mutually connect the replot slot with this signal on two
QCustomPlots to make them
replot synchronously, it won't cause an infinite recursion.
\see replot, afterReplot
*/
/*! \fn void QCustomPlot::afterReplot()
This signal is emitted immediately after a replot has taken place (caused by a
call to the slot \ref
replot).
It is safe to mutually connect the replot slot with this signal on two
QCustomPlots to make them
replot synchronously, it won't cause an infinite recursion.
\see replot, beforeReplot
*/
/* end of documentation of signals */
/* start of documentation of public members */
/*! \var QCPAxis *QCustomPlot::xAxis
A pointer to the primary x Axis (bottom) of the main axis rect of the plot.
QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis,
\ref xAxis2, \ref
yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that
only have a single
axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link
thelayoutsystem the
layout system\endlink to add multiple axis rects or multiple axes to one side,
use the \ref
QCPAxisRect::axis interface to access the new axes. If one of the four default
axes or the
default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by
removing the main
axis rect), the corresponding pointers become 0.
*/
/*! \var QCPAxis *QCustomPlot::yAxis
A pointer to the primary y Axis (left) of the main axis rect of the plot.
QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis,
\ref xAxis2, \ref
yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that
only have a single
axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link
thelayoutsystem the
layout system\endlink to add multiple axis rects or multiple axes to one side,
use the \ref
QCPAxisRect::axis interface to access the new axes. If one of the four default
axes or the
default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by
removing the main
axis rect), the corresponding pointers become 0.
*/
/*! \var QCPAxis *QCustomPlot::xAxis2
A pointer to the secondary x Axis (top) of the main axis rect of the plot.
Secondary axes are
invisible by default. Use QCPAxis::setVisible to change this (or use \ref
QCPAxisRect::setupFullAxesBox).
QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis,
\ref xAxis2, \ref
yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that
only have a single
axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link
thelayoutsystem the
layout system\endlink to add multiple axis rects or multiple axes to one side,
use the \ref
QCPAxisRect::axis interface to access the new axes. If one of the four default
axes or the
default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by
removing the main
axis rect), the corresponding pointers become 0.
*/
/*! \var QCPAxis *QCustomPlot::yAxis2
A pointer to the secondary y Axis (right) of the main axis rect of the plot.
Secondary axes are
invisible by default. Use QCPAxis::setVisible to change this (or use \ref
QCPAxisRect::setupFullAxesBox).
QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis,
\ref xAxis2, \ref
yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that
only have a single
axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link
thelayoutsystem the
layout system\endlink to add multiple axis rects or multiple axes to one side,
use the \ref
QCPAxisRect::axis interface to access the new axes. If one of the four default
axes or the
default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g. by
removing the main
axis rect), the corresponding pointers become 0.
*/
/*! \var QCPLegend *QCustomPlot::legend
A pointer to the default legend of the main axis rect. The legend is invisible
by default. Use
QCPLegend::setVisible to change this.
QCustomPlot offers convenient pointers to the axes (\ref xAxis, \ref yAxis,
\ref xAxis2, \ref
yAxis2) and the \ref legend. They make it very easy working with plots that
only have a single
axis rect and at most one axis at each axis rect side. If you use \link
thelayoutsystem the
layout system\endlink to add multiple legends to the plot, use the layout
system interface to
access the new legend. For example, legends can be placed inside an axis
rect's \ref
QCPAxisRect::insetLayout "inset layout", and must then also be accessed via
the inset layout. If
the default legend is removed due to manipulation of the layout system (e.g.
by removing the main
axis rect), the corresponding pointer becomes 0.
*/
/* end of documentation of public members */
/*!
Constructs a QCustomPlot and sets reasonable default values.
*/
QCustomPlot::QCustomPlot( QWidget* parent )
: QWidget( parent )
, xAxis( 0 )
, yAxis( 0 )
, xAxis2( 0 )
, yAxis2( 0 )
, legend( 0 )
, mPlotLayout( 0 )
, mAutoAddPlottableToLegend( true )
, mAntialiasedElements( QCP::aeNone )
, mNotAntialiasedElements( QCP::aeNone )
, mInteractions( 0 )
, mSelectionTolerance( 8 )
, mNoAntialiasingOnDrag( false )
, mBackgroundBrush( Qt::white, Qt::SolidPattern )
, mBackgroundScaled( true )
, mBackgroundScaledMode( Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding )
, mCurrentLayer( 0 )
, mPlottingHints( QCP::phCacheLabels | QCP::phForceRepaint )
, mMultiSelectModifier( Qt::ControlModifier )
, mPaintBuffer( size() )
, mMouseEventElement( 0 )
, mReplotting( false )
{
setAttribute( Qt::WA_NoMousePropagation );
setAttribute( Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent );
setMouseTracking( true );
QLocale currentLocale = locale();
currentLocale.setNumberOptions( QLocale::OmitGroupSeparator );
setLocale( currentLocale );
// create initial layers:
mLayers.append( new QCPLayer( this, "background" ) );
mLayers.append( new QCPLayer( this, "grid" ) );
mLayers.append( new QCPLayer( this, "main" ) );
mLayers.append( new QCPLayer( this, "axes" ) );
mLayers.append( new QCPLayer( this, "legend" ) );
updateLayerIndices();
setCurrentLayer( "main" );
// create initial layout, axis rect and legend:
mPlotLayout = new QCPLayoutGrid;
mPlotLayout->initializeParentPlot( this );
mPlotLayout->setParent( this ); // important because if parent is QWidget,
// QCPLayout::sizeConstraintsChanged will
// call QWidget::updateGeometry
mPlotLayout->setLayer( "main" );
QCPAxisRect* defaultAxisRect = new QCPAxisRect( this, true );
mPlotLayout->addElement( 0, 0, defaultAxisRect );
xAxis = defaultAxisRect->axis( QCPAxis::atBottom );
yAxis = defaultAxisRect->axis( QCPAxis::atLeft );
xAxis2 = defaultAxisRect->axis( QCPAxis::atTop );
yAxis2 = defaultAxisRect->axis( QCPAxis::atRight );
legend = new QCPLegend;
legend->setVisible( false );
defaultAxisRect->insetLayout()->addElement( legend, Qt::AlignRight | Qt::AlignTop );
defaultAxisRect->insetLayout()->setMargins( QMargins( 12, 12, 12, 12 ) );
defaultAxisRect->setLayer( "background" );
xAxis->setLayer( "axes" );
yAxis->setLayer( "axes" );
xAxis2->setLayer( "axes" );
yAxis2->setLayer( "axes" );
xAxis->grid()->setLayer( "grid" );
yAxis->grid()->setLayer( "grid" );
xAxis2->grid()->setLayer( "grid" );
yAxis2->grid()->setLayer( "grid" );
legend->setLayer( "legend" );
setViewport( rect() ); // needs to be called after mPlotLayout has been created
replot();
}
QCustomPlot::~QCustomPlot()
{
clearPlottables();
clearItems();
if( mPlotLayout )
{
delete mPlotLayout;
mPlotLayout = 0;
}
mCurrentLayer = 0;
qDeleteAll( mLayers ); // don't use removeLayer, because it would prevent the
// last layer to be removed
mLayers.clear();
}
/*!
Sets which elements are forcibly drawn antialiased as an \a or combination of
QCP::AntialiasedElement.
This overrides the antialiasing settings for whole element groups, normally
controlled with the
\a setAntialiasing function on the individual elements. If an element is
neither specified in
\ref setAntialiasedElements nor in \ref setNotAntialiasedElements, the
antialiasing setting on
each individual element instance is used.
For example, if \a antialiasedElements contains \ref QCP::aePlottables, all
plottables will be
drawn antialiased, no matter what the specific
QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiased value was set
to.
if an element in \a antialiasedElements is already set in \ref
setNotAntialiasedElements, it is
removed from there.
\see setNotAntialiasedElements
*/
void QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements( const QCP::AntialiasedElements& antialiasedElements )
{
mAntialiasedElements = antialiasedElements;
// make sure elements aren't in mNotAntialiasedElements and
// mAntialiasedElements simultaneously:
if( ( mNotAntialiasedElements & mAntialiasedElements ) != 0 )
mNotAntialiasedElements |= ~mAntialiasedElements;
}
/*!
Sets whether the specified \a antialiasedElement is forcibly drawn
antialiased.
See \ref setAntialiasedElements for details.
\see setNotAntialiasedElement
*/
void QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElement( QCP::AntialiasedElement antialiasedElement, bool enabled )
{
if( !enabled && mAntialiasedElements.testFlag( antialiasedElement ) )
mAntialiasedElements &= ~antialiasedElement;
else if( enabled && !mAntialiasedElements.testFlag( antialiasedElement ) )
mAntialiasedElements |= antialiasedElement;
// make sure elements aren't in mNotAntialiasedElements and
// mAntialiasedElements simultaneously:
if( ( mNotAntialiasedElements & mAntialiasedElements ) != 0 )
mNotAntialiasedElements |= ~mAntialiasedElements;
}
/*!
Sets which elements are forcibly drawn not antialiased as an \a or combination
of
QCP::AntialiasedElement.
This overrides the antialiasing settings for whole element groups, normally
controlled with the
\a setAntialiasing function on the individual elements. If an element is
neither specified in
\ref setAntialiasedElements nor in \ref setNotAntialiasedElements, the
antialiasing setting on
each individual element instance is used.
For example, if \a notAntialiasedElements contains \ref QCP::aePlottables, no
plottables will be
drawn antialiased, no matter what the specific
QCPAbstractPlottable::setAntialiased value was set
to.
if an element in \a notAntialiasedElements is already set in \ref
setAntialiasedElements, it is
removed from there.
\see setAntialiasedElements
*/
void QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements(
const QCP::AntialiasedElements& notAntialiasedElements )
{
mNotAntialiasedElements = notAntialiasedElements;
// make sure elements aren't in mNotAntialiasedElements and
// mAntialiasedElements simultaneously:
if( ( mNotAntialiasedElements & mAntialiasedElements ) != 0 )
mAntialiasedElements |= ~mNotAntialiasedElements;
}
/*!
Sets whether the specified \a notAntialiasedElement is forcibly drawn not
antialiased.
See \ref setNotAntialiasedElements for details.
\see setAntialiasedElement
*/
void QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElement( QCP::AntialiasedElement notAntialiasedElement,
bool enabled )
{
if( !enabled && mNotAntialiasedElements.testFlag( notAntialiasedElement ) )
mNotAntialiasedElements &= ~notAntialiasedElement;
else if( enabled && !mNotAntialiasedElements.testFlag( notAntialiasedElement ) )
mNotAntialiasedElements |= notAntialiasedElement;
// make sure elements aren't in mNotAntialiasedElements and
// mAntialiasedElements simultaneously:
if( ( mNotAntialiasedElements & mAntialiasedElements ) != 0 )
mAntialiasedElements |= ~mNotAntialiasedElements;
}
/*!
If set to true, adding a plottable (e.g. a graph) to the QCustomPlot
automatically also adds the
plottable to the legend (QCustomPlot::legend).
\see addPlottable, addGraph, QCPLegend::addItem
*/
void QCustomPlot::setAutoAddPlottableToLegend( bool on )
{
mAutoAddPlottableToLegend = on;
}
/*!
Sets the possible interactions of this QCustomPlot as an or-combination of
\ref QCP::Interaction
enums. There are the following types of interactions:
<b>Axis range manipulation</b> is controlled via \ref QCP::iRangeDrag and \ref
QCP::iRangeZoom. When the
respective interaction is enabled, the user may drag axes ranges and zoom with
the mouse wheel.
For details how to control which axes the user may drag/zoom and in what
orientations, see \ref
QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag, \ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoom, \ref
QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes,
\ref QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes.
<b>Plottable selection</b> is controlled by \ref QCP::iSelectPlottables. If
\ref QCP::iSelectPlottables is
set, the user may select plottables (graphs, curves, bars,...) by clicking on
them or in their
vicinity (\ref setSelectionTolerance). Whether the user can actually select a
plottable can
further be restricted with the \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable
function on the specific
plottable. To find out whether a specific plottable is selected, call
QCPAbstractPlottable::selected(). To retrieve a list of all currently selected
plottables, call
\ref selectedPlottables. If you're only interested in QCPGraphs, you may use
the convenience
function \ref selectedGraphs.
<b>Item selection</b> is controlled by \ref QCP::iSelectItems. If \ref
QCP::iSelectItems is set, the user
may select items (QCPItemLine, QCPItemText,...) by clicking on them or in
their vicinity. To find
out whether a specific item is selected, call QCPAbstractItem::selected(). To
retrieve a list of
all currently selected items, call \ref selectedItems.
<b>Axis selection</b> is controlled with \ref QCP::iSelectAxes. If \ref
QCP::iSelectAxes is set, the user
may select parts of the axes by clicking on them. What parts exactly (e.g.
Axis base line, tick
labels, axis label) are selectable can be controlled via \ref
QCPAxis::setSelectableParts for
each axis. To retrieve a list of all axes that currently contain selected
parts, call \ref
selectedAxes. Which parts of an axis are selected, can be retrieved with
QCPAxis::selectedParts().
<b>Legend selection</b> is controlled with \ref QCP::iSelectLegend. If this is
set, the user may
select the legend itself or individual items by clicking on them. What parts
exactly are
selectable can be controlled via \ref QCPLegend::setSelectableParts. To find
out whether the
legend or any of its child items are selected, check the value of
QCPLegend::selectedParts. To
find out which child items are selected, call \ref QCPLegend::selectedItems.
<b>All other selectable elements</b> The selection of all other selectable
objects (e.g.
QCPPlotTitle, or your own layerable subclasses) is controlled with \ref
QCP::iSelectOther. If set, the
user may select those objects by clicking on them. To find out which are
currently selected, you
need to check their selected state explicitly.
If the selection state has changed by user interaction, the \ref
selectionChangedByUser signal is
emitted. Each selectable object additionally emits an individual
selectionChanged signal whenever
their selection state has changed, i.e. not only by user interaction.
To allow multiple objects to be selected by holding the selection modifier
(\ref
setMultiSelectModifier), set the flag \ref QCP::iMultiSelect.
\note In addition to the selection mechanism presented here, QCustomPlot
always emits
corresponding signals, when an object is clicked or double clicked. see \ref
plottableClick and
\ref plottableDoubleClick for example.
\see setInteraction, setSelectionTolerance
*/
void QCustomPlot::setInteractions( const QCP::Interactions& interactions )
{
mInteractions = interactions;
}
/*!
Sets the single \a interaction of this QCustomPlot to \a enabled.
For details about the interaction system, see \ref setInteractions.
\see setInteractions
*/
void QCustomPlot::setInteraction( const QCP::Interaction& interaction, bool enabled )
{
if( !enabled && mInteractions.testFlag( interaction ) )
mInteractions &= ~interaction;
else if( enabled && !mInteractions.testFlag( interaction ) )
mInteractions |= interaction;
}
/*!
Sets the tolerance that is used to decide whether a click selects an object
(e.g. a plottable) or
not.
If the user clicks in the vicinity of the line of e.g. a QCPGraph, it's only
regarded as a
potential selection when the minimum distance between the click position and
the graph line is
smaller than \a pixels. Objects that are defined by an area (e.g. QCPBars)
only react to clicks
directly inside the area and ignore this selection tolerance. In other words,
it only has meaning
for parts of objects that are too thin to exactly hit with a click and thus
need such a
tolerance.
\see setInteractions, QCPLayerable::selectTest
*/
void QCustomPlot::setSelectionTolerance( int pixels )
{
mSelectionTolerance = pixels;
}
/*!
Sets whether antialiasing is disabled for this QCustomPlot while the user is
dragging axes
ranges. If many objects, especially plottables, are drawn antialiased, this
greatly improves
performance during dragging. Thus it creates a more responsive user
experience. As soon as the
user stops dragging, the last replot is done with normal antialiasing, to
restore high image
quality.
\see setAntialiasedElements, setNotAntialiasedElements
*/
void QCustomPlot::setNoAntialiasingOnDrag( bool enabled )
{
mNoAntialiasingOnDrag = enabled;
}
/*!
Sets the plotting hints for this QCustomPlot instance as an \a or combination
of QCP::PlottingHint.
\see setPlottingHint
*/
void QCustomPlot::setPlottingHints( const QCP::PlottingHints& hints )
{
mPlottingHints = hints;
}
/*!
Sets the specified plotting \a hint to \a enabled.
\see setPlottingHints
*/
void QCustomPlot::setPlottingHint( QCP::PlottingHint hint, bool enabled )
{
QCP::PlottingHints newHints = mPlottingHints;
if( !enabled )
newHints &= ~hint;
else
newHints |= hint;
if( newHints != mPlottingHints )
setPlottingHints( newHints );
}
/*!
Sets the keyboard modifier that will be recognized as multi-select-modifier.
If \ref QCP::iMultiSelect is specified in \ref setInteractions, the user may
select multiple objects
by clicking on them one after the other while holding down \a modifier.
By default the multi-select-modifier is set to Qt::ControlModifier.
\see setInteractions
*/
void QCustomPlot::setMultiSelectModifier( Qt::KeyboardModifier modifier )
{
mMultiSelectModifier = modifier;
}
/*!
Sets the viewport of this QCustomPlot. The Viewport is the area that the top
level layout
(QCustomPlot::plotLayout()) uses as its rect. Normally, the viewport is the
entire widget rect.
This function is used to allow arbitrary size exports with \ref toPixmap, \ref
savePng, \ref
savePdf, etc. by temporarily changing the viewport size.
*/
void QCustomPlot::setViewport( const QRect& rect )
{
mViewport = rect;
if( mPlotLayout )
mPlotLayout->setOuterRect( mViewport );
}
/*!
Sets \a pm as the viewport background pixmap (see \ref setViewport). The
pixmap is always drawn
below all other objects in the plot.
For cases where the provided pixmap doesn't have the same size as the
viewport, scaling can be
enabled with \ref setBackgroundScaled and the scaling mode (whether and how
the aspect ratio is
preserved) can be set with \ref setBackgroundScaledMode. To set all these
options in one call,
consider using the overloaded version of this function.
If a background brush was set with \ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush),
the viewport will
first be filled with that brush, before drawing the background pixmap. This
can be useful for
background pixmaps with translucent areas.
\see setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCustomPlot::setBackground( const QPixmap& pm )
{
mBackgroundPixmap = pm;
mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap();
}
/*!
Sets the background brush of the viewport (see \ref setViewport).
Before drawing everything else, the background is filled with \a brush. If a
background pixmap
was set with \ref setBackground(const QPixmap &pm), this brush will be used to
fill the viewport
before the background pixmap is drawn. This can be useful for background
pixmaps with translucent
areas.
Set \a brush to Qt::NoBrush or Qt::Transparent to leave background
transparent. This can be
useful for exporting to image formats which support transparency, e.g. \ref
savePng.
\see setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCustomPlot::setBackground( const QBrush& brush )
{
mBackgroundBrush = brush;
}
/*! \overload
Allows setting the background pixmap of the viewport, whether it shall be
scaled and how it
shall be scaled in one call.
\see setBackground(const QPixmap &pm), setBackgroundScaled,
setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCustomPlot::setBackground( const QPixmap& pm, bool scaled, Qt::AspectRatioMode mode )
{
mBackgroundPixmap = pm;
mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap();
mBackgroundScaled = scaled;
mBackgroundScaledMode = mode;
}
/*!
Sets whether the viewport background pixmap shall be scaled to fit the
viewport. If \a scaled is
set to true, control whether and how the aspect ratio of the original pixmap
is preserved with
\ref setBackgroundScaledMode.
Note that the scaled version of the original pixmap is buffered, so there is
no performance
penalty on replots. (Except when the viewport dimensions are changed
continuously.)
\see setBackground, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCustomPlot::setBackgroundScaled( bool scaled )
{
mBackgroundScaled = scaled;
}
/*!
If scaling of the viewport background pixmap is enabled (\ref
setBackgroundScaled), use this
function to define whether and how the aspect ratio of the original pixmap is
preserved.
\see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled
*/
void QCustomPlot::setBackgroundScaledMode( Qt::AspectRatioMode mode )
{
mBackgroundScaledMode = mode;
}
/*!
Returns the plottable with \a index. If the index is invalid, returns 0.
There is an overloaded version of this function with no parameter which
returns the last added
plottable, see QCustomPlot::plottable()
\see plottableCount, addPlottable
*/
QCPAbstractPlottable* QCustomPlot::plottable( int index )
{
if( index >= 0 && index < mPlottables.size() )
{
return mPlottables.at( index );
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
return 0;
}
}
/*! \overload
Returns the last plottable that was added with \ref addPlottable. If there are
no plottables in
the plot, returns 0.
\see plottableCount, addPlottable
*/
QCPAbstractPlottable* QCustomPlot::plottable()
{
if( !mPlottables.isEmpty() )
{
return mPlottables.last();
}
else
return 0;
}
/*!
Adds the specified plottable to the plot and, if \ref
setAutoAddPlottableToLegend is enabled, to
the legend (QCustomPlot::legend). QCustomPlot takes ownership of the
plottable.
Returns true on success, i.e. when \a plottable isn't already in the plot and
the parent plot of
\a plottable is this QCustomPlot (the latter is controlled by what axes were
passed in the
plottable's constructor).
\see plottable, plottableCount, removePlottable, clearPlottables
*/
bool QCustomPlot::addPlottable( QCPAbstractPlottable* plottable )
{
if( mPlottables.contains( plottable ) )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "plottable already added to this QCustomPlot:"
<< reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( plottable );
return false;
}
if( plottable->parentPlot() != this )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "plottable not created with this QCustomPlot as parent:"
<< reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( plottable );
return false;
}
mPlottables.append( plottable );
// possibly add plottable to legend:
if( mAutoAddPlottableToLegend )
plottable->addToLegend();
// special handling for QCPGraphs to maintain the simple graph interface:
if( QCPGraph* graph = qobject_cast<QCPGraph*>( plottable ) )
mGraphs.append( graph );
if( !plottable->layer() ) // usually the layer is already set in the
// constructor of the plottable (via QCPLayerable
// constructor)
plottable->setLayer( currentLayer() );
return true;
}
/*!
Removes the specified plottable from the plot and, if necessary, from the
legend (QCustomPlot::legend).
Returns true on success.
\see addPlottable, clearPlottables
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removePlottable( QCPAbstractPlottable* plottable )
{
if( !mPlottables.contains( plottable ) )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "plottable not in list:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( plottable );
return false;
}
// remove plottable from legend:
plottable->removeFromLegend();
// special handling for QCPGraphs to maintain the simple graph interface:
if( QCPGraph* graph = qobject_cast<QCPGraph*>( plottable ) )
mGraphs.removeOne( graph );
// remove plottable:
delete plottable;
mPlottables.removeOne( plottable );
return true;
}
/*! \overload
Removes the plottable by its \a index.
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removePlottable( int index )
{
if( index >= 0 && index < mPlottables.size() )
return removePlottable( mPlottables[index] );
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
return false;
}
}
/*!
Removes all plottables from the plot (and the QCustomPlot::legend, if
necessary).
Returns the number of plottables removed.
\see removePlottable
*/
int QCustomPlot::clearPlottables()
{
int c = mPlottables.size();
for( int i = c - 1; i >= 0; --i )
removePlottable( mPlottables[i] );
return c;
}
/*!
Returns the number of currently existing plottables in the plot
\see plottable, addPlottable
*/
int QCustomPlot::plottableCount() const
{
return mPlottables.size();
}
/*!
Returns a list of the selected plottables. If no plottables are currently
selected, the list is empty.
There is a convenience function if you're only interested in selected graphs,
see \ref selectedGraphs.
\see setInteractions, QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable,
QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelected
*/
QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> QCustomPlot::selectedPlottables() const
{
QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> result;
foreach( QCPAbstractPlottable* plottable, mPlottables )
{
if( plottable->selected() )
result.append( plottable );
}
return result;
}
/*!
Returns the plottable at the pixel position \a pos. Plottables that only
consist of single lines
(like graphs) have a tolerance band around them, see \ref
setSelectionTolerance. If multiple
plottables come into consideration, the one closest to \a pos is returned.
If \a onlySelectable is true, only plottables that are selectable
(QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable) are considered.
If there is no plottable at \a pos, the return value is 0.
\see itemAt, layoutElementAt
*/
QCPAbstractPlottable* QCustomPlot::plottableAt( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable ) const
{
QCPAbstractPlottable* resultPlottable = 0;
double resultDistance = mSelectionTolerance; // only regard clicks with
// distances smaller than
// mSelectionTolerance as
// selections, so initialize with that value
foreach( QCPAbstractPlottable* plottable, mPlottables )
{
if( onlySelectable && !plottable->selectable() ) // we could have also passed
// onlySelectable to the
// selectTest
// function, but checking here is faster, because we have access
// to QCPabstractPlottable::selectable
continue;
if( ( plottable->keyAxis()->axisRect()->rect() & plottable->valueAxis()->axisRect()->rect() )
.contains( pos.toPoint() ) ) // only consider clicks inside the rect
// that is spanned by the plottable's
// key/value axes
{
double currentDistance = plottable->selectTest( pos, false );
if( currentDistance >= 0 && currentDistance < resultDistance )
{
resultPlottable = plottable;
resultDistance = currentDistance;
}
}
}
return resultPlottable;
}
/*!
Returns whether this QCustomPlot instance contains the \a plottable.
\see addPlottable
*/
bool QCustomPlot::hasPlottable( QCPAbstractPlottable* plottable ) const
{
return mPlottables.contains( plottable );
}
/*!
Returns the graph with \a index. If the index is invalid, returns 0.
There is an overloaded version of this function with no parameter which
returns the last created
graph, see QCustomPlot::graph()
\see graphCount, addGraph
*/
QCPGraph* QCustomPlot::graph( int index ) const
{
if( index >= 0 && index < mGraphs.size() )
{
return mGraphs.at( index );
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
return 0;
}
}
/*! \overload
Returns the last graph, that was created with \ref addGraph. If there are no
graphs in the plot,
returns 0.
\see graphCount, addGraph
*/
QCPGraph* QCustomPlot::graph() const
{
if( !mGraphs.isEmpty() )
{
return mGraphs.last();
}
else
return 0;
}
/*!
Creates a new graph inside the plot. If \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis are left
unspecified (0), the
bottom (xAxis) is used as key and the left (yAxis) is used as value axis. If
specified, \a
keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in this QCustomPlot.
\a keyAxis will be used as key axis (typically "x") and \a valueAxis as value
axis (typically
"y") for the graph.
Returns a pointer to the newly created graph, or 0 if adding the graph failed.
\see graph, graphCount, removeGraph, clearGraphs
*/
QCPGraph* QCustomPlot::addGraph( QCPAxis* keyAxis, QCPAxis* valueAxis )
{
if( !keyAxis )
keyAxis = xAxis;
if( !valueAxis )
valueAxis = yAxis;
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "can't use default QCustomPlot xAxis or yAxis, "
"because at least one is invalid (has been "
"deleted)";
return 0;
}
if( keyAxis->parentPlot() != this || valueAxis->parentPlot() != this )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "passed keyAxis or valueAxis doesn't have this "
"QCustomPlot as parent";
return 0;
}
QCPGraph* newGraph = new QCPGraph( keyAxis, valueAxis );
if( addPlottable( newGraph ) )
{
newGraph->setName( "Graph " + QString::number( mGraphs.size() ) );
return newGraph;
}
else
{
delete newGraph;
return 0;
}
}
/*!
Removes the specified \a graph from the plot and, if necessary, from the
QCustomPlot::legend. If
any other graphs in the plot have a channel fill set towards the removed
graph, the channel fill
property of those graphs is reset to zero (no channel fill).
Returns true on success.
\see clearGraphs
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removeGraph( QCPGraph* graph )
{
return removePlottable( graph );
}
/*! \overload
Removes the graph by its \a index.
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removeGraph( int index )
{
if( index >= 0 && index < mGraphs.size() )
return removeGraph( mGraphs[index] );
else
return false;
}
/*!
Removes all graphs from the plot (and the QCustomPlot::legend, if necessary).
Returns the number of graphs removed.
\see removeGraph
*/
int QCustomPlot::clearGraphs()
{
int c = mGraphs.size();
for( int i = c - 1; i >= 0; --i )
removeGraph( mGraphs[i] );
return c;
}
/*!
Returns the number of currently existing graphs in the plot
\see graph, addGraph
*/
int QCustomPlot::graphCount() const
{
return mGraphs.size();
}
/*!
Returns a list of the selected graphs. If no graphs are currently selected,
the list is empty.
If you are not only interested in selected graphs but other plottables like
QCPCurve, QCPBars,
etc., use \ref selectedPlottables.
\see setInteractions, selectedPlottables, QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelectable,
QCPAbstractPlottable::setSelected
*/
QList<QCPGraph*> QCustomPlot::selectedGraphs() const
{
QList<QCPGraph*> result;
foreach( QCPGraph* graph, mGraphs )
{
if( graph->selected() )
result.append( graph );
}
return result;
}
/*!
Returns the item with \a index. If the index is invalid, returns 0.
There is an overloaded version of this function with no parameter which
returns the last added
item, see QCustomPlot::item()
\see itemCount, addItem
*/
QCPAbstractItem* QCustomPlot::item( int index ) const
{
if( index >= 0 && index < mItems.size() )
{
return mItems.at( index );
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
return 0;
}
}
/*! \overload
Returns the last item, that was added with \ref addItem. If there are no items
in the plot,
returns 0.
\see itemCount, addItem
*/
QCPAbstractItem* QCustomPlot::item() const
{
if( !mItems.isEmpty() )
{
return mItems.last();
}
else
return 0;
}
/*!
Adds the specified item to the plot. QCustomPlot takes ownership of the item.
Returns true on success, i.e. when \a item wasn't already in the plot and the
parent plot of \a
item is this QCustomPlot.
\see item, itemCount, removeItem, clearItems
*/
bool QCustomPlot::addItem( QCPAbstractItem* item )
{
if( !mItems.contains( item ) && item->parentPlot() == this )
{
mItems.append( item );
return true;
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "item either already in list or not created "
"with this QCustomPlot as parent:"
<< reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( item );
return false;
}
}
/*!
Removes the specified item from the plot.
Returns true on success.
\see addItem, clearItems
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removeItem( QCPAbstractItem* item )
{
if( mItems.contains( item ) )
{
delete item;
mItems.removeOne( item );
return true;
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "item not in list:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( item );
return false;
}
}
/*! \overload
Removes the item by its \a index.
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removeItem( int index )
{
if( index >= 0 && index < mItems.size() )
return removeItem( mItems[index] );
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
return false;
}
}
/*!
Removes all items from the plot.
Returns the number of items removed.
\see removeItem
*/
int QCustomPlot::clearItems()
{
int c = mItems.size();
for( int i = c - 1; i >= 0; --i )
removeItem( mItems[i] );
return c;
}
/*!
Returns the number of currently existing items in the plot
\see item, addItem
*/
int QCustomPlot::itemCount() const
{
return mItems.size();
}
/*!
Returns a list of the selected items. If no items are currently selected, the
list is empty.
\see setInteractions, QCPAbstractItem::setSelectable,
QCPAbstractItem::setSelected
*/
QList<QCPAbstractItem*> QCustomPlot::selectedItems() const
{
QList<QCPAbstractItem*> result;
foreach( QCPAbstractItem* item, mItems )
{
if( item->selected() )
result.append( item );
}
return result;
}
/*!
Returns the item at the pixel position \a pos. Items that only consist of
single lines (e.g. \ref
QCPItemLine or \ref QCPItemCurve) have a tolerance band around them, see \ref
setSelectionTolerance. If multiple items come into consideration, the one
closest to \a pos is
returned.
If \a onlySelectable is true, only items that are selectable
(QCPAbstractItem::setSelectable) are
considered.
If there is no item at \a pos, the return value is 0.
\see plottableAt, layoutElementAt
*/
QCPAbstractItem* QCustomPlot::itemAt( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable ) const
{
QCPAbstractItem* resultItem = 0;
double resultDistance = mSelectionTolerance; // only regard clicks with
// distances smaller than
// mSelectionTolerance as
// selections, so initialize with that value
foreach( QCPAbstractItem* item, mItems )
{
if( onlySelectable && !item->selectable() ) // we could have also passed
// onlySelectable to the
// selectTest function,
// but checking here is faster, because we have access to
// QCPAbstractItem::selectable
continue;
if( !item->clipToAxisRect() ||
item->clipRect().contains( pos.toPoint() ) ) // only consider clicks inside
// axis cliprect of the item
// if actually clipped to it
{
double currentDistance = item->selectTest( pos, false );
if( currentDistance >= 0 && currentDistance < resultDistance )
{
resultItem = item;
resultDistance = currentDistance;
}
}
}
return resultItem;
}
/*!
Returns whether this QCustomPlot contains the \a item.
\see addItem
*/
bool QCustomPlot::hasItem( QCPAbstractItem* item ) const
{
return mItems.contains( item );
}
/*!
Returns the layer with the specified \a name. If there is no layer with the
specified name, 0 is
returned.
Layer names are case-sensitive.
\see addLayer, moveLayer, removeLayer
*/
QCPLayer* QCustomPlot::layer( const QString& name ) const
{
foreach( QCPLayer* layer, mLayers )
{
if( layer->name() == name )
return layer;
}
return 0;
}
/*! \overload
Returns the layer by \a index. If the index is invalid, 0 is returned.
\see addLayer, moveLayer, removeLayer
*/
QCPLayer* QCustomPlot::layer( int index ) const
{
if( index >= 0 && index < mLayers.size() )
{
return mLayers.at( index );
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "index out of bounds:" << index;
return 0;
}
}
/*!
Returns the layer that is set as current layer (see \ref setCurrentLayer).
*/
QCPLayer* QCustomPlot::currentLayer() const
{
return mCurrentLayer;
}
/*!
Sets the layer with the specified \a name to be the current layer. All
layerables (\ref
QCPLayerable), e.g. plottables and items, are created on the current layer.
Returns true on success, i.e. if there is a layer with the specified \a name
in the QCustomPlot.
Layer names are case-sensitive.
\see addLayer, moveLayer, removeLayer, QCPLayerable::setLayer
*/
bool QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer( const QString& name )
{
if( QCPLayer* newCurrentLayer = layer( name ) )
{
return setCurrentLayer( newCurrentLayer );
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "layer with name doesn't exist:" << name;
return false;
}
}
/*! \overload
Sets the provided \a layer to be the current layer.
Returns true on success, i.e. when \a layer is a valid layer in the
QCustomPlot.
\see addLayer, moveLayer, removeLayer
*/
bool QCustomPlot::setCurrentLayer( QCPLayer* layer )
{
if( !mLayers.contains( layer ) )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "layer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( layer );
return false;
}
mCurrentLayer = layer;
return true;
}
/*!
Returns the number of currently existing layers in the plot
\see layer, addLayer
*/
int QCustomPlot::layerCount() const
{
return mLayers.size();
}
/*!
Adds a new layer to this QCustomPlot instance. The new layer will have the
name \a name, which
must be unique. Depending on \a insertMode, it is positioned either below or
above \a otherLayer.
Returns true on success, i.e. if there is no other layer named \a name and \a
otherLayer is a
valid layer inside this QCustomPlot.
If \a otherLayer is 0, the highest layer in the QCustomPlot will be used.
For an explanation of what layers are in QCustomPlot, see the documentation of
\ref QCPLayer.
\see layer, moveLayer, removeLayer
*/
bool QCustomPlot::addLayer( const QString& name,
QCPLayer* otherLayer,
QCustomPlot::LayerInsertMode insertMode )
{
if( !otherLayer )
otherLayer = mLayers.last();
if( !mLayers.contains( otherLayer ) )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "otherLayer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:"
<< reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( otherLayer );
return false;
}
if( layer( name ) )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "A layer exists already with the name" << name;
return false;
}
QCPLayer* newLayer = new QCPLayer( this, name );
mLayers.insert( otherLayer->index() + ( insertMode == limAbove ? 1 : 0 ), newLayer );
updateLayerIndices();
return true;
}
/*!
Removes the specified \a layer and returns true on success.
All layerables (e.g. plottables and items) on the removed layer will be moved
to the layer below
\a layer. If \a layer is the bottom layer, the layerables are moved to the
layer above. In both
cases, the total rendering order of all layerables in the QCustomPlot is
preserved.
If \a layer is the current layer (\ref setCurrentLayer), the layer below (or
above, if bottom
layer) becomes the new current layer.
It is not possible to remove the last layer of the plot.
\see layer, addLayer, moveLayer
*/
bool QCustomPlot::removeLayer( QCPLayer* layer )
{
if( !mLayers.contains( layer ) )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "layer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( layer );
return false;
}
if( mLayers.size() < 2 )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "can't remove last layer";
return false;
}
// append all children of this layer to layer below (if this is lowest layer,
// prepend to layer above)
int removedIndex = layer->index();
bool isFirstLayer = removedIndex == 0;
QCPLayer* targetLayer =
isFirstLayer ? mLayers.at( removedIndex + 1 ) : mLayers.at( removedIndex - 1 );
QList<QCPLayerable*> children = layer->children();
if( isFirstLayer ) // prepend in reverse order (so order relative to each other
// stays the same)
{
for( int i = children.size() - 1; i >= 0; --i )
children.at( i )->moveToLayer( targetLayer, true );
}
else // append normally
{
for( int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i )
children.at( i )->moveToLayer( targetLayer, false );
}
// if removed layer is current layer, change current layer to layer
// below/above:
if( layer == mCurrentLayer )
setCurrentLayer( targetLayer );
// remove layer:
delete layer;
mLayers.removeOne( layer );
updateLayerIndices();
return true;
}
/*!
Moves the specified \a layer either above or below \a otherLayer. Whether it's
placed above or
below is controlled with \a insertMode.
Returns true on success, i.e. when both \a layer and \a otherLayer are valid
layers in the
QCustomPlot.
\see layer, addLayer, moveLayer
*/
bool QCustomPlot::moveLayer( QCPLayer* layer,
QCPLayer* otherLayer,
QCustomPlot::LayerInsertMode insertMode )
{
if( !mLayers.contains( layer ) )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "layer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( layer );
return false;
}
if( !mLayers.contains( otherLayer ) )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "otherLayer not a layer of this QCustomPlot:"
<< reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( otherLayer );
return false;
}
mLayers.move( layer->index(), otherLayer->index() + ( insertMode == limAbove ? 1 : 0 ) );
updateLayerIndices();
return true;
}
/*!
Returns the number of axis rects in the plot.
All axis rects can be accessed via QCustomPlot::axisRect().
Initially, only one axis rect exists in the plot.
\see axisRect, axisRects
*/
int QCustomPlot::axisRectCount() const
{
return axisRects().size();
}
/*!
Returns the axis rect with \a index.
Initially, only one axis rect (with index 0) exists in the plot. If multiple
axis rects were
added, all of them may be accessed with this function in a linear fashion
(even when they are
nested in a layout hierarchy or inside other axis rects via
QCPAxisRect::insetLayout).
\see axisRectCount, axisRects
*/
QCPAxisRect* QCustomPlot::axisRect( int index ) const
{
const QList<QCPAxisRect*> rectList = axisRects();
if( index >= 0 && index < rectList.size() )
{
return rectList.at( index );
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid axis rect index" << index;
return 0;
}
}
/*!
Returns all axis rects in the plot.
\see axisRectCount, axisRect
*/
QList<QCPAxisRect*> QCustomPlot::axisRects() const
{
QList<QCPAxisRect*> result;
QStack<QCPLayoutElement*> elementStack;
if( mPlotLayout )
elementStack.push( mPlotLayout );
while( !elementStack.isEmpty() )
{
foreach( QCPLayoutElement* element, elementStack.pop()->elements( false ) )
{
if( element )
{
elementStack.push( element );
if( QCPAxisRect* ar = qobject_cast<QCPAxisRect*>( element ) )
result.append( ar );
}
}
}
return result;
}
/*!
Returns the layout element at pixel position \a pos. If there is no element at
that position,
returns 0.
Only visible elements are used. If \ref QCPLayoutElement::setVisible on the
element itself or on
any of its parent elements is set to false, it will not be considered.
\see itemAt, plottableAt
*/
QCPLayoutElement* QCustomPlot::layoutElementAt( const QPointF& pos ) const
{
QCPLayoutElement* currentElement = mPlotLayout;
bool searchSubElements = true;
while( searchSubElements && currentElement )
{
searchSubElements = false;
foreach( QCPLayoutElement* subElement, currentElement->elements( false ) )
{
if( subElement && subElement->realVisibility() && subElement->selectTest( pos, false ) >= 0 )
{
currentElement = subElement;
searchSubElements = true;
break;
}
}
}
return currentElement;
}
/*!
Returns the axes that currently have selected parts, i.e. whose selection
state is not \ref
QCPAxis::spNone.
\see selectedPlottables, selectedLegends, setInteractions,
QCPAxis::setSelectedParts,
QCPAxis::setSelectableParts
*/
QList<QCPAxis*> QCustomPlot::selectedAxes() const
{
QList<QCPAxis*> result, allAxes;
foreach( QCPAxisRect* rect, axisRects() )
allAxes << rect->axes();
foreach( QCPAxis* axis, allAxes )
{
if( axis->selectedParts() != QCPAxis::spNone )
result.append( axis );
}
return result;
}
/*!
Returns the legends that currently have selected parts, i.e. whose selection
state is not \ref
QCPLegend::spNone.
\see selectedPlottables, selectedAxes, setInteractions,
QCPLegend::setSelectedParts,
QCPLegend::setSelectableParts, QCPLegend::selectedItems
*/
QList<QCPLegend*> QCustomPlot::selectedLegends() const
{
QList<QCPLegend*> result;
QStack<QCPLayoutElement*> elementStack;
if( mPlotLayout )
elementStack.push( mPlotLayout );
while( !elementStack.isEmpty() )
{
foreach( QCPLayoutElement* subElement, elementStack.pop()->elements( false ) )
{
if( subElement )
{
elementStack.push( subElement );
if( QCPLegend* leg = qobject_cast<QCPLegend*>( subElement ) )
{
if( leg->selectedParts() != QCPLegend::spNone )
result.append( leg );
}
}
}
}
return result;
}
/*!
Deselects all layerables (plottables, items, axes, legends,...) of the
QCustomPlot.
Since calling this function is not a user interaction, this does not emit the
\ref
selectionChangedByUser signal. The individual selectionChanged signals are
emitted though, if the
objects were previously selected.
\see setInteractions, selectedPlottables, selectedItems, selectedAxes,
selectedLegends
*/
void QCustomPlot::deselectAll()
{
foreach( QCPLayer* layer, mLayers )
{
foreach( QCPLayerable* layerable, layer->children() )
layerable->deselectEvent( 0 );
}
}
/*!
Causes a complete replot into the internal buffer. Finally, update() is
called, to redraw the
buffer on the QCustomPlot widget surface. This is the method that must be
called to make changes,
for example on the axis ranges or data points of graphs, visible.
Under a few circumstances, QCustomPlot causes a replot by itself. Those are
resize events of the
QCustomPlot widget and user interactions (object selection and range
dragging/zooming).
Before the replot happens, the signal \ref beforeReplot is emitted. After the
replot, \ref
afterReplot is emitted. It is safe to mutually connect the replot slot with
any of those two
signals on two QCustomPlots to make them replot synchronously, it won't cause
an infinite
recursion.
*/
void QCustomPlot::replot( QCustomPlot::RefreshPriority refreshPriority )
{
if( mReplotting ) // incase signals loop back to replot slot
return;
mReplotting = true;
emit beforeReplot();
mPaintBuffer.fill( mBackgroundBrush.style() == Qt::SolidPattern ? mBackgroundBrush.color()
: Qt::transparent );
QCPPainter painter;
painter.begin( &mPaintBuffer );
if( painter.isActive() )
{
painter.setRenderHint(
QPainter::HighQualityAntialiasing ); // to make Antialiasing look good if
// using the OpenGL graphicssystem
if( mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::SolidPattern && mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush )
painter.fillRect( mViewport, mBackgroundBrush );
draw( &painter );
painter.end();
if( ( refreshPriority == rpHint && mPlottingHints.testFlag( QCP::phForceRepaint ) ) ||
refreshPriority == rpImmediate )
repaint();
else
update();
}
else // might happen if QCustomPlot has width or height zero
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Couldn't activate painter on buffer";
emit afterReplot();
mReplotting = false;
}
/*!
Rescales the axes such that all plottables (like graphs) in the plot are fully
visible.
if \a onlyVisiblePlottables is set to true, only the plottables that have
their visibility set to true
(QCPLayerable::setVisible), will be used to rescale the axes.
\see QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleAxes, QCPAxis::rescale
*/
void QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes( bool onlyVisiblePlottables )
{
QList<QCPAxis*> allAxes;
foreach( QCPAxisRect* rect, axisRects() )
allAxes << rect->axes();
foreach( QCPAxis* axis, allAxes )
axis->rescale( onlyVisiblePlottables );
}
/*!
Saves a PDF with the vectorized plot to the file \a fileName. The axis ratio
as well as the scale
of texts and lines will be derived from the specified \a width and \a height.
This means, the
output will look like the normal on-screen output of a QCustomPlot widget with
the corresponding
pixel width and height. If either \a width or \a height is zero, the exported
image will have the
same dimensions as the QCustomPlot widget currently has.
\a noCosmeticPen disables the use of cosmetic pens when drawing to the PDF
file. Cosmetic pens
are pens with numerical width 0, which are always drawn as a one pixel wide
line, no matter what
zoom factor is set in the PDF-Viewer. For more information about cosmetic
pens, see the QPainter
and QPen documentation.
The objects of the plot will appear in the current selection state. If you
don't want any
selected objects to be painted in their selected look, deselect everything
with \ref deselectAll
before calling this function.
Returns true on success.
\warning
\li If you plan on editing the exported PDF file with a vector graphics editor
like
Inkscape, it is advised to set \a noCosmeticPen to true to avoid losing those
cosmetic lines
(which might be quite many, because cosmetic pens are the default for e.g.
axes and tick marks).
\li If calling this function inside the constructor of the parent of the
QCustomPlot widget
(i.e. the MainWindow constructor, if QCustomPlot is inside the MainWindow),
always provide
explicit non-zero widths and heights. If you leave \a width or \a height as 0
(default), this
function uses the current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget. However,
in Qt, these
aren't defined yet inside the constructor, so you would get an image that has
strange
widths/heights.
\a pdfCreator and \a pdfTitle may be used to set the according metadata fields
in the resulting
PDF file.
\note On Android systems, this method does nothing and issues an according
qDebug warning
message. This is also the case if for other reasons the define flag
QT_NO_PRINTER is set.
\see savePng, saveBmp, saveJpg, saveRastered
*/
bool QCustomPlot::savePdf( const QString& fileName,
bool noCosmeticPen,
int width,
int height,
const QString& pdfCreator,
const QString& pdfTitle )
{
bool success = false;
#ifdef QT_NO_PRINTER
Q_UNUSED( fileName )
Q_UNUSED( noCosmeticPen )
Q_UNUSED( width )
Q_UNUSED( height )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "Qt was built without printer support "
"(QT_NO_PRINTER). PDF not created.";
#else
int newWidth, newHeight;
if( width == 0 || height == 0 )
{
newWidth = this->width();
newHeight = this->height();
}
else
{
newWidth = width;
newHeight = height;
}
QPrinter printer( QPrinter::ScreenResolution );
printer.setOutputFileName( fileName );
printer.setOutputFormat( QPrinter::PdfFormat );
printer.setFullPage( true );
printer.setColorMode( QPrinter::Color );
printer.printEngine()->setProperty( QPrintEngine::PPK_Creator, pdfCreator );
printer.printEngine()->setProperty( QPrintEngine::PPK_DocumentName, pdfTitle );
QRect oldViewport = viewport();
setViewport( QRect( 0, 0, newWidth, newHeight ) );
printer.setPaperSize( viewport().size(), QPrinter::DevicePixel );
QCPPainter printpainter;
if( printpainter.begin( &printer ) )
{
printpainter.setMode( QCPPainter::pmVectorized );
printpainter.setMode( QCPPainter::pmNoCaching );
printpainter.setMode( QCPPainter::pmNonCosmetic, noCosmeticPen );
printpainter.setWindow( mViewport );
if( mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && mBackgroundBrush.color() != Qt::white &&
mBackgroundBrush.color() != Qt::transparent &&
mBackgroundBrush.color().alpha() >
0 ) // draw pdf background color if not white/transparent
printpainter.fillRect( viewport(), mBackgroundBrush );
draw( &printpainter );
printpainter.end();
success = true;
}
setViewport( oldViewport );
#endif // QT_NO_PRINTER
return success;
}
/*!
Saves a PNG image file to \a fileName on disc. The output plot will have the
dimensions \a width
and \a height in pixels. If either \a width or \a height is zero, the exported
image will have
the same dimensions as the QCustomPlot widget currently has. Line widths and
texts etc. are not
scaled up when larger widths/heights are used. If you want that effect, use
the \a scale parameter.
For example, if you set both \a width and \a height to 100 and \a scale to 2,
you will end up with an
image file of size 200*200 in which all graphical elements are scaled up by
factor 2 (line widths,
texts, etc.). This scaling is not done by stretching a 100*100 image, the
result will have full
200*200 pixel resolution.
If you use a high scaling factor, it is recommended to enable antialiasing for
all elements via
temporarily setting \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements to \ref
QCP::aeAll as this allows
QCustomPlot to place objects with sub-pixel accuracy.
\warning If calling this function inside the constructor of the parent of the
QCustomPlot widget
(i.e. the MainWindow constructor, if QCustomPlot is inside the MainWindow),
always provide
explicit non-zero widths and heights. If you leave \a width or \a height as 0
(default), this
function uses the current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget. However,
in Qt, these
aren't defined yet inside the constructor, so you would get an image that has
strange
widths/heights.
The objects of the plot will appear in the current selection state. If you
don't want any selected
objects to be painted in their selected look, deselect everything with \ref
deselectAll before calling
this function.
If you want the PNG to have a transparent background, call \ref
setBackground(const QBrush
&brush) with no brush (Qt::NoBrush) or a transparent color (Qt::transparent),
before saving.
PNG compression can be controlled with the \a quality parameter which must be
between 0 and 100 or
-1 to use the default setting.
Returns true on success. If this function fails, most likely the PNG format
isn't supported by
the system, see Qt docs about QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats().
\see savePdf, saveBmp, saveJpg, saveRastered
*/
bool QCustomPlot::savePng( const QString& fileName,
int width,
int height,
double scale,
int quality )
{
return saveRastered( fileName, width, height, scale, "PNG", quality );
}
/*!
Saves a JPG image file to \a fileName on disc. The output plot will have the
dimensions \a width
and \a height in pixels. If either \a width or \a height is zero, the exported
image will have
the same dimensions as the QCustomPlot widget currently has. Line widths and
texts etc. are not
scaled up when larger widths/heights are used. If you want that effect, use
the \a scale parameter.
For example, if you set both \a width and \a height to 100 and \a scale to 2,
you will end up with an
image file of size 200*200 in which all graphical elements are scaled up by
factor 2 (line widths,
texts, etc.). This scaling is not done by stretching a 100*100 image, the
result will have full
200*200 pixel resolution.
If you use a high scaling factor, it is recommended to enable antialiasing for
all elements via
temporarily setting \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements to \ref
QCP::aeAll as this allows
QCustomPlot to place objects with sub-pixel accuracy.
\warning If calling this function inside the constructor of the parent of the
QCustomPlot widget
(i.e. the MainWindow constructor, if QCustomPlot is inside the MainWindow),
always provide
explicit non-zero widths and heights. If you leave \a width or \a height as 0
(default), this
function uses the current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget. However,
in Qt, these
aren't defined yet inside the constructor, so you would get an image that has
strange
widths/heights.
The objects of the plot will appear in the current selection state. If you
don't want any selected
objects to be painted in their selected look, deselect everything with \ref
deselectAll before calling
this function.
JPG compression can be controlled with the \a quality parameter which must be
between 0 and 100 or
-1 to use the default setting.
Returns true on success. If this function fails, most likely the JPG format
isn't supported by
the system, see Qt docs about QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats().
\see savePdf, savePng, saveBmp, saveRastered
*/
bool QCustomPlot::saveJpg( const QString& fileName,
int width,
int height,
double scale,
int quality )
{
return saveRastered( fileName, width, height, scale, "JPG", quality );
}
/*!
Saves a BMP image file to \a fileName on disc. The output plot will have the
dimensions \a width
and \a height in pixels. If either \a width or \a height is zero, the exported
image will have
the same dimensions as the QCustomPlot widget currently has. Line widths and
texts etc. are not
scaled up when larger widths/heights are used. If you want that effect, use
the \a scale parameter.
For example, if you set both \a width and \a height to 100 and \a scale to 2,
you will end up with an
image file of size 200*200 in which all graphical elements are scaled up by
factor 2 (line widths,
texts, etc.). This scaling is not done by stretching a 100*100 image, the
result will have full
200*200 pixel resolution.
If you use a high scaling factor, it is recommended to enable antialiasing for
all elements via
temporarily setting \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements to \ref
QCP::aeAll as this allows
QCustomPlot to place objects with sub-pixel accuracy.
\warning If calling this function inside the constructor of the parent of the
QCustomPlot widget
(i.e. the MainWindow constructor, if QCustomPlot is inside the MainWindow),
always provide
explicit non-zero widths and heights. If you leave \a width or \a height as 0
(default), this
function uses the current width and height of the QCustomPlot widget. However,
in Qt, these
aren't defined yet inside the constructor, so you would get an image that has
strange
widths/heights.
The objects of the plot will appear in the current selection state. If you
don't want any selected
objects to be painted in their selected look, deselect everything with \ref
deselectAll before calling
this function.
Returns true on success. If this function fails, most likely the BMP format
isn't supported by
the system, see Qt docs about QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats().
\see savePdf, savePng, saveJpg, saveRastered
*/
bool QCustomPlot::saveBmp( const QString& fileName, int width, int height, double scale )
{
return saveRastered( fileName, width, height, scale, "BMP" );
}
/*! \internal
Returns a minimum size hint that corresponds to the minimum size of the top
level layout
(\ref plotLayout). To prevent QCustomPlot from being collapsed to size/width
zero, set a minimum
size (setMinimumSize) either on the whole QCustomPlot or on any layout
elements inside the plot.
This is especially important, when placed in a QLayout where other components
try to take in as
much space as possible (e.g. QMdiArea).
*/
QSize QCustomPlot::minimumSizeHint() const
{
return mPlotLayout->minimumSizeHint();
}
/*! \internal
Returns a size hint that is the same as \ref minimumSizeHint.
*/
QSize QCustomPlot::sizeHint() const
{
return mPlotLayout->minimumSizeHint();
}
/*! \internal
Event handler for when the QCustomPlot widget needs repainting. This does not
cause a \ref replot, but
draws the internal buffer on the widget surface.
*/
void QCustomPlot::paintEvent( QPaintEvent* event )
{
Q_UNUSED( event );
QPainter painter( this );
painter.drawPixmap( 0, 0, mPaintBuffer );
}
/*! \internal
Event handler for a resize of the QCustomPlot widget. Causes the internal
buffer to be resized to
the new size. The viewport (which becomes the outer rect of mPlotLayout) is
resized
appropriately. Finally a \ref replot is performed.
*/
void QCustomPlot::resizeEvent( QResizeEvent* event )
{
// resize and repaint the buffer:
mPaintBuffer = QPixmap( event->size() );
setViewport( rect() );
replot( rpQueued ); // queued update is important here, to prevent painting
// issues in some contexts
}
/*! \internal
Event handler for when a double click occurs. Emits the \ref mouseDoubleClick
signal, then emits
the specialized signals when certain objecs are clicked (e.g. \ref
plottableDoubleClick, \ref
axisDoubleClick, etc.). Finally determines the affected layout element and
forwards the event to
it.
\see mousePressEvent, mouseReleaseEvent
*/
void QCustomPlot::mouseDoubleClickEvent( QMouseEvent* event )
{
emit mouseDoubleClick( event );
QVariant details;
QCPLayerable* clickedLayerable = layerableAt( event->pos(), false, &details );
// emit specialized object double click signals:
if( QCPAbstractPlottable* ap = qobject_cast<QCPAbstractPlottable*>( clickedLayerable ) )
emit plottableDoubleClick( ap, event );
else if( QCPAxis* ax = qobject_cast<QCPAxis*>( clickedLayerable ) )
emit axisDoubleClick( ax, details.value<QCPAxis::SelectablePart>(), event );
else if( QCPAbstractItem* ai = qobject_cast<QCPAbstractItem*>( clickedLayerable ) )
emit itemDoubleClick( ai, event );
else if( QCPLegend* lg = qobject_cast<QCPLegend*>( clickedLayerable ) )
emit legendDoubleClick( lg, 0, event );
else if( QCPAbstractLegendItem* li = qobject_cast<QCPAbstractLegendItem*>( clickedLayerable ) )
emit legendDoubleClick( li->parentLegend(), li, event );
else if( QCPPlotTitle* pt = qobject_cast<QCPPlotTitle*>( clickedLayerable ) )
emit titleDoubleClick( event, pt );
// call double click event of affected layout element:
if( QCPLayoutElement* el = layoutElementAt( event->pos() ) )
el->mouseDoubleClickEvent( event );
// call release event of affected layout element (as in mouseReleaseEvent,
// since the mouseDoubleClick replaces the
// second release event in double click case):
if( mMouseEventElement )
{
mMouseEventElement->mouseReleaseEvent( event );
mMouseEventElement = 0;
}
// QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent(event); don't call base class implementation
// because it would just cause a
// mousePress/ReleaseEvent, which we don't want.
}
/*! \internal
Event handler for when a mouse button is pressed. Emits the mousePress signal.
Then determines
the affected layout element and forwards the event to it.
\see mouseMoveEvent, mouseReleaseEvent
*/
void QCustomPlot::mousePressEvent( QMouseEvent* event )
{
emit mousePress( event );
mMousePressPos = event->pos(); // need this to determine in releaseEvent
// whether it was a click (no position change
// between press and release)
// call event of affected layout element:
mMouseEventElement = layoutElementAt( event->pos() );
if( mMouseEventElement )
mMouseEventElement->mousePressEvent( event );
QWidget::mousePressEvent( event );
}
/*! \internal
Event handler for when the cursor is moved. Emits the \ref mouseMove signal.
If a layout element has mouse capture focus (a mousePressEvent happened on top
of the layout
element before), the mouseMoveEvent is forwarded to that element.
\see mousePressEvent, mouseReleaseEvent
*/
void QCustomPlot::mouseMoveEvent( QMouseEvent* event )
{
emit mouseMove( event );
// call event of affected layout element:
if( mMouseEventElement )
mMouseEventElement->mouseMoveEvent( event );
QWidget::mouseMoveEvent( event );
}
/*! \internal
Event handler for when a mouse button is released. Emits the \ref mouseRelease
signal.
If the mouse was moved less than a certain threshold in any direction since
the \ref
mousePressEvent, it is considered a click which causes the selection mechanism
(if activated via
\ref setInteractions) to possibly change selection states accordingly.
Further, specialized mouse
click signals are emitted (e.g. \ref plottableClick, \ref axisClick, etc.)
If a layout element has mouse capture focus (a \ref mousePressEvent happened
on top of the layout
element before), the \ref mouseReleaseEvent is forwarded to that element.
\see mousePressEvent, mouseMoveEvent
*/
void QCustomPlot::mouseReleaseEvent( QMouseEvent* event )
{
emit mouseRelease( event );
bool doReplot = false;
if( ( mMousePressPos - event->pos() ).manhattanLength() <
5 ) // determine whether it was a click operation
{
if( event->button() == Qt::LeftButton )
{
// handle selection mechanism:
QVariant details;
QCPLayerable* clickedLayerable = layerableAt( event->pos(), true, &details );
bool selectionStateChanged = false;
bool additive = mInteractions.testFlag( QCP::iMultiSelect ) &&
event->modifiers().testFlag( mMultiSelectModifier );
// deselect all other layerables if not additive selection:
if( !additive )
{
foreach( QCPLayer* layer, mLayers )
{
foreach( QCPLayerable* layerable, layer->children() )
{
if( layerable != clickedLayerable &&
mInteractions.testFlag( layerable->selectionCategory() ) )
{
bool selChanged = false;
layerable->deselectEvent( &selChanged );
selectionStateChanged |= selChanged;
}
}
}
}
if( clickedLayerable && mInteractions.testFlag( clickedLayerable->selectionCategory() ) )
{
// a layerable was actually clicked, call its selectEvent:
bool selChanged = false;
clickedLayerable->selectEvent( event, additive, details, &selChanged );
selectionStateChanged |= selChanged;
}
doReplot = true;
if( selectionStateChanged )
emit selectionChangedByUser();
}
// emit specialized object click signals:
QVariant details;
QCPLayerable* clickedLayerable =
layerableAt( event->pos(), false,
&details ); // for these signals, selectability is ignored, that's why we
// call this again with onlySelectable set to false
if( QCPAbstractPlottable* ap = qobject_cast<QCPAbstractPlottable*>( clickedLayerable ) )
emit plottableClick( ap, event );
else if( QCPAxis* ax = qobject_cast<QCPAxis*>( clickedLayerable ) )
emit axisClick( ax, details.value<QCPAxis::SelectablePart>(), event );
else if( QCPAbstractItem* ai = qobject_cast<QCPAbstractItem*>( clickedLayerable ) )
emit itemClick( ai, event );
else if( QCPLegend* lg = qobject_cast<QCPLegend*>( clickedLayerable ) )
emit legendClick( lg, 0, event );
else if( QCPAbstractLegendItem* li = qobject_cast<QCPAbstractLegendItem*>( clickedLayerable ) )
emit legendClick( li->parentLegend(), li, event );
else if( QCPPlotTitle* pt = qobject_cast<QCPPlotTitle*>( clickedLayerable ) )
emit titleClick( event, pt );
}
// call event of affected layout element:
if( mMouseEventElement )
{
mMouseEventElement->mouseReleaseEvent( event );
mMouseEventElement = 0;
}
if( doReplot || noAntialiasingOnDrag() )
replot();
QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent( event );
}
/*! \internal
Event handler for mouse wheel events. First, the \ref mouseWheel signal is
emitted. Then
determines the affected layout element and forwards the event to it.
*/
void QCustomPlot::wheelEvent( QWheelEvent* event )
{
emit mouseWheel( event );
// call event of affected layout element:
if( QCPLayoutElement* el = layoutElementAt( event->pos() ) )
el->wheelEvent( event );
QWidget::wheelEvent( event );
}
/*! \internal
This is the main draw function. It draws the entire plot, including background
pixmap, with the
specified \a painter. Note that it does not fill the background with the
background brush (as the
user may specify with \ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush)), this is up to
the respective
functions calling this method (e.g. \ref replot, \ref toPixmap and \ref
toPainter).
*/
void QCustomPlot::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
// run through layout phases:
mPlotLayout->update( QCPLayoutElement::upPreparation );
mPlotLayout->update( QCPLayoutElement::upMargins );
mPlotLayout->update( QCPLayoutElement::upLayout );
// draw viewport background pixmap:
drawBackground( painter );
// draw all layered objects (grid, axes, plottables, items, legend,...):
foreach( QCPLayer* layer, mLayers )
{
foreach( QCPLayerable* child, layer->children() )
{
if( child->realVisibility() )
{
painter->save();
painter->setClipRect( child->clipRect().translated( 0, -1 ) );
child->applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
child->draw( painter );
painter->restore();
}
}
}
/* Debug code to draw all layout element rects
foreach (QCPLayoutElement* el, findChildren<QCPLayoutElement*>())
{
painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
painter->setPen(QPen(QColor(0, 0, 0, 100), 0, Qt::DashLine));
painter->drawRect(el->rect());
painter->setPen(QPen(QColor(255, 0, 0, 100), 0, Qt::DashLine));
painter->drawRect(el->outerRect());
}
*/
}
/*! \internal
Draws the viewport background pixmap of the plot.
If a pixmap was provided via \ref setBackground, this function buffers the
scaled version
depending on \ref setBackgroundScaled and \ref setBackgroundScaledMode and
then draws it inside
the viewport with the provided \a painter. The scaled version is buffered in
mScaledBackgroundPixmap to prevent expensive rescaling at every redraw. It is
only updated, when
the axis rect has changed in a way that requires a rescale of the background
pixmap (this is
dependent on the \ref setBackgroundScaledMode), or when a differend axis
background pixmap was
set.
Note that this function does not draw a fill with the background brush (\ref
setBackground(const
QBrush &brush)) beneath the pixmap.
\see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCustomPlot::drawBackground( QCPPainter* painter )
{
// Note: background color is handled in individual replot/save functions
// draw background pixmap (on top of fill, if brush specified):
if( !mBackgroundPixmap.isNull() )
{
if( mBackgroundScaled )
{
// check whether mScaledBackground needs to be updated:
QSize scaledSize( mBackgroundPixmap.size() );
scaledSize.scale( mViewport.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode );
if( mScaledBackgroundPixmap.size() != scaledSize )
mScaledBackgroundPixmap = mBackgroundPixmap.scaled( mViewport.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode,
Qt::SmoothTransformation );
painter->drawPixmap(
mViewport.topLeft(), mScaledBackgroundPixmap,
QRect( 0, 0, mViewport.width(), mViewport.height() ) & mScaledBackgroundPixmap.rect() );
}
else
{
painter->drawPixmap( mViewport.topLeft(), mBackgroundPixmap,
QRect( 0, 0, mViewport.width(), mViewport.height() ) );
}
}
}
/*! \internal
This method is used by \ref QCPAxisRect::removeAxis to report removed axes to
the QCustomPlot
so it may clear its QCustomPlot::xAxis, yAxis, xAxis2 and yAxis2 members
accordingly.
*/
void QCustomPlot::axisRemoved( QCPAxis* axis )
{
if( xAxis == axis )
xAxis = 0;
if( xAxis2 == axis )
xAxis2 = 0;
if( yAxis == axis )
yAxis = 0;
if( yAxis2 == axis )
yAxis2 = 0;
// Note: No need to take care of range drag axes and range zoom axes, because
// they are stored in smart pointers
}
/*! \internal
This method is used by the QCPLegend destructor to report legend removal to
the QCustomPlot so
it may clear its QCustomPlot::legend member accordingly.
*/
void QCustomPlot::legendRemoved( QCPLegend* legend )
{
if( this->legend == legend )
this->legend = 0;
}
/*! \internal
Assigns all layers their index (QCPLayer::mIndex) in the mLayers list. This
method is thus called
after every operation that changes the layer indices, like layer removal,
layer creation, layer
moving.
*/
void QCustomPlot::updateLayerIndices() const
{
for( int i = 0; i < mLayers.size(); ++i )
mLayers.at( i )->mIndex = i;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the layerable at pixel position \a pos. If \a onlySelectable is set to
true, only those
layerables that are selectable will be considered. (Layerable subclasses
communicate their
selectability via the QCPLayerable::selectTest method, by returning -1.)
\a selectionDetails is an output parameter that contains selection specifics
of the affected
layerable. This is useful if the respective layerable shall be given a
subsequent
QCPLayerable::selectEvent (like in \ref mouseReleaseEvent). \a
selectionDetails usually contains
information about which part of the layerable was hit, in multi-part
layerables (e.g.
QCPAxis::SelectablePart).
*/
QCPLayerable* QCustomPlot::layerableAt( const QPointF& pos,
bool onlySelectable,
QVariant* selectionDetails ) const
{
for( int layerIndex = mLayers.size() - 1; layerIndex >= 0; --layerIndex )
{
const QList<QCPLayerable*> layerables = mLayers.at( layerIndex )->children();
double minimumDistance = selectionTolerance() * 1.1;
QCPLayerable* minimumDistanceLayerable = 0;
for( int i = layerables.size() - 1; i >= 0; --i )
{
if( !layerables.at( i )->realVisibility() )
continue;
QVariant details;
double dist = layerables.at( i )->selectTest( pos, onlySelectable, &details );
if( dist >= 0 && dist < minimumDistance )
{
minimumDistance = dist;
minimumDistanceLayerable = layerables.at( i );
if( selectionDetails )
*selectionDetails = details;
}
}
if( minimumDistance < selectionTolerance() )
return minimumDistanceLayerable;
}
return 0;
}
/*!
Saves the plot to a rastered image file \a fileName in the image format \a
format. The plot is
sized to \a width and \a height in pixels and scaled with \a scale. (width 100
and scale 2.0 lead
to a full resolution file with width 200.) If the \a format supports
compression, \a quality may
be between 0 and 100 to control it.
Returns true on success. If this function fails, most likely the given \a
format isn't supported
by the system, see Qt docs about QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats().
\see saveBmp, saveJpg, savePng, savePdf
*/
bool QCustomPlot::saveRastered( const QString& fileName,
int width,
int height,
double scale,
const char* format,
int quality )
{
QPixmap buffer = toPixmap( width, height, scale );
if( !buffer.isNull() )
return buffer.save( fileName, format, quality );
else
return false;
}
/*!
Renders the plot to a pixmap and returns it.
The plot is sized to \a width and \a height in pixels and scaled with \a
scale. (width 100 and
scale 2.0 lead to a full resolution pixmap with width 200.)
\see toPainter, saveRastered, saveBmp, savePng, saveJpg, savePdf
*/
QPixmap QCustomPlot::toPixmap( int width, int height, double scale )
{
// this method is somewhat similar to toPainter. Change something here, and a
// change in toPainter might be necessary,
// too.
int newWidth, newHeight;
if( width == 0 || height == 0 )
{
newWidth = this->width();
newHeight = this->height();
}
else
{
newWidth = width;
newHeight = height;
}
int scaledWidth = qRound( scale * newWidth );
int scaledHeight = qRound( scale * newHeight );
QPixmap result( scaledWidth, scaledHeight );
result.fill( mBackgroundBrush.style() == Qt::SolidPattern
? mBackgroundBrush.color()
: Qt::transparent ); // if using non-solid pattern, make
// transparent now and draw brush pattern
// later
QCPPainter painter;
painter.begin( &result );
if( painter.isActive() )
{
QRect oldViewport = viewport();
setViewport( QRect( 0, 0, newWidth, newHeight ) );
painter.setMode( QCPPainter::pmNoCaching );
if( !qFuzzyCompare( scale, 1.0 ) )
{
if( scale > 1.0 ) // for scale < 1 we always want cosmetic pens where
// possible, because else lines might
// disappear for very small scales
painter.setMode( QCPPainter::pmNonCosmetic );
painter.scale( scale, scale );
}
if( mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::SolidPattern && mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush )
painter.fillRect( mViewport, mBackgroundBrush );
draw( &painter );
setViewport( oldViewport );
painter.end();
}
else // might happen if pixmap has width or height zero
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Couldn't activate painter on pixmap";
return QPixmap();
}
return result;
}
/*!
Renders the plot using the passed \a painter.
The plot is sized to \a width and \a height in pixels. If the \a painter's
scale is not 1.0, the resulting plot will
appear scaled accordingly.
\note If you are restricted to using a QPainter (instead of QCPPainter),
create a temporary QPicture and open a
QCPPainter
on it. Then call \ref toPainter with this QCPPainter. After ending the paint
operation on the picture, draw it with
the QPainter. This will reproduce the painter actions the QCPPainter took,
with a QPainter.
\see toPixmap
*/
void QCustomPlot::toPainter( QCPPainter* painter, int width, int height )
{
// this method is somewhat similar to toPixmap. Change something here, and a
// change in toPixmap might be necessary,
// too.
int newWidth, newHeight;
if( width == 0 || height == 0 )
{
newWidth = this->width();
newHeight = this->height();
}
else
{
newWidth = width;
newHeight = height;
}
if( painter->isActive() )
{
QRect oldViewport = viewport();
setViewport( QRect( 0, 0, newWidth, newHeight ) );
painter->setMode( QCPPainter::pmNoCaching );
// warning: the following is different in toPixmap, because a solid
// background color is applied there via
// QPixmap::fill
// here, we need to do this via QPainter::fillRect.
if( mBackgroundBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush )
painter->fillRect( mViewport, mBackgroundBrush );
draw( painter );
setViewport( oldViewport );
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Passed painter is not active";
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPColorGradient
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPColorGradient
\brief Defines a color gradient for use with e.g. \ref QCPColorMap
This class describes a color gradient which can be used to encode data with
color. For example,
QCPColorMap and QCPColorScale have a \ref QCPColorMap::setGradient
"setGradient" method which
takes an instance of this class. Colors are set with \ref
setColorStopAt(double position, const QColor &color)
with a \a position from 0 to 1. In between these defined color positions, the
color will be interpolated linearly either in RGB or HSV space, see \ref
setColorInterpolation.
Alternatively, load one of the preset color gradients shown in the image
below, with \ref
loadPreset, or by directly specifying the preset in the constructor.
\image html QCPColorGradient.png
The fact that the \ref QCPColorGradient(GradientPreset preset) constructor
allows directly
converting a \ref GradientPreset to a QCPColorGradient, you can also directly
pass \ref
GradientPreset to all the \a setGradient methods, e.g.:
\code
colorMap->setGradient(QCPColorGradient::gpHot);
\endcode
The total number of levels used in the gradient can be set with \ref
setLevelCount. Whether the
color gradient shall be applied periodically (wrapping around) to data values
that lie outside
the data range specified on the plottable instance can be controlled with \ref
setPeriodic.
*/
/*!
Constructs a new QCPColorGradient initialized with the colors and color
interpolation according
to \a preset.
The color level count is initialized to 350.
*/
QCPColorGradient::QCPColorGradient( GradientPreset preset )
: mLevelCount( 350 )
, mColorInterpolation( ciRGB )
, mPeriodic( false )
, mColorBufferInvalidated( true )
{
mColorBuffer.fill( qRgb( 0, 0, 0 ), mLevelCount );
loadPreset( preset );
}
/* undocumented operator */
bool QCPColorGradient::operator==( const QCPColorGradient& other ) const
{
return ( ( other.mLevelCount == this->mLevelCount ) &&
( other.mColorInterpolation == this->mColorInterpolation ) &&
( other.mPeriodic == this->mPeriodic ) && ( other.mColorStops == this->mColorStops ) );
}
/*!
Sets the number of discretization levels of the color gradient to \a n. The
default is 350 which
is typically enough to create a smooth appearance.
\image html QCPColorGradient-levelcount.png
*/
void QCPColorGradient::setLevelCount( int n )
{
if( n < 2 )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "n must be greater or equal 2 but was" << n;
n = 2;
}
if( n != mLevelCount )
{
mLevelCount = n;
mColorBufferInvalidated = true;
}
}
/*!
Sets at which positions from 0 to 1 which color shall occur. The positions are
the keys, the
colors are the values of the passed QMap \a colorStops. In between these color
stops, the color
is interpolated according to \ref setColorInterpolation.
A more convenient way to create a custom gradient may be to clear all color
stops with \ref
clearColorStops and then adding them one by one with \ref setColorStopAt.
\see clearColorStops
*/
void QCPColorGradient::setColorStops( const QMap<double, QColor>& colorStops )
{
mColorStops = colorStops;
mColorBufferInvalidated = true;
}
/*!
Sets the \a color the gradient will have at the specified \a position (from 0
to 1). In between
these color stops, the color is interpolated according to \ref
setColorInterpolation.
\see setColorStops, clearColorStops
*/
void QCPColorGradient::setColorStopAt( double position, const QColor& color )
{
mColorStops.insert( position, color );
mColorBufferInvalidated = true;
}
/*!
Sets whether the colors in between the configured color stops (see \ref
setColorStopAt) shall be
interpolated linearly in RGB or in HSV color space.
For example, a sweep in RGB space from red to green will have a muddy brown
intermediate color,
whereas in HSV space the intermediate color is yellow.
*/
void QCPColorGradient::setColorInterpolation( QCPColorGradient::ColorInterpolation interpolation )
{
if( interpolation != mColorInterpolation )
{
mColorInterpolation = interpolation;
mColorBufferInvalidated = true;
}
}
/*!
Sets whether data points that are outside the configured data range (e.g. \ref
QCPColorMap::setDataRange) are colored by periodically repeating the color
gradient or whether
they all have the same color, corresponding to the respective gradient
boundary color.
\image html QCPColorGradient-periodic.png
As shown in the image above, gradients that have the same start and end color
are especially
suitable for a periodic gradient mapping, since they produce smooth color
transitions throughout
the color map. A preset that has this property is \ref gpHues.
In practice, using periodic color gradients makes sense when the data
corresponds to a periodic
dimension, such as an angle or a phase. If this is not the case, the color
encoding might become
ambiguous, because multiple different data values are shown as the same color.
*/
void QCPColorGradient::setPeriodic( bool enabled )
{
mPeriodic = enabled;
}
/*!
This method is used to quickly convert a \a data array to colors. The colors
will be output in
the array \a scanLine. Both \a data and \a scanLine must have the length \a n
when passed to this
function. The data range that shall be used for mapping the data value to the
gradient is passed
in \a range. \a logarithmic indicates whether the data values shall be mapped
to colors
logarithmically.
if \a data actually contains 2D-data linearized via <tt>[row*columnCount +
column]</tt>, you can
set \a dataIndexFactor to <tt>columnCount</tt> to convert a column instead of
a row of the data
array, in \a scanLine. \a scanLine will remain a regular (1D) array. This
works because \a data
is addressed <tt>data[i*dataIndexFactor]</tt>.
*/
void QCPColorGradient::colorize( const double* data,
const QCPRange& range,
QRgb* scanLine,
int n,
int dataIndexFactor,
bool logarithmic )
{
// If you change something here, make sure to also adapt ::color()
if( !data )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer given as data";
return;
}
if( !scanLine )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer given as scanLine";
return;
}
if( mColorBufferInvalidated )
updateColorBuffer();
if( !logarithmic )
{
const double posToIndexFactor = mLevelCount / range.size();
if( mPeriodic )
{
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
int index =
(int)( ( data[dataIndexFactor * i] - range.lower ) * posToIndexFactor ) % mLevelCount;
if( index < 0 )
index += mLevelCount;
scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.at( index );
}
}
else
{
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
int index = ( data[dataIndexFactor * i] - range.lower ) * posToIndexFactor;
if( index < 0 )
index = 0;
else if( index >= mLevelCount )
index = mLevelCount - 1;
scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.at( index );
}
}
}
else // logarithmic == true
{
if( mPeriodic )
{
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
int index = (int)( qLn( data[dataIndexFactor * i] / range.lower ) /
qLn( range.upper / range.lower ) * mLevelCount ) %
mLevelCount;
if( index < 0 )
index += mLevelCount;
scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.at( index );
}
}
else
{
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
int index = qLn( data[dataIndexFactor * i] / range.lower ) /
qLn( range.upper / range.lower ) * mLevelCount;
if( index < 0 )
index = 0;
else if( index >= mLevelCount )
index = mLevelCount - 1;
scanLine[i] = mColorBuffer.at( index );
}
}
}
}
/*! \internal
This method is used to colorize a single data value given in \a position, to
colors. The data
range that shall be used for mapping the data value to the gradient is passed
in \a range. \a
logarithmic indicates whether the data value shall be mapped to a color
logarithmically.
If an entire array of data values shall be converted, rather use \ref
colorize, for better
performance.
*/
QRgb QCPColorGradient::color( double position, const QCPRange& range, bool logarithmic )
{
// If you change something here, make sure to also adapt ::colorize()
if( mColorBufferInvalidated )
updateColorBuffer();
int index = 0;
if( !logarithmic )
index = ( position - range.lower ) * mLevelCount / range.size();
else
index = qLn( position / range.lower ) / qLn( range.upper / range.lower ) * mLevelCount;
if( mPeriodic )
{
index = index % mLevelCount;
if( index < 0 )
index += mLevelCount;
}
else
{
if( index < 0 )
index = 0;
else if( index >= mLevelCount )
index = mLevelCount - 1;
}
return mColorBuffer.at( index );
}
/*!
Clears the current color stops and loads the specified \a preset. A preset
consists of predefined
color stops and the corresponding color interpolation method.
The available presets are:
\image html QCPColorGradient.png
*/
void QCPColorGradient::loadPreset( GradientPreset preset )
{
clearColorStops();
switch( preset )
{
case gpGrayscale:
setColorInterpolation( ciRGB );
setColorStopAt( 0, Qt::black );
setColorStopAt( 1, Qt::white );
break;
case gpHot:
setColorInterpolation( ciRGB );
setColorStopAt( 0, QColor( 50, 0, 0 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.2, QColor( 180, 10, 0 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.4, QColor( 245, 50, 0 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.6, QColor( 255, 150, 10 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.8, QColor( 255, 255, 50 ) );
setColorStopAt( 1, QColor( 255, 255, 255 ) );
break;
case gpCold:
setColorInterpolation( ciRGB );
setColorStopAt( 0, QColor( 0, 0, 50 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.2, QColor( 0, 10, 180 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.4, QColor( 0, 50, 245 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.6, QColor( 10, 150, 255 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.8, QColor( 50, 255, 255 ) );
setColorStopAt( 1, QColor( 255, 255, 255 ) );
break;
case gpNight:
setColorInterpolation( ciHSV );
setColorStopAt( 0, QColor( 10, 20, 30 ) );
setColorStopAt( 1, QColor( 250, 255, 250 ) );
break;
case gpCandy:
setColorInterpolation( ciHSV );
setColorStopAt( 0, QColor( 0, 0, 255 ) );
setColorStopAt( 1, QColor( 255, 250, 250 ) );
break;
case gpGeography:
setColorInterpolation( ciRGB );
setColorStopAt( 0, QColor( 70, 170, 210 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.20, QColor( 90, 160, 180 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.25, QColor( 45, 130, 175 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.30, QColor( 100, 140, 125 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.5, QColor( 100, 140, 100 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.6, QColor( 130, 145, 120 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.7, QColor( 140, 130, 120 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.9, QColor( 180, 190, 190 ) );
setColorStopAt( 1, QColor( 210, 210, 230 ) );
break;
case gpIon:
setColorInterpolation( ciHSV );
setColorStopAt( 0, QColor( 50, 10, 10 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.45, QColor( 0, 0, 255 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.8, QColor( 0, 255, 255 ) );
setColorStopAt( 1, QColor( 0, 255, 0 ) );
break;
case gpThermal:
setColorInterpolation( ciRGB );
setColorStopAt( 0, QColor( 0, 0, 50 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.15, QColor( 20, 0, 120 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.33, QColor( 200, 30, 140 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.6, QColor( 255, 100, 0 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.85, QColor( 255, 255, 40 ) );
setColorStopAt( 1, QColor( 255, 255, 255 ) );
break;
case gpPolar:
setColorInterpolation( ciRGB );
setColorStopAt( 0, QColor( 50, 255, 255 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.18, QColor( 10, 70, 255 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.28, QColor( 10, 10, 190 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.5, QColor( 0, 0, 0 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.72, QColor( 190, 10, 10 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.82, QColor( 255, 70, 10 ) );
setColorStopAt( 1, QColor( 255, 255, 50 ) );
break;
case gpSpectrum:
setColorInterpolation( ciHSV );
setColorStopAt( 0, QColor( 50, 0, 50 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.15, QColor( 0, 0, 255 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.35, QColor( 0, 255, 255 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.6, QColor( 255, 255, 0 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.75, QColor( 255, 30, 0 ) );
setColorStopAt( 1, QColor( 50, 0, 0 ) );
break;
case gpJet:
setColorInterpolation( ciRGB );
setColorStopAt( 0, QColor( 0, 0, 100 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.15, QColor( 0, 50, 255 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.35, QColor( 0, 255, 255 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.65, QColor( 255, 255, 0 ) );
setColorStopAt( 0.85, QColor( 255, 30, 0 ) );
setColorStopAt( 1, QColor( 100, 0, 0 ) );
break;
case gpHues:
setColorInterpolation( ciHSV );
setColorStopAt( 0, QColor( 255, 0, 0 ) );
setColorStopAt( 1.0 / 3.0, QColor( 0, 0, 255 ) );
setColorStopAt( 2.0 / 3.0, QColor( 0, 255, 0 ) );
setColorStopAt( 1, QColor( 255, 0, 0 ) );
break;
}
}
/*!
Clears all color stops.
\see setColorStops, setColorStopAt
*/
void QCPColorGradient::clearColorStops()
{
mColorStops.clear();
mColorBufferInvalidated = true;
}
/*!
Returns an inverted gradient. The inverted gradient has all properties as this
\ref
QCPColorGradient, but the order of the color stops is inverted.
\see setColorStops, setColorStopAt
*/
QCPColorGradient QCPColorGradient::inverted() const
{
QCPColorGradient result( *this );
result.clearColorStops();
for( QMap<double, QColor>::const_iterator it = mColorStops.constBegin();
it != mColorStops.constEnd(); ++it )
result.setColorStopAt( 1.0 - it.key(), it.value() );
return result;
}
/*! \internal
Updates the internal color buffer which will be used by \ref colorize and \ref
color, to quickly
convert positions to colors. This is where the interpolation between color
stops is calculated.
*/
void QCPColorGradient::updateColorBuffer()
{
if( mColorBuffer.size() != mLevelCount )
mColorBuffer.resize( mLevelCount );
if( mColorStops.size() > 1 )
{
double indexToPosFactor = 1.0 / (double)( mLevelCount - 1 );
for( int i = 0; i < mLevelCount; ++i )
{
double position = i * indexToPosFactor;
QMap<double, QColor>::const_iterator it = mColorStops.lowerBound( position );
if( it == mColorStops.constEnd() ) // position is on or after last stop,
// use color of last stop
{
mColorBuffer[i] = ( it - 1 ).value().rgb();
}
else if( it == mColorStops.constBegin() ) // position is on or before
// first stop, use color of
// first stop
{
mColorBuffer[i] = it.value().rgb();
}
else // position is in between stops (or on an intermediate stop),
// interpolate color
{
QMap<double, QColor>::const_iterator high = it;
QMap<double, QColor>::const_iterator low = it - 1;
double t =
( position - low.key() ) / ( high.key() - low.key() ); // interpolation factor 0..1
switch( mColorInterpolation )
{
case ciRGB:
{
mColorBuffer[i] = qRgb( ( 1 - t ) * low.value().red() + t * high.value().red(),
( 1 - t ) * low.value().green() + t * high.value().green(),
( 1 - t ) * low.value().blue() + t * high.value().blue() );
break;
}
case ciHSV:
{
QColor lowHsv = low.value().toHsv();
QColor highHsv = high.value().toHsv();
double hue = 0;
double hueDiff = highHsv.hueF() - lowHsv.hueF();
if( hueDiff > 0.5 )
hue = lowHsv.hueF() - t * ( 1.0 - hueDiff );
else if( hueDiff < -0.5 )
hue = lowHsv.hueF() + t * ( 1.0 + hueDiff );
else
hue = lowHsv.hueF() + t * hueDiff;
if( hue < 0 )
hue += 1.0;
else if( hue >= 1.0 )
hue -= 1.0;
mColorBuffer[i] =
QColor::fromHsvF( hue, ( 1 - t ) * lowHsv.saturationF() + t * highHsv.saturationF(),
( 1 - t ) * lowHsv.valueF() + t * highHsv.valueF() )
.rgb();
break;
}
}
}
}
}
else if( mColorStops.size() == 1 )
{
mColorBuffer.fill( mColorStops.constBegin().value().rgb() );
}
else // mColorStops is empty, fill color buffer with black
{
mColorBuffer.fill( qRgb( 0, 0, 0 ) );
}
mColorBufferInvalidated = false;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAxisRect
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPAxisRect
\brief Holds multiple axes and arranges them in a rectangular shape.
This class represents an axis rect, a rectangular area that is bounded on all
sides with an
arbitrary number of axes.
Initially QCustomPlot has one axis rect, accessible via
QCustomPlot::axisRect(). However, the
layout system allows to have multiple axis rects, e.g. arranged in a grid
layout
(QCustomPlot::plotLayout).
By default, QCPAxisRect comes with four axes, at bottom, top, left and right.
They can be
accessed via \ref axis by providing the respective axis type (\ref
QCPAxis::AxisType) and index.
If you need all axes in the axis rect, use \ref axes. The top and right axes
are set to be
invisible initially (QCPAxis::setVisible). To add more axes to a side, use
\ref addAxis or \ref
addAxes. To remove an axis, use \ref removeAxis.
The axis rect layerable itself only draws a background pixmap or color, if
specified (\ref
setBackground). It is placed on the "background" layer initially (see \ref
QCPLayer for an
explanation of the QCustomPlot layer system). The axes that are held by the
axis rect can be
placed on other layers, independently of the axis rect.
Every axis rect has a child layout of type \ref QCPLayoutInset. It is
accessible via \ref
insetLayout and can be used to have other layout elements (or even other
layouts with multiple
elements) hovering inside the axis rect.
If an axis rect is clicked and dragged, it processes this by moving certain
axis ranges. The
behaviour can be controlled with \ref setRangeDrag and \ref setRangeDragAxes.
If the mouse wheel
is scrolled while the cursor is on the axis rect, certain axes are scaled.
This is controllable
via \ref setRangeZoom, \ref setRangeZoomAxes and \ref setRangeZoomFactor.
These interactions are
only enabled if \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains \ref
QCP::iRangeDrag and \ref
QCP::iRangeZoom.
\image html AxisRectSpacingOverview.png
<center>Overview of the spacings and paddings that define the geometry of an
axis. The dashed
line on the far left indicates the viewport/widget border.</center>
*/
/* start documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn QCPLayoutInset *QCPAxisRect::insetLayout() const
Returns the inset layout of this axis rect. It can be used to place other
layout elements (or
even layouts with multiple other elements) inside/on top of an axis rect.
\see QCPLayoutInset
*/
/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::left() const
Returns the pixel position of the left border of this axis rect. Margins are
not taken into
account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::right() const
Returns the pixel position of the right border of this axis rect. Margins are
not taken into
account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::top() const
Returns the pixel position of the top border of this axis rect. Margins are
not taken into
account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::bottom() const
Returns the pixel position of the bottom border of this axis rect. Margins are
not taken into
account here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::width() const
Returns the pixel width of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into account
here, so the
returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
/*! \fn int QCPAxisRect::height() const
Returns the pixel height of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into account
here, so the
returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
/*! \fn QSize QCPAxisRect::size() const
Returns the pixel size of this axis rect. Margins are not taken into account
here, so the
returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::topLeft() const
Returns the top left corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken
into account here,
so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::topRight() const
Returns the top right corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not
taken into account
here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::bottomLeft() const
Returns the bottom left corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not
taken into account
here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::bottomRight() const
Returns the bottom right corner of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not
taken into account
here, so the returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
/*! \fn QPoint QCPAxisRect::center() const
Returns the center of this axis rect in pixels. Margins are not taken into
account here, so the
returned value is with respect to the inner \ref rect.
*/
/* end documentation of inline functions */
/*!
Creates a QCPAxisRect instance and sets default values. An axis is added for
each of the four
sides, the top and right axes are set invisible initially.
*/
QCPAxisRect::QCPAxisRect( QCustomPlot* parentPlot, bool setupDefaultAxes )
: QCPLayoutElement( parentPlot )
, mBackgroundBrush( Qt::NoBrush )
, mBackgroundScaled( true )
, mBackgroundScaledMode( Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding )
, mInsetLayout( new QCPLayoutInset )
, mRangeDrag( Qt::Horizontal | Qt::Vertical )
, mRangeZoom( Qt::Horizontal | Qt::Vertical )
, mRangeZoomFactorHorz( 0.85 )
, mRangeZoomFactorVert( 0.85 )
, mDragging( false )
{
mInsetLayout->initializeParentPlot( mParentPlot );
mInsetLayout->setParentLayerable( this );
mInsetLayout->setParent( this );
setMinimumSize( 50, 50 );
setMinimumMargins( QMargins( 15, 15, 15, 15 ) );
mAxes.insert( QCPAxis::atLeft, QList<QCPAxis*>() );
mAxes.insert( QCPAxis::atRight, QList<QCPAxis*>() );
mAxes.insert( QCPAxis::atTop, QList<QCPAxis*>() );
mAxes.insert( QCPAxis::atBottom, QList<QCPAxis*>() );
if( setupDefaultAxes )
{
QCPAxis* xAxis = addAxis( QCPAxis::atBottom );
QCPAxis* yAxis = addAxis( QCPAxis::atLeft );
QCPAxis* xAxis2 = addAxis( QCPAxis::atTop );
QCPAxis* yAxis2 = addAxis( QCPAxis::atRight );
setRangeDragAxes( xAxis, yAxis );
setRangeZoomAxes( xAxis, yAxis );
xAxis2->setVisible( false );
yAxis2->setVisible( false );
xAxis->grid()->setVisible( true );
yAxis->grid()->setVisible( true );
xAxis2->grid()->setVisible( false );
yAxis2->grid()->setVisible( false );
xAxis2->grid()->setZeroLinePen( Qt::NoPen );
yAxis2->grid()->setZeroLinePen( Qt::NoPen );
xAxis2->grid()->setVisible( false );
yAxis2->grid()->setVisible( false );
}
}
QCPAxisRect::~QCPAxisRect()
{
delete mInsetLayout;
mInsetLayout = 0;
QList<QCPAxis*> axesList = axes();
for( int i = 0; i < axesList.size(); ++i )
removeAxis( axesList.at( i ) );
}
/*!
Returns the number of axes on the axis rect side specified with \a type.
\see axis
*/
int QCPAxisRect::axisCount( QCPAxis::AxisType type ) const
{
return mAxes.value( type ).size();
}
/*!
Returns the axis with the given \a index on the axis rect side specified with
\a type.
\see axisCount, axes
*/
QCPAxis* QCPAxisRect::axis( QCPAxis::AxisType type, int index ) const
{
QList<QCPAxis*> ax( mAxes.value( type ) );
if( index >= 0 && index < ax.size() )
{
return ax.at( index );
}
else
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Axis index out of bounds:" << index;
return 0;
}
}
/*!
Returns all axes on the axis rect sides specified with \a types.
\a types may be a single \ref QCPAxis::AxisType or an <tt>or</tt>-combination,
to get the axes of
multiple sides.
\see axis
*/
QList<QCPAxis*> QCPAxisRect::axes( QCPAxis::AxisTypes types ) const
{
QList<QCPAxis*> result;
if( types.testFlag( QCPAxis::atLeft ) )
result << mAxes.value( QCPAxis::atLeft );
if( types.testFlag( QCPAxis::atRight ) )
result << mAxes.value( QCPAxis::atRight );
if( types.testFlag( QCPAxis::atTop ) )
result << mAxes.value( QCPAxis::atTop );
if( types.testFlag( QCPAxis::atBottom ) )
result << mAxes.value( QCPAxis::atBottom );
return result;
}
/*! \overload
Returns all axes of this axis rect.
*/
QList<QCPAxis*> QCPAxisRect::axes() const
{
QList<QCPAxis*> result;
QHashIterator<QCPAxis::AxisType, QList<QCPAxis*>> it( mAxes );
while( it.hasNext() )
{
it.next();
result << it.value();
}
return result;
}
/*!
Adds a new axis to the axis rect side specified with \a type, and returns it.
If an axis rect side already contains one or more axes, the lower and upper
endings of the new
axis (\ref QCPAxis::setLowerEnding, \ref QCPAxis::setUpperEnding) are
initialized to \ref
QCPLineEnding::esHalfBar.
\see addAxes, setupFullAxesBox
*/
QCPAxis* QCPAxisRect::addAxis( QCPAxis::AxisType type )
{
QCPAxis* newAxis = new QCPAxis( this, type );
if( mAxes[type].size() > 0 ) // multiple axes on one side, add half-bar axis
// ending to additional axes with offset
{
bool invert = ( type == QCPAxis::atRight ) || ( type == QCPAxis::atBottom );
newAxis->setLowerEnding( QCPLineEnding( QCPLineEnding::esHalfBar, 6, 10, !invert ) );
newAxis->setUpperEnding( QCPLineEnding( QCPLineEnding::esHalfBar, 6, 10, invert ) );
}
mAxes[type].append( newAxis );
return newAxis;
}
/*!
Adds a new axis with \ref addAxis to each axis rect side specified in \a
types. This may be an
<tt>or</tt>-combination of QCPAxis::AxisType, so axes can be added to multiple
sides at once.
Returns a list of the added axes.
\see addAxis, setupFullAxesBox
*/
QList<QCPAxis*> QCPAxisRect::addAxes( QCPAxis::AxisTypes types )
{
QList<QCPAxis*> result;
if( types.testFlag( QCPAxis::atLeft ) )
result << addAxis( QCPAxis::atLeft );
if( types.testFlag( QCPAxis::atRight ) )
result << addAxis( QCPAxis::atRight );
if( types.testFlag( QCPAxis::atTop ) )
result << addAxis( QCPAxis::atTop );
if( types.testFlag( QCPAxis::atBottom ) )
result << addAxis( QCPAxis::atBottom );
return result;
}
/*!
Removes the specified \a axis from the axis rect and deletes it.
Returns true on success, i.e. if \a axis was a valid axis in this axis rect.
\see addAxis
*/
bool QCPAxisRect::removeAxis( QCPAxis* axis )
{
// don't access axis->axisType() to provide safety when axis is an invalid
// pointer, rather go through all axis
// containers:
QHashIterator<QCPAxis::AxisType, QList<QCPAxis*>> it( mAxes );
while( it.hasNext() )
{
it.next();
if( it.value().contains( axis ) )
{
mAxes[it.key()].removeOne( axis );
if( qobject_cast<QCustomPlot*>( parentPlot() ) ) // make sure this isn't
// called from QObject dtor
// when
// QCustomPlot is already destructed (happens when the axis rect
// is not in any layout and thus QObject-child of QCustomPlot)
parentPlot()->axisRemoved( axis );
delete axis;
return true;
}
}
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Axis isn't in axis rect:" << reinterpret_cast<quintptr>( axis );
return false;
}
/*!
Convenience function to create an axis on each side that doesn't have any axes
yet and set their
visibility to true. Further, the top/right axes are assigned the following
properties of the
bottom/left axes:
\li range (\ref QCPAxis::setRange)
\li range reversed (\ref QCPAxis::setRangeReversed)
\li scale type (\ref QCPAxis::setScaleType)
\li scale log base (\ref QCPAxis::setScaleLogBase)
\li ticks (\ref QCPAxis::setTicks)
\li auto (major) tick count (\ref QCPAxis::setAutoTickCount)
\li sub tick count (\ref QCPAxis::setSubTickCount)
\li auto sub ticks (\ref QCPAxis::setAutoSubTicks)
\li tick step (\ref QCPAxis::setTickStep)
\li auto tick step (\ref QCPAxis::setAutoTickStep)
\li number format (\ref QCPAxis::setNumberFormat)
\li number precision (\ref QCPAxis::setNumberPrecision)
\li tick label type (\ref QCPAxis::setTickLabelType)
\li date time format (\ref QCPAxis::setDateTimeFormat)
\li date time spec (\ref QCPAxis::setDateTimeSpec)
Tick labels (\ref QCPAxis::setTickLabels) of the right and top axes are set to
false.
If \a connectRanges is true, the \ref QCPAxis::rangeChanged "rangeChanged"
signals of the bottom
and left axes are connected to the \ref QCPAxis::setRange slots of the top and
right axes.
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setupFullAxesBox( bool connectRanges )
{
QCPAxis *xAxis, *yAxis, *xAxis2, *yAxis2;
if( axisCount( QCPAxis::atBottom ) == 0 )
xAxis = addAxis( QCPAxis::atBottom );
else
xAxis = axis( QCPAxis::atBottom );
if( axisCount( QCPAxis::atLeft ) == 0 )
yAxis = addAxis( QCPAxis::atLeft );
else
yAxis = axis( QCPAxis::atLeft );
if( axisCount( QCPAxis::atTop ) == 0 )
xAxis2 = addAxis( QCPAxis::atTop );
else
xAxis2 = axis( QCPAxis::atTop );
if( axisCount( QCPAxis::atRight ) == 0 )
yAxis2 = addAxis( QCPAxis::atRight );
else
yAxis2 = axis( QCPAxis::atRight );
xAxis->setVisible( true );
yAxis->setVisible( true );
xAxis2->setVisible( true );
yAxis2->setVisible( true );
xAxis2->setTickLabels( false );
yAxis2->setTickLabels( false );
xAxis2->setRange( xAxis->range() );
xAxis2->setRangeReversed( xAxis->rangeReversed() );
xAxis2->setScaleType( xAxis->scaleType() );
xAxis2->setScaleLogBase( xAxis->scaleLogBase() );
xAxis2->setTicks( xAxis->ticks() );
xAxis2->setAutoTickCount( xAxis->autoTickCount() );
xAxis2->setSubTickCount( xAxis->subTickCount() );
xAxis2->setAutoSubTicks( xAxis->autoSubTicks() );
xAxis2->setTickStep( xAxis->tickStep() );
xAxis2->setAutoTickStep( xAxis->autoTickStep() );
xAxis2->setNumberFormat( xAxis->numberFormat() );
xAxis2->setNumberPrecision( xAxis->numberPrecision() );
xAxis2->setTickLabelType( xAxis->tickLabelType() );
xAxis2->setDateTimeFormat( xAxis->dateTimeFormat() );
xAxis2->setDateTimeSpec( xAxis->dateTimeSpec() );
yAxis2->setRange( yAxis->range() );
yAxis2->setRangeReversed( yAxis->rangeReversed() );
yAxis2->setScaleType( yAxis->scaleType() );
yAxis2->setScaleLogBase( yAxis->scaleLogBase() );
yAxis2->setTicks( yAxis->ticks() );
yAxis2->setAutoTickCount( yAxis->autoTickCount() );
yAxis2->setSubTickCount( yAxis->subTickCount() );
yAxis2->setAutoSubTicks( yAxis->autoSubTicks() );
yAxis2->setTickStep( yAxis->tickStep() );
yAxis2->setAutoTickStep( yAxis->autoTickStep() );
yAxis2->setNumberFormat( yAxis->numberFormat() );
yAxis2->setNumberPrecision( yAxis->numberPrecision() );
yAxis2->setTickLabelType( yAxis->tickLabelType() );
yAxis2->setDateTimeFormat( yAxis->dateTimeFormat() );
yAxis2->setDateTimeSpec( yAxis->dateTimeSpec() );
if( connectRanges )
{
connect( xAxis, SIGNAL( rangeChanged( QCPRange ) ), xAxis2, SLOT( setRange( QCPRange ) ) );
connect( yAxis, SIGNAL( rangeChanged( QCPRange ) ), yAxis2, SLOT( setRange( QCPRange ) ) );
}
}
/*!
Returns a list of all the plottables that are associated with this axis rect.
A plottable is considered associated with an axis rect if its key or value
axis (or both) is in
this axis rect.
\see graphs, items
*/
QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> QCPAxisRect::plottables() const
{
// Note: don't append all QCPAxis::plottables() into a list, because we might
// get duplicate entries
QList<QCPAbstractPlottable*> result;
for( int i = 0; i < mParentPlot->mPlottables.size(); ++i )
{
if( mParentPlot->mPlottables.at( i )->keyAxis()->axisRect() == this ||
mParentPlot->mPlottables.at( i )->valueAxis()->axisRect() == this )
result.append( mParentPlot->mPlottables.at( i ) );
}
return result;
}
/*!
Returns a list of all the graphs that are associated with this axis rect.
A graph is considered associated with an axis rect if its key or value axis
(or both) is in
this axis rect.
\see plottables, items
*/
QList<QCPGraph*> QCPAxisRect::graphs() const
{
// Note: don't append all QCPAxis::graphs() into a list, because we might get
// duplicate entries
QList<QCPGraph*> result;
for( int i = 0; i < mParentPlot->mGraphs.size(); ++i )
{
if( mParentPlot->mGraphs.at( i )->keyAxis()->axisRect() == this ||
mParentPlot->mGraphs.at( i )->valueAxis()->axisRect() == this )
result.append( mParentPlot->mGraphs.at( i ) );
}
return result;
}
/*!
Returns a list of all the items that are associated with this axis rect.
An item is considered associated with an axis rect if any of its positions has
key or value axis
set to an axis that is in this axis rect, or if any of its positions has \ref
QCPItemPosition::setAxisRect set to the axis rect, or if the clip axis rect
(\ref
QCPAbstractItem::setClipAxisRect) is set to this axis rect.
\see plottables, graphs
*/
QList<QCPAbstractItem*> QCPAxisRect::items() const
{
// Note: don't just append all QCPAxis::items() into a list, because we might
// get duplicate entries
// and miss those items that have this axis rect as clipAxisRect.
QList<QCPAbstractItem*> result;
for( int itemId = 0; itemId < mParentPlot->mItems.size(); ++itemId )
{
if( mParentPlot->mItems.at( itemId )->clipAxisRect() == this )
{
result.append( mParentPlot->mItems.at( itemId ) );
continue;
}
QList<QCPItemPosition*> positions = mParentPlot->mItems.at( itemId )->positions();
for( int posId = 0; posId < positions.size(); ++posId )
{
if( positions.at( posId )->axisRect() == this ||
positions.at( posId )->keyAxis()->axisRect() == this ||
positions.at( posId )->valueAxis()->axisRect() == this )
{
result.append( mParentPlot->mItems.at( itemId ) );
break;
}
}
}
return result;
}
/*!
This method is called automatically upon replot and doesn't need to be called
by users of
QCPAxisRect.
Calls the base class implementation to update the margins (see \ref
QCPLayoutElement::update),
and finally passes the \ref rect to the inset layout (\ref insetLayout) and
calls its
QCPInsetLayout::update function.
*/
void QCPAxisRect::update( UpdatePhase phase )
{
QCPLayoutElement::update( phase );
switch( phase )
{
case upPreparation:
{
QList<QCPAxis*> allAxes = axes();
for( int i = 0; i < allAxes.size(); ++i )
allAxes.at( i )->setupTickVectors();
break;
}
case upLayout:
{
mInsetLayout->setOuterRect( rect() );
break;
}
default:
break;
}
// pass update call on to inset layout (doesn't happen automatically, because
// QCPAxisRect doesn't derive from
// QCPLayout):
mInsetLayout->update( phase );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QList<QCPLayoutElement*> QCPAxisRect::elements( bool recursive ) const
{
QList<QCPLayoutElement*> result;
if( mInsetLayout )
{
result << mInsetLayout;
if( recursive )
result << mInsetLayout->elements( recursive );
}
return result;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAxisRect::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
painter->setAntialiasing( false );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAxisRect::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
drawBackground( painter );
}
/*!
Sets \a pm as the axis background pixmap. The axis background pixmap will be
drawn inside the
axis rect. Since axis rects place themselves on the "background" layer by
default, the axis rect
backgrounds are usually drawn below everything else.
For cases where the provided pixmap doesn't have the same size as the axis
rect, scaling can be
enabled with \ref setBackgroundScaled and the scaling mode (i.e. whether and
how the aspect ratio
is preserved) can be set with \ref setBackgroundScaledMode. To set all these
options in one call,
consider using the overloaded version of this function.
Below the pixmap, the axis rect may be optionally filled with a brush, if
specified with \ref
setBackground(const QBrush &brush).
\see setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode, setBackground(const QBrush
&brush)
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setBackground( const QPixmap& pm )
{
mBackgroundPixmap = pm;
mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap();
}
/*! \overload
Sets \a brush as the background brush. The axis rect background will be filled
with this brush.
Since axis rects place themselves on the "background" layer by default, the
axis rect backgrounds
are usually drawn below everything else.
The brush will be drawn before (under) any background pixmap, which may be
specified with \ref
setBackground(const QPixmap &pm).
To disable drawing of a background brush, set \a brush to Qt::NoBrush.
\see setBackground(const QPixmap &pm)
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setBackground( const QBrush& brush )
{
mBackgroundBrush = brush;
}
/*! \overload
Allows setting the background pixmap of the axis rect, whether it shall be
scaled and how it
shall be scaled in one call.
\see setBackground(const QPixmap &pm), setBackgroundScaled,
setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setBackground( const QPixmap& pm, bool scaled, Qt::AspectRatioMode mode )
{
mBackgroundPixmap = pm;
mScaledBackgroundPixmap = QPixmap();
mBackgroundScaled = scaled;
mBackgroundScaledMode = mode;
}
/*!
Sets whether the axis background pixmap shall be scaled to fit the axis rect
or not. If \a scaled
is set to true, you may control whether and how the aspect ratio of the
original pixmap is
preserved with \ref setBackgroundScaledMode.
Note that the scaled version of the original pixmap is buffered, so there is
no performance
penalty on replots. (Except when the axis rect dimensions are changed
continuously.)
\see setBackground, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setBackgroundScaled( bool scaled )
{
mBackgroundScaled = scaled;
}
/*!
If scaling of the axis background pixmap is enabled (\ref
setBackgroundScaled), use this function to
define whether and how the aspect ratio of the original pixmap passed to \ref
setBackground is preserved.
\see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setBackgroundScaledMode( Qt::AspectRatioMode mode )
{
mBackgroundScaledMode = mode;
}
/*!
Returns the range drag axis of the \a orientation provided.
\see setRangeDragAxes
*/
QCPAxis* QCPAxisRect::rangeDragAxis( Qt::Orientation orientation )
{
return ( orientation == Qt::Horizontal ? mRangeDragHorzAxis.data() : mRangeDragVertAxis.data() );
}
/*!
Returns the range zoom axis of the \a orientation provided.
\see setRangeZoomAxes
*/
QCPAxis* QCPAxisRect::rangeZoomAxis( Qt::Orientation orientation )
{
return ( orientation == Qt::Horizontal ? mRangeZoomHorzAxis.data() : mRangeZoomVertAxis.data() );
}
/*!
Returns the range zoom factor of the \a orientation provided.
\see setRangeZoomFactor
*/
double QCPAxisRect::rangeZoomFactor( Qt::Orientation orientation )
{
return ( orientation == Qt::Horizontal ? mRangeZoomFactorHorz : mRangeZoomFactorVert );
}
/*!
Sets which axis orientation may be range dragged by the user with mouse
interaction.
What orientation corresponds to which specific axis can be set with
\ref setRangeDragAxes(QCPAxis *horizontal, QCPAxis *vertical). By
default, the horizontal axis is the bottom axis (xAxis) and the vertical axis
is the left axis (yAxis).
To disable range dragging entirely, pass 0 as \a orientations or remove \ref
QCP::iRangeDrag from \ref
QCustomPlot::setInteractions. To enable range dragging for both directions,
pass <tt>Qt::Horizontal |
Qt::Vertical</tt> as \a orientations.
In addition to setting \a orientations to a non-zero value, make sure \ref
QCustomPlot::setInteractions
contains \ref QCP::iRangeDrag to enable the range dragging interaction.
\see setRangeZoom, setRangeDragAxes, setNoAntialiasingOnDrag
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeDrag( Qt::Orientations orientations )
{
mRangeDrag = orientations;
}
/*!
Sets which axis orientation may be zoomed by the user with the mouse wheel.
What orientation
corresponds to which specific axis can be set with \ref
setRangeZoomAxes(QCPAxis *horizontal,
QCPAxis *vertical). By default, the horizontal axis is the bottom axis (xAxis)
and the vertical
axis is the left axis (yAxis).
To disable range zooming entirely, pass 0 as \a orientations or remove \ref
QCP::iRangeZoom from \ref
QCustomPlot::setInteractions. To enable range zooming for both directions,
pass <tt>Qt::Horizontal |
Qt::Vertical</tt> as \a orientations.
In addition to setting \a orientations to a non-zero value, make sure \ref
QCustomPlot::setInteractions
contains \ref QCP::iRangeZoom to enable the range zooming interaction.
\see setRangeZoomFactor, setRangeZoomAxes, setRangeDrag
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoom( Qt::Orientations orientations )
{
mRangeZoom = orientations;
}
/*!
Sets the axes whose range will be dragged when \ref setRangeDrag enables mouse
range dragging
on the QCustomPlot widget.
\see setRangeZoomAxes
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeDragAxes( QCPAxis* horizontal, QCPAxis* vertical )
{
mRangeDragHorzAxis = horizontal;
mRangeDragVertAxis = vertical;
}
/*!
Sets the axes whose range will be zoomed when \ref setRangeZoom enables mouse
wheel zooming on the
QCustomPlot widget. The two axes can be zoomed with different strengths, when
different factors
are passed to \ref setRangeZoomFactor(double horizontalFactor, double
verticalFactor).
\see setRangeDragAxes
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomAxes( QCPAxis* horizontal, QCPAxis* vertical )
{
mRangeZoomHorzAxis = horizontal;
mRangeZoomVertAxis = vertical;
}
/*!
Sets how strong one rotation step of the mouse wheel zooms, when range zoom
was activated with
\ref setRangeZoom. The two parameters \a horizontalFactor and \a
verticalFactor provide a way to
let the horizontal axis zoom at different rates than the vertical axis. Which
axis is horizontal
and which is vertical, can be set with \ref setRangeZoomAxes.
When the zoom factor is greater than one, scrolling the mouse wheel backwards
(towards the user)
will zoom in (make the currently visible range smaller). For zoom factors
smaller than one, the
same scrolling direction will zoom out.
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomFactor( double horizontalFactor, double verticalFactor )
{
mRangeZoomFactorHorz = horizontalFactor;
mRangeZoomFactorVert = verticalFactor;
}
/*! \overload
Sets both the horizontal and vertical zoom \a factor.
*/
void QCPAxisRect::setRangeZoomFactor( double factor )
{
mRangeZoomFactorHorz = factor;
mRangeZoomFactorVert = factor;
}
/*! \internal
Draws the background of this axis rect. It may consist of a background fill (a
QBrush) and a
pixmap.
If a brush was given via \ref setBackground(const QBrush &brush), this
function first draws an
according filling inside the axis rect with the provided \a painter.
Then, if a pixmap was provided via \ref setBackground, this function buffers
the scaled version
depending on \ref setBackgroundScaled and \ref setBackgroundScaledMode and
then draws it inside
the axis rect with the provided \a painter. The scaled version is buffered in
mScaledBackgroundPixmap to prevent expensive rescaling at every redraw. It is
only updated, when
the axis rect has changed in a way that requires a rescale of the background
pixmap (this is
dependant on the \ref setBackgroundScaledMode), or when a differend axis
backgroud pixmap was
set.
\see setBackground, setBackgroundScaled, setBackgroundScaledMode
*/
void QCPAxisRect::drawBackground( QCPPainter* painter )
{
// draw background fill:
if( mBackgroundBrush != Qt::NoBrush )
painter->fillRect( mRect, mBackgroundBrush );
// draw background pixmap (on top of fill, if brush specified):
if( !mBackgroundPixmap.isNull() )
{
if( mBackgroundScaled )
{
// check whether mScaledBackground needs to be updated:
QSize scaledSize( mBackgroundPixmap.size() );
scaledSize.scale( mRect.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode );
if( mScaledBackgroundPixmap.size() != scaledSize )
mScaledBackgroundPixmap = mBackgroundPixmap.scaled( mRect.size(), mBackgroundScaledMode,
Qt::SmoothTransformation );
painter->drawPixmap(
mRect.topLeft(), mScaledBackgroundPixmap,
QRect( 0, 0, mRect.width(), mRect.height() ) & mScaledBackgroundPixmap.rect() );
}
else
{
painter->drawPixmap( mRect.topLeft(), mBackgroundPixmap,
QRect( 0, 0, mRect.width(), mRect.height() ) );
}
}
}
/*! \internal
This function makes sure multiple axes on the side specified with \a type
don't collide, but are
distributed according to their respective space requirement
(QCPAxis::calculateMargin).
It does this by setting an appropriate offset (\ref QCPAxis::setOffset) on all
axes except the
one with index zero.
This function is called by \ref calculateAutoMargin.
*/
void QCPAxisRect::updateAxesOffset( QCPAxis::AxisType type )
{
const QList<QCPAxis*> axesList = mAxes.value( type );
if( axesList.isEmpty() )
return;
bool isFirstVisible = !axesList.first()->visible(); // if the first axis is
// visible, the second
// axis (which is where
// the loop starts) isn't the first visible axis, so initialize
// with false
for( int i = 1; i < axesList.size(); ++i )
{
int offset = axesList.at( i - 1 )->offset() + axesList.at( i - 1 )->calculateMargin();
if( axesList.at( i )->visible() ) // only add inner tick length to offset if
// this axis is visible and it's not the
// first visible one (might happen if true first axis is invisible)
{
if( !isFirstVisible )
offset += axesList.at( i )->tickLengthIn();
isFirstVisible = false;
}
axesList.at( i )->setOffset( offset );
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
int QCPAxisRect::calculateAutoMargin( QCP::MarginSide side )
{
if( !mAutoMargins.testFlag( side ) )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Called with side that isn't specified as auto margin";
updateAxesOffset( QCPAxis::marginSideToAxisType( side ) );
// note: only need to look at the last (outer most) axis to determine the
// total margin, due to updateAxisOffset call
const QList<QCPAxis*> axesList = mAxes.value( QCPAxis::marginSideToAxisType( side ) );
if( axesList.size() > 0 )
return axesList.last()->offset() + axesList.last()->calculateMargin();
else
return 0;
}
/*! \internal
Event handler for when a mouse button is pressed on the axis rect. If the left
mouse button is
pressed, the range dragging interaction is initialized (the actual range
manipulation happens in
the \ref mouseMoveEvent).
The mDragging flag is set to true and some anchor points are set that are
needed to determine the
distance the mouse was dragged in the mouse move/release events later.
\see mouseMoveEvent, mouseReleaseEvent
*/
void QCPAxisRect::mousePressEvent( QMouseEvent* event )
{
mDragStart = event->pos(); // need this even when not LeftButton is pressed,
// to determine in releaseEvent whether it
// was a full click (no position change between press and release)
if( event->buttons() & Qt::LeftButton )
{
mDragging = true;
// initialize antialiasing backup in case we start dragging:
if( mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag() )
{
mAADragBackup = mParentPlot->antialiasedElements();
mNotAADragBackup = mParentPlot->notAntialiasedElements();
}
// Mouse range dragging interaction:
if( mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag( QCP::iRangeDrag ) )
{
if( mRangeDragHorzAxis )
mDragStartHorzRange = mRangeDragHorzAxis.data()->range();
if( mRangeDragVertAxis )
mDragStartVertRange = mRangeDragVertAxis.data()->range();
}
}
}
/*! \internal
Event handler for when the mouse is moved on the axis rect. If range dragging
was activated in a
preceding \ref mousePressEvent, the range is moved accordingly.
\see mousePressEvent, mouseReleaseEvent
*/
void QCPAxisRect::mouseMoveEvent( QMouseEvent* event )
{
// Mouse range dragging interaction:
if( mDragging && mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag( QCP::iRangeDrag ) )
{
if( mRangeDrag.testFlag( Qt::Horizontal ) )
{
if( QCPAxis* rangeDragHorzAxis = mRangeDragHorzAxis.data() )
{
if( rangeDragHorzAxis->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLinear )
{
double diff = rangeDragHorzAxis->pixelToCoord( mDragStart.x() ) -
rangeDragHorzAxis->pixelToCoord( event->pos().x() );
rangeDragHorzAxis->setRange( mDragStartHorzRange.lower + diff,
mDragStartHorzRange.upper + diff );
}
else if( rangeDragHorzAxis->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic )
{
double diff = rangeDragHorzAxis->pixelToCoord( mDragStart.x() ) /
rangeDragHorzAxis->pixelToCoord( event->pos().x() );
rangeDragHorzAxis->setRange( mDragStartHorzRange.lower * diff,
mDragStartHorzRange.upper * diff );
}
}
}
if( mRangeDrag.testFlag( Qt::Vertical ) )
{
if( QCPAxis* rangeDragVertAxis = mRangeDragVertAxis.data() )
{
if( rangeDragVertAxis->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLinear )
{
double diff = rangeDragVertAxis->pixelToCoord( mDragStart.y() ) -
rangeDragVertAxis->pixelToCoord( event->pos().y() );
rangeDragVertAxis->setRange( mDragStartVertRange.lower + diff,
mDragStartVertRange.upper + diff );
}
else if( rangeDragVertAxis->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic )
{
double diff = rangeDragVertAxis->pixelToCoord( mDragStart.y() ) /
rangeDragVertAxis->pixelToCoord( event->pos().y() );
rangeDragVertAxis->setRange( mDragStartVertRange.lower * diff,
mDragStartVertRange.upper * diff );
}
}
}
if( mRangeDrag != 0 ) // if either vertical or horizontal drag was enabled, do a replot
{
if( mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag() )
mParentPlot->setNotAntialiasedElements( QCP::aeAll );
mParentPlot->replot();
}
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAxisRect::mouseReleaseEvent( QMouseEvent* event )
{
Q_UNUSED( event )
mDragging = false;
if( mParentPlot->noAntialiasingOnDrag() )
{
mParentPlot->setAntialiasedElements( mAADragBackup );
mParentPlot->setNotAntialiasedElements( mNotAADragBackup );
}
}
/*! \internal
Event handler for mouse wheel events. If rangeZoom is Qt::Horizontal,
Qt::Vertical or both, the
ranges of the axes defined as rangeZoomHorzAxis and rangeZoomVertAxis are
scaled. The center of
the scaling operation is the current cursor position inside the axis rect. The
scaling factor is
dependant on the mouse wheel delta (which direction the wheel was rotated) to
provide a natural
zooming feel. The Strength of the zoom can be controlled via \ref
setRangeZoomFactor.
Note, that event->delta() is usually +/-120 for single rotation steps.
However, if the mouse
wheel is turned rapidly, many steps may bunch up to one event, so the
event->delta() may then be
multiples of 120. This is taken into account here, by calculating \a
wheelSteps and using it as
exponent of the range zoom factor. This takes care of the wheel direction
automatically, by
inverting the factor, when the wheel step is negative (f^-1 = 1/f).
*/
void QCPAxisRect::wheelEvent( QWheelEvent* event )
{
// Mouse range zooming interaction:
if( mParentPlot->interactions().testFlag( QCP::iRangeZoom ) )
{
if( mRangeZoom != 0 )
{
double factor;
double wheelSteps = event->delta() / 120.0; // a single step delta is +/-120 usually
if( mRangeZoom.testFlag( Qt::Horizontal ) )
{
factor = pow( mRangeZoomFactorHorz, wheelSteps );
if( mRangeZoomHorzAxis.data() )
mRangeZoomHorzAxis.data()->scaleRange(
factor, mRangeZoomHorzAxis.data()->pixelToCoord( event->pos().x() ) );
}
if( mRangeZoom.testFlag( Qt::Vertical ) )
{
factor = pow( mRangeZoomFactorVert, wheelSteps );
if( mRangeZoomVertAxis.data() )
mRangeZoomVertAxis.data()->scaleRange(
factor, mRangeZoomVertAxis.data()->pixelToCoord( event->pos().y() ) );
}
mParentPlot->replot();
}
}
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPAbstractLegendItem
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPAbstractLegendItem
\brief The abstract base class for all entries in a QCPLegend.
It defines a very basic interface for entries in a QCPLegend. For representing
plottables in the
legend, the subclass \ref QCPPlottableLegendItem is more suitable.
Only derive directly from this class when you need absolute freedom (e.g. a
custom legend entry
that's not even associated with a plottable).
You must implement the following pure virtual functions:
\li \ref draw (from QCPLayerable)
You inherit the following members you may use:
<table>
<tr>
<td>QCPLegend *\b mParentLegend</td>
<td>A pointer to the parent QCPLegend.</td>
</tr><tr>
<td>QFont \b mFont</td>
<td>The generic font of the item. You should use this font for all or at
least the most prominent text of the
item.</td>
</tr>
</table>
*/
/* start of documentation of signals */
/*! \fn void QCPAbstractLegendItem::selectionChanged(bool selected)
This signal is emitted when the selection state of this legend item has
changed, either by user
interaction or by a direct call to \ref setSelected.
*/
/* end of documentation of signals */
/*!
Constructs a QCPAbstractLegendItem and associates it with the QCPLegend \a
parent. This does not
cause the item to be added to \a parent, so \ref QCPLegend::addItem must be
called separately.
*/
QCPAbstractLegendItem::QCPAbstractLegendItem( QCPLegend* parent )
: QCPLayoutElement( parent->parentPlot() )
, mParentLegend( parent )
, mFont( parent->font() )
, mTextColor( parent->textColor() )
, mSelectedFont( parent->selectedFont() )
, mSelectedTextColor( parent->selectedTextColor() )
, mSelectable( true )
, mSelected( false )
{
setLayer( "legend" );
setMargins( QMargins( 8, 2, 8, 2 ) );
}
/*!
Sets the default font of this specific legend item to \a font.
\see setTextColor, QCPLegend::setFont
*/
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setFont( const QFont& font )
{
mFont = font;
}
/*!
Sets the default text color of this specific legend item to \a color.
\see setFont, QCPLegend::setTextColor
*/
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setTextColor( const QColor& color )
{
mTextColor = color;
}
/*!
When this legend item is selected, \a font is used to draw generic text,
instead of the normal
font set with \ref setFont.
\see setFont, QCPLegend::setSelectedFont
*/
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectedFont( const QFont& font )
{
mSelectedFont = font;
}
/*!
When this legend item is selected, \a color is used to draw generic text,
instead of the normal
color set with \ref setTextColor.
\see setTextColor, QCPLegend::setSelectedTextColor
*/
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectedTextColor( const QColor& color )
{
mSelectedTextColor = color;
}
/*!
Sets whether this specific legend item is selectable.
\see setSelectedParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectable( bool selectable )
{
if( mSelectable != selectable )
{
mSelectable = selectable;
emit selectableChanged( mSelectable );
}
}
/*!
Sets whether this specific legend item is selected.
It is possible to set the selection state of this item by calling this
function directly, even if
setSelectable is set to false.
\see setSelectableParts, QCustomPlot::setInteractions
*/
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelected( bool selected )
{
if( mSelected != selected )
{
mSelected = selected;
emit selectionChanged( mSelected );
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPAbstractLegendItem::selectTest( const QPointF& pos,
bool onlySelectable,
QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( !mParentPlot )
return -1;
if( onlySelectable &&
( !mSelectable || !mParentLegend->selectableParts().testFlag( QCPLegend::spItems ) ) )
return -1;
if( mRect.contains( pos.toPoint() ) )
return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99;
else
return -1;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
applyAntialiasingHint( painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeLegendItems );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QRect QCPAbstractLegendItem::clipRect() const
{
return mOuterRect;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::selectEvent( QMouseEvent* event,
bool additive,
const QVariant& details,
bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
Q_UNUSED( event )
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( mSelectable && mParentLegend->selectableParts().testFlag( QCPLegend::spItems ) )
{
bool selBefore = mSelected;
setSelected( additive ? !mSelected : true );
if( selectionStateChanged )
*selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPAbstractLegendItem::deselectEvent( bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
if( mSelectable && mParentLegend->selectableParts().testFlag( QCPLegend::spItems ) )
{
bool selBefore = mSelected;
setSelected( false );
if( selectionStateChanged )
*selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
}
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPPlottableLegendItem
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPPlottableLegendItem
\brief A legend item representing a plottable with an icon and the plottable
name.
This is the standard legend item for plottables. It displays an icon of the
plottable next to the
plottable name. The icon is drawn by the respective plottable itself (\ref
QCPAbstractPlottable::drawLegendIcon), and tries to give an intuitive symbol
for the plottable.
For example, the QCPGraph draws a centered horizontal line and/or a single
scatter point in the
middle.
Legend items of this type are always associated with one plottable
(retrievable via the
plottable() function and settable with the constructor). You may change the
font of the plottable
name with \ref setFont. Icon padding and border pen is taken from the parent
QCPLegend, see \ref
QCPLegend::setIconBorderPen and \ref QCPLegend::setIconTextPadding.
The function \ref QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend/\ref
QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend
creates/removes legend items of this type in the default implementation.
However, these functions
may be reimplemented such that a different kind of legend item (e.g a direct
subclass of
QCPAbstractLegendItem) is used for that plottable.
Since QCPLegend is based on QCPLayoutGrid, a legend item itself is just a
subclass of
QCPLayoutElement. While it could be added to a legend (or any other layout)
via the normal layout
interface, QCPLegend has specialized functions for handling legend items
conveniently, see the
documentation of \ref QCPLegend.
*/
/*!
Creates a new legend item associated with \a plottable.
Once it's created, it can be added to the legend via \ref QCPLegend::addItem.
A more convenient way of adding/removing a plottable to/from the legend is via
the functions \ref
QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend and \ref
QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend.
*/
QCPPlottableLegendItem::QCPPlottableLegendItem( QCPLegend* parent, QCPAbstractPlottable* plottable )
: QCPAbstractLegendItem( parent ), mPlottable( plottable )
{
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that shall be used to draw the icon border, taking into
account the selection
state of this item.
*/
QPen QCPPlottableLegendItem::getIconBorderPen() const
{
return mSelected ? mParentLegend->selectedIconBorderPen() : mParentLegend->iconBorderPen();
}
/*! \internal
Returns the text color that shall be used to draw text, taking into account
the selection state
of this item.
*/
QColor QCPPlottableLegendItem::getTextColor() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedTextColor : mTextColor;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the font that shall be used to draw text, taking into account the
selection state of this
item.
*/
QFont QCPPlottableLegendItem::getFont() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedFont : mFont;
}
/*! \internal
Draws the item with \a painter. The size and position of the drawn legend item
is defined by the
parent layout (typically a \ref QCPLegend) and the \ref minimumSizeHint and
\ref maximumSizeHint
of this legend item.
*/
void QCPPlottableLegendItem::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
if( !mPlottable )
return;
painter->setFont( getFont() );
painter->setPen( QPen( getTextColor() ) );
QSizeF iconSize = mParentLegend->iconSize();
QRectF textRect = painter->fontMetrics().boundingRect( 0, 0, 0, iconSize.height(),
Qt::TextDontClip, mPlottable->name() );
QRectF iconRect( mRect.topLeft(), iconSize );
int textHeight = qMax( textRect.height(), iconSize.height() ); // if text has smaller height than
// icon, center text vertically in
// icon height, else align tops
painter->drawText( mRect.x() + iconSize.width() + mParentLegend->iconTextPadding(), mRect.y(),
textRect.width(), textHeight, Qt::TextDontClip, mPlottable->name() );
// draw icon:
painter->save();
painter->setClipRect( iconRect, Qt::IntersectClip );
mPlottable->drawLegendIcon( painter, iconRect );
painter->restore();
// draw icon border:
if( getIconBorderPen().style() != Qt::NoPen )
{
painter->setPen( getIconBorderPen() );
painter->setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
painter->drawRect( iconRect );
}
}
/*! \internal
Calculates and returns the size of this item. This includes the icon, the text
and the padding in
between.
*/
QSize QCPPlottableLegendItem::minimumSizeHint() const
{
if( !mPlottable )
return QSize();
QSize result( 0, 0 );
QRect textRect;
QFontMetrics fontMetrics( getFont() );
QSize iconSize = mParentLegend->iconSize();
textRect =
fontMetrics.boundingRect( 0, 0, 0, iconSize.height(), Qt::TextDontClip, mPlottable->name() );
result.setWidth( iconSize.width() + mParentLegend->iconTextPadding() + textRect.width() +
mMargins.left() + mMargins.right() );
result.setHeight( qMax( textRect.height(), iconSize.height() ) + mMargins.top() +
mMargins.bottom() );
return result;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPLegend
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPLegend
\brief Manages a legend inside a QCustomPlot.
A legend is a small box somewhere in the plot which lists plottables with
their name and icon.
Normally, the legend is populated by calling \ref
QCPAbstractPlottable::addToLegend. The
respective legend item can be removed with \ref
QCPAbstractPlottable::removeFromLegend. However,
QCPLegend also offers an interface to add and manipulate legend items
directly: \ref item, \ref
itemWithPlottable, \ref itemCount, \ref addItem, \ref removeItem, etc.
The QCPLegend derives from QCPLayoutGrid and as such can be placed in any
position a
QCPLayoutElement may be positioned. The legend items are themselves
QCPLayoutElements which are
placed in the grid layout of the legend. QCPLegend only adds an interface
specialized for
handling child elements of type QCPAbstractLegendItem, as mentioned above. In
principle, any
other layout elements may also be added to a legend via the normal \ref
QCPLayoutGrid interface.
However, the QCPAbstractLegendItem-Interface will ignore those elements (e.g.
\ref itemCount will
only return the number of items with QCPAbstractLegendItems type).
By default, every QCustomPlot has one legend (QCustomPlot::legend) which is
placed in the inset
layout of the main axis rect (\ref QCPAxisRect::insetLayout). To move the
legend to another
position inside the axis rect, use the methods of the \ref QCPLayoutInset. To
move the legend
outside of the axis rect, place it anywhere else with the
QCPLayout/QCPLayoutElement interface.
*/
/* start of documentation of signals */
/*! \fn void QCPLegend::selectionChanged(QCPLegend::SelectableParts selection);
This signal is emitted when the selection state of this legend has changed.
\see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts
*/
/* end of documentation of signals */
/*!
Constructs a new QCPLegend instance with \a parentPlot as the containing plot
and default values.
Note that by default, QCustomPlot already contains a legend ready to be used
as
QCustomPlot::legend
*/
QCPLegend::QCPLegend()
{
setRowSpacing( 0 );
setColumnSpacing( 10 );
setMargins( QMargins( 2, 3, 2, 2 ) );
setAntialiased( false );
setIconSize( 32, 18 );
setIconTextPadding( 7 );
setSelectableParts( spLegendBox | spItems );
setSelectedParts( spNone );
setBorderPen( QPen( Qt::black ) );
setSelectedBorderPen( QPen( Qt::blue, 2 ) );
setIconBorderPen( Qt::NoPen );
setSelectedIconBorderPen( QPen( Qt::blue, 2 ) );
setBrush( Qt::white );
setSelectedBrush( Qt::white );
setTextColor( Qt::black );
setSelectedTextColor( Qt::blue );
}
QCPLegend::~QCPLegend()
{
clearItems();
if( mParentPlot )
mParentPlot->legendRemoved( this );
}
/* no doc for getter, see setSelectedParts */
QCPLegend::SelectableParts QCPLegend::selectedParts() const
{
// check whether any legend elements selected, if yes, add spItems to return
// value
bool hasSelectedItems = false;
for( int i = 0; i < itemCount(); ++i )
{
if( item( i ) && item( i )->selected() )
{
hasSelectedItems = true;
break;
}
}
if( hasSelectedItems )
return mSelectedParts | spItems;
else
return mSelectedParts & ~spItems;
}
/*!
Sets the pen, the border of the entire legend is drawn with.
*/
void QCPLegend::setBorderPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mBorderPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the brush of the legend background.
*/
void QCPLegend::setBrush( const QBrush& brush )
{
mBrush = brush;
}
/*!
Sets the default font of legend text. Legend items that draw text (e.g. the
name of a graph) will
use this font by default. However, a different font can be specified on a
per-item-basis by
accessing the specific legend item.
This function will also set \a font on all already existing legend items.
\see QCPAbstractLegendItem::setFont
*/
void QCPLegend::setFont( const QFont& font )
{
mFont = font;
for( int i = 0; i < itemCount(); ++i )
{
if( item( i ) )
item( i )->setFont( mFont );
}
}
/*!
Sets the default color of legend text. Legend items that draw text (e.g. the
name of a graph)
will use this color by default. However, a different colors can be specified
on a per-item-basis
by accessing the specific legend item.
This function will also set \a color on all already existing legend items.
\see QCPAbstractLegendItem::setTextColor
*/
void QCPLegend::setTextColor( const QColor& color )
{
mTextColor = color;
for( int i = 0; i < itemCount(); ++i )
{
if( item( i ) )
item( i )->setTextColor( color );
}
}
/*!
Sets the size of legend icons. Legend items that draw an icon (e.g. a visual
representation of the graph) will use this size by default.
*/
void QCPLegend::setIconSize( const QSize& size )
{
mIconSize = size;
}
/*! \overload
*/
void QCPLegend::setIconSize( int width, int height )
{
mIconSize.setWidth( width );
mIconSize.setHeight( height );
}
/*!
Sets the horizontal space in pixels between the legend icon and the text next
to it.
Legend items that draw an icon (e.g. a visual representation of the graph) and
text (e.g. the
name of the graph) will use this space by default.
*/
void QCPLegend::setIconTextPadding( int padding )
{
mIconTextPadding = padding;
}
/*!
Sets the pen used to draw a border around each legend icon. Legend items that
draw an
icon (e.g. a visual representation of the graph) will use this pen by default.
If no border is wanted, set this to \a Qt::NoPen.
*/
void QCPLegend::setIconBorderPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mIconBorderPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets whether the user can (de-)select the parts in \a selectable by clicking
on the QCustomPlot surface.
(When \ref QCustomPlot::setInteractions contains \ref QCP::iSelectLegend.)
However, even when \a selectable is set to a value not allowing the selection
of a specific part,
it is still possible to set the selection of this part manually, by calling
\ref setSelectedParts
directly.
\see SelectablePart, setSelectedParts
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectableParts( const SelectableParts& selectable )
{
if( mSelectableParts != selectable )
{
mSelectableParts = selectable;
emit selectableChanged( mSelectableParts );
}
}
/*!
Sets the selected state of the respective legend parts described by \ref
SelectablePart. When a part
is selected, it uses a different pen/font and brush. If some legend items are
selected and \a selected
doesn't contain \ref spItems, those items become deselected.
The entire selection mechanism is handled automatically when \ref
QCustomPlot::setInteractions
contains iSelectLegend. You only need to call this function when you wish to
change the selection
state manually.
This function can change the selection state of a part even when \ref
setSelectableParts was set to a
value that actually excludes the part.
emits the \ref selectionChanged signal when \a selected is different from the
previous selection state.
Note that it doesn't make sense to set the selected state \ref spItems here
when it wasn't set
before, because there's no way to specify which exact items to newly select.
Do this by calling
\ref QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelected directly on the legend item you wish
to select.
\see SelectablePart, setSelectableParts, selectTest, setSelectedBorderPen,
setSelectedIconBorderPen, setSelectedBrush,
setSelectedFont
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectedParts( const SelectableParts& selected )
{
SelectableParts newSelected = selected;
mSelectedParts = this->selectedParts(); // update mSelectedParts in case item
// selection changed
if( mSelectedParts != newSelected )
{
if( !mSelectedParts.testFlag( spItems ) &&
newSelected.testFlag( spItems ) ) // attempt to set spItems flag (can't do that)
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "spItems flag can not be set, it can only be "
"unset with this function";
newSelected &= ~spItems;
}
if( mSelectedParts.testFlag( spItems ) &&
!newSelected.testFlag( spItems ) ) // spItems flag was unset, so clear item selection
{
for( int i = 0; i < itemCount(); ++i )
{
if( item( i ) )
item( i )->setSelected( false );
}
}
mSelectedParts = newSelected;
emit selectionChanged( mSelectedParts );
}
}
/*!
When the legend box is selected, this pen is used to draw the border instead
of the normal pen
set via \ref setBorderPen.
\see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, setSelectedBrush
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectedBorderPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedBorderPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen legend items will use to draw their icon borders, when they are
selected.
\see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, setSelectedFont
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectedIconBorderPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedIconBorderPen = pen;
}
/*!
When the legend box is selected, this brush is used to draw the legend
background instead of the normal brush
set via \ref setBrush.
\see setSelectedParts, setSelectableParts, setSelectedBorderPen
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectedBrush( const QBrush& brush )
{
mSelectedBrush = brush;
}
/*!
Sets the default font that is used by legend items when they are selected.
This function will also set \a font on all already existing legend items.
\see setFont, QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectedFont
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectedFont( const QFont& font )
{
mSelectedFont = font;
for( int i = 0; i < itemCount(); ++i )
{
if( item( i ) )
item( i )->setSelectedFont( font );
}
}
/*!
Sets the default text color that is used by legend items when they are
selected.
This function will also set \a color on all already existing legend items.
\see setTextColor, QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelectedTextColor
*/
void QCPLegend::setSelectedTextColor( const QColor& color )
{
mSelectedTextColor = color;
for( int i = 0; i < itemCount(); ++i )
{
if( item( i ) )
item( i )->setSelectedTextColor( color );
}
}
/*!
Returns the item with index \a i.
\see itemCount
*/
QCPAbstractLegendItem* QCPLegend::item( int index ) const
{
return qobject_cast<QCPAbstractLegendItem*>( elementAt( index ) );
}
/*!
Returns the QCPPlottableLegendItem which is associated with \a plottable (e.g.
a \ref QCPGraph*).
If such an item isn't in the legend, returns 0.
\see hasItemWithPlottable
*/
QCPPlottableLegendItem* QCPLegend::itemWithPlottable( const QCPAbstractPlottable* plottable ) const
{
for( int i = 0; i < itemCount(); ++i )
{
if( QCPPlottableLegendItem* pli = qobject_cast<QCPPlottableLegendItem*>( item( i ) ) )
{
if( pli->plottable() == plottable )
return pli;
}
}
return 0;
}
/*!
Returns the number of items currently in the legend.
\see item
*/
int QCPLegend::itemCount() const
{
return elementCount();
}
/*!
Returns whether the legend contains \a itm.
*/
bool QCPLegend::hasItem( QCPAbstractLegendItem* item ) const
{
for( int i = 0; i < itemCount(); ++i )
{
if( item == this->item( i ) )
return true;
}
return false;
}
/*!
Returns whether the legend contains a QCPPlottableLegendItem which is
associated with \a plottable (e.g. a \ref
QCPGraph*).
If such an item isn't in the legend, returns false.
\see itemWithPlottable
*/
bool QCPLegend::hasItemWithPlottable( const QCPAbstractPlottable* plottable ) const
{
return itemWithPlottable( plottable );
}
/*!
Adds \a item to the legend, if it's not present already.
Returns true on sucess, i.e. if the item wasn't in the list already and has
been successfuly added.
The legend takes ownership of the item.
*/
bool QCPLegend::addItem( QCPAbstractLegendItem* item )
{
if( !hasItem( item ) )
{
return addElement( rowCount(), 0, item );
}
else
return false;
}
/*!
Removes the item with index \a index from the legend.
Returns true, if successful.
\see itemCount, clearItems
*/
bool QCPLegend::removeItem( int index )
{
if( QCPAbstractLegendItem* ali = item( index ) )
{
bool success = remove( ali );
simplify();
return success;
}
else
return false;
}
/*! \overload
Removes \a item from the legend.
Returns true, if successful.
\see clearItems
*/
bool QCPLegend::removeItem( QCPAbstractLegendItem* item )
{
bool success = remove( item );
simplify();
return success;
}
/*!
Removes all items from the legend.
*/
void QCPLegend::clearItems()
{
for( int i = itemCount() - 1; i >= 0; --i )
removeItem( i );
}
/*!
Returns the legend items that are currently selected. If no items are
selected,
the list is empty.
\see QCPAbstractLegendItem::setSelected, setSelectable
*/
QList<QCPAbstractLegendItem*> QCPLegend::selectedItems() const
{
QList<QCPAbstractLegendItem*> result;
for( int i = 0; i < itemCount(); ++i )
{
if( QCPAbstractLegendItem* ali = item( i ) )
{
if( ali->selected() )
result.append( ali );
}
}
return result;
}
/*! \internal
A convenience function to easily set the QPainter::Antialiased hint on the
provided \a painter
before drawing main legend elements.
This is the antialiasing state the painter passed to the \ref draw method is
in by default.
This function takes into account the local setting of the antialiasing flag as
well as the
overrides set with \ref QCustomPlot::setAntialiasedElements and \ref
QCustomPlot::setNotAntialiasedElements.
\see setAntialiased
*/
void QCPLegend::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
applyAntialiasingHint( painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeLegend );
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen used to paint the border of the legend, taking into account
the selection state
of the legend box.
*/
QPen QCPLegend::getBorderPen() const
{
return mSelectedParts.testFlag( spLegendBox ) ? mSelectedBorderPen : mBorderPen;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the brush used to paint the background of the legend, taking into
account the selection
state of the legend box.
*/
QBrush QCPLegend::getBrush() const
{
return mSelectedParts.testFlag( spLegendBox ) ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush;
}
/*! \internal
Draws the legend box with the provided \a painter. The individual legend items
are layerables
themselves, thus are drawn independently.
*/
void QCPLegend::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
// draw background rect:
painter->setBrush( getBrush() );
painter->setPen( getBorderPen() );
painter->drawRect( mOuterRect );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPLegend::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
if( !mParentPlot )
return -1;
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectableParts.testFlag( spLegendBox ) )
return -1;
if( mOuterRect.contains( pos.toPoint() ) )
{
if( details )
details->setValue( spLegendBox );
return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99;
}
return -1;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPLegend::selectEvent( QMouseEvent* event,
bool additive,
const QVariant& details,
bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
Q_UNUSED( event )
mSelectedParts = selectedParts(); // in case item selection has changed
if( details.value<SelectablePart>() == spLegendBox && mSelectableParts.testFlag( spLegendBox ) )
{
SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts;
setSelectedParts( additive ? mSelectedParts ^ spLegendBox
: mSelectedParts | spLegendBox ); // no need to
// unset spItems
// in !additive
// case, because
// they will be deselected by QCustomPlot (they're
// normal QCPLayerables with own deselectEvent)
if( selectionStateChanged )
*selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore;
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPLegend::deselectEvent( bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
mSelectedParts = selectedParts(); // in case item selection has changed
if( mSelectableParts.testFlag( spLegendBox ) )
{
SelectableParts selBefore = mSelectedParts;
setSelectedParts( selectedParts() & ~spLegendBox );
if( selectionStateChanged )
*selectionStateChanged = mSelectedParts != selBefore;
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCP::Interaction QCPLegend::selectionCategory() const
{
return QCP::iSelectLegend;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCP::Interaction QCPAbstractLegendItem::selectionCategory() const
{
return QCP::iSelectLegend;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPLegend::parentPlotInitialized( QCustomPlot* parentPlot ){Q_UNUSED( parentPlot )}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPPlotTitle
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPPlotTitle
\brief A layout element displaying a plot title text
The text may be specified with \ref setText, theformatting can be controlled
with \ref setFont
and \ref setTextColor.
A plot title can be added as follows:
\code
customPlot->plotLayout()->insertRow(0); // inserts an empty row above the
default axis rect
customPlot->plotLayout()->addElement(0, 0, new QCPPlotTitle(customPlot, "Your
Plot Title"));
\endcode
Since a plot title is a common requirement, QCustomPlot offers specialized
selection signals for
easy interaction with QCPPlotTitle. If a layout element of type QCPPlotTitle
is clicked, the
signal \ref QCustomPlot::titleClick is emitted. A double click emits the \ref
QCustomPlot::titleDoubleClick signal.
*/
/* start documentation of signals */
/*! \fn void QCPPlotTitle::selectionChanged(bool selected)
This signal is emitted when the selection state has changed to \a selected,
either by user
interaction or by a direct call to \ref setSelected.
\see setSelected, setSelectable
*/
/* end documentation of signals */
/*!
Creates a new QCPPlotTitle instance and sets default values. The initial text
is empty (\ref setText).
To set the title text in the constructor, rather use \ref
QCPPlotTitle(QCustomPlot *parentPlot, const QString &text).
*/
QCPPlotTitle::QCPPlotTitle( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QCPLayoutElement( parentPlot )
, mFont( QFont( "sans serif", 13 * 1.5, QFont::Bold ) )
, mTextColor( Qt::black )
, mSelectedFont( QFont( "sans serif", 13 * 1.6, QFont::Bold ) )
, mSelectedTextColor( Qt::blue )
, mSelectable( false )
, mSelected( false )
{
if( parentPlot )
{
setLayer( parentPlot->currentLayer() );
mFont = QFont( parentPlot->font().family(), parentPlot->font().pointSize() * 1.5, QFont::Bold );
mSelectedFont =
QFont( parentPlot->font().family(), parentPlot->font().pointSize() * 1.6, QFont::Bold );
}
setMargins( QMargins( 5, 5, 5, 0 ) );
}
/*! \overload
Creates a new QCPPlotTitle instance and sets default values. The initial text
is set to \a text.
*/
QCPPlotTitle::QCPPlotTitle( QCustomPlot* parentPlot, const QString& text )
: QCPLayoutElement( parentPlot )
, mText( text )
, mFont(
QFont( parentPlot->font().family(), parentPlot->font().pointSize() * 1.5, QFont::Bold ) )
, mTextColor( Qt::black )
, mSelectedFont(
QFont( parentPlot->font().family(), parentPlot->font().pointSize() * 1.6, QFont::Bold ) )
, mSelectedTextColor( Qt::blue )
, mSelectable( false )
, mSelected( false )
{
setLayer( "axes" );
setMargins( QMargins( 5, 5, 5, 0 ) );
}
/*!
Sets the text that will be displayed to \a text. Multiple lines can be created
by insertion of "\n".
\see setFont, setTextColor
*/
void QCPPlotTitle::setText( const QString& text )
{
mText = text;
}
/*!
Sets the \a font of the title text.
\see setTextColor, setSelectedFont
*/
void QCPPlotTitle::setFont( const QFont& font )
{
mFont = font;
}
/*!
Sets the \a color of the title text.
\see setFont, setSelectedTextColor
*/
void QCPPlotTitle::setTextColor( const QColor& color )
{
mTextColor = color;
}
/*!
Sets the \a font of the title text that will be used if the plot title is
selected (\ref setSelected).
\see setFont
*/
void QCPPlotTitle::setSelectedFont( const QFont& font )
{
mSelectedFont = font;
}
/*!
Sets the \a color of the title text that will be used if the plot title is
selected (\ref setSelected).
\see setTextColor
*/
void QCPPlotTitle::setSelectedTextColor( const QColor& color )
{
mSelectedTextColor = color;
}
/*!
Sets whether the user may select this plot title to \a selectable.
Note that even when \a selectable is set to <tt>false</tt>, the selection
state may be changed
programmatically via \ref setSelected.
*/
void QCPPlotTitle::setSelectable( bool selectable )
{
if( mSelectable != selectable )
{
mSelectable = selectable;
emit selectableChanged( mSelectable );
}
}
/*!
Sets the selection state of this plot title to \a selected. If the selection
has changed, \ref
selectionChanged is emitted.
Note that this function can change the selection state independently of the
current \ref
setSelectable state.
*/
void QCPPlotTitle::setSelected( bool selected )
{
if( mSelected != selected )
{
mSelected = selected;
emit selectionChanged( mSelected );
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPlotTitle::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
applyAntialiasingHint( painter, mAntialiased, QCP::aeNone );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPlotTitle::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
painter->setFont( mainFont() );
painter->setPen( QPen( mainTextColor() ) );
painter->drawText( mRect, Qt::AlignCenter, mText, &mTextBoundingRect );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QSize QCPPlotTitle::minimumSizeHint() const
{
QFontMetrics metrics( mFont );
QSize result = metrics.boundingRect( 0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::AlignCenter, mText ).size();
result.rwidth() += mMargins.left() + mMargins.right();
result.rheight() += mMargins.top() + mMargins.bottom();
return result;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QSize QCPPlotTitle::maximumSizeHint() const
{
QFontMetrics metrics( mFont );
QSize result = metrics.boundingRect( 0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::AlignCenter, mText ).size();
result.rheight() += mMargins.top() + mMargins.bottom();
result.setWidth( QWIDGETSIZE_MAX );
return result;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPlotTitle::selectEvent( QMouseEvent* event,
bool additive,
const QVariant& details,
bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
Q_UNUSED( event )
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( mSelectable )
{
bool selBefore = mSelected;
setSelected( additive ? !mSelected : true );
if( selectionStateChanged )
*selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPPlotTitle::deselectEvent( bool* selectionStateChanged )
{
if( mSelectable )
{
bool selBefore = mSelected;
setSelected( false );
if( selectionStateChanged )
*selectionStateChanged = mSelected != selBefore;
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPPlotTitle::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectable )
return -1;
if( mTextBoundingRect.contains( pos.toPoint() ) )
return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99;
else
return -1;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the main font to be used. This is mSelectedFont if \ref setSelected is
set to
<tt>true</tt>, else mFont is returned.
*/
QFont QCPPlotTitle::mainFont() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedFont : mFont;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the main color to be used. This is mSelectedTextColor if \ref
setSelected is set to
<tt>true</tt>, else mTextColor is returned.
*/
QColor QCPPlotTitle::mainTextColor() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedTextColor : mTextColor;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPColorScale
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPColorScale
\brief A color scale for use with color coding data such as QCPColorMap
This layout element can be placed on the plot to correlate a color gradient
with data values. It
is usually used in combination with one or multiple \ref QCPColorMap
"QCPColorMaps".
\image html QCPColorScale.png
The color scale can be either horizontal or vertical, as shown in the image
above. The
orientation and the side where the numbers appear is controlled with \ref
setType.
Use \ref QCPColorMap::setColorScale to connect a color map with a color scale.
Once they are
connected, they share their gradient, data range and data scale type (\ref
setGradient, \ref
setDataRange, \ref setDataScaleType). Multiple color maps may be associated
with a single color
scale, to make them all synchronize these properties.
To have finer control over the number display and axis behaviour, you can
directly access the
\ref axis. See the documentation of QCPAxis for details about configuring
axes. For example, if
you want to change the number of automatically generated ticks, call
\code
colorScale->axis()->setAutoTickCount(3);
\endcode
Placing a color scale next to the main axis rect works like with any other
layout element:
\code
QCPColorScale *colorScale = new QCPColorScale(customPlot);
customPlot->plotLayout()->addElement(0, 1, colorScale);
colorScale->setLabel("Some Label Text");
\endcode
In this case we have placed it to the right of the default axis rect, so it
wasn't necessary to
call \ref setType, since \ref QCPAxis::atRight is already the default. The
text next to the color
scale can be set with \ref setLabel.
For optimum appearance (like in the image above), it may be desirable to line
up the axis rect and
the borders of the color scale. Use a \ref QCPMarginGroup to achieve this:
\code
QCPMarginGroup *group = new QCPMarginGroup(customPlot);
colorScale->setMarginGroup(QCP::msTop|QCP::msBottom, group);
customPlot->axisRect()->setMarginGroup(QCP::msTop|QCP::msBottom, group);
\endcode
Color scales are initialized with a non-zero minimum top and bottom margin
(\ref
setMinimumMargins), because vertical color scales are most common and the
minimum top/bottom
margin makes sure it keeps some distance to the top/bottom widget border. So
if you change to a
horizontal color scale by setting \ref setType to \ref QCPAxis::atBottom or
\ref QCPAxis::atTop, you
might want to also change the minimum margins accordingly, e.g. \ref
setMinimumMargins(QMargins(6, 0, 6, 0)).
*/
/* start documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn QCPAxis *QCPColorScale::axis() const
Returns the internal \ref QCPAxis instance of this color scale. You can access
it to alter the
appearance and behaviour of the axis. \ref QCPColorScale duplicates some
properties in its
interface for convenience. Those are \ref setDataRange (\ref
QCPAxis::setRange), \ref
setDataScaleType (\ref QCPAxis::setScaleType), and the method \ref setLabel
(\ref
QCPAxis::setLabel). As they each are connected, it does not matter whether you
use the method on
the QCPColorScale or on its QCPAxis.
If the type of the color scale is changed with \ref setType, the axis returned
by this method
will change, too, to either the left, right, bottom or top axis, depending on
which type was set.
*/
/* end documentation of signals */
/* start documentation of signals */
/*! \fn void QCPColorScale::dataRangeChanged(QCPRange newRange);
This signal is emitted when the data range changes.
\see setDataRange
*/
/*! \fn void QCPColorScale::dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType);
This signal is emitted when the data scale type changes.
\see setDataScaleType
*/
/*! \fn void QCPColorScale::gradientChanged(QCPColorGradient newGradient);
This signal is emitted when the gradient changes.
\see setGradient
*/
/* end documentation of signals */
/*!
Constructs a new QCPColorScale.
*/
QCPColorScale::QCPColorScale( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QCPLayoutElement( parentPlot )
, mType( QCPAxis::atTop )
, // set to atTop such that setType(QCPAxis::atRight)
// below doesn't skip work because it
// thinks it's already atRight
mDataScaleType( QCPAxis::stLinear )
, mBarWidth( 20 )
, mAxisRect( new QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate( this ) )
{
setMinimumMargins( QMargins( 0, 6, 0, 6 ) ); // for default right color scale
// types, keep some room at bottom
// and top
// (important if no margin group is used)
setType( QCPAxis::atRight );
setDataRange( QCPRange( 0, 6 ) );
}
QCPColorScale::~QCPColorScale()
{
delete mAxisRect;
}
/* undocumented getter */
QString QCPColorScale::label() const
{
if( !mColorAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal color axis undefined";
return QString();
}
return mColorAxis.data()->label();
}
/* undocumented getter */
bool QCPColorScale::rangeDrag() const
{
if( !mAxisRect )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
return false;
}
return mAxisRect.data()->rangeDrag().testFlag( QCPAxis::orientation( mType ) ) &&
mAxisRect.data()->rangeDragAxis( QCPAxis::orientation( mType ) ) &&
mAxisRect.data()->rangeDragAxis( QCPAxis::orientation( mType ) )->orientation() ==
QCPAxis::orientation( mType );
}
/* undocumented getter */
bool QCPColorScale::rangeZoom() const
{
if( !mAxisRect )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
return false;
}
return mAxisRect.data()->rangeZoom().testFlag( QCPAxis::orientation( mType ) ) &&
mAxisRect.data()->rangeZoomAxis( QCPAxis::orientation( mType ) ) &&
mAxisRect.data()->rangeZoomAxis( QCPAxis::orientation( mType ) )->orientation() ==
QCPAxis::orientation( mType );
}
/*!
Sets at which side of the color scale the axis is placed, and thus also its
orientation.
Note that after setting \a type to a different value, the axis returned by
\ref axis() will
be a different one. The new axis will adopt the following properties from the
previous axis: The
range, scale type, log base and label.
*/
void QCPColorScale::setType( QCPAxis::AxisType type )
{
if( !mAxisRect )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
return;
}
if( mType != type )
{
mType = type;
QCPRange rangeTransfer( 0, 6 );
double logBaseTransfer = 10;
QString labelTransfer;
// revert some settings on old axis:
if( mColorAxis )
{
rangeTransfer = mColorAxis.data()->range();
labelTransfer = mColorAxis.data()->label();
logBaseTransfer = mColorAxis.data()->scaleLogBase();
mColorAxis.data()->setLabel( "" );
disconnect( mColorAxis.data(), SIGNAL( rangeChanged( QCPRange ) ), this,
SLOT( setDataRange( QCPRange ) ) );
disconnect( mColorAxis.data(), SIGNAL( scaleTypeChanged( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ), this,
SLOT( setDataScaleType( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ) );
}
foreach( QCPAxis::AxisType atype, QList<QCPAxis::AxisType>()
<< QCPAxis::atLeft << QCPAxis::atRight
<< QCPAxis::atBottom << QCPAxis::atTop )
{
mAxisRect.data()->axis( atype )->setTicks( atype == mType );
mAxisRect.data()->axis( atype )->setTickLabels( atype == mType );
}
// set new mColorAxis pointer:
mColorAxis = mAxisRect.data()->axis( mType );
// transfer settings to new axis:
mColorAxis.data()->setRange( rangeTransfer ); // transfer range of old axis to
// new one (necessary if axis
// changes
// from vertical to horizontal or vice versa)
mColorAxis.data()->setLabel( labelTransfer );
mColorAxis.data()->setScaleLogBase( logBaseTransfer ); // scaleType is
// synchronized among
// axes in realtime via
// signals (connected in QCPColorScale ctor), so we only
// need to take care of log base here
connect( mColorAxis.data(), SIGNAL( rangeChanged( QCPRange ) ), this,
SLOT( setDataRange( QCPRange ) ) );
connect( mColorAxis.data(), SIGNAL( scaleTypeChanged( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ), this,
SLOT( setDataScaleType( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ) );
mAxisRect.data()->setRangeDragAxes(
QCPAxis::orientation( mType ) == Qt::Horizontal ? mColorAxis.data() : 0,
QCPAxis::orientation( mType ) == Qt::Vertical ? mColorAxis.data() : 0 );
}
}
/*!
Sets the range spanned by the color gradient and that is shown by the axis in
the color scale.
It is equivalent to calling QCPColorMap::setDataRange on any of the connected
color maps. It is
also equivalent to directly accessing the \ref axis and setting its range with
\ref
QCPAxis::setRange.
\see setDataScaleType, setGradient, rescaleDataRange
*/
void QCPColorScale::setDataRange( const QCPRange& dataRange )
{
if( mDataRange.lower != dataRange.lower || mDataRange.upper != dataRange.upper )
{
mDataRange = dataRange;
if( mColorAxis )
mColorAxis.data()->setRange( mDataRange );
emit dataRangeChanged( mDataRange );
}
}
/*!
Sets the scale type of the color scale, i.e. whether values are linearly
associated with colors
or logarithmically.
It is equivalent to calling QCPColorMap::setDataScaleType on any of the
connected color maps. It is
also equivalent to directly accessing the \ref axis and setting its scale type
with \ref
QCPAxis::setScaleType.
\see setDataRange, setGradient
*/
void QCPColorScale::setDataScaleType( QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType )
{
if( mDataScaleType != scaleType )
{
mDataScaleType = scaleType;
if( mColorAxis )
mColorAxis.data()->setScaleType( mDataScaleType );
if( mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic )
setDataRange( mDataRange.sanitizedForLogScale() );
emit dataScaleTypeChanged( mDataScaleType );
}
}
/*!
Sets the color gradient that will be used to represent data values.
It is equivalent to calling QCPColorMap::setGradient on any of the connected
color maps.
\see setDataRange, setDataScaleType
*/
void QCPColorScale::setGradient( const QCPColorGradient& gradient )
{
if( mGradient != gradient )
{
mGradient = gradient;
if( mAxisRect )
mAxisRect.data()->mGradientImageInvalidated = true;
emit gradientChanged( mGradient );
}
}
/*!
Sets the axis label of the color scale. This is equivalent to calling \ref
QCPAxis::setLabel on
the internal \ref axis.
*/
void QCPColorScale::setLabel( const QString& str )
{
if( !mColorAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal color axis undefined";
return;
}
mColorAxis.data()->setLabel( str );
}
/*!
Sets the width (or height, for horizontal color scales) the bar where the
gradient is displayed
will have.
*/
void QCPColorScale::setBarWidth( int width )
{
mBarWidth = width;
}
/*!
Sets whether the user can drag the data range (\ref setDataRange).
Note that \ref QCP::iRangeDrag must be in the QCustomPlot's interactions (\ref
QCustomPlot::setInteractions) to allow range dragging.
*/
void QCPColorScale::setRangeDrag( bool enabled )
{
if( !mAxisRect )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
return;
}
if( enabled )
mAxisRect.data()->setRangeDrag( QCPAxis::orientation( mType ) );
else
mAxisRect.data()->setRangeDrag( 0 );
}
/*!
Sets whether the user can zoom the data range (\ref setDataRange) by scrolling
the mouse wheel.
Note that \ref QCP::iRangeZoom must be in the QCustomPlot's interactions (\ref
QCustomPlot::setInteractions) to allow range dragging.
*/
void QCPColorScale::setRangeZoom( bool enabled )
{
if( !mAxisRect )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
return;
}
if( enabled )
mAxisRect.data()->setRangeZoom( QCPAxis::orientation( mType ) );
else
mAxisRect.data()->setRangeZoom( 0 );
}
/*!
Returns a list of all the color maps associated with this color scale.
*/
QList<QCPColorMap*> QCPColorScale::colorMaps() const
{
QList<QCPColorMap*> result;
for( int i = 0; i < mParentPlot->plottableCount(); ++i )
{
if( QCPColorMap* cm = qobject_cast<QCPColorMap*>( mParentPlot->plottable( i ) ) )
if( cm->colorScale() == this )
result.append( cm );
}
return result;
}
/*!
Changes the data range such that all color maps associated with this color
scale are fully mapped
to the gradient in the data dimension.
\see setDataRange
*/
void QCPColorScale::rescaleDataRange( bool onlyVisibleMaps )
{
QList<QCPColorMap*> maps = colorMaps();
QCPRange newRange;
bool haveRange = false;
int sign = 0; // TODO: should change this to QCPAbstractPlottable::SignDomain
// later (currently is protected, maybe
// move to QCP namespace)
if( mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic )
sign = ( mDataRange.upper < 0 ? -1 : 1 );
for( int i = 0; i < maps.size(); ++i )
{
if( !maps.at( i )->realVisibility() && onlyVisibleMaps )
continue;
QCPRange mapRange;
if( maps.at( i )->colorScale() == this )
{
bool currentFoundRange = true;
mapRange = maps.at( i )->data()->dataBounds();
if( sign == 1 )
{
if( mapRange.lower <= 0 && mapRange.upper > 0 )
mapRange.lower = mapRange.upper * 1e-3;
else if( mapRange.lower <= 0 && mapRange.upper <= 0 )
currentFoundRange = false;
}
else if( sign == -1 )
{
if( mapRange.upper >= 0 && mapRange.lower < 0 )
mapRange.upper = mapRange.lower * 1e-3;
else if( mapRange.upper >= 0 && mapRange.lower >= 0 )
currentFoundRange = false;
}
if( currentFoundRange )
{
if( !haveRange )
newRange = mapRange;
else
newRange.expand( mapRange );
haveRange = true;
}
}
}
if( haveRange )
{
if( !QCPRange::validRange( newRange ) ) // likely due to range being zero
// (plottable has only constant data in
// this
// dimension), shift current range to at least center the data
{
double center = ( newRange.lower + newRange.upper ) *
0.5; // upper and lower should be equal anyway, but just to
// make sure, incase validRange returned false for
// other reason
if( mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLinear )
{
newRange.lower = center - mDataRange.size() / 2.0;
newRange.upper = center + mDataRange.size() / 2.0;
}
else // mScaleType == stLogarithmic
{
newRange.lower = center / qSqrt( mDataRange.upper / mDataRange.lower );
newRange.upper = center * qSqrt( mDataRange.upper / mDataRange.lower );
}
}
setDataRange( newRange );
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorScale::update( UpdatePhase phase )
{
QCPLayoutElement::update( phase );
if( !mAxisRect )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
return;
}
mAxisRect.data()->update( phase );
switch( phase )
{
case upMargins:
{
if( mType == QCPAxis::atBottom || mType == QCPAxis::atTop )
{
setMaximumSize( QWIDGETSIZE_MAX, mBarWidth + mAxisRect.data()->margins().top() +
mAxisRect.data()->margins().bottom() +
margins().top() + margins().bottom() );
setMinimumSize( 0, mBarWidth + mAxisRect.data()->margins().top() +
mAxisRect.data()->margins().bottom() + margins().top() +
margins().bottom() );
}
else
{
setMaximumSize( mBarWidth + mAxisRect.data()->margins().left() +
mAxisRect.data()->margins().right() + margins().left() +
margins().right(),
QWIDGETSIZE_MAX );
setMinimumSize( mBarWidth + mAxisRect.data()->margins().left() +
mAxisRect.data()->margins().right() + margins().left() +
margins().right(),
0 );
}
break;
}
case upLayout:
{
mAxisRect.data()->setOuterRect( rect() );
break;
}
default:
break;
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorScale::applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
painter->setAntialiasing( false );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorScale::mousePressEvent( QMouseEvent* event )
{
if( !mAxisRect )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
return;
}
mAxisRect.data()->mousePressEvent( event );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorScale::mouseMoveEvent( QMouseEvent* event )
{
if( !mAxisRect )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
return;
}
mAxisRect.data()->mouseMoveEvent( event );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorScale::mouseReleaseEvent( QMouseEvent* event )
{
if( !mAxisRect )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
return;
}
mAxisRect.data()->mouseReleaseEvent( event );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorScale::wheelEvent( QWheelEvent* event )
{
if( !mAxisRect )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "internal axis rect was deleted";
return;
}
mAxisRect.data()->wheelEvent( event );
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate
\internal
\brief An axis rect subclass for use in a QCPColorScale
This is a private class and not part of the public QCustomPlot interface.
It provides the axis rect functionality for the QCPColorScale class.
*/
/*!
Creates a new instance, as a child of \a parentColorScale.
*/
QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate( QCPColorScale* parentColorScale )
: QCPAxisRect( parentColorScale->parentPlot(), true )
, mParentColorScale( parentColorScale )
, mGradientImageInvalidated( true )
{
setParentLayerable( parentColorScale );
setMinimumMargins( QMargins( 0, 0, 0, 0 ) );
foreach( QCPAxis::AxisType type, QList<QCPAxis::AxisType>()
<< QCPAxis::atBottom << QCPAxis::atTop << QCPAxis::atLeft
<< QCPAxis::atRight )
{
axis( type )->setVisible( true );
axis( type )->grid()->setVisible( false );
axis( type )->setPadding( 0 );
connect( axis( type ), SIGNAL( selectionChanged( QCPAxis::SelectableParts ) ), this,
SLOT( axisSelectionChanged( QCPAxis::SelectableParts ) ) );
connect( axis( type ), SIGNAL( selectableChanged( QCPAxis::SelectableParts ) ), this,
SLOT( axisSelectableChanged( QCPAxis::SelectableParts ) ) );
}
connect( axis( QCPAxis::atLeft ), SIGNAL( rangeChanged( QCPRange ) ), axis( QCPAxis::atRight ),
SLOT( setRange( QCPRange ) ) );
connect( axis( QCPAxis::atRight ), SIGNAL( rangeChanged( QCPRange ) ), axis( QCPAxis::atLeft ),
SLOT( setRange( QCPRange ) ) );
connect( axis( QCPAxis::atBottom ), SIGNAL( rangeChanged( QCPRange ) ), axis( QCPAxis::atTop ),
SLOT( setRange( QCPRange ) ) );
connect( axis( QCPAxis::atTop ), SIGNAL( rangeChanged( QCPRange ) ), axis( QCPAxis::atBottom ),
SLOT( setRange( QCPRange ) ) );
connect( axis( QCPAxis::atLeft ), SIGNAL( scaleTypeChanged( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ),
axis( QCPAxis::atRight ), SLOT( setScaleType( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ) );
connect( axis( QCPAxis::atRight ), SIGNAL( scaleTypeChanged( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ),
axis( QCPAxis::atLeft ), SLOT( setScaleType( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ) );
connect( axis( QCPAxis::atBottom ), SIGNAL( scaleTypeChanged( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ),
axis( QCPAxis::atTop ), SLOT( setScaleType( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ) );
connect( axis( QCPAxis::atTop ), SIGNAL( scaleTypeChanged( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ),
axis( QCPAxis::atBottom ), SLOT( setScaleType( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ) );
// make layer transfers of color scale transfer to axis rect and axes
// the axes must be set after axis rect, such that they appear above color
// gradient drawn by axis rect:
connect( parentColorScale, SIGNAL( layerChanged( QCPLayer* ) ), this,
SLOT( setLayer( QCPLayer* ) ) );
foreach( QCPAxis::AxisType type, QList<QCPAxis::AxisType>()
<< QCPAxis::atBottom << QCPAxis::atTop << QCPAxis::atLeft
<< QCPAxis::atRight )
connect( parentColorScale, SIGNAL( layerChanged( QCPLayer* ) ), axis( type ),
SLOT( setLayer( QCPLayer* ) ) );
}
/*! \internal
Updates the color gradient image if necessary, by calling \ref
updateGradientImage, then draws
it. Then the axes are drawn by calling the \ref QCPAxisRect::draw base class
implementation.
*/
void QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
if( mGradientImageInvalidated )
updateGradientImage();
bool mirrorHorz = false;
bool mirrorVert = false;
if( mParentColorScale->mColorAxis )
{
mirrorHorz = mParentColorScale->mColorAxis.data()->rangeReversed() &&
( mParentColorScale->type() == QCPAxis::atBottom ||
mParentColorScale->type() == QCPAxis::atTop );
mirrorVert = mParentColorScale->mColorAxis.data()->rangeReversed() &&
( mParentColorScale->type() == QCPAxis::atLeft ||
mParentColorScale->type() == QCPAxis::atRight );
}
painter->drawImage( rect(), mGradientImage.mirrored( mirrorHorz, mirrorVert ) );
QCPAxisRect::draw( painter );
}
/*! \internal
Uses the current gradient of the parent \ref QCPColorScale (specified in the
constructor) to
generate a gradient image. This gradient image will be used in the \ref draw
method.
*/
void QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::updateGradientImage()
{
if( rect().isEmpty() )
return;
int n = mParentColorScale->mGradient.levelCount();
int w, h;
QVector<double> data( n );
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
data[i] = i;
if( mParentColorScale->mType == QCPAxis::atBottom || mParentColorScale->mType == QCPAxis::atTop )
{
w = n;
h = rect().height();
mGradientImage = QImage( w, h, QImage::Format_RGB32 );
QVector<QRgb*> pixels;
for( int y = 0; y < h; ++y )
pixels.append( reinterpret_cast<QRgb*>( mGradientImage.scanLine( y ) ) );
mParentColorScale->mGradient.colorize( data.constData(), QCPRange( 0, n - 1 ), pixels.first(),
n );
for( int y = 1; y < h; ++y )
memcpy( pixels.at( y ), pixels.first(), n * sizeof( QRgb ) );
}
else
{
w = rect().width();
h = n;
mGradientImage = QImage( w, h, QImage::Format_RGB32 );
for( int y = 0; y < h; ++y )
{
QRgb* pixels = reinterpret_cast<QRgb*>( mGradientImage.scanLine( y ) );
const QRgb lineColor =
mParentColorScale->mGradient.color( data[h - 1 - y], QCPRange( 0, n - 1 ) );
for( int x = 0; x < w; ++x )
pixels[x] = lineColor;
}
}
mGradientImageInvalidated = false;
}
/*! \internal
This slot is connected to the selectionChanged signals of the four axes in the
constructor. It
synchronizes the selection state of the axes.
*/
void QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::axisSelectionChanged( QCPAxis::SelectableParts selectedParts )
{
// axis bases of four axes shall always (de-)selected synchronously:
foreach( QCPAxis::AxisType type, QList<QCPAxis::AxisType>()
<< QCPAxis::atBottom << QCPAxis::atTop << QCPAxis::atLeft
<< QCPAxis::atRight )
{
if( QCPAxis* senderAxis = qobject_cast<QCPAxis*>( sender() ) )
if( senderAxis->axisType() == type )
continue;
if( axis( type )->selectableParts().testFlag( QCPAxis::spAxis ) )
{
if( selectedParts.testFlag( QCPAxis::spAxis ) )
axis( type )->setSelectedParts( axis( type )->selectedParts() | QCPAxis::spAxis );
else
axis( type )->setSelectedParts( axis( type )->selectedParts() & ~QCPAxis::spAxis );
}
}
}
/*! \internal
This slot is connected to the selectableChanged signals of the four axes in
the constructor. It
synchronizes the selectability of the axes.
*/
void QCPColorScaleAxisRectPrivate::axisSelectableChanged( QCPAxis::SelectableParts selectableParts )
{
// synchronize axis base selectability:
foreach( QCPAxis::AxisType type, QList<QCPAxis::AxisType>()
<< QCPAxis::atBottom << QCPAxis::atTop << QCPAxis::atLeft
<< QCPAxis::atRight )
{
if( QCPAxis* senderAxis = qobject_cast<QCPAxis*>( sender() ) )
if( senderAxis->axisType() == type )
continue;
if( axis( type )->selectableParts().testFlag( QCPAxis::spAxis ) )
{
if( selectableParts.testFlag( QCPAxis::spAxis ) )
axis( type )->setSelectableParts( axis( type )->selectableParts() | QCPAxis::spAxis );
else
axis( type )->setSelectableParts( axis( type )->selectableParts() & ~QCPAxis::spAxis );
}
}
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPData
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPData
\brief Holds the data of one single data point for QCPGraph.
The container for storing multiple data points is \ref QCPDataMap.
The stored data is:
\li \a key: coordinate on the key axis of this data point
\li \a value: coordinate on the value axis of this data point
\li \a keyErrorMinus: negative error in the key dimension (for error bars)
\li \a keyErrorPlus: positive error in the key dimension (for error bars)
\li \a valueErrorMinus: negative error in the value dimension (for error bars)
\li \a valueErrorPlus: positive error in the value dimension (for error bars)
\see QCPDataMap
*/
/*!
Constructs a data point with key, value and all errors set to zero.
*/
QCPData::QCPData()
: key( 0 )
, value( 0 )
, keyErrorPlus( 0 )
, keyErrorMinus( 0 )
, valueErrorPlus( 0 )
, valueErrorMinus( 0 )
{
}
/*!
Constructs a data point with the specified \a key and \a value. All errors are
set to zero.
*/
QCPData::QCPData( double key, double value )
: key( key )
, value( value )
, keyErrorPlus( 0 )
, keyErrorMinus( 0 )
, valueErrorPlus( 0 )
, valueErrorMinus( 0 )
{
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPGraph
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPGraph
\brief A plottable representing a graph in a plot.
\image html QCPGraph.png
Usually QCustomPlot creates graphs internally via QCustomPlot::addGraph and
the resulting
instance is accessed via QCustomPlot::graph.
To plot data, assign it with the \ref setData or \ref addData functions.
Alternatively, you can
also access and modify the graph's data via the \ref data method, which
returns a pointer to the
internal \ref QCPDataMap.
Graphs are used to display single-valued data. Single-valued means that there
should only be one
data point per unique key coordinate. In other words, the graph can't have \a
loops. If you do
want to plot non-single-valued curves, rather use the QCPCurve plottable.
\section appearance Changing the appearance
The appearance of the graph is mainly determined by the line style, scatter
style, brush and pen
of the graph (\ref setLineStyle, \ref setScatterStyle, \ref setBrush, \ref
setPen).
\subsection filling Filling under or between graphs
QCPGraph knows two types of fills: Normal graph fills towards the
zero-value-line parallel to
the key axis of the graph, and fills between two graphs, called channel fills.
To enable a fill,
just set a brush with \ref setBrush which is neither Qt::NoBrush nor fully
transparent.
By default, a normal fill towards the zero-value-line will be drawn. To set up
a channel fill
between this graph and another one, call \ref setChannelFillGraph with the
other graph as
parameter.
\see QCustomPlot::addGraph, QCustomPlot::graph, QCPLegend::addGraph
*/
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn QCPDataMap *QCPGraph::data() const
Returns a pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref QCPDataMap. You
may use it to
directly manipulate the data, which may be more convenient and faster than
using the regular \ref
setData or \ref addData methods, in certain situations.
*/
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
/*!
Constructs a graph which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a
valueAxis as its value
axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot
instance and not have
the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a
corresponding message is
printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though.
The constructed QCPGraph can be added to the plot with
QCustomPlot::addPlottable, QCustomPlot
then takes ownership of the graph.
To directly create a graph inside a plot, you can also use the simpler
QCustomPlot::addGraph function.
*/
QCPGraph::QCPGraph( QCPAxis* keyAxis, QCPAxis* valueAxis )
: QCPAbstractPlottable( keyAxis, valueAxis )
{
mData = new QCPDataMap;
setPen( QPen( Qt::blue, 0 ) );
setErrorPen( QPen( Qt::black ) );
setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
setSelectedPen( QPen( QColor( 80, 80, 255 ), 2.5 ) );
setSelectedBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
setLineStyle( lsLine );
setErrorType( etNone );
setErrorBarSize( 6 );
setErrorBarSkipSymbol( true );
setChannelFillGraph( 0 );
setAdaptiveSampling( true );
}
QCPGraph::~QCPGraph()
{
delete mData;
}
/*!
Replaces the current data with the provided \a data.
If \a copy is set to true, data points in \a data will only be copied. if
false, the graph
takes ownership of the passed data and replaces the internal data pointer with
it. This is
significantly faster than copying for large datasets.
Alternatively, you can also access and modify the graph's data via the \ref
data method, which
returns a pointer to the internal \ref QCPDataMap.
*/
void QCPGraph::setData( QCPDataMap* data, bool copy )
{
if( copy )
{
*mData = *data;
}
else
{
delete mData;
mData = data;
}
}
/*! \overload
Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a key and \a value
pairs. The provided
vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points will be the
size of the
smallest vector.
*/
void QCPGraph::setData( const QVector<double>& key, const QVector<double>& value )
{
mData->clear();
int n = key.size();
n = qMin( n, value.size() );
QCPData newData;
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
newData.key = key[i];
newData.value = value[i];
mData->insertMulti( newData.key, newData );
}
}
/*!
Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a key and \a value
pairs. Additionally the
symmetrical value error of the data points are set to the values in \a
valueError.
For error bars to show appropriately, see \ref setErrorType.
The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added
points will be the size of the
smallest vector.
For asymmetrical errors (plus different from minus), see the overloaded
version of this function.
*/
void QCPGraph::setDataValueError( const QVector<double>& key,
const QVector<double>& value,
const QVector<double>& valueError )
{
mData->clear();
int n = key.size();
n = qMin( n, value.size() );
n = qMin( n, valueError.size() );
QCPData newData;
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
newData.key = key[i];
newData.value = value[i];
newData.valueErrorMinus = valueError[i];
newData.valueErrorPlus = valueError[i];
mData->insertMulti( key[i], newData );
}
}
/*!
\overload
Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a key and \a value
pairs. Additionally the
negative value error of the data points are set to the values in \a
valueErrorMinus, the positive
value error to \a valueErrorPlus.
For error bars to show appropriately, see \ref setErrorType.
The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added
points will be the size of the
smallest vector.
*/
void QCPGraph::setDataValueError( const QVector<double>& key,
const QVector<double>& value,
const QVector<double>& valueErrorMinus,
const QVector<double>& valueErrorPlus )
{
mData->clear();
int n = key.size();
n = qMin( n, value.size() );
n = qMin( n, valueErrorMinus.size() );
n = qMin( n, valueErrorPlus.size() );
QCPData newData;
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
newData.key = key[i];
newData.value = value[i];
newData.valueErrorMinus = valueErrorMinus[i];
newData.valueErrorPlus = valueErrorPlus[i];
mData->insertMulti( key[i], newData );
}
}
/*!
Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a key and \a value
pairs. Additionally the
symmetrical key error of the data points are set to the values in \a keyError.
For error bars to show appropriately, see \ref setErrorType.
The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added
points will be the size of the
smallest vector.
For asymmetrical errors (plus different from minus), see the overloaded
version of this function.
*/
void QCPGraph::setDataKeyError( const QVector<double>& key,
const QVector<double>& value,
const QVector<double>& keyError )
{
mData->clear();
int n = key.size();
n = qMin( n, value.size() );
n = qMin( n, keyError.size() );
QCPData newData;
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
newData.key = key[i];
newData.value = value[i];
newData.keyErrorMinus = keyError[i];
newData.keyErrorPlus = keyError[i];
mData->insertMulti( key[i], newData );
}
}
/*!
\overload
Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a key and \a value
pairs. Additionally the
negative key error of the data points are set to the values in \a
keyErrorMinus, the positive
key error to \a keyErrorPlus.
For error bars to show appropriately, see \ref setErrorType.
The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added
points will be the size of the
smallest vector.
*/
void QCPGraph::setDataKeyError( const QVector<double>& key,
const QVector<double>& value,
const QVector<double>& keyErrorMinus,
const QVector<double>& keyErrorPlus )
{
mData->clear();
int n = key.size();
n = qMin( n, value.size() );
n = qMin( n, keyErrorMinus.size() );
n = qMin( n, keyErrorPlus.size() );
QCPData newData;
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
newData.key = key[i];
newData.value = value[i];
newData.keyErrorMinus = keyErrorMinus[i];
newData.keyErrorPlus = keyErrorPlus[i];
mData->insertMulti( key[i], newData );
}
}
/*!
Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a key and \a value
pairs. Additionally the
symmetrical key and value errors of the data points are set to the values in
\a keyError and \a valueError.
For error bars to show appropriately, see \ref setErrorType.
The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added
points will be the size of the
smallest vector.
For asymmetrical errors (plus different from minus), see the overloaded
version of this function.
*/
void QCPGraph::setDataBothError( const QVector<double>& key,
const QVector<double>& value,
const QVector<double>& keyError,
const QVector<double>& valueError )
{
mData->clear();
int n = key.size();
n = qMin( n, value.size() );
n = qMin( n, valueError.size() );
n = qMin( n, keyError.size() );
QCPData newData;
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
newData.key = key[i];
newData.value = value[i];
newData.keyErrorMinus = keyError[i];
newData.keyErrorPlus = keyError[i];
newData.valueErrorMinus = valueError[i];
newData.valueErrorPlus = valueError[i];
mData->insertMulti( key[i], newData );
}
}
/*!
\overload
Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a key and \a value
pairs. Additionally the
negative key and value errors of the data points are set to the values in \a
keyErrorMinus and \a valueErrorMinus. The
positive
key and value errors are set to the values in \a keyErrorPlus \a
valueErrorPlus.
For error bars to show appropriately, see \ref setErrorType.
The provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added
points will be the size of the
smallest vector.
*/
void QCPGraph::setDataBothError( const QVector<double>& key,
const QVector<double>& value,
const QVector<double>& keyErrorMinus,
const QVector<double>& keyErrorPlus,
const QVector<double>& valueErrorMinus,
const QVector<double>& valueErrorPlus )
{
mData->clear();
int n = key.size();
n = qMin( n, value.size() );
n = qMin( n, valueErrorMinus.size() );
n = qMin( n, valueErrorPlus.size() );
n = qMin( n, keyErrorMinus.size() );
n = qMin( n, keyErrorPlus.size() );
QCPData newData;
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
newData.key = key[i];
newData.value = value[i];
newData.keyErrorMinus = keyErrorMinus[i];
newData.keyErrorPlus = keyErrorPlus[i];
newData.valueErrorMinus = valueErrorMinus[i];
newData.valueErrorPlus = valueErrorPlus[i];
mData->insertMulti( key[i], newData );
}
}
/*!
Sets how the single data points are connected in the plot. For scatter-only
plots, set \a ls to
\ref lsNone and \ref setScatterStyle to the desired scatter style.
\see setScatterStyle
*/
void QCPGraph::setLineStyle( LineStyle ls )
{
mLineStyle = ls;
}
/*!
Sets the visual appearance of single data points in the plot. If set to \ref
QCPScatterStyle::ssNone, no scatter
points
are drawn (e.g. for line-only-plots with appropriate line style).
\see QCPScatterStyle, setLineStyle
*/
void QCPGraph::setScatterStyle( const QCPScatterStyle& style )
{
mScatterStyle = style;
}
/*!
Sets which kind of error bars (Key Error, Value Error or both) should be drawn
on each data
point. If you set \a errorType to something other than \ref etNone, make sure
to actually pass
error data via the specific setData functions along with the data points (e.g.
\ref
setDataValueError, \ref setDataKeyError, \ref setDataBothError).
\see ErrorType
*/
void QCPGraph::setErrorType( ErrorType errorType )
{
mErrorType = errorType;
}
/*!
Sets the pen with which the error bars will be drawn.
\see setErrorBarSize, setErrorType
*/
void QCPGraph::setErrorPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mErrorPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the width of the handles at both ends of an error bar in pixels.
*/
void QCPGraph::setErrorBarSize( double size )
{
mErrorBarSize = size;
}
/*!
If \a enabled is set to true, the error bar will not be drawn as a solid line
under the scatter symbol but
leave some free space around the symbol.
This feature uses the current scatter size (\ref QCPScatterStyle::setSize) to
determine the size
of the area to leave blank. So when drawing Pixmaps as scatter points (\ref
QCPScatterStyle::ssPixmap), the scatter size must be set manually to a value
corresponding to the
size of the Pixmap, if the error bars should leave gaps to its boundaries.
\ref setErrorType, setErrorBarSize, setScatterStyle
*/
void QCPGraph::setErrorBarSkipSymbol( bool enabled )
{
mErrorBarSkipSymbol = enabled;
}
/*!
Sets the target graph for filling the area between this graph and \a
targetGraph with the current
brush (\ref setBrush).
When \a targetGraph is set to 0, a normal graph fill to the zero-value-line
will be shown. To
disable any filling, set the brush to Qt::NoBrush.
\see setBrush
*/
void QCPGraph::setChannelFillGraph( QCPGraph* targetGraph )
{
// prevent setting channel target to this graph itself:
if( targetGraph == this )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "targetGraph is this graph itself";
mChannelFillGraph = 0;
return;
}
// prevent setting channel target to a graph not in the plot:
if( targetGraph && targetGraph->mParentPlot != mParentPlot )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "targetGraph not in same plot";
mChannelFillGraph = 0;
return;
}
mChannelFillGraph = targetGraph;
}
/*!
Sets whether adaptive sampling shall be used when plotting this graph.
QCustomPlot's adaptive
sampling technique can drastically improve the replot performance for graphs
with a larger number
of points (e.g. above 10,000), without notably changing the appearance of the
graph.
By default, adaptive sampling is enabled. Even if enabled, QCustomPlot decides
whether adaptive
sampling shall actually be used on a per-graph basis. So leaving adaptive
sampling enabled has no
disadvantage in almost all cases.
\image html adaptive-sampling-line.png "A line plot of 500,000 points without
and with adaptive sampling"
As can be seen, line plots experience no visual degradation from adaptive
sampling. Outliers are
reproduced reliably, as well as the overall shape of the data set. The replot
time reduces
dramatically though. This allows QCustomPlot to display large amounts of data
in realtime.
\image html adaptive-sampling-scatter.png "A scatter plot of 100,000 points
without and with adaptive sampling"
Care must be taken when using high-density scatter plots in combination with
adaptive sampling.
The adaptive sampling algorithm treats scatter plots more carefully than line
plots which still
gives a significant reduction of replot times, but not quite as much as for
line plots. This is
because scatter plots inherently need more data points to be preserved in
order to still resemble
the original, non-adaptive-sampling plot. As shown above, the results still
aren't quite
identical, as banding occurs for the outer data points. This is in fact
intentional, such that
the boundaries of the data cloud stay visible to the viewer. How strong the
banding appears,
depends on the point density, i.e. the number of points in the plot.
For some situations with scatter plots it might thus be desirable to manually
turn adaptive
sampling off. For example, when saving the plot to disk. This can be achieved
by setting \a
enabled to false before issuing a command like \ref QCustomPlot::savePng, and
setting \a enabled
back to true afterwards.
*/
void QCPGraph::setAdaptiveSampling( bool enabled )
{
mAdaptiveSampling = enabled;
}
/*!
Adds the provided data points in \a dataMap to the current data.
Alternatively, you can also access and modify the graph's data via the \ref
data method, which
returns a pointer to the internal \ref QCPDataMap.
\see removeData
*/
void QCPGraph::addData( const QCPDataMap& dataMap )
{
mData->unite( dataMap );
}
/*! \overload
Adds the provided single data point in \a data to the current data.
Alternatively, you can also access and modify the graph's data via the \ref
data method, which
returns a pointer to the internal \ref QCPDataMap.
\see removeData
*/
void QCPGraph::addData( const QCPData& data )
{
mData->insertMulti( data.key, data );
}
/*! \overload
Adds the provided single data point as \a key and \a value pair to the current
data.
Alternatively, you can also access and modify the graph's data via the \ref
data method, which
returns a pointer to the internal \ref QCPDataMap.
\see removeData
*/
void QCPGraph::addData( double key, double value )
{
QCPData newData;
newData.key = key;
newData.value = value;
mData->insertMulti( newData.key, newData );
}
/*! \overload
Adds the provided data points as \a key and \a value pairs to the current
data.
Alternatively, you can also access and modify the graph's data via the \ref
data method, which
returns a pointer to the internal \ref QCPDataMap.
\see removeData
*/
void QCPGraph::addData( const QVector<double>& keys, const QVector<double>& values )
{
int n = qMin( keys.size(), values.size() );
QCPData newData;
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
newData.key = keys[i];
newData.value = values[i];
mData->insertMulti( newData.key, newData );
}
}
/*!
Removes all data points with keys smaller than \a key.
\see addData, clearData
*/
void QCPGraph::removeDataBefore( double key )
{
QCPDataMap::iterator it = mData->begin();
while( it != mData->end() && it.key() < key )
it = mData->erase( it );
}
/*!
Removes all data points with keys greater than \a key.
\see addData, clearData
*/
void QCPGraph::removeDataAfter( double key )
{
if( mData->isEmpty() )
return;
QCPDataMap::iterator it = mData->upperBound( key );
while( it != mData->end() )
it = mData->erase( it );
}
/*!
Removes all data points with keys between \a fromKey and \a toKey.
if \a fromKey is greater or equal to \a toKey, the function does nothing. To
remove
a single data point with known key, use \ref removeData(double key).
\see addData, clearData
*/
void QCPGraph::removeData( double fromKey, double toKey )
{
if( fromKey >= toKey || mData->isEmpty() )
return;
QCPDataMap::iterator it = mData->upperBound( fromKey );
QCPDataMap::iterator itEnd = mData->upperBound( toKey );
while( it != itEnd )
it = mData->erase( it );
}
/*! \overload
Removes a single data point at \a key. If the position is not known with
absolute precision,
consider using \ref removeData(double fromKey, double toKey) with a small
fuzziness interval around
the suspected position, depeding on the precision with which the key is known.
\see addData, clearData
*/
void QCPGraph::removeData( double key )
{
mData->remove( key );
}
/*!
Removes all data points.
\see removeData, removeDataAfter, removeDataBefore
*/
void QCPGraph::clearData()
{
mData->clear();
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPGraph::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( ( onlySelectable && !mSelectable ) || mData->isEmpty() )
return -1;
if( !mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return -1;
}
if( mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains( pos.toPoint() ) )
return pointDistance( pos );
else
return -1;
}
/*! \overload
Allows to define whether error bars are taken into consideration when
determining the new axis
range.
\see rescaleKeyAxis, rescaleValueAxis, QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleAxes,
QCustomPlot::rescaleAxes
*/
void QCPGraph::rescaleAxes( bool onlyEnlarge, bool includeErrorBars ) const
{
rescaleKeyAxis( onlyEnlarge, includeErrorBars );
rescaleValueAxis( onlyEnlarge, includeErrorBars );
}
/*! \overload
Allows to define whether error bars (of kind \ref QCPGraph::etKey) are taken
into consideration
when determining the new axis range.
\see rescaleAxes, QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleKeyAxis
*/
void QCPGraph::rescaleKeyAxis( bool onlyEnlarge, bool includeErrorBars ) const
{
// this code is a copy of QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleKeyAxis with the only
// change
// that getKeyRange is passed the includeErrorBars value.
if( mData->isEmpty() )
return;
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis";
return;
}
SignDomain signDomain = sdBoth;
if( keyAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic )
signDomain = ( keyAxis->range().upper < 0 ? sdNegative : sdPositive );
bool foundRange;
QCPRange newRange = getKeyRange( foundRange, signDomain, includeErrorBars );
if( foundRange )
{
if( onlyEnlarge )
{
if( keyAxis->range().lower < newRange.lower )
newRange.lower = keyAxis->range().lower;
if( keyAxis->range().upper > newRange.upper )
newRange.upper = keyAxis->range().upper;
}
keyAxis->setRange( newRange );
}
}
/*! \overload
Allows to define whether error bars (of kind \ref QCPGraph::etValue) are taken
into consideration
when determining the new axis range.
\see rescaleAxes, QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleValueAxis
*/
void QCPGraph::rescaleValueAxis( bool onlyEnlarge, bool includeErrorBars ) const
{
// this code is a copy of QCPAbstractPlottable::rescaleValueAxis with the only
// change
// is that getValueRange is passed the includeErrorBars value.
if( mData->isEmpty() )
return;
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid value axis";
return;
}
SignDomain signDomain = sdBoth;
if( valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic )
signDomain = ( valueAxis->range().upper < 0 ? sdNegative : sdPositive );
bool foundRange;
QCPRange newRange = getValueRange( foundRange, signDomain, includeErrorBars );
if( foundRange )
{
if( onlyEnlarge )
{
if( valueAxis->range().lower < newRange.lower )
newRange.lower = valueAxis->range().lower;
if( valueAxis->range().upper > newRange.upper )
newRange.upper = valueAxis->range().upper;
}
valueAxis->setRange( newRange );
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPGraph::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
if( !mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
if( mKeyAxis.data()->range().size() <= 0 || mData->isEmpty() )
return;
if( mLineStyle == lsNone && mScatterStyle.isNone() )
return;
// allocate line and (if necessary) point vectors:
QVector<QPointF>* lineData = new QVector<QPointF>;
QVector<QCPData>* scatterData = 0;
if( !mScatterStyle.isNone() )
scatterData = new QVector<QCPData>;
// fill vectors with data appropriate to plot style:
getPlotData( lineData, scatterData );
// check data validity if flag set:
#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA
QCPDataMap::const_iterator it;
for( it = mData->constBegin(); it != mData->constEnd(); ++it )
{
if( QCP::isInvalidData( it.value().key, it.value().value ) ||
QCP::isInvalidData( it.value().keyErrorPlus, it.value().keyErrorMinus ) ||
QCP::isInvalidData( it.value().valueErrorPlus, it.value().valueErrorPlus ) )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at" << it.key() << "invalid."
<< "Plottable name:" << name();
}
#endif
// draw fill of graph:
drawFill( painter, lineData );
// draw line:
if( mLineStyle == lsImpulse )
drawImpulsePlot( painter, lineData );
else if( mLineStyle != lsNone )
drawLinePlot( painter, lineData ); // also step plots can be drawn as a line plot
// draw scatters:
if( scatterData )
drawScatterPlot( painter, scatterData );
// free allocated line and point vectors:
delete lineData;
if( scatterData )
delete scatterData;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPGraph::drawLegendIcon( QCPPainter* painter, const QRectF& rect ) const
{
// draw fill:
if( mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush )
{
applyFillAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->fillRect(
QRectF( rect.left(), rect.top() + rect.height() / 2.0, rect.width(), rect.height() / 3.0 ),
mBrush );
}
// draw line vertically centered:
if( mLineStyle != lsNone )
{
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( mPen );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( rect.left(), rect.top() + rect.height() / 2.0, rect.right() + 5,
rect.top() + rect.height() / 2.0 ) ); // +5 on x2 else last segment
// is missing from
// dashed/dotted pens
}
// draw scatter symbol:
if( !mScatterStyle.isNone() )
{
applyScattersAntialiasingHint( painter );
// scale scatter pixmap if it's too large to fit in legend icon rect:
if( mScatterStyle.shape() == QCPScatterStyle::ssPixmap &&
( mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().width() > rect.width() ||
mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().height() > rect.height() ) )
{
QCPScatterStyle scaledStyle( mScatterStyle );
scaledStyle.setPixmap( scaledStyle.pixmap().scaled( rect.size().toSize(), Qt::KeepAspectRatio,
Qt::SmoothTransformation ) );
scaledStyle.applyTo( painter, mPen );
scaledStyle.drawShape( painter, QRectF( rect ).center() );
}
else
{
mScatterStyle.applyTo( painter, mPen );
mScatterStyle.drawShape( painter, QRectF( rect ).center() );
}
}
}
/*! \internal
This function branches out to the line style specific "get(...)PlotData"
functions, according to
the line style of the graph.
\a lineData will be filled with raw points that will be drawn with the
according draw functions,
e.g. \ref drawLinePlot and \ref drawImpulsePlot. These aren't necessarily the
original data
points, since for step plots for example, additional points are needed for
drawing lines that
make up steps. If the line style of the graph is \ref lsNone, the \a lineData
vector will be left
untouched.
\a scatterData will be filled with the original data points so \ref
drawScatterPlot can draw the
scatter symbols accordingly. If no scatters need to be drawn, i.e. the scatter
style's shape is
\ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone, pass 0 as \a scatterData, and this step will be
skipped.
\see getScatterPlotData, getLinePlotData, getStepLeftPlotData,
getStepRightPlotData,
getStepCenterPlotData, getImpulsePlotData
*/
void QCPGraph::getPlotData( QVector<QPointF>* lineData, QVector<QCPData>* scatterData ) const
{
switch( mLineStyle )
{
case lsNone:
getScatterPlotData( scatterData );
break;
case lsLine:
getLinePlotData( lineData, scatterData );
break;
case lsStepLeft:
getStepLeftPlotData( lineData, scatterData );
break;
case lsStepRight:
getStepRightPlotData( lineData, scatterData );
break;
case lsStepCenter:
getStepCenterPlotData( lineData, scatterData );
break;
case lsImpulse:
getImpulsePlotData( lineData, scatterData );
break;
}
}
/*! \internal
If line style is \ref lsNone and the scatter style's shape is not \ref
QCPScatterStyle::ssNone,
this function serves at providing the visible data points in \a scatterData,
so the \ref
drawScatterPlot function can draw the scatter points accordingly.
If line style is not \ref lsNone, this function is not called and the data for
the scatter points
are (if needed) calculated inside the corresponding other "get(...)PlotData"
functions.
\see drawScatterPlot
*/
void QCPGraph::getScatterPlotData( QVector<QCPData>* scatterData ) const
{
getPreparedData( 0, scatterData );
}
/*! \internal
Places the raw data points needed for a normal linearly connected graph in \a
linePixelData.
As for all plot data retrieval functions, \a scatterData just contains all
unaltered data (scatter)
points that are visible for drawing scatter points, if necessary. If drawing
scatter points is
disabled (i.e. the scatter style's shape is \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone),
pass 0 as \a
scatterData, and the function will skip filling the vector.
\see drawLinePlot
*/
void QCPGraph::getLinePlotData( QVector<QPointF>* linePixelData,
QVector<QCPData>* scatterData ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
if( !linePixelData )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer passed as linePixelData";
return;
}
QVector<QCPData> lineData;
getPreparedData( &lineData, scatterData );
linePixelData->reserve( lineData.size() + 2 ); // added 2 to reserve memory for
// lower/upper fill base points
// that might be needed for fill
linePixelData->resize( lineData.size() );
// transform lineData points to pixels:
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
{
for( int i = 0; i < lineData.size(); ++i )
{
( *linePixelData )[i].setX( valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).value ) );
( *linePixelData )[i].setY( keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).key ) );
}
}
else // key axis is horizontal
{
for( int i = 0; i < lineData.size(); ++i )
{
( *linePixelData )[i].setX( keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).key ) );
( *linePixelData )[i].setY( valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).value ) );
}
}
}
/*!
\internal
Places the raw data points needed for a step plot with left oriented steps in
\a lineData.
As for all plot data retrieval functions, \a scatterData just contains all
unaltered data (scatter)
points that are visible for drawing scatter points, if necessary. If drawing
scatter points is
disabled (i.e. the scatter style's shape is \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone),
pass 0 as \a
scatterData, and the function will skip filling the vector.
\see drawLinePlot
*/
void QCPGraph::getStepLeftPlotData( QVector<QPointF>* linePixelData,
QVector<QCPData>* scatterData ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
if( !linePixelData )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer passed as lineData";
return;
}
QVector<QCPData> lineData;
getPreparedData( &lineData, scatterData );
linePixelData->reserve( lineData.size() * 2 + 2 ); // added 2 to reserve memory
// for lower/upper fill base
// points that might be
// needed for fill
linePixelData->resize( lineData.size() * 2 );
// calculate steps from lineData and transform to pixel coordinates:
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
{
double lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.first().value );
double key;
for( int i = 0; i < lineData.size(); ++i )
{
key = keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setX( lastValue );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setY( key );
lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).value );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 1].setX( lastValue );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 1].setY( key );
}
}
else // key axis is horizontal
{
double lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.first().value );
double key;
for( int i = 0; i < lineData.size(); ++i )
{
key = keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setX( key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setY( lastValue );
lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).value );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 1].setX( key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 1].setY( lastValue );
}
}
}
/*!
\internal
Places the raw data points needed for a step plot with right oriented steps in
\a lineData.
As for all plot data retrieval functions, \a scatterData just contains all
unaltered data (scatter)
points that are visible for drawing scatter points, if necessary. If drawing
scatter points is
disabled (i.e. the scatter style's shape is \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone),
pass 0 as \a
scatterData, and the function will skip filling the vector.
\see drawLinePlot
*/
void QCPGraph::getStepRightPlotData( QVector<QPointF>* linePixelData,
QVector<QCPData>* scatterData ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
if( !linePixelData )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer passed as lineData";
return;
}
QVector<QCPData> lineData;
getPreparedData( &lineData, scatterData );
linePixelData->reserve( lineData.size() * 2 + 2 ); // added 2 to reserve memory
// for lower/upper fill base
// points that might be
// needed for fill
linePixelData->resize( lineData.size() * 2 );
// calculate steps from lineData and transform to pixel coordinates:
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
{
double lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.first().key );
double value;
for( int i = 0; i < lineData.size(); ++i )
{
value = valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).value );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setX( value );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setY( lastKey );
lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 1].setX( value );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 1].setY( lastKey );
}
}
else // key axis is horizontal
{
double lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.first().key );
double value;
for( int i = 0; i < lineData.size(); ++i )
{
value = valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).value );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setX( lastKey );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setY( value );
lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 1].setX( lastKey );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 1].setY( value );
}
}
}
/*!
\internal
Places the raw data points needed for a step plot with centered steps in \a
lineData.
As for all plot data retrieval functions, \a scatterData just contains all
unaltered data (scatter)
points that are visible for drawing scatter points, if necessary. If drawing
scatter points is
disabled (i.e. the scatter style's shape is \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone),
pass 0 as \a
scatterData, and the function will skip filling the vector.
\see drawLinePlot
*/
void QCPGraph::getStepCenterPlotData( QVector<QPointF>* linePixelData,
QVector<QCPData>* scatterData ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
if( !linePixelData )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer passed as lineData";
return;
}
QVector<QCPData> lineData;
getPreparedData( &lineData, scatterData );
linePixelData->reserve( lineData.size() * 2 + 2 ); // added 2 to reserve memory
// for lower/upper fill base
// points that might be
// needed for fill
linePixelData->resize( lineData.size() * 2 );
// calculate steps from lineData and transform to pixel coordinates:
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
{
double lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.first().key );
double lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.first().value );
double key;
( *linePixelData )[0].setX( lastValue );
( *linePixelData )[0].setY( lastKey );
for( int i = 1; i < lineData.size(); ++i )
{
key = ( keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).key ) + lastKey ) * 0.5;
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 - 1].setX( lastValue );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 - 1].setY( key );
lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).value );
lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setX( lastValue );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setY( key );
}
( *linePixelData )[lineData.size() * 2 - 1].setX( lastValue );
( *linePixelData )[lineData.size() * 2 - 1].setY( lastKey );
}
else // key axis is horizontal
{
double lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.first().key );
double lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.first().value );
double key;
( *linePixelData )[0].setX( lastKey );
( *linePixelData )[0].setY( lastValue );
for( int i = 1; i < lineData.size(); ++i )
{
key = ( keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).key ) + lastKey ) * 0.5;
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 - 1].setX( key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 - 1].setY( lastValue );
lastValue = valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).value );
lastKey = keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setX( key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setY( lastValue );
}
( *linePixelData )[lineData.size() * 2 - 1].setX( lastKey );
( *linePixelData )[lineData.size() * 2 - 1].setY( lastValue );
}
}
/*!
\internal
Places the raw data points needed for an impulse plot in \a lineData.
As for all plot data retrieval functions, \a scatterData just contains all
unaltered data (scatter)
points that are visible for drawing scatter points, if necessary. If drawing
scatter points is
disabled (i.e. the scatter style's shape is \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone),
pass 0 as \a
scatterData, and the function will skip filling the vector.
\see drawImpulsePlot
*/
void QCPGraph::getImpulsePlotData( QVector<QPointF>* linePixelData,
QVector<QCPData>* scatterData ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
if( !linePixelData )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "null pointer passed as linePixelData";
return;
}
QVector<QCPData> lineData;
getPreparedData( &lineData, scatterData );
linePixelData->resize( lineData.size() *
2 ); // no need to reserve 2 extra points because impulse plot has no fill
// transform lineData points to pixels:
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
{
double zeroPointX = valueAxis->coordToPixel( 0 );
double key;
for( int i = 0; i < lineData.size(); ++i )
{
key = keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setX( zeroPointX );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setY( key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 1].setX( valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).value ) );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 1].setY( key );
}
}
else // key axis is horizontal
{
double zeroPointY = valueAxis->coordToPixel( 0 );
double key;
for( int i = 0; i < lineData.size(); ++i )
{
key = keyAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setX( key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 0].setY( zeroPointY );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 1].setX( key );
( *linePixelData )[i * 2 + 1].setY( valueAxis->coordToPixel( lineData.at( i ).value ) );
}
}
}
/*! \internal
Draws the fill of the graph with the specified brush.
If the fill is a normal fill towards the zero-value-line, only the \a lineData
is required (and
two extra points at the zero-value-line, which are added by \ref
addFillBasePoints and removed by
\ref removeFillBasePoints after the fill drawing is done).
If the fill is a channel fill between this QCPGraph and another QCPGraph
(mChannelFillGraph), the
more complex polygon is calculated with the \ref getChannelFillPolygon
function.
\see drawLinePlot
*/
void QCPGraph::drawFill( QCPPainter* painter, QVector<QPointF>* lineData ) const
{
if( mLineStyle == lsImpulse )
return; // fill doesn't make sense for impulse plot
if( mainBrush().style() == Qt::NoBrush || mainBrush().color().alpha() == 0 )
return;
applyFillAntialiasingHint( painter );
if( !mChannelFillGraph )
{
// draw base fill under graph, fill goes all the way to the zero-value-line:
addFillBasePoints( lineData );
painter->setPen( Qt::NoPen );
painter->setBrush( mainBrush() );
painter->drawPolygon( QPolygonF( *lineData ) );
removeFillBasePoints( lineData );
}
else
{
// draw channel fill between this graph and mChannelFillGraph:
painter->setPen( Qt::NoPen );
painter->setBrush( mainBrush() );
painter->drawPolygon( getChannelFillPolygon( lineData ) );
}
}
/*! \internal
Draws scatter symbols at every data point passed in \a scatterData. scatter
symbols are independent
of the line style and are always drawn if the scatter style's shape is not
\ref
QCPScatterStyle::ssNone. Hence, the \a scatterData vector is outputted by all
"get(...)PlotData"
functions, together with the (line style dependent) line data.
\see drawLinePlot, drawImpulsePlot
*/
void QCPGraph::drawScatterPlot( QCPPainter* painter, QVector<QCPData>* scatterData ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
// draw error bars:
if( mErrorType != etNone )
{
applyErrorBarsAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( mErrorPen );
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
{
for( int i = 0; i < scatterData->size(); ++i )
drawError( painter, valueAxis->coordToPixel( scatterData->at( i ).value ),
keyAxis->coordToPixel( scatterData->at( i ).key ), scatterData->at( i ) );
}
else
{
for( int i = 0; i < scatterData->size(); ++i )
drawError( painter, keyAxis->coordToPixel( scatterData->at( i ).key ),
valueAxis->coordToPixel( scatterData->at( i ).value ), scatterData->at( i ) );
}
}
// draw scatter point symbols:
applyScattersAntialiasingHint( painter );
mScatterStyle.applyTo( painter, mPen );
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
{
for( int i = 0; i < scatterData->size(); ++i )
mScatterStyle.drawShape( painter, valueAxis->coordToPixel( scatterData->at( i ).value ),
keyAxis->coordToPixel( scatterData->at( i ).key ) );
}
else
{
for( int i = 0; i < scatterData->size(); ++i )
mScatterStyle.drawShape( painter, keyAxis->coordToPixel( scatterData->at( i ).key ),
valueAxis->coordToPixel( scatterData->at( i ).value ) );
}
}
/*! \internal
Draws line graphs from the provided data. It connects all points in \a
lineData, which was
created by one of the "get(...)PlotData" functions for line styles that
require simple line
connections between the point vector they create. These are for example \ref
getLinePlotData,
\ref getStepLeftPlotData, \ref getStepRightPlotData and \ref
getStepCenterPlotData.
\see drawScatterPlot, drawImpulsePlot
*/
void QCPGraph::drawLinePlot( QCPPainter* painter, QVector<QPointF>* lineData ) const
{
// draw line of graph:
if( mainPen().style() != Qt::NoPen && mainPen().color().alpha() != 0 )
{
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( mainPen() );
painter->setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
/* Draws polyline in batches, currently not used:
int p = 0;
while (p < lineData->size())
{
int batch = qMin(25, lineData->size()-p);
if (p != 0)
{
++batch;
--p; // to draw the connection lines between two batches
}
painter->drawPolyline(lineData->constData()+p, batch);
p += batch;
}
*/
// if drawing solid line and not in PDF, use much faster line drawing
// instead of polyline:
if( mParentPlot->plottingHints().testFlag( QCP::phFastPolylines ) &&
painter->pen().style() == Qt::SolidLine &&
!painter->modes().testFlag( QCPPainter::pmVectorized ) &&
!painter->modes().testFlag( QCPPainter::pmNoCaching ) )
{
for( int i = 1; i < lineData->size(); ++i )
painter->drawLine( lineData->at( i - 1 ), lineData->at( i ) );
}
else
{
painter->drawPolyline( QPolygonF( *lineData ) );
}
}
}
/*! \internal
Draws impulses from the provided data, i.e. it connects all line pairs in \a
lineData, which was
created by \ref getImpulsePlotData.
\see drawScatterPlot, drawLinePlot
*/
void QCPGraph::drawImpulsePlot( QCPPainter* painter, QVector<QPointF>* lineData ) const
{
// draw impulses:
if( mainPen().style() != Qt::NoPen && mainPen().color().alpha() != 0 )
{
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
QPen pen = mainPen();
pen.setCapStyle( Qt::FlatCap ); // so impulse line doesn't reach beyond zero-line
painter->setPen( pen );
painter->setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
painter->drawLines( *lineData );
}
}
/*! \internal
Returns the \a lineData and \a scatterData that need to be plotted for this
graph taking into
consideration the current axis ranges and, if \ref setAdaptiveSampling is
enabled, local point
densities.
0 may be passed as \a lineData or \a scatterData to indicate that the
respective dataset isn't
needed. For example, if the scatter style (\ref setScatterStyle) is \ref
QCPScatterStyle::ssNone, \a
scatterData should be 0 to prevent unnecessary calculations.
This method is used by the various "get(...)PlotData" methods to get the basic
working set of data.
*/
void QCPGraph::getPreparedData( QVector<QCPData>* lineData, QVector<QCPData>* scatterData ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
// get visible data range:
QCPDataMap::const_iterator lower,
upper; // note that upper is the actual upper point, and not 1 step after
// the upper point
getVisibleDataBounds( lower, upper );
if( lower == mData->constEnd() || upper == mData->constEnd() )
return;
// count points in visible range, taking into account that we only need to
// count to the limit maxCount if using
// adaptive sampling:
int maxCount = std::numeric_limits<int>::max();
if( mAdaptiveSampling )
{
int keyPixelSpan =
qAbs( keyAxis->coordToPixel( lower.key() ) - keyAxis->coordToPixel( upper.key() ) );
maxCount = 2 * keyPixelSpan + 2;
}
int dataCount = countDataInBounds( lower, upper, maxCount );
if( mAdaptiveSampling && dataCount >= maxCount ) // use adaptive sampling only
// if there are at least two
// points per pixel on average
{
if( lineData )
{
QCPDataMap::const_iterator it = lower;
QCPDataMap::const_iterator upperEnd = upper + 1;
double minValue = it.value().value;
double maxValue = it.value().value;
QCPDataMap::const_iterator currentIntervalFirstPoint = it;
int reversedFactor = keyAxis->rangeReversed() ? -1 : 1; // is used to calculate keyEpsilon
// pixel into the correct direction
int reversedRound = keyAxis->rangeReversed() ? 1 : 0; // is used to switch between floor
// (normal) and ceil (reversed)
// rounding of
// currentIntervalStartKey
double currentIntervalStartKey =
keyAxis->pixelToCoord( (int)( keyAxis->coordToPixel( lower.key() ) + reversedRound ) );
double lastIntervalEndKey = currentIntervalStartKey;
double keyEpsilon =
qAbs( currentIntervalStartKey -
keyAxis->pixelToCoord( keyAxis->coordToPixel( currentIntervalStartKey ) +
1.0 * reversedFactor ) ); // interval of one pixel
// on screen when mapped
// to plot key
// coordinates
bool keyEpsilonVariable =
keyAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic; // indicates whether keyEpsilon needs
// to be updated after every interval
// (for log axes)
int intervalDataCount = 1;
++it; // advance iterator to second data point because adaptive sampling
// works in 1 point retrospect
while( it != upperEnd )
{
if( it.key() < currentIntervalStartKey + keyEpsilon ) // data point is
// still within
// same pixel, so
// skip it and
// expand value span of this cluster if necessary
{
if( it.value().value < minValue )
minValue = it.value().value;
else if( it.value().value > maxValue )
maxValue = it.value().value;
++intervalDataCount;
}
else // new pixel interval started
{
if( intervalDataCount >= 2 ) // last pixel had multiple data points,
// consolidate them to a cluster
{
if( lastIntervalEndKey <
currentIntervalStartKey - keyEpsilon ) // last point is further away, so first
// point of this cluster must be at a real
// data point
lineData->append( QCPData( currentIntervalStartKey + keyEpsilon * 0.2,
currentIntervalFirstPoint.value().value ) );
lineData->append( QCPData( currentIntervalStartKey + keyEpsilon * 0.25, minValue ) );
lineData->append( QCPData( currentIntervalStartKey + keyEpsilon * 0.75, maxValue ) );
if( it.key() > currentIntervalStartKey +
keyEpsilon * 2 ) // new pixel started further away from previous
// cluster, so make sure the last point of the
// cluster is at a real data point
lineData->append(
QCPData( currentIntervalStartKey + keyEpsilon * 0.8, ( it - 1 ).value().value ) );
}
else
lineData->append( QCPData( currentIntervalFirstPoint.key(),
currentIntervalFirstPoint.value().value ) );
lastIntervalEndKey = ( it - 1 ).value().key;
minValue = it.value().value;
maxValue = it.value().value;
currentIntervalFirstPoint = it;
currentIntervalStartKey =
keyAxis->pixelToCoord( (int)( keyAxis->coordToPixel( it.key() ) + reversedRound ) );
if( keyEpsilonVariable )
keyEpsilon =
qAbs( currentIntervalStartKey -
keyAxis->pixelToCoord( keyAxis->coordToPixel( currentIntervalStartKey ) +
1.0 * reversedFactor ) );
intervalDataCount = 1;
}
++it;
}
// handle last interval:
if( intervalDataCount >= 2 ) // last pixel had multiple data points,
// consolidate them to a cluster
{
if( lastIntervalEndKey <
currentIntervalStartKey - keyEpsilon ) // last point wasn't a cluster, so first point
// of this cluster must be at a real data point
lineData->append( QCPData( currentIntervalStartKey + keyEpsilon * 0.2,
currentIntervalFirstPoint.value().value ) );
lineData->append( QCPData( currentIntervalStartKey + keyEpsilon * 0.25, minValue ) );
lineData->append( QCPData( currentIntervalStartKey + keyEpsilon * 0.75, maxValue ) );
}
else
lineData->append(
QCPData( currentIntervalFirstPoint.key(), currentIntervalFirstPoint.value().value ) );
}
if( scatterData )
{
double valueMaxRange = valueAxis->range().upper;
double valueMinRange = valueAxis->range().lower;
QCPDataMap::const_iterator it = lower;
QCPDataMap::const_iterator upperEnd = upper + 1;
double minValue = it.value().value;
double maxValue = it.value().value;
QCPDataMap::const_iterator minValueIt = it;
QCPDataMap::const_iterator maxValueIt = it;
QCPDataMap::const_iterator currentIntervalStart = it;
int reversedFactor = keyAxis->rangeReversed() ? -1 : 1; // is used to calculate keyEpsilon
// pixel into the correct direction
int reversedRound = keyAxis->rangeReversed() ? 1 : 0; // is used to switch between floor
// (normal) and ceil (reversed)
// rounding of
// currentIntervalStartKey
double currentIntervalStartKey =
keyAxis->pixelToCoord( (int)( keyAxis->coordToPixel( lower.key() ) + reversedRound ) );
double keyEpsilon =
qAbs( currentIntervalStartKey -
keyAxis->pixelToCoord( keyAxis->coordToPixel( currentIntervalStartKey ) +
1.0 * reversedFactor ) ); // interval of one pixel
// on screen when mapped
// to plot key
// coordinates
bool keyEpsilonVariable =
keyAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic; // indicates whether keyEpsilon needs
// to be updated after every interval
// (for log axes)
int intervalDataCount = 1;
++it; // advance iterator to second data point because adaptive sampling
// works in 1 point retrospect
while( it != upperEnd )
{
if( it.key() < currentIntervalStartKey + keyEpsilon ) // data point is
// still within
// same pixel, so
// skip it and
// expand value span of this pixel if necessary
{
if( it.value().value < minValue && it.value().value > valueMinRange &&
it.value().value < valueMaxRange )
{
minValue = it.value().value;
minValueIt = it;
}
else if( it.value().value > maxValue && it.value().value > valueMinRange &&
it.value().value < valueMaxRange )
{
maxValue = it.value().value;
maxValueIt = it;
}
++intervalDataCount;
}
else // new pixel started
{
if( intervalDataCount >= 2 ) // last pixel had multiple data points, consolidate them
{
// determine value pixel span and add as many points in interval to
// maintain certain vertical data density
// (this is specific to scatter plot):
double valuePixelSpan =
qAbs( valueAxis->coordToPixel( minValue ) - valueAxis->coordToPixel( maxValue ) );
int dataModulo = qMax(
1,
qRound( intervalDataCount / ( valuePixelSpan / 4.0 ) ) ); // approximately every 4
// value pixels one data
// point on average
QCPDataMap::const_iterator intervalIt = currentIntervalStart;
int c = 0;
while( intervalIt != it )
{
if( ( c % dataModulo == 0 || intervalIt == minValueIt || intervalIt == maxValueIt ) &&
intervalIt.value().value > valueMinRange &&
intervalIt.value().value < valueMaxRange )
scatterData->append( intervalIt.value() );
++c;
++intervalIt;
}
}
else if( currentIntervalStart.value().value > valueMinRange &&
currentIntervalStart.value().value < valueMaxRange )
scatterData->append( currentIntervalStart.value() );
minValue = it.value().value;
maxValue = it.value().value;
currentIntervalStart = it;
currentIntervalStartKey =
keyAxis->pixelToCoord( (int)( keyAxis->coordToPixel( it.key() ) + reversedRound ) );
if( keyEpsilonVariable )
keyEpsilon =
qAbs( currentIntervalStartKey -
keyAxis->pixelToCoord( keyAxis->coordToPixel( currentIntervalStartKey ) +
1.0 * reversedFactor ) );
intervalDataCount = 1;
}
++it;
}
// handle last interval:
if( intervalDataCount >= 2 ) // last pixel had multiple data points, consolidate them
{
// determine value pixel span and add as many points in interval to
// maintain certain vertical data density (this
// is specific to scatter plot):
double valuePixelSpan =
qAbs( valueAxis->coordToPixel( minValue ) - valueAxis->coordToPixel( maxValue ) );
int dataModulo = qMax(
1, qRound( intervalDataCount / ( valuePixelSpan / 4.0 ) ) ); // approximately every 4
// value pixels one data
// point on average
QCPDataMap::const_iterator intervalIt = currentIntervalStart;
int c = 0;
while( intervalIt != it )
{
if( ( c % dataModulo == 0 || intervalIt == minValueIt || intervalIt == maxValueIt ) &&
intervalIt.value().value > valueMinRange && intervalIt.value().value < valueMaxRange )
scatterData->append( intervalIt.value() );
++c;
++intervalIt;
}
}
else if( currentIntervalStart.value().value > valueMinRange &&
currentIntervalStart.value().value < valueMaxRange )
scatterData->append( currentIntervalStart.value() );
}
}
else // don't use adaptive sampling algorithm, transfer points one-to-one
// from the map into the output parameters
{
QVector<QCPData>* dataVector = 0;
if( lineData )
dataVector = lineData;
else if( scatterData )
dataVector = scatterData;
if( dataVector )
{
QCPDataMap::const_iterator it = lower;
QCPDataMap::const_iterator upperEnd = upper + 1;
dataVector->reserve( dataCount + 2 ); // +2 for possible fill end points
while( it != upperEnd )
{
dataVector->append( it.value() );
++it;
}
}
if( lineData && scatterData )
*scatterData = *dataVector;
}
}
/*! \internal
called by the scatter drawing function (\ref drawScatterPlot) to draw the
error bars on one data
point. \a x and \a y pixel positions of the data point are passed since they
are already known in
pixel coordinates in the drawing function, so we save some extra coordToPixel
transforms here. \a
data is therefore only used for the errors, not key and value.
*/
void QCPGraph::drawError( QCPPainter* painter, double x, double y, const QCPData& data ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
double a, b; // positions of error bar bounds in pixels
double barWidthHalf = mErrorBarSize * 0.5;
double skipSymbolMargin = mScatterStyle.size(); // pixels left blank per side,
// when mErrorBarSkipSymbol is
// true
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
{
// draw key error vertically and value error horizontally
if( mErrorType == etKey || mErrorType == etBoth )
{
a = keyAxis->coordToPixel( data.key - data.keyErrorMinus );
b = keyAxis->coordToPixel( data.key + data.keyErrorPlus );
if( keyAxis->rangeReversed() )
qSwap( a, b );
// draw spine:
if( mErrorBarSkipSymbol )
{
if( a - y > skipSymbolMargin ) // don't draw spine if error is so small
// it's within skipSymbolmargin
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, a, x, y + skipSymbolMargin ) );
if( y - b > skipSymbolMargin )
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, y - skipSymbolMargin, x, b ) );
}
else
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, a, x, b ) );
// draw handles:
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - barWidthHalf, a, x + barWidthHalf, a ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - barWidthHalf, b, x + barWidthHalf, b ) );
}
if( mErrorType == etValue || mErrorType == etBoth )
{
a = valueAxis->coordToPixel( data.value - data.valueErrorMinus );
b = valueAxis->coordToPixel( data.value + data.valueErrorPlus );
if( valueAxis->rangeReversed() )
qSwap( a, b );
// draw spine:
if( mErrorBarSkipSymbol )
{
if( x - a > skipSymbolMargin ) // don't draw spine if error is so small
// it's within skipSymbolmargin
painter->drawLine( QLineF( a, y, x - skipSymbolMargin, y ) );
if( b - x > skipSymbolMargin )
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x + skipSymbolMargin, y, b, y ) );
}
else
painter->drawLine( QLineF( a, y, b, y ) );
// draw handles:
painter->drawLine( QLineF( a, y - barWidthHalf, a, y + barWidthHalf ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( b, y - barWidthHalf, b, y + barWidthHalf ) );
}
}
else // mKeyAxis->orientation() is Qt::Horizontal
{
// draw value error vertically and key error horizontally
if( mErrorType == etKey || mErrorType == etBoth )
{
a = keyAxis->coordToPixel( data.key - data.keyErrorMinus );
b = keyAxis->coordToPixel( data.key + data.keyErrorPlus );
if( keyAxis->rangeReversed() )
qSwap( a, b );
// draw spine:
if( mErrorBarSkipSymbol )
{
if( x - a > skipSymbolMargin ) // don't draw spine if error is so small
// it's within skipSymbolmargin
painter->drawLine( QLineF( a, y, x - skipSymbolMargin, y ) );
if( b - x > skipSymbolMargin )
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x + skipSymbolMargin, y, b, y ) );
}
else
painter->drawLine( QLineF( a, y, b, y ) );
// draw handles:
painter->drawLine( QLineF( a, y - barWidthHalf, a, y + barWidthHalf ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( b, y - barWidthHalf, b, y + barWidthHalf ) );
}
if( mErrorType == etValue || mErrorType == etBoth )
{
a = valueAxis->coordToPixel( data.value - data.valueErrorMinus );
b = valueAxis->coordToPixel( data.value + data.valueErrorPlus );
if( valueAxis->rangeReversed() )
qSwap( a, b );
// draw spine:
if( mErrorBarSkipSymbol )
{
if( a - y > skipSymbolMargin ) // don't draw spine if error is so small
// it's within skipSymbolmargin
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, a, x, y + skipSymbolMargin ) );
if( y - b > skipSymbolMargin )
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, y - skipSymbolMargin, x, b ) );
}
else
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x, a, x, b ) );
// draw handles:
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - barWidthHalf, a, x + barWidthHalf, a ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( x - barWidthHalf, b, x + barWidthHalf, b ) );
}
}
}
/*! \internal
called by \ref getPreparedData to determine which data (key) range is visible
at the current key
axis range setting, so only that needs to be processed.
\a lower returns an iterator to the lowest data point that needs to be taken
into account when
plotting. Note that in order to get a clean plot all the way to the edge of
the axis rect, \a
lower may still be just outside the visible range.
\a upper returns an iterator to the highest data point. Same as before, \a
upper may also lie
just outside of the visible range.
if the graph contains no data, both \a lower and \a upper point to constEnd.
*/
void QCPGraph::getVisibleDataBounds( QCPDataMap::const_iterator& lower,
QCPDataMap::const_iterator& upper ) const
{
if( !mKeyAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis";
return;
}
if( mData->isEmpty() )
{
lower = mData->constEnd();
upper = mData->constEnd();
return;
}
// get visible data range as QMap iterators
QCPDataMap::const_iterator lbound = mData->lowerBound( mKeyAxis.data()->range().lower );
QCPDataMap::const_iterator ubound = mData->upperBound( mKeyAxis.data()->range().upper );
bool lowoutlier = lbound != mData->constBegin(); // indicates whether there
// exist points below axis
// range
bool highoutlier =
ubound != mData->constEnd(); // indicates whether there exist points above axis range
lower = ( lowoutlier ? lbound - 1 : lbound ); // data point range that will be actually drawn
upper = ( highoutlier ? ubound : ubound - 1 ); // data point range that will be actually drawn
}
/*! \internal
Counts the number of data points between \a lower and \a upper (including
them), up to a maximum
of \a maxCount.
This function is used by \ref getPreparedData to determine whether adaptive
sampling shall be
used (if enabled via \ref setAdaptiveSampling) or not. This is also why
counting of data points
only needs to be done until \a maxCount is reached, which should be set to the
number of data
points at which adaptive sampling sets in.
*/
int QCPGraph::countDataInBounds( const QCPDataMap::const_iterator& lower,
const QCPDataMap::const_iterator& upper,
int maxCount ) const
{
if( upper == mData->constEnd() && lower == mData->constEnd() )
return 0;
QCPDataMap::const_iterator it = lower;
int count = 1;
while( it != upper && count < maxCount )
{
++it;
++count;
}
return count;
}
/*! \internal
The line data vector generated by e.g. getLinePlotData contains only the line
that connects the
data points. If the graph needs to be filled, two additional points need to be
added at the
value-zero-line in the lower and upper key positions of the graph. This
function calculates these
points and adds them to the end of \a lineData. Since the fill is typically
drawn before the line
stroke, these added points need to be removed again after the fill is done,
with the
removeFillBasePoints function.
The expanding of \a lineData by two points will not cause unnecessary memory
reallocations,
because the data vector generation functions (getLinePlotData etc.) reserve
two extra points when
they allocate memory for \a lineData.
\see removeFillBasePoints, lowerFillBasePoint, upperFillBasePoint
*/
void QCPGraph::addFillBasePoints( QVector<QPointF>* lineData ) const
{
if( !mKeyAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key axis";
return;
}
// append points that close the polygon fill at the key axis:
if( mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
{
*lineData << upperFillBasePoint( lineData->last().y() );
*lineData << lowerFillBasePoint( lineData->first().y() );
}
else
{
*lineData << upperFillBasePoint( lineData->last().x() );
*lineData << lowerFillBasePoint( lineData->first().x() );
}
}
/*! \internal
removes the two points from \a lineData that were added by \ref
addFillBasePoints.
\see addFillBasePoints, lowerFillBasePoint, upperFillBasePoint
*/
void QCPGraph::removeFillBasePoints( QVector<QPointF>* lineData ) const
{
lineData->remove( lineData->size() - 2, 2 );
}
/*! \internal
called by \ref addFillBasePoints to conveniently assign the point which closes
the fill polygon
on the lower side of the zero-value-line parallel to the key axis. The
logarithmic axis scale
case is a bit special, since the zero-value-line in pixel coordinates is in
positive or negative
infinity. So this case is handled separately by just closing the fill polygon
on the axis which
lies in the direction towards the zero value.
\a lowerKey will be the the key (in pixels) of the returned point. Depending
on whether the key
axis is horizontal or vertical, \a lowerKey will end up as the x or y value of
the returned
point, respectively.
\see upperFillBasePoint, addFillBasePoints
*/
QPointF QCPGraph::lowerFillBasePoint( double lowerKey ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return QPointF();
}
QPointF point;
if( valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLinear )
{
if( keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atLeft )
{
point.setX( valueAxis->coordToPixel( 0 ) );
point.setY( lowerKey );
}
else if( keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atRight )
{
point.setX( valueAxis->coordToPixel( 0 ) );
point.setY( lowerKey );
}
else if( keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atTop )
{
point.setX( lowerKey );
point.setY( valueAxis->coordToPixel( 0 ) );
}
else if( keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atBottom )
{
point.setX( lowerKey );
point.setY( valueAxis->coordToPixel( 0 ) );
}
}
else // valueAxis->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic
{
// In logarithmic scaling we can't just draw to value zero so we just fill
// all the way
// to the axis which is in the direction towards zero
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
{
if( ( valueAxis->range().upper < 0 && !valueAxis->rangeReversed() ) ||
( valueAxis->range().upper > 0 &&
valueAxis->rangeReversed() ) ) // if range is negative, zero is on
// opposite side of key axis
point.setX( keyAxis->axisRect()->right() );
else
point.setX( keyAxis->axisRect()->left() );
point.setY( lowerKey );
}
else if( keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atTop || keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atBottom )
{
point.setX( lowerKey );
if( ( valueAxis->range().upper < 0 && !valueAxis->rangeReversed() ) ||
( valueAxis->range().upper > 0 &&
valueAxis->rangeReversed() ) ) // if range is negative, zero is on
// opposite side of key axis
point.setY( keyAxis->axisRect()->top() );
else
point.setY( keyAxis->axisRect()->bottom() );
}
}
return point;
}
/*! \internal
called by \ref addFillBasePoints to conveniently assign the point which closes
the fill
polygon on the upper side of the zero-value-line parallel to the key axis. The
logarithmic axis
scale case is a bit special, since the zero-value-line in pixel coordinates is
in positive or
negative infinity. So this case is handled separately by just closing the fill
polygon on the
axis which lies in the direction towards the zero value.
\a upperKey will be the the key (in pixels) of the returned point. Depending
on whether the key
axis is horizontal or vertical, \a upperKey will end up as the x or y value of
the returned
point, respectively.
\see lowerFillBasePoint, addFillBasePoints
*/
QPointF QCPGraph::upperFillBasePoint( double upperKey ) const
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return QPointF();
}
QPointF point;
if( valueAxis->scaleType() == QCPAxis::stLinear )
{
if( keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atLeft )
{
point.setX( valueAxis->coordToPixel( 0 ) );
point.setY( upperKey );
}
else if( keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atRight )
{
point.setX( valueAxis->coordToPixel( 0 ) );
point.setY( upperKey );
}
else if( keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atTop )
{
point.setX( upperKey );
point.setY( valueAxis->coordToPixel( 0 ) );
}
else if( keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atBottom )
{
point.setX( upperKey );
point.setY( valueAxis->coordToPixel( 0 ) );
}
}
else // valueAxis->mScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic
{
// In logarithmic scaling we can't just draw to value 0 so we just fill all
// the way
// to the axis which is in the direction towards 0
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
{
if( ( valueAxis->range().upper < 0 && !valueAxis->rangeReversed() ) ||
( valueAxis->range().upper > 0 &&
valueAxis->rangeReversed() ) ) // if range is negative, zero is on
// opposite side of key axis
point.setX( keyAxis->axisRect()->right() );
else
point.setX( keyAxis->axisRect()->left() );
point.setY( upperKey );
}
else if( keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atTop || keyAxis->axisType() == QCPAxis::atBottom )
{
point.setX( upperKey );
if( ( valueAxis->range().upper < 0 && !valueAxis->rangeReversed() ) ||
( valueAxis->range().upper > 0 &&
valueAxis->rangeReversed() ) ) // if range is negative, zero is on
// opposite side of key axis
point.setY( keyAxis->axisRect()->top() );
else
point.setY( keyAxis->axisRect()->bottom() );
}
}
return point;
}
/*! \internal
Generates the polygon needed for drawing channel fills between this graph
(data passed via \a
lineData) and the graph specified by mChannelFillGraph (data generated by
calling its \ref
getPlotData function). May return an empty polygon if the key ranges have no
overlap or fill
target graph and this graph don't have same orientation (i.e. both key axes
horizontal or both
key axes vertical). For increased performance (due to implicit sharing), keep
the returned
QPolygonF const.
*/
const QPolygonF QCPGraph::getChannelFillPolygon( const QVector<QPointF>* lineData ) const
{
if( !mChannelFillGraph )
return QPolygonF();
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return QPolygonF();
}
if( !mChannelFillGraph.data()->mKeyAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "channel fill target key axis invalid";
return QPolygonF();
}
if( mChannelFillGraph.data()->mKeyAxis.data()->orientation() != keyAxis->orientation() )
return QPolygonF(); // don't have same axis orientation, can't fill that
// (Note: if keyAxis fits, valueAxis will fit
// too, because it's always orthogonal to keyAxis)
if( lineData->isEmpty() )
return QPolygonF();
QVector<QPointF> otherData;
mChannelFillGraph.data()->getPlotData( &otherData, 0 );
if( otherData.isEmpty() )
return QPolygonF();
QVector<QPointF> thisData;
thisData.reserve( lineData->size() + otherData.size() ); // because we will join
// both vectors at end
// of this function
for( int i = 0; i < lineData->size(); ++i ) // don't use the vector<<(vector),
// it squeezes internally, which
// ruins
// the performance tuning with reserve()
thisData << lineData->at( i );
// pointers to be able to swap them, depending which data range needs
// cropping:
QVector<QPointF>* staticData = &thisData;
QVector<QPointF>* croppedData = &otherData;
// crop both vectors to ranges in which the keys overlap (which coord is key,
// depends on axisType):
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
// x is key
// if an axis range is reversed, the data point keys will be descending.
// Reverse them, since following algorithm
// assumes ascending keys:
if( staticData->first().x() > staticData->last().x() )
{
int size = staticData->size();
for( int i = 0; i < size / 2; ++i )
qSwap( ( *staticData )[i], ( *staticData )[size - 1 - i] );
}
if( croppedData->first().x() > croppedData->last().x() )
{
int size = croppedData->size();
for( int i = 0; i < size / 2; ++i )
qSwap( ( *croppedData )[i], ( *croppedData )[size - 1 - i] );
}
// crop lower bound:
if( staticData->first().x() < croppedData->first().x() ) // other one must be cropped
qSwap( staticData, croppedData );
int lowBound = findIndexBelowX( croppedData, staticData->first().x() );
if( lowBound == -1 )
return QPolygonF(); // key ranges have no overlap
croppedData->remove( 0, lowBound );
// set lowest point of cropped data to fit exactly key position of first
// static data
// point via linear interpolation:
if( croppedData->size() < 2 )
return QPolygonF(); // need at least two points for interpolation
double slope;
if( croppedData->at( 1 ).x() - croppedData->at( 0 ).x() != 0 )
slope = ( croppedData->at( 1 ).y() - croppedData->at( 0 ).y() ) /
( croppedData->at( 1 ).x() - croppedData->at( 0 ).x() );
else
slope = 0;
( *croppedData )[0].setY( croppedData->at( 0 ).y() +
slope * ( staticData->first().x() - croppedData->at( 0 ).x() ) );
( *croppedData )[0].setX( staticData->first().x() );
// crop upper bound:
if( staticData->last().x() > croppedData->last().x() ) // other one must be cropped
qSwap( staticData, croppedData );
int highBound = findIndexAboveX( croppedData, staticData->last().x() );
if( highBound == -1 )
return QPolygonF(); // key ranges have no overlap
croppedData->remove( highBound + 1, croppedData->size() - ( highBound + 1 ) );
// set highest point of cropped data to fit exactly key position of last
// static data
// point via linear interpolation:
if( croppedData->size() < 2 )
return QPolygonF(); // need at least two points for interpolation
int li = croppedData->size() - 1; // last index
if( croppedData->at( li ).x() - croppedData->at( li - 1 ).x() != 0 )
slope = ( croppedData->at( li ).y() - croppedData->at( li - 1 ).y() ) /
( croppedData->at( li ).x() - croppedData->at( li - 1 ).x() );
else
slope = 0;
( *croppedData )[li].setY( croppedData->at( li - 1 ).y() +
slope * ( staticData->last().x() - croppedData->at( li - 1 ).x() ) );
( *croppedData )[li].setX( staticData->last().x() );
}
else // mKeyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical
{
// y is key
// similar to "x is key" but switched x,y. Further, lower/upper meaning is
// inverted compared to x,
// because in pixel coordinates, y increases from top to bottom, not bottom
// to top like data coordinate.
// if an axis range is reversed, the data point keys will be descending.
// Reverse them, since following algorithm
// assumes ascending keys:
if( staticData->first().y() < staticData->last().y() )
{
int size = staticData->size();
for( int i = 0; i < size / 2; ++i )
qSwap( ( *staticData )[i], ( *staticData )[size - 1 - i] );
}
if( croppedData->first().y() < croppedData->last().y() )
{
int size = croppedData->size();
for( int i = 0; i < size / 2; ++i )
qSwap( ( *croppedData )[i], ( *croppedData )[size - 1 - i] );
}
// crop lower bound:
if( staticData->first().y() > croppedData->first().y() ) // other one must be cropped
qSwap( staticData, croppedData );
int lowBound = findIndexAboveY( croppedData, staticData->first().y() );
if( lowBound == -1 )
return QPolygonF(); // key ranges have no overlap
croppedData->remove( 0, lowBound );
// set lowest point of cropped data to fit exactly key position of first
// static data
// point via linear interpolation:
if( croppedData->size() < 2 )
return QPolygonF(); // need at least two points for interpolation
double slope;
if( croppedData->at( 1 ).y() - croppedData->at( 0 ).y() !=
0 ) // avoid division by zero in step plots
slope = ( croppedData->at( 1 ).x() - croppedData->at( 0 ).x() ) /
( croppedData->at( 1 ).y() - croppedData->at( 0 ).y() );
else
slope = 0;
( *croppedData )[0].setX( croppedData->at( 0 ).x() +
slope * ( staticData->first().y() - croppedData->at( 0 ).y() ) );
( *croppedData )[0].setY( staticData->first().y() );
// crop upper bound:
if( staticData->last().y() < croppedData->last().y() ) // other one must be cropped
qSwap( staticData, croppedData );
int highBound = findIndexBelowY( croppedData, staticData->last().y() );
if( highBound == -1 )
return QPolygonF(); // key ranges have no overlap
croppedData->remove( highBound + 1, croppedData->size() - ( highBound + 1 ) );
// set highest point of cropped data to fit exactly key position of last
// static data
// point via linear interpolation:
if( croppedData->size() < 2 )
return QPolygonF(); // need at least two points for interpolation
int li = croppedData->size() - 1; // last index
if( croppedData->at( li ).y() - croppedData->at( li - 1 ).y() !=
0 ) // avoid division by zero in step plots
slope = ( croppedData->at( li ).x() - croppedData->at( li - 1 ).x() ) /
( croppedData->at( li ).y() - croppedData->at( li - 1 ).y() );
else
slope = 0;
( *croppedData )[li].setX( croppedData->at( li - 1 ).x() +
slope * ( staticData->last().y() - croppedData->at( li - 1 ).y() ) );
( *croppedData )[li].setY( staticData->last().y() );
}
// return joined:
for( int i = otherData.size() - 1; i >= 0;
--i ) // insert reversed, otherwise the polygon will be twisted
thisData << otherData.at( i );
return QPolygonF( thisData );
}
/*! \internal
Finds the smallest index of \a data, whose points x value is just above \a x.
Assumes x values in
\a data points are ordered ascending, as is the case when plotting with
horizontal key axis.
Used to calculate the channel fill polygon, see \ref getChannelFillPolygon.
*/
int QCPGraph::findIndexAboveX( const QVector<QPointF>* data, double x ) const
{
for( int i = data->size() - 1; i >= 0; --i )
{
if( data->at( i ).x() < x )
{
if( i < data->size() - 1 )
return i + 1;
else
return data->size() - 1;
}
}
return -1;
}
/*! \internal
Finds the highest index of \a data, whose points x value is just below \a x.
Assumes x values in
\a data points are ordered ascending, as is the case when plotting with
horizontal key axis.
Used to calculate the channel fill polygon, see \ref getChannelFillPolygon.
*/
int QCPGraph::findIndexBelowX( const QVector<QPointF>* data, double x ) const
{
for( int i = 0; i < data->size(); ++i )
{
if( data->at( i ).x() > x )
{
if( i > 0 )
return i - 1;
else
return 0;
}
}
return -1;
}
/*! \internal
Finds the smallest index of \a data, whose points y value is just above \a y.
Assumes y values in
\a data points are ordered descending, as is the case when plotting with
vertical key axis.
Used to calculate the channel fill polygon, see \ref getChannelFillPolygon.
*/
int QCPGraph::findIndexAboveY( const QVector<QPointF>* data, double y ) const
{
for( int i = 0; i < data->size(); ++i )
{
if( data->at( i ).y() < y )
{
if( i > 0 )
return i - 1;
else
return 0;
}
}
return -1;
}
/*! \internal
Calculates the (minimum) distance (in pixels) the graph's representation has
from the given \a
pixelPoint in pixels. This is used to determine whether the graph was clicked
or not, e.g. in
\ref selectTest.
If either the graph has no data or if the line style is \ref lsNone and the
scatter style's shape
is \ref QCPScatterStyle::ssNone (i.e. there is no visual representation of the
graph), returns
500.
*/
double QCPGraph::pointDistance( const QPointF& pixelPoint ) const
{
if( mData->isEmpty() )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "requested point distance on graph" << mName << "without data";
return 500;
}
if( mData->size() == 1 )
{
QPointF dataPoint =
coordsToPixels( mData->constBegin().key(), mData->constBegin().value().value );
return QVector2D( dataPoint - pixelPoint ).length();
}
if( mLineStyle == lsNone && mScatterStyle.isNone() )
return 500;
// calculate minimum distances to graph representation:
if( mLineStyle == lsNone )
{
// no line displayed, only calculate distance to scatter points:
QVector<QCPData>* scatterData = new QVector<QCPData>;
getScatterPlotData( scatterData );
double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits<double>::max();
QPointF ptA;
QPointF ptB = coordsToPixels( scatterData->at( 0 ).key,
scatterData->at( 0 ).value ); // getScatterPlotData returns
// in plot coordinates, so
// transform to pixels
for( int i = 1; i < scatterData->size(); ++i )
{
ptA = ptB;
ptB = coordsToPixels( scatterData->at( i ).key, scatterData->at( i ).value );
double currentDistSqr = distSqrToLine( ptA, ptB, pixelPoint );
if( currentDistSqr < minDistSqr )
minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
}
delete scatterData;
return sqrt( minDistSqr );
}
else
{
// line displayed calculate distance to line segments:
QVector<QPointF>* lineData = new QVector<QPointF>;
getPlotData( lineData, 0 ); // unlike with getScatterPlotData we get pixel coordinates here
double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits<double>::max();
if( mLineStyle == lsImpulse )
{
// impulse plot differs from other line styles in that the lineData points
// are only pairwise connected:
for( int i = 0; i < lineData->size() - 1; i += 2 ) // iterate pairs
{
double currentDistSqr =
distSqrToLine( lineData->at( i ), lineData->at( i + 1 ), pixelPoint );
if( currentDistSqr < minDistSqr )
minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
}
}
else
{
// all other line plots (line and step) connect points directly:
for( int i = 0; i < lineData->size() - 1; ++i )
{
double currentDistSqr =
distSqrToLine( lineData->at( i ), lineData->at( i + 1 ), pixelPoint );
if( currentDistSqr < minDistSqr )
minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
}
}
delete lineData;
return sqrt( minDistSqr );
}
}
/*! \internal
Finds the highest index of \a data, whose points y value is just below \a y.
Assumes y values in
\a data points are ordered descending, as is the case when plotting with
vertical key axis (since
keys are ordered ascending).
Used to calculate the channel fill polygon, see \ref getChannelFillPolygon.
*/
int QCPGraph::findIndexBelowY( const QVector<QPointF>* data, double y ) const
{
for( int i = data->size() - 1; i >= 0; --i )
{
if( data->at( i ).y() > y )
{
if( i < data->size() - 1 )
return i + 1;
else
return data->size() - 1;
}
}
return -1;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPGraph::getKeyRange( bool& foundRange, SignDomain inSignDomain ) const
{
// just call the specialized version which takes an additional argument
// whether error bars
// should also be taken into consideration for range calculation. We set this
// to true here.
return getKeyRange( foundRange, inSignDomain, true );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPGraph::getValueRange( bool& foundRange, SignDomain inSignDomain ) const
{
// just call the specialized version which takes an additional argument
// whether error bars
// should also be taken into consideration for range calculation. We set this
// to true here.
return getValueRange( foundRange, inSignDomain, true );
}
/*! \overload
Allows to specify whether the error bars should be included in the range
calculation.
\see getKeyRange(bool &foundRange, SignDomain inSignDomain)
*/
QCPRange QCPGraph::getKeyRange( bool& foundRange,
SignDomain inSignDomain,
bool includeErrors ) const
{
QCPRange range;
bool haveLower = false;
bool haveUpper = false;
double current, currentErrorMinus, currentErrorPlus;
if( inSignDomain == sdBoth ) // range may be anywhere
{
QCPDataMap::const_iterator it = mData->constBegin();
while( it != mData->constEnd() )
{
current = it.value().key;
currentErrorMinus = ( includeErrors ? it.value().keyErrorMinus : 0 );
currentErrorPlus = ( includeErrors ? it.value().keyErrorPlus : 0 );
if( current - currentErrorMinus < range.lower || !haveLower )
{
range.lower = current - currentErrorMinus;
haveLower = true;
}
if( current + currentErrorPlus > range.upper || !haveUpper )
{
range.upper = current + currentErrorPlus;
haveUpper = true;
}
++it;
}
}
else if( inSignDomain == sdNegative ) // range may only be in the negative sign domain
{
QCPDataMap::const_iterator it = mData->constBegin();
while( it != mData->constEnd() )
{
current = it.value().key;
currentErrorMinus = ( includeErrors ? it.value().keyErrorMinus : 0 );
currentErrorPlus = ( includeErrors ? it.value().keyErrorPlus : 0 );
if( ( current - currentErrorMinus < range.lower || !haveLower ) &&
current - currentErrorMinus < 0 )
{
range.lower = current - currentErrorMinus;
haveLower = true;
}
if( ( current + currentErrorPlus > range.upper || !haveUpper ) &&
current + currentErrorPlus < 0 )
{
range.upper = current + currentErrorPlus;
haveUpper = true;
}
if( includeErrors ) // in case point is in valid sign domain but errobars
// stretch beyond it, we still want to
// geht that point.
{
if( ( current < range.lower || !haveLower ) && current < 0 )
{
range.lower = current;
haveLower = true;
}
if( ( current > range.upper || !haveUpper ) && current < 0 )
{
range.upper = current;
haveUpper = true;
}
}
++it;
}
}
else if( inSignDomain == sdPositive ) // range may only be in the positive sign domain
{
QCPDataMap::const_iterator it = mData->constBegin();
while( it != mData->constEnd() )
{
current = it.value().key;
currentErrorMinus = ( includeErrors ? it.value().keyErrorMinus : 0 );
currentErrorPlus = ( includeErrors ? it.value().keyErrorPlus : 0 );
if( ( current - currentErrorMinus < range.lower || !haveLower ) &&
current - currentErrorMinus > 0 )
{
range.lower = current - currentErrorMinus;
haveLower = true;
}
if( ( current + currentErrorPlus > range.upper || !haveUpper ) &&
current + currentErrorPlus > 0 )
{
range.upper = current + currentErrorPlus;
haveUpper = true;
}
if( includeErrors ) // in case point is in valid sign domain but errobars
// stretch beyond it, we still want to get
// that point.
{
if( ( current < range.lower || !haveLower ) && current > 0 )
{
range.lower = current;
haveLower = true;
}
if( ( current > range.upper || !haveUpper ) && current > 0 )
{
range.upper = current;
haveUpper = true;
}
}
++it;
}
}
foundRange = haveLower && haveUpper;
return range;
}
/*! \overload
Allows to specify whether the error bars should be included in the range
calculation.
\see getValueRange(bool &foundRange, SignDomain inSignDomain)
*/
QCPRange QCPGraph::getValueRange( bool& foundRange,
SignDomain inSignDomain,
bool includeErrors ) const
{
QCPRange range;
bool haveLower = false;
bool haveUpper = false;
double current, currentErrorMinus, currentErrorPlus;
if( inSignDomain == sdBoth ) // range may be anywhere
{
QCPDataMap::const_iterator it = mData->constBegin();
while( it != mData->constEnd() )
{
current = it.value().value;
currentErrorMinus = ( includeErrors ? it.value().valueErrorMinus : 0 );
currentErrorPlus = ( includeErrors ? it.value().valueErrorPlus : 0 );
if( current - currentErrorMinus < range.lower || !haveLower )
{
range.lower = current - currentErrorMinus;
haveLower = true;
}
if( current + currentErrorPlus > range.upper || !haveUpper )
{
range.upper = current + currentErrorPlus;
haveUpper = true;
}
++it;
}
}
else if( inSignDomain == sdNegative ) // range may only be in the negative sign domain
{
QCPDataMap::const_iterator it = mData->constBegin();
while( it != mData->constEnd() )
{
current = it.value().value;
currentErrorMinus = ( includeErrors ? it.value().valueErrorMinus : 0 );
currentErrorPlus = ( includeErrors ? it.value().valueErrorPlus : 0 );
if( ( current - currentErrorMinus < range.lower || !haveLower ) &&
current - currentErrorMinus < 0 )
{
range.lower = current - currentErrorMinus;
haveLower = true;
}
if( ( current + currentErrorPlus > range.upper || !haveUpper ) &&
current + currentErrorPlus < 0 )
{
range.upper = current + currentErrorPlus;
haveUpper = true;
}
if( includeErrors ) // in case point is in valid sign domain but errobars
// stretch beyond it, we still want to get
// that point.
{
if( ( current < range.lower || !haveLower ) && current < 0 )
{
range.lower = current;
haveLower = true;
}
if( ( current > range.upper || !haveUpper ) && current < 0 )
{
range.upper = current;
haveUpper = true;
}
}
++it;
}
}
else if( inSignDomain == sdPositive ) // range may only be in the positive sign domain
{
QCPDataMap::const_iterator it = mData->constBegin();
while( it != mData->constEnd() )
{
current = it.value().value;
currentErrorMinus = ( includeErrors ? it.value().valueErrorMinus : 0 );
currentErrorPlus = ( includeErrors ? it.value().valueErrorPlus : 0 );
if( ( current - currentErrorMinus < range.lower || !haveLower ) &&
current - currentErrorMinus > 0 )
{
range.lower = current - currentErrorMinus;
haveLower = true;
}
if( ( current + currentErrorPlus > range.upper || !haveUpper ) &&
current + currentErrorPlus > 0 )
{
range.upper = current + currentErrorPlus;
haveUpper = true;
}
if( includeErrors ) // in case point is in valid sign domain but errobars
// stretch beyond it, we still want to
// geht that point.
{
if( ( current < range.lower || !haveLower ) && current > 0 )
{
range.lower = current;
haveLower = true;
}
if( ( current > range.upper || !haveUpper ) && current > 0 )
{
range.upper = current;
haveUpper = true;
}
}
++it;
}
}
foundRange = haveLower && haveUpper;
return range;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPCurveData
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPCurveData
\brief Holds the data of one single data point for QCPCurve.
The container for storing multiple data points is \ref QCPCurveDataMap.
The stored data is:
\li \a t: the free parameter of the curve at this curve point (cp. the
mathematical vector <em>(x(t), y(t))</em>)
\li \a key: coordinate on the key axis of this curve point
\li \a value: coordinate on the value axis of this curve point
\see QCPCurveDataMap
*/
/*!
Constructs a curve data point with t, key and value set to zero.
*/
QCPCurveData::QCPCurveData() : t( 0 ), key( 0 ), value( 0 ) {}
/*!
Constructs a curve data point with the specified \a t, \a key and \a value.
*/
QCPCurveData::QCPCurveData( double t, double key, double value )
: t( t ), key( key ), value( value )
{
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPCurve
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPCurve
\brief A plottable representing a parametric curve in a plot.
\image html QCPCurve.png
Unlike QCPGraph, plottables of this type may have multiple points with the
same key coordinate,
so their visual representation can have \a loops. This is realized by
introducing a third
coordinate \a t, which defines the order of the points described by the other
two coordinates \a
x and \a y.
To plot data, assign it with the \ref setData or \ref addData functions.
\section appearance Changing the appearance
The appearance of the curve is determined by the pen and the brush (\ref
setPen, \ref setBrush).
\section usage Usage
Like all data representing objects in QCustomPlot, the QCPCurve is a plottable
(QCPAbstractPlottable). So
the plottable-interface of QCustomPlot applies (QCustomPlot::plottable,
QCustomPlot::addPlottable,
QCustomPlot::removePlottable, etc.)
Usually, you first create an instance:
\code
QCPCurve *newCurve = new QCPCurve(customPlot->xAxis,
customPlot->yAxis);\endcode
add it to the customPlot with QCustomPlot::addPlottable:
\code
customPlot->addPlottable(newCurve);\endcode
and then modify the properties of the newly created plottable, e.g.:
\code
newCurve->setName("Fermat's Spiral");
newCurve->setData(tData, xData, yData);\endcode
*/
/*!
Constructs a curve which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a
valueAxis as its value
axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot
instance and not have
the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a
corresponding message is
printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though.
The constructed QCPCurve can be added to the plot with
QCustomPlot::addPlottable, QCustomPlot
then takes ownership of the graph.
*/
QCPCurve::QCPCurve( QCPAxis* keyAxis, QCPAxis* valueAxis )
: QCPAbstractPlottable( keyAxis, valueAxis )
{
mData = new QCPCurveDataMap;
mPen.setColor( Qt::blue );
mPen.setStyle( Qt::SolidLine );
mBrush.setColor( Qt::blue );
mBrush.setStyle( Qt::NoBrush );
mSelectedPen = mPen;
mSelectedPen.setWidthF( 2.5 );
mSelectedPen.setColor( QColor( 80, 80, 255 ) ); // lighter than Qt::blue of mPen
mSelectedBrush = mBrush;
setScatterStyle( QCPScatterStyle() );
setLineStyle( lsLine );
}
QCPCurve::~QCPCurve()
{
delete mData;
}
/*!
Replaces the current data with the provided \a data.
If \a copy is set to true, data points in \a data will only be copied. if
false, the plottable
takes ownership of the passed data and replaces the internal data pointer with
it. This is
significantly faster than copying for large datasets.
*/
void QCPCurve::setData( QCPCurveDataMap* data, bool copy )
{
if( copy )
{
*mData = *data;
}
else
{
delete mData;
mData = data;
}
}
/*! \overload
Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a t, \a key and \a
value tuples. The
provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points
will be the size of
the smallest vector.
*/
void QCPCurve::setData( const QVector<double>& t,
const QVector<double>& key,
const QVector<double>& value )
{
mData->clear();
int n = t.size();
n = qMin( n, key.size() );
n = qMin( n, value.size() );
QCPCurveData newData;
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
newData.t = t[i];
newData.key = key[i];
newData.value = value[i];
mData->insertMulti( newData.t, newData );
}
}
/*! \overload
Replaces the current data with the provided \a key and \a value pairs. The t
parameter
of each data point will be set to the integer index of the respective
key/value pair.
*/
void QCPCurve::setData( const QVector<double>& key, const QVector<double>& value )
{
mData->clear();
int n = key.size();
n = qMin( n, value.size() );
QCPCurveData newData;
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
newData.t = i; // no t vector given, so we assign t the index of the key/value pair
newData.key = key[i];
newData.value = value[i];
mData->insertMulti( newData.t, newData );
}
}
/*!
Sets the visual appearance of single data points in the plot. If set to \ref
QCPScatterStyle::ssNone, no scatter points are drawn (e.g. for line-only plots
with appropriate
line style).
\see QCPScatterStyle, setLineStyle
*/
void QCPCurve::setScatterStyle( const QCPScatterStyle& style )
{
mScatterStyle = style;
}
/*!
Sets how the single data points are connected in the plot or how they are
represented visually
apart from the scatter symbol. For scatter-only plots, set \a style to \ref
lsNone and \ref
setScatterStyle to the desired scatter style.
\see setScatterStyle
*/
void QCPCurve::setLineStyle( QCPCurve::LineStyle style )
{
mLineStyle = style;
}
/*!
Adds the provided data points in \a dataMap to the current data.
\see removeData
*/
void QCPCurve::addData( const QCPCurveDataMap& dataMap )
{
mData->unite( dataMap );
}
/*! \overload
Adds the provided single data point in \a data to the current data.
\see removeData
*/
void QCPCurve::addData( const QCPCurveData& data )
{
mData->insertMulti( data.t, data );
}
/*! \overload
Adds the provided single data point as \a t, \a key and \a value tuple to the
current data
\see removeData
*/
void QCPCurve::addData( double t, double key, double value )
{
QCPCurveData newData;
newData.t = t;
newData.key = key;
newData.value = value;
mData->insertMulti( newData.t, newData );
}
/*! \overload
Adds the provided single data point as \a key and \a value pair to the current
data The t
parameter of the data point is set to the t of the last data point plus 1. If
there is no last
data point, t will be set to 0.
\see removeData
*/
void QCPCurve::addData( double key, double value )
{
QCPCurveData newData;
if( !mData->isEmpty() )
newData.t = ( mData->constEnd() - 1 ).key() + 1;
else
newData.t = 0;
newData.key = key;
newData.value = value;
mData->insertMulti( newData.t, newData );
}
/*! \overload
Adds the provided data points as \a t, \a key and \a value tuples to the
current data.
\see removeData
*/
void QCPCurve::addData( const QVector<double>& ts,
const QVector<double>& keys,
const QVector<double>& values )
{
int n = ts.size();
n = qMin( n, keys.size() );
n = qMin( n, values.size() );
QCPCurveData newData;
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
newData.t = ts[i];
newData.key = keys[i];
newData.value = values[i];
mData->insertMulti( newData.t, newData );
}
}
/*!
Removes all data points with curve parameter t smaller than \a t.
\see addData, clearData
*/
void QCPCurve::removeDataBefore( double t )
{
QCPCurveDataMap::iterator it = mData->begin();
while( it != mData->end() && it.key() < t )
it = mData->erase( it );
}
/*!
Removes all data points with curve parameter t greater than \a t.
\see addData, clearData
*/
void QCPCurve::removeDataAfter( double t )
{
if( mData->isEmpty() )
return;
QCPCurveDataMap::iterator it = mData->upperBound( t );
while( it != mData->end() )
it = mData->erase( it );
}
/*!
Removes all data points with curve parameter t between \a fromt and \a tot. if
\a fromt is
greater or equal to \a tot, the function does nothing. To remove a single data
point with known
t, use \ref removeData(double t).
\see addData, clearData
*/
void QCPCurve::removeData( double fromt, double tot )
{
if( fromt >= tot || mData->isEmpty() )
return;
QCPCurveDataMap::iterator it = mData->upperBound( fromt );
QCPCurveDataMap::iterator itEnd = mData->upperBound( tot );
while( it != itEnd )
it = mData->erase( it );
}
/*! \overload
Removes a single data point at curve parameter \a t. If the position is not
known with absolute
precision, consider using \ref removeData(double fromt, double tot) with a
small fuzziness
interval around the suspected position, depeding on the precision with which
the curve parameter
is known.
\see addData, clearData
*/
void QCPCurve::removeData( double t )
{
mData->remove( t );
}
/*!
Removes all data points.
\see removeData, removeDataAfter, removeDataBefore
*/
void QCPCurve::clearData()
{
mData->clear();
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPCurve::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( ( onlySelectable && !mSelectable ) || mData->isEmpty() )
return -1;
if( !mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return -1;
}
if( mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains( pos.toPoint() ) )
return pointDistance( pos );
else
return -1;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPCurve::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
if( mData->isEmpty() )
return;
// allocate line vector:
QVector<QPointF>* lineData = new QVector<QPointF>;
// fill with curve data:
getCurveData( lineData );
// check data validity if flag set:
#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA
QCPCurveDataMap::const_iterator it;
for( it = mData->constBegin(); it != mData->constEnd(); ++it )
{
if( QCP::isInvalidData( it.value().t ) ||
QCP::isInvalidData( it.value().key, it.value().value ) )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at" << it.key() << "invalid."
<< "Plottable name:" << name();
}
#endif
// draw curve fill:
if( mainBrush().style() != Qt::NoBrush && mainBrush().color().alpha() != 0 )
{
applyFillAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( Qt::NoPen );
painter->setBrush( mainBrush() );
painter->drawPolygon( QPolygonF( *lineData ) );
}
// draw curve line:
if( mLineStyle != lsNone && mainPen().style() != Qt::NoPen && mainPen().color().alpha() != 0 )
{
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( mainPen() );
painter->setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
// if drawing solid line and not in PDF, use much faster line drawing
// instead of polyline:
if( mParentPlot->plottingHints().testFlag( QCP::phFastPolylines ) &&
painter->pen().style() == Qt::SolidLine &&
!painter->modes().testFlag( QCPPainter::pmVectorized ) &&
!painter->modes().testFlag( QCPPainter::pmNoCaching ) )
{
for( int i = 1; i < lineData->size(); ++i )
painter->drawLine( lineData->at( i - 1 ), lineData->at( i ) );
}
else
{
painter->drawPolyline( QPolygonF( *lineData ) );
}
}
// draw scatters:
if( !mScatterStyle.isNone() )
drawScatterPlot( painter, lineData );
// free allocated line data:
delete lineData;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPCurve::drawLegendIcon( QCPPainter* painter, const QRectF& rect ) const
{
// draw fill:
if( mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush )
{
applyFillAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->fillRect(
QRectF( rect.left(), rect.top() + rect.height() / 2.0, rect.width(), rect.height() / 3.0 ),
mBrush );
}
// draw line vertically centered:
if( mLineStyle != lsNone )
{
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( mPen );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( rect.left(), rect.top() + rect.height() / 2.0, rect.right() + 5,
rect.top() + rect.height() / 2.0 ) ); // +5 on x2 else last segment
// is missing from
// dashed/dotted pens
}
// draw scatter symbol:
if( !mScatterStyle.isNone() )
{
applyScattersAntialiasingHint( painter );
// scale scatter pixmap if it's too large to fit in legend icon rect:
if( mScatterStyle.shape() == QCPScatterStyle::ssPixmap &&
( mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().width() > rect.width() ||
mScatterStyle.pixmap().size().height() > rect.height() ) )
{
QCPScatterStyle scaledStyle( mScatterStyle );
scaledStyle.setPixmap( scaledStyle.pixmap().scaled( rect.size().toSize(), Qt::KeepAspectRatio,
Qt::SmoothTransformation ) );
scaledStyle.applyTo( painter, mPen );
scaledStyle.drawShape( painter, QRectF( rect ).center() );
}
else
{
mScatterStyle.applyTo( painter, mPen );
mScatterStyle.drawShape( painter, QRectF( rect ).center() );
}
}
}
/*! \internal
Draws scatter symbols at every data point passed in \a pointData. scatter
symbols are independent of
the line style and are always drawn if scatter shape is not \ref
QCPScatterStyle::ssNone.
*/
void QCPCurve::drawScatterPlot( QCPPainter* painter, const QVector<QPointF>* pointData ) const
{
// draw scatter point symbols:
applyScattersAntialiasingHint( painter );
mScatterStyle.applyTo( painter, mPen );
for( int i = 0; i < pointData->size(); ++i )
mScatterStyle.drawShape( painter, pointData->at( i ) );
}
/*! \internal
called by QCPCurve::draw to generate a point vector (pixels) which represents
the line of the
curve. Line segments that aren't visible in the current axis rect are handled
in an optimized
way.
*/
void QCPCurve::getCurveData( QVector<QPointF>* lineData ) const
{
/* Extended sides of axis rect R divide space into 9 regions:
1__|_4_|__7
2__|_R_|__8
3 | 6 | 9
General idea: If the two points of a line segment are in the same region
(that is not R), the line segment corner
is removed.
Curves outside R become straight lines closely outside of R which greatly
reduces drawing time, yet keeps the look
of lines and
fills inside R consistent.
The region R has index 5.
*/
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
QCPAxis* valueAxis = mValueAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis || !valueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
QRect axisRect = mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect() & mValueAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect();
lineData->reserve( mData->size() );
QCPCurveDataMap::const_iterator it;
int lastRegion = 5;
int currentRegion = 5;
double RLeft = keyAxis->range().lower;
double RRight = keyAxis->range().upper;
double RBottom = valueAxis->range().lower;
double RTop = valueAxis->range().upper;
double x, y; // current key/value
bool addedLastAlready = true;
bool firstPoint = true; // first point must always be drawn, to make sure fill
// works correctly
for( it = mData->constBegin(); it != mData->constEnd(); ++it )
{
x = it.value().key;
y = it.value().value;
// determine current region:
if( x < RLeft ) // region 123
{
if( y > RTop )
currentRegion = 1;
else if( y < RBottom )
currentRegion = 3;
else
currentRegion = 2;
}
else if( x > RRight ) // region 789
{
if( y > RTop )
currentRegion = 7;
else if( y < RBottom )
currentRegion = 9;
else
currentRegion = 8;
}
else // region 456
{
if( y > RTop )
currentRegion = 4;
else if( y < RBottom )
currentRegion = 6;
else
currentRegion = 5;
}
/*
Watch out, the next part is very tricky. It modifies the curve such that
it seems like the
whole thing is still drawn, but actually the points outside the axisRect
are simplified
("optimized") greatly. There are some subtle special cases when line
segments are large and
thereby each subsequent point may be in a different region or even skip
some.
*/
// determine whether to keep current point:
if( currentRegion == 5 ||
( firstPoint && mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush ) ) // current is in R, add
// current and last if it
// wasn't added already
{
if( !addedLastAlready ) // in case curve just entered R, make sure the last
// point outside R is also drawn
// correctly
lineData->append( coordsToPixels( ( it - 1 ).value().key,
( it - 1 ).value().value ) ); // add last point to vector
else if( lastRegion != 5 ) // added last already. If that's the case, we
// probably added it at optimized position.
// So go back and make sure it's at original position (else the angle
// changes under
// which this segment enters R)
{
if( !firstPoint ) // because on firstPoint, currentRegion is 5 and
// addedLastAlready is true, although there is
// no last point
lineData->replace( lineData->size() - 1,
coordsToPixels( ( it - 1 ).value().key, ( it - 1 ).value().value ) );
}
lineData->append(
coordsToPixels( it.value().key, it.value().value ) ); // add current point to vector
addedLastAlready = true; // so in next iteration, we don't add this point twice
}
else if( currentRegion != lastRegion ) // changed region, add current and
// last if not added already
{
// using outsideCoordsToPixels instead of coorsToPixels for optimized
// point placement (places points just outside
// axisRect instead of potentially far away)
// if we're coming from R or we skip diagonally over the corner regions
// (so line might still be visible in R), we
// can't place points optimized
if( lastRegion == 5 || // coming from R
( ( lastRegion == 2 && currentRegion == 4 ) ||
( lastRegion == 4 && currentRegion == 2 ) ) || // skip top left diagonal
( ( lastRegion == 4 && currentRegion == 8 ) ||
( lastRegion == 8 && currentRegion == 4 ) ) || // skip top right diagonal
( ( lastRegion == 8 && currentRegion == 6 ) ||
( lastRegion == 6 && currentRegion == 8 ) ) || // skip bottom right diagonal
( ( lastRegion == 6 && currentRegion == 2 ) ||
( lastRegion == 2 && currentRegion == 6 ) ) // skip bottom left diagonal
)
{
// always add last point if not added already, original:
if( !addedLastAlready )
lineData->append( coordsToPixels( ( it - 1 ).value().key, ( it - 1 ).value().value ) );
// add current point, original:
lineData->append( coordsToPixels( it.value().key, it.value().value ) );
}
else // no special case that forbids optimized point placement, so do
// it:
{
// always add last point if not added already, optimized:
if( !addedLastAlready )
lineData->append( outsideCoordsToPixels( ( it - 1 ).value().key, ( it - 1 ).value().value,
currentRegion, axisRect ) );
// add current point, optimized:
lineData->append(
outsideCoordsToPixels( it.value().key, it.value().value, currentRegion, axisRect ) );
}
addedLastAlready = true; // so that if next point enters 5, or crosses
// another region boundary, we don't add this
// point twice
}
else // neither in R, nor crossed a region boundary, skip current point
{
addedLastAlready = false;
}
lastRegion = currentRegion;
firstPoint = false;
}
// If curve ends outside R, we want to add very last point so the fill looks
// like it should when the curve started
// inside R:
if( lastRegion != 5 && mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && !mData->isEmpty() )
lineData->append( coordsToPixels( ( mData->constEnd() - 1 ).value().key,
( mData->constEnd() - 1 ).value().value ) );
}
/*! \internal
Calculates the (minimum) distance (in pixels) the curve's representation has
from the given \a
pixelPoint in pixels. This is used to determine whether the curve was clicked
or not, e.g. in
\ref selectTest.
*/
double QCPCurve::pointDistance( const QPointF& pixelPoint ) const
{
if( mData->isEmpty() )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "requested point distance on curve" << mName << "without data";
return 500;
}
if( mData->size() == 1 )
{
QPointF dataPoint =
coordsToPixels( mData->constBegin().key(), mData->constBegin().value().value );
return QVector2D( dataPoint - pixelPoint ).length();
}
// calculate minimum distance to line segments:
QVector<QPointF>* lineData = new QVector<QPointF>;
getCurveData( lineData );
double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits<double>::max();
for( int i = 0; i < lineData->size() - 1; ++i )
{
double currentDistSqr = distSqrToLine( lineData->at( i ), lineData->at( i + 1 ), pixelPoint );
if( currentDistSqr < minDistSqr )
minDistSqr = currentDistSqr;
}
delete lineData;
return sqrt( minDistSqr );
}
/*! \internal
This is a specialized \ref coordsToPixels function for points that are outside
the visible
axisRect and just crossing a boundary (since \ref getCurveData reduces
non-visible curve segments
to those line segments that cross region boundaries, see documentation there).
It only uses the
coordinate parallel to the region boundary of the axisRect. The other
coordinate is picked just
outside the axisRect (how far is determined by the scatter size and the line
width). Together
with the optimization in \ref getCurveData this improves performance for large
curves (or zoomed
in ones) significantly while keeping the illusion the whole curve and its
filling is still being
drawn for the viewer.
*/
QPointF QCPCurve::outsideCoordsToPixels( double key,
double value,
int region,
QRect axisRect ) const
{
int margin = qCeil( qMax( mScatterStyle.size(), (double)mPen.widthF() ) ) + 2;
QPointF result = coordsToPixels( key, value );
switch( region )
{
case 2:
result.setX( axisRect.left() - margin );
break; // left
case 8:
result.setX( axisRect.right() + margin );
break; // right
case 4:
result.setY( axisRect.top() - margin );
break; // top
case 6:
result.setY( axisRect.bottom() + margin );
break; // bottom
case 1:
result.setX( axisRect.left() - margin );
result.setY( axisRect.top() - margin );
break; // top left
case 7:
result.setX( axisRect.right() + margin );
result.setY( axisRect.top() - margin );
break; // top right
case 9:
result.setX( axisRect.right() + margin );
result.setY( axisRect.bottom() + margin );
break; // bottom right
case 3:
result.setX( axisRect.left() - margin );
result.setY( axisRect.bottom() + margin );
break; // bottom left
}
return result;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPCurve::getKeyRange( bool& foundRange, SignDomain inSignDomain ) const
{
QCPRange range;
bool haveLower = false;
bool haveUpper = false;
double current;
QCPCurveDataMap::const_iterator it = mData->constBegin();
while( it != mData->constEnd() )
{
current = it.value().key;
if( inSignDomain == sdBoth || ( inSignDomain == sdNegative && current < 0 ) ||
( inSignDomain == sdPositive && current > 0 ) )
{
if( current < range.lower || !haveLower )
{
range.lower = current;
haveLower = true;
}
if( current > range.upper || !haveUpper )
{
range.upper = current;
haveUpper = true;
}
}
++it;
}
foundRange = haveLower && haveUpper;
return range;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPCurve::getValueRange( bool& foundRange, SignDomain inSignDomain ) const
{
QCPRange range;
bool haveLower = false;
bool haveUpper = false;
double current;
QCPCurveDataMap::const_iterator it = mData->constBegin();
while( it != mData->constEnd() )
{
current = it.value().value;
if( inSignDomain == sdBoth || ( inSignDomain == sdNegative && current < 0 ) ||
( inSignDomain == sdPositive && current > 0 ) )
{
if( current < range.lower || !haveLower )
{
range.lower = current;
haveLower = true;
}
if( current > range.upper || !haveUpper )
{
range.upper = current;
haveUpper = true;
}
}
++it;
}
foundRange = haveLower && haveUpper;
return range;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPBarData
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPBarData
\brief Holds the data of one single data point (one bar) for QCPBars.
The container for storing multiple data points is \ref QCPBarDataMap.
The stored data is:
\li \a key: coordinate on the key axis of this bar
\li \a value: height coordinate on the value axis of this bar
\see QCPBarDataaMap
*/
/*!
Constructs a bar data point with key and value set to zero.
*/
QCPBarData::QCPBarData() : key( 0 ), value( 0 ) {}
/*!
Constructs a bar data point with the specified \a key and \a value.
*/
QCPBarData::QCPBarData( double key, double value ) : key( key ), value( value ) {}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPBars
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPBars
\brief A plottable representing a bar chart in a plot.
\image html QCPBars.png
To plot data, assign it with the \ref setData or \ref addData functions.
\section appearance Changing the appearance
The appearance of the bars is determined by the pen and the brush (\ref
setPen, \ref setBrush).
Bar charts are stackable. This means, Two QCPBars plottables can be placed on
top of each other
(see \ref QCPBars::moveAbove). Then, when two bars are at the same key
position, they will appear
stacked.
\section usage Usage
Like all data representing objects in QCustomPlot, the QCPBars is a plottable
(QCPAbstractPlottable). So the plottable-interface of QCustomPlot applies
(QCustomPlot::plottable, QCustomPlot::addPlottable,
QCustomPlot::removePlottable, etc.)
Usually, you first create an instance:
\code
QCPBars *newBars = new QCPBars(customPlot->xAxis, customPlot->yAxis);\endcode
add it to the customPlot with QCustomPlot::addPlottable:
\code
customPlot->addPlottable(newBars);\endcode
and then modify the properties of the newly created plottable, e.g.:
\code
newBars->setName("Country population");
newBars->setData(xData, yData);\endcode
*/
/*! \fn QCPBars *QCPBars::barBelow() const
Returns the bars plottable that is directly below this bars plottable.
If there is no such plottable, returns 0.
\see barAbove, moveBelow, moveAbove
*/
/*! \fn QCPBars *QCPBars::barAbove() const
Returns the bars plottable that is directly above this bars plottable.
If there is no such plottable, returns 0.
\see barBelow, moveBelow, moveAbove
*/
/*!
Constructs a bar chart which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and \a
valueAxis as its value
axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same QCustomPlot
instance and not have
the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a
corresponding message is
printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not aborted, though.
The constructed QCPBars can be added to the plot with
QCustomPlot::addPlottable, QCustomPlot
then takes ownership of the bar chart.
*/
QCPBars::QCPBars( QCPAxis* keyAxis, QCPAxis* valueAxis )
: QCPAbstractPlottable( keyAxis, valueAxis )
{
mData = new QCPBarDataMap;
mPen.setColor( Qt::blue );
mPen.setStyle( Qt::SolidLine );
mBrush.setColor( QColor( 40, 50, 255, 30 ) );
mBrush.setStyle( Qt::SolidPattern );
mSelectedPen = mPen;
mSelectedPen.setWidthF( 2.5 );
mSelectedPen.setColor( QColor( 80, 80, 255 ) ); // lighter than Qt::blue of mPen
mSelectedBrush = mBrush;
mWidth = 0.75;
}
QCPBars::~QCPBars()
{
if( mBarBelow || mBarAbove )
connectBars( mBarBelow.data(), mBarAbove.data() ); // take this bar out of any stacking
delete mData;
}
/*!
Sets the width of the bars in plot (key) coordinates.
*/
void QCPBars::setWidth( double width )
{
mWidth = width;
}
/*!
Replaces the current data with the provided \a data.
If \a copy is set to true, data points in \a data will only be copied. if
false, the plottable
takes ownership of the passed data and replaces the internal data pointer with
it. This is
significantly faster than copying for large datasets.
*/
void QCPBars::setData( QCPBarDataMap* data, bool copy )
{
if( copy )
{
*mData = *data;
}
else
{
delete mData;
mData = data;
}
}
/*! \overload
Replaces the current data with the provided points in \a key and \a value
tuples. The
provided vectors should have equal length. Else, the number of added points
will be the size of
the smallest vector.
*/
void QCPBars::setData( const QVector<double>& key, const QVector<double>& value )
{
mData->clear();
int n = key.size();
n = qMin( n, value.size() );
QCPBarData newData;
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
newData.key = key[i];
newData.value = value[i];
mData->insertMulti( newData.key, newData );
}
}
/*!
Moves this bars plottable below \a bars. In other words, the bars of this
plottable will appear
below the bars of \a bars. The move target \a bars must use the same key and
value axis as this
plottable.
Inserting into and removing from existing bar stacking is handled gracefully.
If \a bars already
has a bars object below itself, this bars object is inserted between the two.
If this bars object
is already between two other bars, the two other bars will be stacked on top
of each other after
the operation.
To remove this bars plottable from any stacking, set \a bars to 0.
\see moveBelow, barAbove, barBelow
*/
void QCPBars::moveBelow( QCPBars* bars )
{
if( bars == this )
return;
if( bars && ( bars->keyAxis() != mKeyAxis.data() || bars->valueAxis() != mValueAxis.data() ) )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "passed QCPBars* doesn't have same key and "
"value axis as this QCPBars";
return;
}
// remove from stacking:
connectBars( mBarBelow.data(),
mBarAbove.data() ); // Note: also works if one (or both) of them is 0
// if new bar given, insert this bar below it:
if( bars )
{
if( bars->mBarBelow )
connectBars( bars->mBarBelow.data(), this );
connectBars( this, bars );
}
}
/*!
Moves this bars plottable above \a bars. In other words, the bars of this
plottable will appear
above the bars of \a bars. The move target \a bars must use the same key and
value axis as this
plottable.
Inserting into and removing from existing bar stacking is handled gracefully.
If \a bars already
has a bars object below itself, this bars object is inserted between the two.
If this bars object
is already between two other bars, the two other bars will be stacked on top
of each other after
the operation.
To remove this bars plottable from any stacking, set \a bars to 0.
\see moveBelow, barBelow, barAbove
*/
void QCPBars::moveAbove( QCPBars* bars )
{
if( bars == this )
return;
if( bars && ( bars->keyAxis() != mKeyAxis.data() || bars->valueAxis() != mValueAxis.data() ) )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO
<< "passed QCPBars* doesn't have same key and "
"value axis as this QCPBars";
return;
}
// remove from stacking:
connectBars( mBarBelow.data(),
mBarAbove.data() ); // Note: also works if one (or both) of them is 0
// if new bar given, insert this bar above it:
if( bars )
{
if( bars->mBarAbove )
connectBars( this, bars->mBarAbove.data() );
connectBars( bars, this );
}
}
/*!
Adds the provided data points in \a dataMap to the current data.
\see removeData
*/
void QCPBars::addData( const QCPBarDataMap& dataMap )
{
mData->unite( dataMap );
}
/*! \overload
Adds the provided single data point in \a data to the current data.
\see removeData
*/
void QCPBars::addData( const QCPBarData& data )
{
mData->insertMulti( data.key, data );
}
/*! \overload
Adds the provided single data point as \a key and \a value tuple to the
current data
\see removeData
*/
void QCPBars::addData( double key, double value )
{
QCPBarData newData;
newData.key = key;
newData.value = value;
mData->insertMulti( newData.key, newData );
}
/*! \overload
Adds the provided data points as \a key and \a value tuples to the current
data.
\see removeData
*/
void QCPBars::addData( const QVector<double>& keys, const QVector<double>& values )
{
int n = keys.size();
n = qMin( n, values.size() );
QCPBarData newData;
for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i )
{
newData.key = keys[i];
newData.value = values[i];
mData->insertMulti( newData.key, newData );
}
}
/*!
Removes all data points with key smaller than \a key.
\see addData, clearData
*/
void QCPBars::removeDataBefore( double key )
{
QCPBarDataMap::iterator it = mData->begin();
while( it != mData->end() && it.key() < key )
it = mData->erase( it );
}
/*!
Removes all data points with key greater than \a key.
\see addData, clearData
*/
void QCPBars::removeDataAfter( double key )
{
if( mData->isEmpty() )
return;
QCPBarDataMap::iterator it = mData->upperBound( key );
while( it != mData->end() )
it = mData->erase( it );
}
/*!
Removes all data points with key between \a fromKey and \a toKey. if \a
fromKey is
greater or equal to \a toKey, the function does nothing. To remove a single
data point with known
key, use \ref removeData(double key).
\see addData, clearData
*/
void QCPBars::removeData( double fromKey, double toKey )
{
if( fromKey >= toKey || mData->isEmpty() )
return;
QCPBarDataMap::iterator it = mData->upperBound( fromKey );
QCPBarDataMap::iterator itEnd = mData->upperBound( toKey );
while( it != itEnd )
it = mData->erase( it );
}
/*! \overload
Removes a single data point at \a key. If the position is not known with
absolute precision,
consider using \ref removeData(double fromKey, double toKey) with a small
fuzziness interval
around the suspected position, depeding on the precision with which the key is
known.
\see addData, clearData
*/
void QCPBars::removeData( double key )
{
mData->remove( key );
}
/*!
Removes all data points.
\see removeData, removeDataAfter, removeDataBefore
*/
void QCPBars::clearData()
{
mData->clear();
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPBars::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectable )
return -1;
if( !mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return -1;
}
if( mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains( pos.toPoint() ) )
{
QCPBarDataMap::ConstIterator it;
double posKey, posValue;
pixelsToCoords( pos, posKey, posValue );
for( it = mData->constBegin(); it != mData->constEnd(); ++it )
{
double baseValue = getBaseValue( it.key(), it.value().value >= 0 );
QCPRange keyRange( it.key() - mWidth * 0.5, it.key() + mWidth * 0.5 );
QCPRange valueRange( baseValue, baseValue + it.value().value );
if( keyRange.contains( posKey ) && valueRange.contains( posValue ) )
return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99;
}
}
return -1;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPBars::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
if( !mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
if( mData->isEmpty() )
return;
QCPBarDataMap::const_iterator it;
for( it = mData->constBegin(); it != mData->constEnd(); ++it )
{
// skip bar if not visible in key axis range:
if( it.key() + mWidth * 0.5 < mKeyAxis.data()->range().lower ||
it.key() - mWidth * 0.5 > mKeyAxis.data()->range().upper )
continue;
// check data validity if flag set:
#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA
if( QCP::isInvalidData( it.value().key, it.value().value ) )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at" << it.key() << "of drawn range invalid."
<< "Plottable name:" << name();
#endif
QPolygonF barPolygon = getBarPolygon( it.key(), it.value().value );
// draw bar fill:
if( mainBrush().style() != Qt::NoBrush && mainBrush().color().alpha() != 0 )
{
applyFillAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( Qt::NoPen );
painter->setBrush( mainBrush() );
painter->drawPolygon( barPolygon );
}
// draw bar line:
if( mainPen().style() != Qt::NoPen && mainPen().color().alpha() != 0 )
{
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( mainPen() );
painter->setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
painter->drawPolyline( barPolygon );
}
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPBars::drawLegendIcon( QCPPainter* painter, const QRectF& rect ) const
{
// draw filled rect:
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setBrush( mBrush );
painter->setPen( mPen );
QRectF r = QRectF( 0, 0, rect.width() * 0.67, rect.height() * 0.67 );
r.moveCenter( rect.center() );
painter->drawRect( r );
}
/*! \internal
Returns the polygon of a single bar with \a key and \a value. The Polygon is
open at the bottom
and shifted according to the bar stacking (see \ref moveAbove).
*/
QPolygonF QCPBars::getBarPolygon( double key, double value ) const
{
QPolygonF result;
double baseValue = getBaseValue( key, value >= 0 );
result << coordsToPixels( key - mWidth * 0.5, baseValue );
result << coordsToPixels( key - mWidth * 0.5, baseValue + value );
result << coordsToPixels( key + mWidth * 0.5, baseValue + value );
result << coordsToPixels( key + mWidth * 0.5, baseValue );
return result;
}
/*! \internal
This function is called to find at which value to start drawing the base of a
bar at \a key, when
it is stacked on top of another QCPBars (e.g. with \ref moveAbove).
positive and negative bars are separated per stack (positive are stacked above
0-value upwards,
negative are stacked below 0-value downwards). This can be indicated with \a
positive. So if the
bar for which we need the base value is negative, set \a positive to false.
*/
double QCPBars::getBaseValue( double key, bool positive ) const
{
if( mBarBelow )
{
double max = 0;
// find bars of mBarBelow that are approximately at key and find largest
// one:
QCPBarDataMap::const_iterator it = mBarBelow.data()->mData->lowerBound( key - mWidth * 0.1 );
QCPBarDataMap::const_iterator itEnd = mBarBelow.data()->mData->upperBound( key + mWidth * 0.1 );
while( it != itEnd )
{
if( ( positive && it.value().value > max ) || ( !positive && it.value().value < max ) )
max = it.value().value;
++it;
}
// recurse down the bar-stack to find the total height:
return max + mBarBelow.data()->getBaseValue( key, positive );
}
else
return 0;
}
/*! \internal
Connects \a below and \a above to each other via their mBarAbove/mBarBelow
properties.
The bar(s) currently below lower and upper will become disconnected to
lower/upper.
If lower is zero, upper will be disconnected at the bottom.
If upper is zero, lower will be disconnected at the top.
*/
void QCPBars::connectBars( QCPBars* lower, QCPBars* upper )
{
if( !lower && !upper )
return;
if( !lower ) // disconnect upper at bottom
{
// disconnect old bar below upper:
if( upper->mBarBelow && upper->mBarBelow.data()->mBarAbove.data() == upper )
upper->mBarBelow.data()->mBarAbove = 0;
upper->mBarBelow = 0;
}
else if( !upper ) // disconnect lower at top
{
// disconnect old bar above lower:
if( lower->mBarAbove && lower->mBarAbove.data()->mBarBelow.data() == lower )
lower->mBarAbove.data()->mBarBelow = 0;
lower->mBarAbove = 0;
}
else // connect lower and upper
{
// disconnect old bar above lower:
if( lower->mBarAbove && lower->mBarAbove.data()->mBarBelow.data() == lower )
lower->mBarAbove.data()->mBarBelow = 0;
// disconnect old bar below upper:
if( upper->mBarBelow && upper->mBarBelow.data()->mBarAbove.data() == upper )
upper->mBarBelow.data()->mBarAbove = 0;
lower->mBarAbove = upper;
upper->mBarBelow = lower;
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPBars::getKeyRange( bool& foundRange, SignDomain inSignDomain ) const
{
QCPRange range;
bool haveLower = false;
bool haveUpper = false;
double current;
double barWidthHalf = mWidth * 0.5;
QCPBarDataMap::const_iterator it = mData->constBegin();
while( it != mData->constEnd() )
{
current = it.value().key;
if( inSignDomain == sdBoth || ( inSignDomain == sdNegative && current + barWidthHalf < 0 ) ||
( inSignDomain == sdPositive && current - barWidthHalf > 0 ) )
{
if( current - barWidthHalf < range.lower || !haveLower )
{
range.lower = current - barWidthHalf;
haveLower = true;
}
if( current + barWidthHalf > range.upper || !haveUpper )
{
range.upper = current + barWidthHalf;
haveUpper = true;
}
}
++it;
}
foundRange = haveLower && haveUpper;
return range;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPBars::getValueRange( bool& foundRange, SignDomain inSignDomain ) const
{
QCPRange range;
bool haveLower = true; // set to true, because 0 should always be visible in bar charts
bool haveUpper = true; // set to true, because 0 should always be visible in bar charts
double current;
QCPBarDataMap::const_iterator it = mData->constBegin();
while( it != mData->constEnd() )
{
current = it.value().value + getBaseValue( it.value().key, it.value().value >= 0 );
if( inSignDomain == sdBoth || ( inSignDomain == sdNegative && current < 0 ) ||
( inSignDomain == sdPositive && current > 0 ) )
{
if( current < range.lower || !haveLower )
{
range.lower = current;
haveLower = true;
}
if( current > range.upper || !haveUpper )
{
range.upper = current;
haveUpper = true;
}
}
++it;
}
foundRange = true; // return true because bar charts always have the 0-line visible
return range;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPStatisticalBox
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPStatisticalBox
\brief A plottable representing a single statistical box in a plot.
\image html QCPStatisticalBox.png
To plot data, assign it with the individual parameter functions or use \ref
setData to set all
parameters at once. The individual functions are:
\li \ref setMinimum
\li \ref setLowerQuartile
\li \ref setMedian
\li \ref setUpperQuartile
\li \ref setMaximum
Additionally you can define a list of outliers, drawn as scatter datapoints:
\li \ref setOutliers
\section appearance Changing the appearance
The appearance of the box itself is controlled via \ref setPen and \ref
setBrush. You may change
the width of the box with \ref setWidth in plot coordinates (not pixels).
Analog functions exist for the minimum/maximum-whiskers: \ref setWhiskerPen,
\ref
setWhiskerBarPen, \ref setWhiskerWidth. The whisker width is the width of the
bar at the top
(maximum) and bottom (minimum).
The median indicator line has its own pen, \ref setMedianPen.
If the whisker backbone pen is changed, make sure to set the capStyle to
Qt::FlatCap. Else, the
backbone line might exceed the whisker bars by a few pixels due to the pen cap
being not
perfectly flat.
The Outlier data points are drawn as normal scatter points. Their look can be
controlled with
\ref setOutlierStyle
\section usage Usage
Like all data representing objects in QCustomPlot, the QCPStatisticalBox is a
plottable
(QCPAbstractPlottable). So the plottable-interface of QCustomPlot applies
(QCustomPlot::plottable, QCustomPlot::addPlottable,
QCustomPlot::removePlottable, etc.)
Usually, you first create an instance:
\code
QCPStatisticalBox *newBox = new QCPStatisticalBox(customPlot->xAxis,
customPlot->yAxis);\endcode
add it to the customPlot with QCustomPlot::addPlottable:
\code
customPlot->addPlottable(newBox);\endcode
and then modify the properties of the newly created plottable, e.g.:
\code
newBox->setName("Measurement Series 1");
newBox->setData(1, 3, 4, 5, 7);
newBox->setOutliers(QVector<double>() << 0.5 << 0.64 << 7.2 << 7.42);\endcode
*/
/*!
Constructs a statistical box which uses \a keyAxis as its key axis ("x") and
\a valueAxis as its
value axis ("y"). \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis must reside in the same
QCustomPlot instance and
not have the same orientation. If either of these restrictions is violated, a
corresponding
message is printed to the debug output (qDebug), the construction is not
aborted, though.
The constructed statistical box can be added to the plot with
QCustomPlot::addPlottable,
QCustomPlot then takes ownership of the statistical box.
*/
QCPStatisticalBox::QCPStatisticalBox( QCPAxis* keyAxis, QCPAxis* valueAxis )
: QCPAbstractPlottable( keyAxis, valueAxis )
, mKey( 0 )
, mMinimum( 0 )
, mLowerQuartile( 0 )
, mMedian( 0 )
, mUpperQuartile( 0 )
, mMaximum( 0 )
{
setOutlierStyle( QCPScatterStyle( QCPScatterStyle::ssCircle, Qt::blue, 6 ) );
setWhiskerWidth( 0.2 );
setWidth( 0.5 );
setPen( QPen( Qt::black ) );
setSelectedPen( QPen( Qt::blue, 2.5 ) );
setMedianPen( QPen( Qt::black, 3, Qt::SolidLine, Qt::FlatCap ) );
setWhiskerPen( QPen( Qt::black, 0, Qt::DashLine, Qt::FlatCap ) );
setWhiskerBarPen( QPen( Qt::black ) );
setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
setSelectedBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
}
/*!
Sets the key coordinate of the statistical box.
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setKey( double key )
{
mKey = key;
}
/*!
Sets the parameter "minimum" of the statistical box plot. This is the position
of the lower
whisker, typically the minimum measurement of the sample that's not considered
an outlier.
\see setMaximum, setWhiskerPen, setWhiskerBarPen, setWhiskerWidth
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setMinimum( double value )
{
mMinimum = value;
}
/*!
Sets the parameter "lower Quartile" of the statistical box plot. This is the
lower end of the
box. The lower and the upper quartiles are the two statistical quartiles
around the median of the
sample, they contain 50% of the sample data.
\see setUpperQuartile, setPen, setBrush, setWidth
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setLowerQuartile( double value )
{
mLowerQuartile = value;
}
/*!
Sets the parameter "median" of the statistical box plot. This is the value of
the median mark
inside the quartile box. The median separates the sample data in half (50% of
the sample data is
below/above the median).
\see setMedianPen
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setMedian( double value )
{
mMedian = value;
}
/*!
Sets the parameter "upper Quartile" of the statistical box plot. This is the
upper end of the
box. The lower and the upper quartiles are the two statistical quartiles
around the median of the
sample, they contain 50% of the sample data.
\see setLowerQuartile, setPen, setBrush, setWidth
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setUpperQuartile( double value )
{
mUpperQuartile = value;
}
/*!
Sets the parameter "maximum" of the statistical box plot. This is the position
of the upper
whisker, typically the maximum measurement of the sample that's not considered
an outlier.
\see setMinimum, setWhiskerPen, setWhiskerBarPen, setWhiskerWidth
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setMaximum( double value )
{
mMaximum = value;
}
/*!
Sets a vector of outlier values that will be drawn as scatters. Any data
points in the sample
that are not within the whiskers (\ref setMinimum, \ref setMaximum) should be
considered outliers
and displayed as such.
\see setOutlierStyle
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setOutliers( const QVector<double>& values )
{
mOutliers = values;
}
/*!
Sets all parameters of the statistical box plot at once.
\see setKey, setMinimum, setLowerQuartile, setMedian, setUpperQuartile,
setMaximum
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setData( double key,
double minimum,
double lowerQuartile,
double median,
double upperQuartile,
double maximum )
{
setKey( key );
setMinimum( minimum );
setLowerQuartile( lowerQuartile );
setMedian( median );
setUpperQuartile( upperQuartile );
setMaximum( maximum );
}
/*!
Sets the width of the box in key coordinates.
\see setWhiskerWidth
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setWidth( double width )
{
mWidth = width;
}
/*!
Sets the width of the whiskers (\ref setMinimum, \ref setMaximum) in key
coordinates.
\see setWidth
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setWhiskerWidth( double width )
{
mWhiskerWidth = width;
}
/*!
Sets the pen used for drawing the whisker backbone (That's the line parallel
to the value axis).
Make sure to set the \a pen capStyle to Qt::FlatCap to prevent the whisker
backbone from reaching
a few pixels past the whisker bars, when using a non-zero pen width.
\see setWhiskerBarPen
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setWhiskerPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mWhiskerPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen used for drawing the whisker bars (Those are the lines parallel
to the key axis at
each end of the whisker backbone).
\see setWhiskerPen
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setWhiskerBarPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mWhiskerBarPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen used for drawing the median indicator line inside the statistical
box.
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setMedianPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mMedianPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the appearance of the outlier data points.
\see setOutliers
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::setOutlierStyle( const QCPScatterStyle& style )
{
mOutlierStyle = style;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPStatisticalBox::clearData()
{
setOutliers( QVector<double>() );
setKey( 0 );
setMinimum( 0 );
setLowerQuartile( 0 );
setMedian( 0 );
setUpperQuartile( 0 );
setMaximum( 0 );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPStatisticalBox::selectTest( const QPointF& pos,
bool onlySelectable,
QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectable )
return -1;
if( !mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return -1;
}
if( mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains( pos.toPoint() ) )
{
double posKey, posValue;
pixelsToCoords( pos, posKey, posValue );
// quartile box:
QCPRange keyRange( mKey - mWidth * 0.5, mKey + mWidth * 0.5 );
QCPRange valueRange( mLowerQuartile, mUpperQuartile );
if( keyRange.contains( posKey ) && valueRange.contains( posValue ) )
return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99;
// min/max whiskers:
if( QCPRange( mMinimum, mMaximum ).contains( posValue ) )
return qAbs( mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel( mKey ) -
mKeyAxis.data()->coordToPixel( posKey ) );
}
return -1;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPStatisticalBox::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
if( !mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return;
}
// check data validity if flag set:
#ifdef QCUSTOMPLOT_CHECK_DATA
if( QCP::isInvalidData( mKey, mMedian ) || QCP::isInvalidData( mLowerQuartile, mUpperQuartile ) ||
QCP::isInvalidData( mMinimum, mMaximum ) )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point at" << mKey << "of drawn range has invalid data."
<< "Plottable name:" << name();
for( int i = 0; i < mOutliers.size(); ++i )
if( QCP::isInvalidData( mOutliers.at( i ) ) )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Data point outlier at" << mKey << "of drawn range invalid."
<< "Plottable name:" << name();
#endif
QRectF quartileBox;
drawQuartileBox( painter, &quartileBox );
painter->save();
painter->setClipRect( quartileBox, Qt::IntersectClip );
drawMedian( painter );
painter->restore();
drawWhiskers( painter );
drawOutliers( painter );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPStatisticalBox::drawLegendIcon( QCPPainter* painter, const QRectF& rect ) const
{
// draw filled rect:
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( mPen );
painter->setBrush( mBrush );
QRectF r = QRectF( 0, 0, rect.width() * 0.67, rect.height() * 0.67 );
r.moveCenter( rect.center() );
painter->drawRect( r );
}
/*! \internal
Draws the quartile box. \a box is an output parameter that returns the
quartile box (in pixel
coordinates) which is used to set the clip rect of the painter before calling
\ref drawMedian (so
the median doesn't draw outside the quartile box).
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::drawQuartileBox( QCPPainter* painter, QRectF* quartileBox ) const
{
QRectF box;
box.setTopLeft( coordsToPixels( mKey - mWidth * 0.5, mUpperQuartile ) );
box.setBottomRight( coordsToPixels( mKey + mWidth * 0.5, mLowerQuartile ) );
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( mainPen() );
painter->setBrush( mainBrush() );
painter->drawRect( box );
if( quartileBox )
*quartileBox = box;
}
/*! \internal
Draws the median line inside the quartile box.
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::drawMedian( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
QLineF medianLine;
medianLine.setP1( coordsToPixels( mKey - mWidth * 0.5, mMedian ) );
medianLine.setP2( coordsToPixels( mKey + mWidth * 0.5, mMedian ) );
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( mMedianPen );
painter->drawLine( medianLine );
}
/*! \internal
Draws both whisker backbones and bars.
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::drawWhiskers( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
QLineF backboneMin, backboneMax, barMin, barMax;
backboneMax.setPoints( coordsToPixels( mKey, mUpperQuartile ), coordsToPixels( mKey, mMaximum ) );
backboneMin.setPoints( coordsToPixels( mKey, mLowerQuartile ), coordsToPixels( mKey, mMinimum ) );
barMax.setPoints( coordsToPixels( mKey - mWhiskerWidth * 0.5, mMaximum ),
coordsToPixels( mKey + mWhiskerWidth * 0.5, mMaximum ) );
barMin.setPoints( coordsToPixels( mKey - mWhiskerWidth * 0.5, mMinimum ),
coordsToPixels( mKey + mWhiskerWidth * 0.5, mMinimum ) );
applyErrorBarsAntialiasingHint( painter );
painter->setPen( mWhiskerPen );
painter->drawLine( backboneMin );
painter->drawLine( backboneMax );
painter->setPen( mWhiskerBarPen );
painter->drawLine( barMin );
painter->drawLine( barMax );
}
/*! \internal
Draws the outlier scatter points.
*/
void QCPStatisticalBox::drawOutliers( QCPPainter* painter ) const
{
applyScattersAntialiasingHint( painter );
mOutlierStyle.applyTo( painter, mPen );
for( int i = 0; i < mOutliers.size(); ++i )
mOutlierStyle.drawShape( painter, coordsToPixels( mKey, mOutliers.at( i ) ) );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPStatisticalBox::getKeyRange( bool& foundRange, SignDomain inSignDomain ) const
{
foundRange = true;
if( inSignDomain == sdBoth )
{
return QCPRange( mKey - mWidth * 0.5, mKey + mWidth * 0.5 );
}
else if( inSignDomain == sdNegative )
{
if( mKey + mWidth * 0.5 < 0 )
return QCPRange( mKey - mWidth * 0.5, mKey + mWidth * 0.5 );
else if( mKey < 0 )
return QCPRange( mKey - mWidth * 0.5, mKey );
else
{
foundRange = false;
return QCPRange();
}
}
else if( inSignDomain == sdPositive )
{
if( mKey - mWidth * 0.5 > 0 )
return QCPRange( mKey - mWidth * 0.5, mKey + mWidth * 0.5 );
else if( mKey > 0 )
return QCPRange( mKey, mKey + mWidth * 0.5 );
else
{
foundRange = false;
return QCPRange();
}
}
foundRange = false;
return QCPRange();
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPStatisticalBox::getValueRange( bool& foundRange, SignDomain inSignDomain ) const
{
QVector<double> values; // values that must be considered (i.e. all outliers
// and the five box-parameters)
values.reserve( mOutliers.size() + 5 );
values << mMaximum << mUpperQuartile << mMedian << mLowerQuartile << mMinimum;
values << mOutliers;
// go through values and find the ones in legal range:
bool haveUpper = false;
bool haveLower = false;
double upper = 0;
double lower = 0;
for( int i = 0; i < values.size(); ++i )
{
if( ( inSignDomain == sdNegative && values.at( i ) < 0 ) ||
( inSignDomain == sdPositive && values.at( i ) > 0 ) || ( inSignDomain == sdBoth ) )
{
if( values.at( i ) > upper || !haveUpper )
{
upper = values.at( i );
haveUpper = true;
}
if( values.at( i ) < lower || !haveLower )
{
lower = values.at( i );
haveLower = true;
}
}
}
// return the bounds if we found some sensible values:
if( haveLower && haveUpper )
{
foundRange = true;
return QCPRange( lower, upper );
}
else // might happen if all values are in other sign domain
{
foundRange = false;
return QCPRange();
}
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPColorMapData
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPColorMapData
\brief Holds the two-dimensional data of a QCPColorMap plottable.
This class is a data storage for \ref QCPColorMap. It holds a two-dimensional
array, which \ref
QCPColorMap then displays as a 2D image in the plot, where the array values
are represented by a
color, depending on the value.
The size of the array can be controlled via \ref setSize (or \ref setKeySize,
\ref setValueSize).
Which plot coordinates these cells correspond to can be configured with \ref
setRange (or \ref
setKeyRange, \ref setValueRange).
The data cells can be accessed in two ways: They can be directly addressed by
an integer index
with \ref setCell. This is the fastest method. Alternatively, they can be
addressed by their plot
coordinate with \ref setData. plot coordinate to cell index transformations
and vice versa are
provided by the functions \ref coordToCell and \ref cellToCoord.
This class also buffers the minimum and maximum values that are in the data
set, to provide
QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange with the necessary information quickly. Setting
a cell to a value
that is greater than the current maximum increases this maximum to the new
value. However,
setting the cell that currently holds the maximum value to a smaller value
doesn't decrease the
maximum again, because finding the true new maximum would require going
through the entire data
array, which might be time consuming. The same holds for the data minimum.
This functionality is
given by \ref recalculateDataBounds, such that you can decide when it is
sensible to find the
true current minimum and maximum. The method QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange
offers a convenience
parameter \a recalculateDataBounds which may be set to true to automatically
call \ref
recalculateDataBounds internally.
*/
/* start of documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn bool QCPColorMapData::isEmpty() const
Returns whether this instance carries no data. This is equivalent to having a
size where at least
one of the dimensions is 0 (see \ref setSize).
*/
/* end of documentation of inline functions */
/*!
Constructs a new QCPColorMapData instance. The instance has \a keySize cells
in the key direction
and \a valueSize cells in the value direction. These cells will be displayed
by the \ref QCPColorMap
at the coordinates \a keyRange and \a valueRange.
\see setSize, setKeySize, setValueSize, setRange, setKeyRange, setValueRange
*/
QCPColorMapData::QCPColorMapData( int keySize,
int valueSize,
const QCPRange& keyRange,
const QCPRange& valueRange )
: mKeySize( 0 )
, mValueSize( 0 )
, mKeyRange( keyRange )
, mValueRange( valueRange )
, mIsEmpty( true )
, mData( 0 )
, mDataModified( true )
{
setSize( keySize, valueSize );
fill( 0 );
}
QCPColorMapData::~QCPColorMapData()
{
if( mData )
delete[] mData;
}
/*!
Constructs a new QCPColorMapData instance copying the data and range of \a
other.
*/
QCPColorMapData::QCPColorMapData( const QCPColorMapData& other )
: mKeySize( 0 ), mValueSize( 0 ), mIsEmpty( true ), mData( 0 ), mDataModified( true )
{
*this = other;
}
/*!
Overwrites this color map data instance with the data stored in \a other.
*/
QCPColorMapData& QCPColorMapData::operator=( const QCPColorMapData& other )
{
if( &other != this )
{
const int keySize = other.keySize();
const int valueSize = other.valueSize();
setSize( keySize, valueSize );
setRange( other.keyRange(), other.valueRange() );
if( !mIsEmpty )
memcpy( mData, other.mData, sizeof( mData[0] ) * keySize * valueSize );
mDataBounds = other.mDataBounds;
mDataModified = true;
}
return *this;
}
/* undocumented getter */
double QCPColorMapData::data( double key, double value )
{
int keyCell =
( key - mKeyRange.lower ) / ( mKeyRange.upper - mKeyRange.lower ) * ( mKeySize - 1 ) + 0.5;
int valueCell =
( 1.0 - ( value - mValueRange.lower ) / ( mValueRange.upper - mValueRange.lower ) ) *
( mValueSize - 1 ) +
0.5;
if( keyCell >= 0 && keyCell < mKeySize && valueCell >= 0 && valueCell < mValueSize )
return mData[valueCell * mKeySize + keyCell];
else
return 0;
}
/* undocumented getter */
double QCPColorMapData::cell( int keyIndex, int valueIndex )
{
if( keyIndex >= 0 && keyIndex < mKeySize && valueIndex >= 0 && valueIndex < mValueSize )
return mData[valueIndex * mKeySize + keyIndex];
else
return 0;
}
/*!
Resizes the data array to have \a keySize cells in the key dimension and \a
valueSize cells in
the value dimension.
The current data is discarded and the map cells are set to 0, unless the map
had already the
requested size.
Setting at least one of \a keySize or \a valueSize to zero frees the internal
data array and \ref
isEmpty returns true.
\see setRange, setKeySize, setValueSize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setSize( int keySize, int valueSize )
{
if( keySize != mKeySize || valueSize != mValueSize )
{
mKeySize = keySize;
mValueSize = valueSize;
if( mData )
delete[] mData;
mIsEmpty = mKeySize == 0 || mValueSize == 0;
if( !mIsEmpty )
{
#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS
try
{ // 2D arrays get memory intensive fast. So if the allocation fails,
// at least output debug message
#endif
mData = new double[mKeySize * mValueSize];
#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS
}
catch( ... )
{
mData = 0;
}
#endif
if( mData )
fill( 0 );
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "out of memory for data dimensions " << mKeySize << "*"
<< mValueSize;
}
else
mData = 0;
mDataModified = true;
}
}
/*!
Resizes the data array to have \a keySize cells in the key dimension.
The current data is discarded and the map cells are set to 0, unless the map
had already the
requested size.
Setting \a keySize to zero frees the internal data array and \ref isEmpty
returns true.
\see setKeyRange, setSize, setValueSize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setKeySize( int keySize )
{
setSize( keySize, mValueSize );
}
/*!
Resizes the data array to have \a valueSize cells in the value dimension.
The current data is discarded and the map cells are set to 0, unless the map
had already the
requested size.
Setting \a valueSize to zero frees the internal data array and \ref isEmpty
returns true.
\see setValueRange, setSize, setKeySize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setValueSize( int valueSize )
{
setSize( mKeySize, valueSize );
}
/*!
Sets the coordinate ranges the data shall be distributed over. This defines
the rectangular area
covered by the color map in plot coordinates.
The outer cells will be centered on the range boundaries given to this
function. For example, if
the key size (\ref setKeySize) is 3 and \a keyRange is set to <tt>QCPRange(2,
3)</tt> there will
be cells centered on the key coordinates 2, 2.5 and 3.
\see setSize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setRange( const QCPRange& keyRange, const QCPRange& valueRange )
{
setKeyRange( keyRange );
setValueRange( valueRange );
}
/*!
Sets the coordinate range the data shall be distributed over in the key
dimension. Together with
the value range, This defines the rectangular area covered by the color map in
plot coordinates.
The outer cells will be centered on the range boundaries given to this
function. For example, if
the key size (\ref setKeySize) is 3 and \a keyRange is set to <tt>QCPRange(2,
3)</tt> there will
be cells centered on the key coordinates 2, 2.5 and 3.
\see setRange, setValueRange, setSize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setKeyRange( const QCPRange& keyRange )
{
mKeyRange = keyRange;
}
/*!
Sets the coordinate range the data shall be distributed over in the value
dimension. Together with
the key range, This defines the rectangular area covered by the color map in
plot coordinates.
The outer cells will be centered on the range boundaries given to this
function. For example, if
the value size (\ref setValueSize) is 3 and \a valueRange is set to
<tt>QCPRange(2, 3)</tt> there
will be cells centered on the value coordinates 2, 2.5 and 3.
\see setRange, setKeyRange, setSize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setValueRange( const QCPRange& valueRange )
{
mValueRange = valueRange;
}
/*!
Sets the data of the cell, which lies at the plot coordinates given by \a key
and \a value, to \a
z.
\see setCell, setRange
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setData( double key, double value, double z )
{
int keyCell =
( key - mKeyRange.lower ) / ( mKeyRange.upper - mKeyRange.lower ) * ( mKeySize - 1 ) + 0.5;
int valueCell = ( value - mValueRange.lower ) / ( mValueRange.upper - mValueRange.lower ) *
( mValueSize - 1 ) +
0.5;
if( keyCell >= 0 && keyCell < mKeySize && valueCell >= 0 && valueCell < mValueSize )
{
mData[valueCell * mKeySize + keyCell] = z;
if( z < mDataBounds.lower )
mDataBounds.lower = z;
if( z > mDataBounds.upper )
mDataBounds.upper = z;
mDataModified = true;
}
}
/*!
Sets the data of the cell with indices \a keyIndex and \a valueIndex to \a z.
The indices
enumerate the cells starting from zero, up to the map's size-1 in the
respective dimension (see
\ref setSize).
In the standard plot configuration (horizontal key axis and vertical value
axis, both not
range-reversed), the cell with indices (0, 0) is in the bottom left corner and
the cell with
indices (keySize-1, valueSize-1) is in the top right corner of the color map.
\see setData, setSize
*/
void QCPColorMapData::setCell( int keyIndex, int valueIndex, double z )
{
if( keyIndex >= 0 && keyIndex < mKeySize && valueIndex >= 0 && valueIndex < mValueSize )
{
mData[valueIndex * mKeySize + keyIndex] = z;
if( z < mDataBounds.lower )
mDataBounds.lower = z;
if( z > mDataBounds.upper )
mDataBounds.upper = z;
mDataModified = true;
}
}
/*!
Goes through the data and updates the buffered minimum and maximum data
values.
Calling this method is only advised if you are about to call \ref
QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange
and can not guarantee that the cells holding the maximum or minimum data
haven't been overwritten
with a smaller or larger value respectively, since the buffered
maximum/minimum values have been
updated the last time. Why this is the case is explained in the class
description (\ref
QCPColorMapData).
Note that the method \ref QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange provides a parameter
\a
recalculateDataBounds for convenience. Setting this to true will call this
method for you, before
doing the rescale.
*/
void QCPColorMapData::recalculateDataBounds()
{
if( mKeySize > 0 && mValueSize > 0 )
{
double minHeight = mData[0];
double maxHeight = mData[0];
const int dataCount = mValueSize * mKeySize;
for( int i = 0; i < dataCount; ++i )
{
if( mData[i] > maxHeight )
maxHeight = mData[i];
if( mData[i] < minHeight )
minHeight = mData[i];
}
mDataBounds.lower = minHeight;
mDataBounds.upper = maxHeight;
}
}
/*!
Frees the internal data memory.
This is equivalent to calling \ref setSize "setSize(0, 0)".
*/
void QCPColorMapData::clear()
{
setSize( 0, 0 );
}
/*!
Sets all cells to the value \a z.
*/
void QCPColorMapData::fill( double z )
{
const int dataCount = mValueSize * mKeySize;
for( int i = 0; i < dataCount; ++i )
mData[i] = z;
mDataBounds = QCPRange( z, z );
}
/*!
Transforms plot coordinates given by \a key and \a value to cell indices of
this QCPColorMapData
instance. The resulting cell indices are returned via the output parameters \a
keyIndex and \a
valueIndex.
The retrieved key/value cell indices can then be used for example with \ref
setCell.
If you are only interested in a key or value index, you may pass 0 as \a
valueIndex or \a
keyIndex.
\see cellToCoord, QCPAxis::coordToPixel
*/
void QCPColorMapData::coordToCell( double key, double value, int* keyIndex, int* valueIndex ) const
{
if( keyIndex )
*keyIndex =
( key - mKeyRange.lower ) / ( mKeyRange.upper - mKeyRange.lower ) * ( mKeySize - 1 ) + 0.5;
if( valueIndex )
*valueIndex = ( value - mValueRange.lower ) / ( mValueRange.upper - mValueRange.lower ) *
( mValueSize - 1 ) +
0.5;
}
/*!
Transforms cell indices given by \a keyIndex and \a valueIndex to cell indices
of this QCPColorMapData
instance. The resulting coordinates are returned via the output parameters \a
key and \a
value.
If you are only interested in a key or value coordinate, you may pass 0 as \a
key or \a
value.
\see coordToCell, QCPAxis::pixelToCoord
*/
void QCPColorMapData::cellToCoord( int keyIndex, int valueIndex, double* key, double* value ) const
{
if( key )
*key = keyIndex / (double)( mKeySize - 1 ) * ( mKeyRange.upper - mKeyRange.lower ) +
mKeyRange.lower;
if( value )
*value = valueIndex / (double)( mValueSize - 1 ) * ( mValueRange.upper - mValueRange.lower ) +
mValueRange.lower;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPColorMap
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPColorMap
\brief A plottable representing a two-dimensional color map in a plot.
\image html QCPColorMap.png
The data is stored in the class \ref QCPColorMapData, which can be accessed
via the data()
method.
A color map has three dimensions to represent a data point: The \a key
dimension, the \a value
dimension and the \a data dimension. As with other plottables such as graphs,
\a key and \a value
correspond to two orthogonal axes on the QCustomPlot surface that you specify
in the QColorMap
constructor. The \a data dimension however is encoded as the color of the
point at (\a key, \a
value).
Set the number of points (or \a cells) in the key/value dimension via \ref
QCPColorMapData::setSize. The plot coordinate range over which these points
will be displayed is
specified via \ref QCPColorMapData::setRange. The first cell will be centered
on the lower range
boundary and the last cell will be centered on the upper range boundary. The
data can be set by
either accessing the cells directly with QCPColorMapData::setCell or by
addressing the cells via
their plot coordinates with \ref QCPColorMapData::setData. If possible, you
should prefer
setCell, since it doesn't need to do any coordinate transformation and thus
performs a bit
better.
The cell with index (0, 0) is at the bottom left, if the color map uses normal
(i.e. not reversed)
key and value axes.
To show the user which colors correspond to which \a data values, a \ref
QCPColorScale is
typically placed to the right of the axis rect. See the documentation there
for details on how to
add and use a color scale.
\section appearance Changing the appearance
The central part of the appearance is the color gradient, which can be
specified via \ref
setGradient. See the documentation of \ref QCPColorGradient for details on
configuring a color
gradient.
The \a data range that is mapped to the colors of the gradient can be
specified with \ref
setDataRange. To make the data range encompass the whole data set minimum to
maximum, call \ref
rescaleDataRange.
\section usage Usage
Like all data representing objects in QCustomPlot, the QCPColorMap is a
plottable
(QCPAbstractPlottable). So the plottable-interface of QCustomPlot applies
(QCustomPlot::plottable, QCustomPlot::addPlottable,
QCustomPlot::removePlottable, etc.)
Usually, you first create an instance:
\code
QCPColorMap *colorMap = new QCPColorMap(customPlot->xAxis,
customPlot->yAxis);\endcode
add it to the customPlot with QCustomPlot::addPlottable:
\code
customPlot->addPlottable(colorMap);\endcode
and then modify the properties of the newly created color map, e.g.:
\code
colorMap->data()->setSize(50, 50);
colorMap->data()->setRange(QCPRange(0, 2), QCPRange(0, 2));
for (int x=0; x<50; ++x)
for (int y=0; y<50; ++y)
colorMap->data()->setCell(x, y, qCos(x/10.0)+qSin(y/10.0));
colorMap->setGradient(QCPColorGradient::gpPolar);
colorMap->rescaleDataRange(true);
customPlot->rescaleAxes();
customPlot->replot();
\endcode
\note The QCPColorMap always displays the data at equal key/value intervals,
even if the key or
value axis is set to a logarithmic scaling. If you want to use QCPColorMap
with logarithmic axes,
you shouldn't use the \ref QCPColorMapData::setData method as it uses a linear
transformation to
determine the cell index. Rather directly access the cell index with \ref
QCPColorMapData::setCell.
*/
/* start documentation of inline functions */
/*! \fn QCPColorMapData *QCPColorMap::data() const
Returns a pointer to the internal data storage of type \ref QCPColorMapData.
Access this to
modify data points (cells) and the color map key/value range.
\see setData
*/
/* end documentation of inline functions */
/* start documentation of signals */
/*! \fn void QCPColorMap::dataRangeChanged(QCPRange newRange);
This signal is emitted when the data range changes.
\see setDataRange
*/
/*! \fn void QCPColorMap::dataScaleTypeChanged(QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType);
This signal is emitted when the data scale type changes.
\see setDataScaleType
*/
/*! \fn void QCPColorMap::gradientChanged(QCPColorGradient newGradient);
This signal is emitted when the gradient changes.
\see setGradient
*/
/* end documentation of signals */
/*!
Constructs a color map with the specified \a keyAxis and \a valueAxis.
The constructed QCPColorMap can be added to the plot with
QCustomPlot::addPlottable, QCustomPlot
then takes ownership of the color map.
*/
QCPColorMap::QCPColorMap( QCPAxis* keyAxis, QCPAxis* valueAxis )
: QCPAbstractPlottable( keyAxis, valueAxis )
, mDataScaleType( QCPAxis::stLinear )
, mMapData( new QCPColorMapData( 10, 10, QCPRange( 0, 5 ), QCPRange( 0, 5 ) ) )
, mInterpolate( true )
, mTightBoundary( false )
, mMapImageInvalidated( true )
{
}
QCPColorMap::~QCPColorMap()
{
delete mMapData;
}
/*!
Replaces the current \ref data with the provided \a data.
If \a copy is set to true, the \a data object will only be copied. if false,
the color map
takes ownership of the passed data and replaces the internal data pointer with
it. This is
significantly faster than copying for large datasets.
*/
void QCPColorMap::setData( QCPColorMapData* data, bool copy )
{
if( copy )
{
*mMapData = *data;
}
else
{
delete mMapData;
mMapData = data;
}
mMapImageInvalidated = true;
}
/*!
Sets the data range of this color map to \a dataRange. The data range defines
which data values
are mapped to the color gradient.
To make the data range span the full range of the data set, use \ref
rescaleDataRange.
\see QCPColorScale::setDataRange
*/
void QCPColorMap::setDataRange( const QCPRange& dataRange )
{
if( !QCPRange::validRange( dataRange ) )
return;
if( mDataRange.lower != dataRange.lower || mDataRange.upper != dataRange.upper )
{
if( mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic )
mDataRange = dataRange.sanitizedForLogScale();
else
mDataRange = dataRange.sanitizedForLinScale();
mMapImageInvalidated = true;
emit dataRangeChanged( mDataRange );
}
}
/*!
Sets whether the data is correlated with the color gradient linearly or
logarithmically.
\see QCPColorScale::setDataScaleType
*/
void QCPColorMap::setDataScaleType( QCPAxis::ScaleType scaleType )
{
if( mDataScaleType != scaleType )
{
mDataScaleType = scaleType;
mMapImageInvalidated = true;
emit dataScaleTypeChanged( mDataScaleType );
if( mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic )
setDataRange( mDataRange.sanitizedForLogScale() );
}
}
/*!
Sets the color gradient that is used to represent the data. For more details
on how to create an
own gradient or use one of the preset gradients, see \ref QCPColorGradient.
The colors defined by the gradient will be used to represent data values in
the currently set
data range, see \ref setDataRange. Data points that are outside this data
range will either be
colored uniformly with the respective gradient boundary color, or the gradient
will repeat,
depending on \ref QCPColorGradient::setPeriodic.
\see QCPColorScale::setGradient
*/
void QCPColorMap::setGradient( const QCPColorGradient& gradient )
{
if( mGradient != gradient )
{
mGradient = gradient;
mMapImageInvalidated = true;
emit gradientChanged( mGradient );
}
}
/*!
Sets whether the color map image shall use bicubic interpolation when
displaying the color map
shrinked or expanded, and not at a 1:1 pixel-to-data scale.
\image html QCPColorMap-interpolate.png "A 10*10 color map, with interpolation
and without interpolation enabled"
*/
void QCPColorMap::setInterpolate( bool enabled )
{
mInterpolate = enabled;
}
/*!
Sets whether the outer most data rows and columns are clipped to the specified
key and value
range (see \ref QCPColorMapData::setKeyRange, \ref
QCPColorMapData::setValueRange).
if \a enabled is set to false, the data points at the border of the color map
are drawn with the
same width and height as all other data points. Since the data points are
represented by
rectangles of one color centered on the data coordinate, this means that the
shown color map
extends by half a data point over the specified key/value range in each
direction.
\image html QCPColorMap-tightboundary.png "A color map, with tight boundary
enabled and disabled"
*/
void QCPColorMap::setTightBoundary( bool enabled )
{
mTightBoundary = enabled;
}
/*!
Associates the color scale \a colorScale with this color map.
This means that both the color scale and the color map synchronize their
gradient, data range and
data scale type (\ref setGradient, \ref setDataRange, \ref setDataScaleType).
Multiple color maps
can be associated with one single color scale. This causes the color maps to
also synchronize
those properties, via the mutual color scale.
This function causes the color map to adopt the current color gradient, data
range and data scale
type of \a colorScale. After this call, you may change these properties at
either the color map
or the color scale, and the setting will be applied to both.
Pass 0 as \a colorScale to disconnect the color scale from this color map
again.
*/
void QCPColorMap::setColorScale( QCPColorScale* colorScale )
{
if( mColorScale ) // unconnect signals from old color scale
{
disconnect( this, SIGNAL( dataRangeChanged( QCPRange ) ), mColorScale.data(),
SLOT( setDataRange( QCPRange ) ) );
disconnect( this, SIGNAL( dataScaleTypeChanged( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ), mColorScale.data(),
SLOT( setDataScaleType( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ) );
disconnect( this, SIGNAL( gradientChanged( QCPColorGradient ) ), mColorScale.data(),
SLOT( setGradient( QCPColorGradient ) ) );
disconnect( mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL( dataRangeChanged( QCPRange ) ), this,
SLOT( setDataRange( QCPRange ) ) );
disconnect( mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL( gradientChanged( QCPColorGradient ) ), this,
SLOT( setGradient( QCPColorGradient ) ) );
disconnect( mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL( dataScaleTypeChanged( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ), this,
SLOT( setDataScaleType( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ) );
}
mColorScale = colorScale;
if( mColorScale ) // connect signals to new color scale
{
setGradient( mColorScale.data()->gradient() );
setDataRange( mColorScale.data()->dataRange() );
setDataScaleType( mColorScale.data()->dataScaleType() );
connect( this, SIGNAL( dataRangeChanged( QCPRange ) ), mColorScale.data(),
SLOT( setDataRange( QCPRange ) ) );
connect( this, SIGNAL( dataScaleTypeChanged( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ), mColorScale.data(),
SLOT( setDataScaleType( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ) );
connect( this, SIGNAL( gradientChanged( QCPColorGradient ) ), mColorScale.data(),
SLOT( setGradient( QCPColorGradient ) ) );
connect( mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL( dataRangeChanged( QCPRange ) ), this,
SLOT( setDataRange( QCPRange ) ) );
connect( mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL( gradientChanged( QCPColorGradient ) ), this,
SLOT( setGradient( QCPColorGradient ) ) );
connect( mColorScale.data(), SIGNAL( dataScaleTypeChanged( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ), this,
SLOT( setDataScaleType( QCPAxis::ScaleType ) ) );
}
}
/*!
Sets the data range (\ref setDataRange) to span the minimum and maximum values
that occur in the
current data set. This corresponds to the \ref rescaleKeyAxis or \ref
rescaleValueAxis methods,
only for the third data dimension of the color map.
The minimum and maximum values of the data set are buffered in the internal
QCPColorMapData
instance (\ref data). As data is updated via its \ref QCPColorMapData::setCell
or \ref
QCPColorMapData::setData, the buffered minimum and maximum values are updated,
too. For
performance reasons, however, they are only updated in an expanding fashion.
So the buffered
maximum can only increase and the buffered minimum can only decrease. In
consequence, changes to
the data that actually lower the maximum of the data set (by overwriting the
cell holding the
current maximum with a smaller value), aren't recognized and the buffered
maximum overestimates
the true maximum of the data set. The same happens for the buffered minimum.
To recalculate the
true minimum and maximum by explicitly looking at each cell, the method
QCPColorMapData::recalculateDataBounds can be used. For convenience, setting
the parameter \a
recalculateDataBounds calls this method before setting the data range to the
buffered minimum and
maximum.
\see setDataRange
*/
void QCPColorMap::rescaleDataRange( bool recalculateDataBounds )
{
if( recalculateDataBounds )
mMapData->recalculateDataBounds();
setDataRange( mMapData->dataBounds() );
}
/*!
Takes the current appearance of the color map and updates the legend icon,
which is used to
represent this color map in the legend (see \ref QCPLegend).
The \a transformMode specifies whether the rescaling is done by a faster, low
quality image
scaling algorithm (Qt::FastTransformation) or by a slower, higher quality
algorithm
(Qt::SmoothTransformation).
The current color map appearance is scaled down to \a thumbSize. Ideally, this
should be equal to
the size of the legend icon (see \ref QCPLegend::setIconSize). If it isn't
exactly the configured
legend icon size, the thumb will be rescaled during drawing of the legend
item.
\see setDataRange
*/
void QCPColorMap::updateLegendIcon( Qt::TransformationMode transformMode, const QSize& thumbSize )
{
if( mMapImage.isNull() && !data()->isEmpty() )
updateMapImage(); // try to update map image if it's null (happens if no
// draw has happened yet)
if( !mMapImage.isNull() ) // might still be null, e.g. if data is empty, so
// check here again
{
bool mirrorX =
( keyAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? keyAxis() : valueAxis() )->rangeReversed();
bool mirrorY =
( valueAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical ? valueAxis() : keyAxis() )->rangeReversed();
mLegendIcon = QPixmap::fromImage( mMapImage.mirrored( mirrorX, mirrorY ) )
.scaled( thumbSize, Qt::KeepAspectRatio, transformMode );
}
}
/*!
Clears the colormap data by calling \ref QCPColorMapData::clear() on the
internal data. This also
resizes the map to 0x0 cells.
*/
void QCPColorMap::clearData()
{
mMapData->clear();
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPColorMap::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectable )
return -1;
if( !mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid key or value axis";
return -1;
}
if( mKeyAxis.data()->axisRect()->rect().contains( pos.toPoint() ) )
{
double posKey, posValue;
pixelsToCoords( pos, posKey, posValue );
if( mMapData->keyRange().contains( posKey ) && mMapData->valueRange().contains( posValue ) )
return mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99;
}
return -1;
}
/*! \internal
Updates the internal map image buffer by going through the internal \ref
QCPColorMapData and
turning the data values into color pixels with \ref
QCPColorGradient::colorize.
This method is called by \ref QCPColorMap::draw if either the data has been
modified or the map image
has been invalidated for a different reason (e.g. a change of the data range
with \ref
setDataRange).
*/
void QCPColorMap::updateMapImage()
{
QCPAxis* keyAxis = mKeyAxis.data();
if( !keyAxis )
return;
// resize mMapImage to correct dimensions, according to key/value axes
// orientation:
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal &&
( mMapImage.size().width() != mMapData->keySize() ||
mMapImage.size().height() != mMapData->valueSize() ) )
mMapImage = QImage( QSize( mMapData->keySize(), mMapData->valueSize() ), QImage::Format_RGB32 );
else if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical &&
( mMapImage.size().width() != mMapData->valueSize() ||
mMapImage.size().height() != mMapData->keySize() ) )
mMapImage = QImage( QSize( mMapData->valueSize(), mMapData->keySize() ), QImage::Format_RGB32 );
const int keySize = mMapData->keySize();
const int valueSize = mMapData->valueSize();
const double* rawData = mMapData->mData;
if( keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
{
const int lineCount = valueSize;
const int rowCount = keySize;
for( int line = 0; line < lineCount; ++line )
{
QRgb* pixels = reinterpret_cast<QRgb*>( mMapImage.scanLine(
lineCount - 1 - line ) ); // invert scanline index because QImage counts scanlines from
// top, but our vertical index counts from bottom (mathematical
// coordinate system)
mGradient.colorize( rawData + line * rowCount, mDataRange, pixels, rowCount, 1,
mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic );
}
}
else // keyAxis->orientation() == Qt::Vertical
{
const int lineCount = keySize;
const int rowCount = valueSize;
for( int line = 0; line < lineCount; ++line )
{
QRgb* pixels = reinterpret_cast<QRgb*>( mMapImage.scanLine(
lineCount - 1 - line ) ); // invert scanline index because QImage counts scanlines from
// top, but our vertical index counts from bottom (mathematical
// coordinate system)
mGradient.colorize( rawData + line, mDataRange, pixels, rowCount, lineCount,
mDataScaleType == QCPAxis::stLogarithmic );
}
}
mMapData->mDataModified = false;
mMapImageInvalidated = false;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorMap::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
if( mMapData->isEmpty() )
return;
if( !mKeyAxis || !mValueAxis )
return;
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
if( mMapData->mDataModified || mMapImageInvalidated )
updateMapImage();
double halfSampleKey = 0;
double halfSampleValue = 0;
if( mMapData->keySize() > 1 )
halfSampleKey = 0.5 * mMapData->keyRange().size() / (double)( mMapData->keySize() - 1 );
if( mMapData->valueSize() > 1 )
halfSampleValue = 0.5 * mMapData->valueRange().size() / (double)( mMapData->valueSize() - 1 );
QRectF imageRect( coordsToPixels( mMapData->keyRange().lower - halfSampleKey,
mMapData->valueRange().lower - halfSampleValue ),
coordsToPixels( mMapData->keyRange().upper + halfSampleKey,
mMapData->valueRange().upper + halfSampleValue ) );
imageRect = imageRect.normalized();
bool mirrorX =
( keyAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? keyAxis() : valueAxis() )->rangeReversed();
bool mirrorY =
( valueAxis()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical ? valueAxis() : keyAxis() )->rangeReversed();
bool smoothBackup = painter->renderHints().testFlag( QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform );
painter->setRenderHint( QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform, mInterpolate );
QRegion clipBackup;
if( mTightBoundary )
{
clipBackup = painter->clipRegion();
painter->setClipRect(
QRectF( coordsToPixels( mMapData->keyRange().lower, mMapData->valueRange().lower ),
coordsToPixels( mMapData->keyRange().upper, mMapData->valueRange().upper ) )
.normalized(),
Qt::IntersectClip );
}
painter->drawImage( imageRect, mMapImage.mirrored( mirrorX, mirrorY ) );
if( mTightBoundary )
painter->setClipRegion( clipBackup );
painter->setRenderHint( QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform, smoothBackup );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPColorMap::drawLegendIcon( QCPPainter* painter, const QRectF& rect ) const
{
applyDefaultAntialiasingHint( painter );
// draw map thumbnail:
if( !mLegendIcon.isNull() )
{
QPixmap scaledIcon =
mLegendIcon.scaled( rect.size().toSize(), Qt::KeepAspectRatio, Qt::FastTransformation );
QRectF iconRect = QRectF( 0, 0, scaledIcon.width(), scaledIcon.height() );
iconRect.moveCenter( rect.center() );
painter->drawPixmap( iconRect.topLeft(), scaledIcon );
}
/*
// draw frame:
painter->setBrush(Qt::NoBrush);
painter->setPen(Qt::black);
painter->drawRect(rect.adjusted(1, 1, 0, 0));
*/
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPColorMap::getKeyRange( bool& foundRange, SignDomain inSignDomain ) const
{
foundRange = true;
QCPRange result = mMapData->keyRange();
result.normalize();
if( inSignDomain == QCPAbstractPlottable::sdPositive )
{
if( result.lower <= 0 && result.upper > 0 )
result.lower = result.upper * 1e-3;
else if( result.lower <= 0 && result.upper <= 0 )
foundRange = false;
}
else if( inSignDomain == QCPAbstractPlottable::sdNegative )
{
if( result.upper >= 0 && result.lower < 0 )
result.upper = result.lower * 1e-3;
else if( result.upper >= 0 && result.lower >= 0 )
foundRange = false;
}
return result;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QCPRange QCPColorMap::getValueRange( bool& foundRange, SignDomain inSignDomain ) const
{
foundRange = true;
QCPRange result = mMapData->valueRange();
result.normalize();
if( inSignDomain == QCPAbstractPlottable::sdPositive )
{
if( result.lower <= 0 && result.upper > 0 )
result.lower = result.upper * 1e-3;
else if( result.lower <= 0 && result.upper <= 0 )
foundRange = false;
}
else if( inSignDomain == QCPAbstractPlottable::sdNegative )
{
if( result.upper >= 0 && result.lower < 0 )
result.upper = result.lower * 1e-3;
else if( result.upper >= 0 && result.lower >= 0 )
foundRange = false;
}
return result;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemStraightLine
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPItemStraightLine
\brief A straight line that spans infinitely in both directions
\image html QCPItemStraightLine.png "Straight line example. Blue dotted
circles are anchors, solid blue discs are
positions."
It has two positions, \a point1 and \a point2, which define the straight line.
*/
/*!
Creates a straight line item and sets default values.
The constructed item can be added to the plot with QCustomPlot::addItem.
*/
QCPItemStraightLine::QCPItemStraightLine( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QCPAbstractItem( parentPlot )
, point1( createPosition( "point1" ) )
, point2( createPosition( "point2" ) )
{
point1->setCoords( 0, 0 );
point2->setCoords( 1, 1 );
setPen( QPen( Qt::black ) );
setSelectedPen( QPen( Qt::blue, 2 ) );
}
QCPItemStraightLine::~QCPItemStraightLine() {}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line
\see setSelectedPen
*/
void QCPItemStraightLine::setPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line when selected
\see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemStraightLine::setSelectedPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedPen = pen;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemStraightLine::selectTest( const QPointF& pos,
bool onlySelectable,
QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectable )
return -1;
return distToStraightLine( QVector2D( point1->pixelPoint() ),
QVector2D( point2->pixelPoint() - point1->pixelPoint() ),
QVector2D( pos ) );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemStraightLine::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
QVector2D start( point1->pixelPoint() );
QVector2D end( point2->pixelPoint() );
// get visible segment of straight line inside clipRect:
double clipPad = mainPen().widthF();
QLineF line = getRectClippedStraightLine(
start, end - start, clipRect().adjusted( -clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad ) );
// paint visible segment, if existent:
if( !line.isNull() )
{
painter->setPen( mainPen() );
painter->drawLine( line );
}
}
/*! \internal
finds the shortest distance of \a point to the straight line defined by the
base point \a
base and the direction vector \a vec.
This is a helper function for \ref selectTest.
*/
double QCPItemStraightLine::distToStraightLine( const QVector2D& base,
const QVector2D& vec,
const QVector2D& point ) const
{
return qAbs( ( base.y() - point.y() ) * vec.x() - ( base.x() - point.x() ) * vec.y() ) /
vec.length();
}
/*! \internal
Returns the section of the straight line defined by \a base and direction
vector \a
vec, that is visible in the specified \a rect.
This is a helper function for \ref draw.
*/
QLineF QCPItemStraightLine::getRectClippedStraightLine( const QVector2D& base,
const QVector2D& vec,
const QRect& rect ) const
{
double bx, by;
double gamma;
QLineF result;
if( vec.x() == 0 && vec.y() == 0 )
return result;
if( qFuzzyIsNull( vec.x() ) ) // line is vertical
{
// check top of rect:
bx = rect.left();
by = rect.top();
gamma = base.x() - bx + ( by - base.y() ) * vec.x() / vec.y();
if( gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width() )
result.setLine( bx + gamma, rect.top(), bx + gamma,
rect.bottom() ); // no need to check bottom because we know
// line is vertical
}
else if( qFuzzyIsNull( vec.y() ) ) // line is horizontal
{
// check left of rect:
bx = rect.left();
by = rect.top();
gamma = base.y() - by + ( bx - base.x() ) * vec.y() / vec.x();
if( gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height() )
result.setLine( rect.left(), by + gamma, rect.right(),
by + gamma ); // no need to check right because we know line
// is horizontal
}
else // line is skewed
{
QList<QVector2D> pointVectors;
// check top of rect:
bx = rect.left();
by = rect.top();
gamma = base.x() - bx + ( by - base.y() ) * vec.x() / vec.y();
if( gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width() )
pointVectors.append( QVector2D( bx + gamma, by ) );
// check bottom of rect:
bx = rect.left();
by = rect.bottom();
gamma = base.x() - bx + ( by - base.y() ) * vec.x() / vec.y();
if( gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width() )
pointVectors.append( QVector2D( bx + gamma, by ) );
// check left of rect:
bx = rect.left();
by = rect.top();
gamma = base.y() - by + ( bx - base.x() ) * vec.y() / vec.x();
if( gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height() )
pointVectors.append( QVector2D( bx, by + gamma ) );
// check right of rect:
bx = rect.right();
by = rect.top();
gamma = base.y() - by + ( bx - base.x() ) * vec.y() / vec.x();
if( gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height() )
pointVectors.append( QVector2D( bx, by + gamma ) );
// evaluate points:
if( pointVectors.size() == 2 )
{
result.setPoints( pointVectors.at( 0 ).toPointF(), pointVectors.at( 1 ).toPointF() );
}
else if( pointVectors.size() > 2 )
{
// line probably goes through corner of rect, and we got two points there.
// single out the point pair with greatest
// distance:
double distSqrMax = 0;
QVector2D pv1, pv2;
for( int i = 0; i < pointVectors.size() - 1; ++i )
{
for( int k = i + 1; k < pointVectors.size(); ++k )
{
double distSqr = ( pointVectors.at( i ) - pointVectors.at( k ) ).lengthSquared();
if( distSqr > distSqrMax )
{
pv1 = pointVectors.at( i );
pv2 = pointVectors.at( k );
distSqrMax = distSqr;
}
}
}
result.setPoints( pv1.toPointF(), pv2.toPointF() );
}
}
return result;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the
item is not selected and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemStraightLine::mainPen() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemLine
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPItemLine
\brief A line from one point to another
\image html QCPItemLine.png "Line example. Blue dotted circles are anchors,
solid blue discs are positions."
It has two positions, \a start and \a end, which define the end points of the
line.
With \ref setHead and \ref setTail you may set different line ending styles,
e.g. to create an arrow.
*/
/*!
Creates a line item and sets default values.
The constructed item can be added to the plot with QCustomPlot::addItem.
*/
QCPItemLine::QCPItemLine( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QCPAbstractItem( parentPlot )
, start( createPosition( "start" ) )
, end( createPosition( "end" ) )
{
start->setCoords( 0, 0 );
end->setCoords( 1, 1 );
setPen( QPen( Qt::black ) );
setSelectedPen( QPen( Qt::blue, 2 ) );
}
QCPItemLine::~QCPItemLine() {}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line
\see setSelectedPen
*/
void QCPItemLine::setPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line when selected
\see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemLine::setSelectedPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the line ending style of the head. The head corresponds to the \a end
position.
Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly
specify
a QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle here, e.g. \code
setHead(QCPLineEnding::esSpikeArrow) \endcode
\see setTail
*/
void QCPItemLine::setHead( const QCPLineEnding& head )
{
mHead = head;
}
/*!
Sets the line ending style of the tail. The tail corresponds to the \a start
position.
Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly
specify
a QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle here, e.g. \code
setTail(QCPLineEnding::esSpikeArrow) \endcode
\see setHead
*/
void QCPItemLine::setTail( const QCPLineEnding& tail )
{
mTail = tail;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemLine::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectable )
return -1;
return qSqrt( distSqrToLine( start->pixelPoint(), end->pixelPoint(), pos ) );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemLine::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
QVector2D startVec( start->pixelPoint() );
QVector2D endVec( end->pixelPoint() );
if( startVec.toPoint() == endVec.toPoint() )
return;
// get visible segment of straight line inside clipRect:
double clipPad = qMax( mHead.boundingDistance(), mTail.boundingDistance() );
clipPad = qMax( clipPad, (double)mainPen().widthF() );
QLineF line = getRectClippedLine( startVec, endVec,
clipRect().adjusted( -clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad ) );
// paint visible segment, if existent:
if( !line.isNull() )
{
painter->setPen( mainPen() );
painter->drawLine( line );
painter->setBrush( Qt::SolidPattern );
if( mTail.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone )
mTail.draw( painter, startVec, startVec - endVec );
if( mHead.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone )
mHead.draw( painter, endVec, endVec - startVec );
}
}
/*! \internal
Returns the section of the line defined by \a start and \a end, that is
visible in the specified
\a rect.
This is a helper function for \ref draw.
*/
QLineF QCPItemLine::getRectClippedLine( const QVector2D& start,
const QVector2D& end,
const QRect& rect ) const
{
bool containsStart = rect.contains( start.x(), start.y() );
bool containsEnd = rect.contains( end.x(), end.y() );
if( containsStart && containsEnd )
return QLineF( start.toPointF(), end.toPointF() );
QVector2D base = start;
QVector2D vec = end - start;
double bx, by;
double gamma, mu;
QLineF result;
QList<QVector2D> pointVectors;
if( !qFuzzyIsNull( vec.y() ) ) // line is not horizontal
{
// check top of rect:
bx = rect.left();
by = rect.top();
mu = ( by - base.y() ) / vec.y();
if( mu >= 0 && mu <= 1 )
{
gamma = base.x() - bx + mu * vec.x();
if( gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width() )
pointVectors.append( QVector2D( bx + gamma, by ) );
}
// check bottom of rect:
bx = rect.left();
by = rect.bottom();
mu = ( by - base.y() ) / vec.y();
if( mu >= 0 && mu <= 1 )
{
gamma = base.x() - bx + mu * vec.x();
if( gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.width() )
pointVectors.append( QVector2D( bx + gamma, by ) );
}
}
if( !qFuzzyIsNull( vec.x() ) ) // line is not vertical
{
// check left of rect:
bx = rect.left();
by = rect.top();
mu = ( bx - base.x() ) / vec.x();
if( mu >= 0 && mu <= 1 )
{
gamma = base.y() - by + mu * vec.y();
if( gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height() )
pointVectors.append( QVector2D( bx, by + gamma ) );
}
// check right of rect:
bx = rect.right();
by = rect.top();
mu = ( bx - base.x() ) / vec.x();
if( mu >= 0 && mu <= 1 )
{
gamma = base.y() - by + mu * vec.y();
if( gamma >= 0 && gamma <= rect.height() )
pointVectors.append( QVector2D( bx, by + gamma ) );
}
}
if( containsStart )
pointVectors.append( start );
if( containsEnd )
pointVectors.append( end );
// evaluate points:
if( pointVectors.size() == 2 )
{
result.setPoints( pointVectors.at( 0 ).toPointF(), pointVectors.at( 1 ).toPointF() );
}
else if( pointVectors.size() > 2 )
{
// line probably goes through corner of rect, and we got two points there.
// single out the point pair with greatest
// distance:
double distSqrMax = 0;
QVector2D pv1, pv2;
for( int i = 0; i < pointVectors.size() - 1; ++i )
{
for( int k = i + 1; k < pointVectors.size(); ++k )
{
double distSqr = ( pointVectors.at( i ) - pointVectors.at( k ) ).lengthSquared();
if( distSqr > distSqrMax )
{
pv1 = pointVectors.at( i );
pv2 = pointVectors.at( k );
distSqrMax = distSqr;
}
}
}
result.setPoints( pv1.toPointF(), pv2.toPointF() );
}
return result;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the
item is not selected and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemLine::mainPen() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemCurve
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPItemCurve
\brief A curved line from one point to another
\image html QCPItemCurve.png "Curve example. Blue dotted circles are anchors,
solid blue discs are positions."
It has four positions, \a start and \a end, which define the end points of the
line, and two
control points which define the direction the line exits from the start and
the direction from
which it approaches the end: \a startDir and \a endDir.
With \ref setHead and \ref setTail you may set different line ending styles,
e.g. to create an
arrow.
Often it is desirable for the control points to stay at fixed relative
positions to the start/end
point. This can be achieved by setting the parent anchor e.g. of \a startDir
simply to \a start,
and then specify the desired pixel offset with QCPItemPosition::setCoords on
\a startDir.
*/
/*!
Creates a curve item and sets default values.
The constructed item can be added to the plot with QCustomPlot::addItem.
*/
QCPItemCurve::QCPItemCurve( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QCPAbstractItem( parentPlot )
, start( createPosition( "start" ) )
, startDir( createPosition( "startDir" ) )
, endDir( createPosition( "endDir" ) )
, end( createPosition( "end" ) )
{
start->setCoords( 0, 0 );
startDir->setCoords( 0.5, 0 );
endDir->setCoords( 0, 0.5 );
end->setCoords( 1, 1 );
setPen( QPen( Qt::black ) );
setSelectedPen( QPen( Qt::blue, 2 ) );
}
QCPItemCurve::~QCPItemCurve() {}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line
\see setSelectedPen
*/
void QCPItemCurve::setPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line when selected
\see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemCurve::setSelectedPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the line ending style of the head. The head corresponds to the \a end
position.
Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly
specify
a QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle here, e.g. \code
setHead(QCPLineEnding::esSpikeArrow) \endcode
\see setTail
*/
void QCPItemCurve::setHead( const QCPLineEnding& head )
{
mHead = head;
}
/*!
Sets the line ending style of the tail. The tail corresponds to the \a start
position.
Note that due to the overloaded QCPLineEnding constructor, you may directly
specify
a QCPLineEnding::EndingStyle here, e.g. \code
setTail(QCPLineEnding::esSpikeArrow) \endcode
\see setHead
*/
void QCPItemCurve::setTail( const QCPLineEnding& tail )
{
mTail = tail;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemCurve::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectable )
return -1;
QPointF startVec( start->pixelPoint() );
QPointF startDirVec( startDir->pixelPoint() );
QPointF endDirVec( endDir->pixelPoint() );
QPointF endVec( end->pixelPoint() );
QPainterPath cubicPath( startVec );
cubicPath.cubicTo( startDirVec, endDirVec, endVec );
QPolygonF polygon = cubicPath.toSubpathPolygons().first();
double minDistSqr = std::numeric_limits<double>::max();
for( int i = 1; i < polygon.size(); ++i )
{
double distSqr = distSqrToLine( polygon.at( i - 1 ), polygon.at( i ), pos );
if( distSqr < minDistSqr )
minDistSqr = distSqr;
}
return qSqrt( minDistSqr );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemCurve::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
QPointF startVec( start->pixelPoint() );
QPointF startDirVec( startDir->pixelPoint() );
QPointF endDirVec( endDir->pixelPoint() );
QPointF endVec( end->pixelPoint() );
if( QVector2D( endVec - startVec ).length() > 1e10f ) // too large curves cause crash
return;
QPainterPath cubicPath( startVec );
cubicPath.cubicTo( startDirVec, endDirVec, endVec );
// paint visible segment, if existent:
QRect clip = clipRect().adjusted( -mainPen().widthF(), -mainPen().widthF(), mainPen().widthF(),
mainPen().widthF() );
QRect cubicRect = cubicPath.controlPointRect().toRect();
if( cubicRect.isEmpty() ) // may happen when start and end exactly on same x or
// y position
cubicRect.adjust( 0, 0, 1, 1 );
if( clip.intersects( cubicRect ) )
{
painter->setPen( mainPen() );
painter->drawPath( cubicPath );
painter->setBrush( Qt::SolidPattern );
if( mTail.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone )
mTail.draw( painter, QVector2D( startVec ),
M_PI - cubicPath.angleAtPercent( 0 ) / 180.0 * M_PI );
if( mHead.style() != QCPLineEnding::esNone )
mHead.draw( painter, QVector2D( endVec ), -cubicPath.angleAtPercent( 1 ) / 180.0 * M_PI );
}
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the
item is not selected and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemCurve::mainPen() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemRect
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPItemRect
\brief A rectangle
\image html QCPItemRect.png "Rectangle example. Blue dotted circles are
anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
It has two positions, \a topLeft and \a bottomRight, which define the
rectangle.
*/
/*!
Creates a rectangle item and sets default values.
The constructed item can be added to the plot with QCustomPlot::addItem.
*/
QCPItemRect::QCPItemRect( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QCPAbstractItem( parentPlot )
, topLeft( createPosition( "topLeft" ) )
, bottomRight( createPosition( "bottomRight" ) )
, top( createAnchor( "top", aiTop ) )
, topRight( createAnchor( "topRight", aiTopRight ) )
, right( createAnchor( "right", aiRight ) )
, bottom( createAnchor( "bottom", aiBottom ) )
, bottomLeft( createAnchor( "bottomLeft", aiBottomLeft ) )
, left( createAnchor( "left", aiLeft ) )
{
topLeft->setCoords( 0, 1 );
bottomRight->setCoords( 1, 0 );
setPen( QPen( Qt::black ) );
setSelectedPen( QPen( Qt::blue, 2 ) );
setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
setSelectedBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
}
QCPItemRect::~QCPItemRect() {}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the rectangle
\see setSelectedPen, setBrush
*/
void QCPItemRect::setPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the rectangle when selected
\see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemRect::setSelectedPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the brush that will be used to fill the rectangle. To disable filling,
set \a brush to
Qt::NoBrush.
\see setSelectedBrush, setPen
*/
void QCPItemRect::setBrush( const QBrush& brush )
{
mBrush = brush;
}
/*!
Sets the brush that will be used to fill the rectangle when selected. To
disable filling, set \a
brush to Qt::NoBrush.
\see setBrush
*/
void QCPItemRect::setSelectedBrush( const QBrush& brush )
{
mSelectedBrush = brush;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemRect::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectable )
return -1;
QRectF rect = QRectF( topLeft->pixelPoint(), bottomRight->pixelPoint() ).normalized();
bool filledRect = mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && mBrush.color().alpha() != 0;
return rectSelectTest( rect, pos, filledRect );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemRect::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
QPointF p1 = topLeft->pixelPoint();
QPointF p2 = bottomRight->pixelPoint();
if( p1.toPoint() == p2.toPoint() )
return;
QRectF rect = QRectF( p1, p2 ).normalized();
double clipPad = mainPen().widthF();
QRectF boundingRect = rect.adjusted( -clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad );
if( boundingRect.intersects( clipRect() ) ) // only draw if bounding rect of rect
// item is visible in cliprect
{
painter->setPen( mainPen() );
painter->setBrush( mainBrush() );
painter->drawRect( rect );
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QPointF QCPItemRect::anchorPixelPoint( int anchorId ) const
{
QRectF rect = QRectF( topLeft->pixelPoint(), bottomRight->pixelPoint() );
switch( anchorId )
{
case aiTop:
return ( rect.topLeft() + rect.topRight() ) * 0.5;
case aiTopRight:
return rect.topRight();
case aiRight:
return ( rect.topRight() + rect.bottomRight() ) * 0.5;
case aiBottom:
return ( rect.bottomLeft() + rect.bottomRight() ) * 0.5;
case aiBottomLeft:
return rect.bottomLeft();
case aiLeft:
return ( rect.topLeft() + rect.bottomLeft() ) * 0.5;
}
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId;
return QPointF();
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the
item is not selected
and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemRect::mainPen() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the brush that should be used for drawing fills of the item. Returns
mBrush when the item
is not selected and mSelectedBrush when it is.
*/
QBrush QCPItemRect::mainBrush() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemText
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPItemText
\brief A text label
\image html QCPItemText.png "Text example. Blue dotted circles are anchors,
solid blue discs are positions."
Its position is defined by the member \a position and the setting of \ref
setPositionAlignment.
The latter controls which part of the text rect shall be aligned with \a
position.
The text alignment itself (i.e. left, center, right) can be controlled with
\ref
setTextAlignment.
The text may be rotated around the \a position point with \ref setRotation.
*/
/*!
Creates a text item and sets default values.
The constructed item can be added to the plot with QCustomPlot::addItem.
*/
QCPItemText::QCPItemText( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QCPAbstractItem( parentPlot )
, position( createPosition( "position" ) )
, topLeft( createAnchor( "topLeft", aiTopLeft ) )
, top( createAnchor( "top", aiTop ) )
, topRight( createAnchor( "topRight", aiTopRight ) )
, right( createAnchor( "right", aiRight ) )
, bottomRight( createAnchor( "bottomRight", aiBottomRight ) )
, bottom( createAnchor( "bottom", aiBottom ) )
, bottomLeft( createAnchor( "bottomLeft", aiBottomLeft ) )
, left( createAnchor( "left", aiLeft ) )
{
position->setCoords( 0, 0 );
setRotation( 0 );
setTextAlignment( Qt::AlignTop | Qt::AlignHCenter );
setPositionAlignment( Qt::AlignCenter );
setText( "text" );
setPen( Qt::NoPen );
setSelectedPen( Qt::NoPen );
setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
setSelectedBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
setColor( Qt::black );
setSelectedColor( Qt::blue );
}
QCPItemText::~QCPItemText() {}
/*!
Sets the color of the text.
*/
void QCPItemText::setColor( const QColor& color )
{
mColor = color;
}
/*!
Sets the color of the text that will be used when the item is selected.
*/
void QCPItemText::setSelectedColor( const QColor& color )
{
mSelectedColor = color;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used do draw a rectangular border around the text.
To disable the
border, set \a pen to Qt::NoPen.
\see setSelectedPen, setBrush, setPadding
*/
void QCPItemText::setPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used do draw a rectangular border around the text,
when the item is
selected. To disable the border, set \a pen to Qt::NoPen.
\see setPen
*/
void QCPItemText::setSelectedPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the brush that will be used do fill the background of the text. To
disable the
background, set \a brush to Qt::NoBrush.
\see setSelectedBrush, setPen, setPadding
*/
void QCPItemText::setBrush( const QBrush& brush )
{
mBrush = brush;
}
/*!
Sets the brush that will be used do fill the background of the text, when the
item is selected. To disable the
background, set \a brush to Qt::NoBrush.
\see setBrush
*/
void QCPItemText::setSelectedBrush( const QBrush& brush )
{
mSelectedBrush = brush;
}
/*!
Sets the font of the text.
\see setSelectedFont, setColor
*/
void QCPItemText::setFont( const QFont& font )
{
mFont = font;
}
/*!
Sets the font of the text that will be used when the item is selected.
\see setFont
*/
void QCPItemText::setSelectedFont( const QFont& font )
{
mSelectedFont = font;
}
/*!
Sets the text that will be displayed. Multi-line texts are supported by
inserting a line break
character, e.g. '\n'.
\see setFont, setColor, setTextAlignment
*/
void QCPItemText::setText( const QString& text )
{
mText = text;
}
/*!
Sets which point of the text rect shall be aligned with \a position.
Examples:
\li If \a alignment is <tt>Qt::AlignHCenter | Qt::AlignTop</tt>, the text will
be positioned such
that the top of the text rect will be horizontally centered on \a position.
\li If \a alignment is <tt>Qt::AlignLeft | Qt::AlignBottom</tt>, \a position
will indicate the
bottom left corner of the text rect.
If you want to control the alignment of (multi-lined) text within the text
rect, use \ref
setTextAlignment.
*/
void QCPItemText::setPositionAlignment( Qt::Alignment alignment )
{
mPositionAlignment = alignment;
}
/*!
Controls how (multi-lined) text is aligned inside the text rect (typically
Qt::AlignLeft, Qt::AlignCenter or
Qt::AlignRight).
*/
void QCPItemText::setTextAlignment( Qt::Alignment alignment )
{
mTextAlignment = alignment;
}
/*!
Sets the angle in degrees by which the text (and the text rectangle, if
visible) will be rotated
around \a position.
*/
void QCPItemText::setRotation( double degrees )
{
mRotation = degrees;
}
/*!
Sets the distance between the border of the text rectangle and the text. The
appearance (and
visibility) of the text rectangle can be controlled with \ref setPen and \ref
setBrush.
*/
void QCPItemText::setPadding( const QMargins& padding )
{
mPadding = padding;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemText::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectable )
return -1;
// The rect may be rotated, so we transform the actual clicked pos to the
// rotated
// coordinate system, so we can use the normal rectSelectTest function for
// non-rotated rects:
QPointF positionPixels( position->pixelPoint() );
QTransform inputTransform;
inputTransform.translate( positionPixels.x(), positionPixels.y() );
inputTransform.rotate( -mRotation );
inputTransform.translate( -positionPixels.x(), -positionPixels.y() );
QPointF rotatedPos = inputTransform.map( pos );
QFontMetrics fontMetrics( mFont );
QRect textRect = fontMetrics.boundingRect( 0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip | mTextAlignment, mText );
QRect textBoxRect =
textRect.adjusted( -mPadding.left(), -mPadding.top(), mPadding.right(), mPadding.bottom() );
QPointF textPos = getTextDrawPoint( positionPixels, textBoxRect, mPositionAlignment );
textBoxRect.moveTopLeft( textPos.toPoint() );
return rectSelectTest( textBoxRect, rotatedPos, true );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemText::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
QPointF pos( position->pixelPoint() );
QTransform transform = painter->transform();
transform.translate( pos.x(), pos.y() );
if( !qFuzzyIsNull( mRotation ) )
transform.rotate( mRotation );
painter->setFont( mainFont() );
QRect textRect =
painter->fontMetrics().boundingRect( 0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip | mTextAlignment, mText );
QRect textBoxRect =
textRect.adjusted( -mPadding.left(), -mPadding.top(), mPadding.right(), mPadding.bottom() );
QPointF textPos =
getTextDrawPoint( QPointF( 0, 0 ), textBoxRect,
mPositionAlignment ); // 0, 0 because the transform does the translation
textRect.moveTopLeft( textPos.toPoint() + QPoint( mPadding.left(), mPadding.top() ) );
textBoxRect.moveTopLeft( textPos.toPoint() );
double clipPad = mainPen().widthF();
QRect boundingRect = textBoxRect.adjusted( -clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad );
if( transform.mapRect( boundingRect ).intersects( painter->transform().mapRect( clipRect() ) ) )
{
painter->setTransform( transform );
if( ( mainBrush().style() != Qt::NoBrush && mainBrush().color().alpha() != 0 ) ||
( mainPen().style() != Qt::NoPen && mainPen().color().alpha() != 0 ) )
{
painter->setPen( mainPen() );
painter->setBrush( mainBrush() );
painter->drawRect( textBoxRect );
}
painter->setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
painter->setPen( QPen( mainColor() ) );
painter->drawText( textRect, Qt::TextDontClip | mTextAlignment, mText );
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QPointF QCPItemText::anchorPixelPoint( int anchorId ) const
{
// get actual rect points (pretty much copied from draw function):
QPointF pos( position->pixelPoint() );
QTransform transform;
transform.translate( pos.x(), pos.y() );
if( !qFuzzyIsNull( mRotation ) )
transform.rotate( mRotation );
QFontMetrics fontMetrics( mainFont() );
QRect textRect = fontMetrics.boundingRect( 0, 0, 0, 0, Qt::TextDontClip | mTextAlignment, mText );
QRectF textBoxRect =
textRect.adjusted( -mPadding.left(), -mPadding.top(), mPadding.right(), mPadding.bottom() );
QPointF textPos =
getTextDrawPoint( QPointF( 0, 0 ), textBoxRect,
mPositionAlignment ); // 0, 0 because the transform does the translation
textBoxRect.moveTopLeft( textPos.toPoint() );
QPolygonF rectPoly = transform.map( QPolygonF( textBoxRect ) );
switch( anchorId )
{
case aiTopLeft:
return rectPoly.at( 0 );
case aiTop:
return ( rectPoly.at( 0 ) + rectPoly.at( 1 ) ) * 0.5;
case aiTopRight:
return rectPoly.at( 1 );
case aiRight:
return ( rectPoly.at( 1 ) + rectPoly.at( 2 ) ) * 0.5;
case aiBottomRight:
return rectPoly.at( 2 );
case aiBottom:
return ( rectPoly.at( 2 ) + rectPoly.at( 3 ) ) * 0.5;
case aiBottomLeft:
return rectPoly.at( 3 );
case aiLeft:
return ( rectPoly.at( 3 ) + rectPoly.at( 0 ) ) * 0.5;
}
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId;
return QPointF();
}
/*! \internal
Returns the point that must be given to the QPainter::drawText function (which
expects the top
left point of the text rect), according to the position \a pos, the text
bounding box \a rect and
the requested \a positionAlignment.
For example, if \a positionAlignment is <tt>Qt::AlignLeft |
Qt::AlignBottom</tt> the returned point
will be shifted upward by the height of \a rect, starting from \a pos. So if
the text is finally
drawn at that point, the lower left corner of the resulting text rect is at \a
pos.
*/
QPointF QCPItemText::getTextDrawPoint( const QPointF& pos,
const QRectF& rect,
Qt::Alignment positionAlignment ) const
{
if( positionAlignment == 0 || positionAlignment == ( Qt::AlignLeft | Qt::AlignTop ) )
return pos;
QPointF result = pos; // start at top left
if( positionAlignment.testFlag( Qt::AlignHCenter ) )
result.rx() -= rect.width() / 2.0;
else if( positionAlignment.testFlag( Qt::AlignRight ) )
result.rx() -= rect.width();
if( positionAlignment.testFlag( Qt::AlignVCenter ) )
result.ry() -= rect.height() / 2.0;
else if( positionAlignment.testFlag( Qt::AlignBottom ) )
result.ry() -= rect.height();
return result;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the font that should be used for drawing text. Returns mFont when the
item is not selected
and mSelectedFont when it is.
*/
QFont QCPItemText::mainFont() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedFont : mFont;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the color that should be used for drawing text. Returns mColor when
the item is not
selected and mSelectedColor when it is.
*/
QColor QCPItemText::mainColor() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedColor : mColor;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the
item is not selected
and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemText::mainPen() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the brush that should be used for drawing fills of the item. Returns
mBrush when the item
is not selected and mSelectedBrush when it is.
*/
QBrush QCPItemText::mainBrush() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemEllipse
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPItemEllipse
\brief An ellipse
\image html QCPItemEllipse.png "Ellipse example. Blue dotted circles are
anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
It has two positions, \a topLeft and \a bottomRight, which define the rect the
ellipse will be drawn in.
*/
/*!
Creates an ellipse item and sets default values.
The constructed item can be added to the plot with QCustomPlot::addItem.
*/
QCPItemEllipse::QCPItemEllipse( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QCPAbstractItem( parentPlot )
, topLeft( createPosition( "topLeft" ) )
, bottomRight( createPosition( "bottomRight" ) )
, topLeftRim( createAnchor( "topLeftRim", aiTopLeftRim ) )
, top( createAnchor( "top", aiTop ) )
, topRightRim( createAnchor( "topRightRim", aiTopRightRim ) )
, right( createAnchor( "right", aiRight ) )
, bottomRightRim( createAnchor( "bottomRightRim", aiBottomRightRim ) )
, bottom( createAnchor( "bottom", aiBottom ) )
, bottomLeftRim( createAnchor( "bottomLeftRim", aiBottomLeftRim ) )
, left( createAnchor( "left", aiLeft ) )
, center( createAnchor( "center", aiCenter ) )
{
topLeft->setCoords( 0, 1 );
bottomRight->setCoords( 1, 0 );
setPen( QPen( Qt::black ) );
setSelectedPen( QPen( Qt::blue, 2 ) );
setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
setSelectedBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
}
QCPItemEllipse::~QCPItemEllipse() {}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the ellipse
\see setSelectedPen, setBrush
*/
void QCPItemEllipse::setPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the ellipse when selected
\see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemEllipse::setSelectedPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the brush that will be used to fill the ellipse. To disable filling, set
\a brush to
Qt::NoBrush.
\see setSelectedBrush, setPen
*/
void QCPItemEllipse::setBrush( const QBrush& brush )
{
mBrush = brush;
}
/*!
Sets the brush that will be used to fill the ellipse when selected. To disable
filling, set \a
brush to Qt::NoBrush.
\see setBrush
*/
void QCPItemEllipse::setSelectedBrush( const QBrush& brush )
{
mSelectedBrush = brush;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemEllipse::selectTest( const QPointF& pos,
bool onlySelectable,
QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectable )
return -1;
double result = -1;
QPointF p1 = topLeft->pixelPoint();
QPointF p2 = bottomRight->pixelPoint();
QPointF center( ( p1 + p2 ) / 2.0 );
double a = qAbs( p1.x() - p2.x() ) / 2.0;
double b = qAbs( p1.y() - p2.y() ) / 2.0;
double x = pos.x() - center.x();
double y = pos.y() - center.y();
// distance to border:
double c = 1.0 / qSqrt( x * x / ( a * a ) + y * y / ( b * b ) );
result = qAbs( c - 1 ) * qSqrt( x * x + y * y );
// filled ellipse, allow click inside to count as hit:
if( result > mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99 && mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush &&
mBrush.color().alpha() != 0 )
{
if( x * x / ( a * a ) + y * y / ( b * b ) <= 1 )
result = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99;
}
return result;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemEllipse::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
QPointF p1 = topLeft->pixelPoint();
QPointF p2 = bottomRight->pixelPoint();
if( p1.toPoint() == p2.toPoint() )
return;
QRectF ellipseRect = QRectF( p1, p2 ).normalized();
QRect clip = clipRect().adjusted( -mainPen().widthF(), -mainPen().widthF(), mainPen().widthF(),
mainPen().widthF() );
if( ellipseRect.intersects(
clip ) ) // only draw if bounding rect of ellipse is visible in cliprect
{
painter->setPen( mainPen() );
painter->setBrush( mainBrush() );
#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS
try // drawEllipse sometimes throws exceptions if ellipse is too big
{
#endif
painter->drawEllipse( ellipseRect );
#ifdef __EXCEPTIONS
}
catch( ... )
{
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "Item too large for memory, setting invisible";
setVisible( false );
}
#endif
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QPointF QCPItemEllipse::anchorPixelPoint( int anchorId ) const
{
QRectF rect = QRectF( topLeft->pixelPoint(), bottomRight->pixelPoint() );
switch( anchorId )
{
case aiTopLeftRim:
return rect.center() + ( rect.topLeft() - rect.center() ) * 1 / qSqrt( 2 );
case aiTop:
return ( rect.topLeft() + rect.topRight() ) * 0.5;
case aiTopRightRim:
return rect.center() + ( rect.topRight() - rect.center() ) * 1 / qSqrt( 2 );
case aiRight:
return ( rect.topRight() + rect.bottomRight() ) * 0.5;
case aiBottomRightRim:
return rect.center() + ( rect.bottomRight() - rect.center() ) * 1 / qSqrt( 2 );
case aiBottom:
return ( rect.bottomLeft() + rect.bottomRight() ) * 0.5;
case aiBottomLeftRim:
return rect.center() + ( rect.bottomLeft() - rect.center() ) * 1 / qSqrt( 2 );
case aiLeft:
return ( rect.topLeft() + rect.bottomLeft() ) * 0.5;
case aiCenter:
return ( rect.topLeft() + rect.bottomRight() ) * 0.5;
}
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId;
return QPointF();
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the
item is not selected
and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemEllipse::mainPen() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the brush that should be used for drawing fills of the item. Returns
mBrush when the item
is not selected and mSelectedBrush when it is.
*/
QBrush QCPItemEllipse::mainBrush() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemPixmap
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPItemPixmap
\brief An arbitrary pixmap
\image html QCPItemPixmap.png "Pixmap example. Blue dotted circles are
anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
It has two positions, \a topLeft and \a bottomRight, which define the
rectangle the pixmap will
be drawn in. Depending on the scale setting (\ref setScaled), the pixmap will
be either scaled to
fit the rectangle or be drawn aligned to the topLeft position.
If scaling is enabled and \a topLeft is further to the bottom/right than \a
bottomRight (as shown
on the right side of the example image), the pixmap will be flipped in the
respective
orientations.
*/
/*!
Creates a rectangle item and sets default values.
The constructed item can be added to the plot with QCustomPlot::addItem.
*/
QCPItemPixmap::QCPItemPixmap( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QCPAbstractItem( parentPlot )
, topLeft( createPosition( "topLeft" ) )
, bottomRight( createPosition( "bottomRight" ) )
, top( createAnchor( "top", aiTop ) )
, topRight( createAnchor( "topRight", aiTopRight ) )
, right( createAnchor( "right", aiRight ) )
, bottom( createAnchor( "bottom", aiBottom ) )
, bottomLeft( createAnchor( "bottomLeft", aiBottomLeft ) )
, left( createAnchor( "left", aiLeft ) )
{
topLeft->setCoords( 0, 1 );
bottomRight->setCoords( 1, 0 );
setPen( Qt::NoPen );
setSelectedPen( QPen( Qt::blue ) );
setScaled( false, Qt::KeepAspectRatio );
}
QCPItemPixmap::~QCPItemPixmap() {}
/*!
Sets the pixmap that will be displayed.
*/
void QCPItemPixmap::setPixmap( const QPixmap& pixmap )
{
mPixmap = pixmap;
if( mPixmap.isNull() )
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "pixmap is null";
}
/*!
Sets whether the pixmap will be scaled to fit the rectangle defined by the \a
topLeft and \a
bottomRight positions.
*/
void QCPItemPixmap::setScaled( bool scaled, Qt::AspectRatioMode aspectRatioMode )
{
mScaled = scaled;
mAspectRatioMode = aspectRatioMode;
updateScaledPixmap();
}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw a border around the pixmap.
\see setSelectedPen, setBrush
*/
void QCPItemPixmap::setPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw a border around the pixmap when
selected
\see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemPixmap::setSelectedPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedPen = pen;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemPixmap::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectable )
return -1;
return rectSelectTest( getFinalRect(), pos, true );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemPixmap::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
bool flipHorz = false;
bool flipVert = false;
QRect rect = getFinalRect( &flipHorz, &flipVert );
double clipPad = mainPen().style() == Qt::NoPen ? 0 : mainPen().widthF();
QRect boundingRect = rect.adjusted( -clipPad, -clipPad, clipPad, clipPad );
if( boundingRect.intersects( clipRect() ) )
{
updateScaledPixmap( rect, flipHorz, flipVert );
painter->drawPixmap( rect.topLeft(), mScaled ? mScaledPixmap : mPixmap );
QPen pen = mainPen();
if( pen.style() != Qt::NoPen )
{
painter->setPen( pen );
painter->setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
painter->drawRect( rect );
}
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QPointF QCPItemPixmap::anchorPixelPoint( int anchorId ) const
{
bool flipHorz;
bool flipVert;
QRect rect = getFinalRect( &flipHorz, &flipVert );
// we actually want denormal rects (negative width/height) here, so restore
// the flipped state:
if( flipHorz )
rect.adjust( rect.width(), 0, -rect.width(), 0 );
if( flipVert )
rect.adjust( 0, rect.height(), 0, -rect.height() );
switch( anchorId )
{
case aiTop:
return ( rect.topLeft() + rect.topRight() ) * 0.5;
case aiTopRight:
return rect.topRight();
case aiRight:
return ( rect.topRight() + rect.bottomRight() ) * 0.5;
case aiBottom:
return ( rect.bottomLeft() + rect.bottomRight() ) * 0.5;
case aiBottomLeft:
return rect.bottomLeft();
case aiLeft:
return ( rect.topLeft() + rect.bottomLeft() ) * 0.5;
;
}
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId;
return QPointF();
}
/*! \internal
Creates the buffered scaled image (\a mScaledPixmap) to fit the specified \a
finalRect. The
parameters \a flipHorz and \a flipVert control whether the resulting image
shall be flipped
horizontally or vertically. (This is used when \a topLeft is further to the
bottom/right than \a
bottomRight.)
This function only creates the scaled pixmap when the buffered pixmap has a
different size than
the expected result, so calling this function repeatedly, e.g. in the \ref
draw function, does
not cause expensive rescaling every time.
If scaling is disabled, sets mScaledPixmap to a null QPixmap.
*/
void QCPItemPixmap::updateScaledPixmap( QRect finalRect, bool flipHorz, bool flipVert )
{
if( mPixmap.isNull() )
return;
if( mScaled )
{
if( finalRect.isNull() )
finalRect = getFinalRect( &flipHorz, &flipVert );
if( finalRect.size() != mScaledPixmap.size() )
{
mScaledPixmap =
mPixmap.scaled( finalRect.size(), mAspectRatioMode, Qt::SmoothTransformation );
if( flipHorz || flipVert )
mScaledPixmap =
QPixmap::fromImage( mScaledPixmap.toImage().mirrored( flipHorz, flipVert ) );
}
}
else if( !mScaledPixmap.isNull() )
mScaledPixmap = QPixmap();
}
/*! \internal
Returns the final (tight) rect the pixmap is drawn in, depending on the
current item positions
and scaling settings.
The output parameters \a flippedHorz and \a flippedVert return whether the
pixmap should be drawn
flipped horizontally or vertically in the returned rect. (The returned rect
itself is always
normalized, i.e. the top left corner of the rect is actually further to the
top/left than the
bottom right corner). This is the case when the item position \a topLeft is
further to the
bottom/right than \a bottomRight.
If scaling is disabled, returns a rect with size of the original pixmap and
the top left corner
aligned with the item position \a topLeft. The position \a bottomRight is
ignored.
*/
QRect QCPItemPixmap::getFinalRect( bool* flippedHorz, bool* flippedVert ) const
{
QRect result;
bool flipHorz = false;
bool flipVert = false;
QPoint p1 = topLeft->pixelPoint().toPoint();
QPoint p2 = bottomRight->pixelPoint().toPoint();
if( p1 == p2 )
return QRect( p1, QSize( 0, 0 ) );
if( mScaled )
{
QSize newSize = QSize( p2.x() - p1.x(), p2.y() - p1.y() );
QPoint topLeft = p1;
if( newSize.width() < 0 )
{
flipHorz = true;
newSize.rwidth() *= -1;
topLeft.setX( p2.x() );
}
if( newSize.height() < 0 )
{
flipVert = true;
newSize.rheight() *= -1;
topLeft.setY( p2.y() );
}
QSize scaledSize = mPixmap.size();
scaledSize.scale( newSize, mAspectRatioMode );
result = QRect( topLeft, scaledSize );
}
else
{
result = QRect( p1, mPixmap.size() );
}
if( flippedHorz )
*flippedHorz = flipHorz;
if( flippedVert )
*flippedVert = flipVert;
return result;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the
item is not selected
and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemPixmap::mainPen() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemTracer
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPItemTracer
\brief Item that sticks to QCPGraph data points
\image html QCPItemTracer.png "Tracer example. Blue dotted circles are
anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
The tracer can be connected with a QCPGraph via \ref setGraph. Then it will
automatically adopt
the coordinate axes of the graph and update its \a position to be on the
graph's data. This means
the key stays controllable via \ref setGraphKey, but the value will follow the
graph data. If a
QCPGraph is connected, note that setting the coordinates of the tracer item
directly via \a
position will have no effect because they will be overriden in the next redraw
(this is when the
coordinate update happens).
If the specified key in \ref setGraphKey is outside the key bounds of the
graph, the tracer will
stay at the corresponding end of the graph.
With \ref setInterpolating you may specify whether the tracer may only stay
exactly on data
points or whether it interpolates data points linearly, if given a key that
lies between two data
points of the graph.
The tracer has different visual styles, see \ref setStyle. It is also possible
to make the tracer
have no own visual appearance (set the style to \ref tsNone), and just connect
other item
positions to the tracer \a position (used as an anchor) via \ref
QCPItemPosition::setParentAnchor.
\note The tracer position is only automatically updated upon redraws. So when
the data of the
graph changes and immediately afterwards (without a redraw) the a position
coordinates of the
tracer are retrieved, they will not reflect the updated data of the graph. In
this case \ref
updatePosition must be called manually, prior to reading the tracer
coordinates.
*/
/*!
Creates a tracer item and sets default values.
The constructed item can be added to the plot with QCustomPlot::addItem.
*/
QCPItemTracer::QCPItemTracer( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QCPAbstractItem( parentPlot ), position( createPosition( "position" ) ), mGraph( 0 )
{
position->setCoords( 0, 0 );
setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
setSelectedBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
setPen( QPen( Qt::black ) );
setSelectedPen( QPen( Qt::blue, 2 ) );
setStyle( tsCrosshair );
setSize( 6 );
setInterpolating( false );
setGraphKey( 0 );
}
QCPItemTracer::~QCPItemTracer() {}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the tracer
\see setSelectedPen, setBrush
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the line of the tracer when selected
\see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setSelectedPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the brush that will be used to draw any fills of the tracer
\see setSelectedBrush, setPen
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setBrush( const QBrush& brush )
{
mBrush = brush;
}
/*!
Sets the brush that will be used to draw any fills of the tracer, when
selected.
\see setBrush, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setSelectedBrush( const QBrush& brush )
{
mSelectedBrush = brush;
}
/*!
Sets the size of the tracer in pixels, if the style supports setting a size
(e.g. \ref tsSquare
does, \ref tsCrosshair does not).
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setSize( double size )
{
mSize = size;
}
/*!
Sets the style/visual appearance of the tracer.
If you only want to use the tracer \a position as an anchor for other items,
set \a style to
\ref tsNone.
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setStyle( QCPItemTracer::TracerStyle style )
{
mStyle = style;
}
/*!
Sets the QCPGraph this tracer sticks to. The tracer \a position will be set to
type
QCPItemPosition::ptPlotCoords and the axes will be set to the axes of \a
graph.
To free the tracer from any graph, set \a graph to 0. The tracer \a position
can then be placed
freely like any other item position. This is the state the tracer will assume
when its graph gets
deleted while still attached to it.
\see setGraphKey
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setGraph( QCPGraph* graph )
{
if( graph )
{
if( graph->parentPlot() == mParentPlot )
{
position->setType( QCPItemPosition::ptPlotCoords );
position->setAxes( graph->keyAxis(), graph->valueAxis() );
mGraph = graph;
updatePosition();
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "graph isn't in same QCustomPlot instance as this item";
}
else
{
mGraph = 0;
}
}
/*!
Sets the key of the graph's data point the tracer will be positioned at. This
is the only free
coordinate of a tracer when attached to a graph.
Depending on \ref setInterpolating, the tracer will be either positioned on
the data point
closest to \a key, or will stay exactly at \a key and interpolate the value
linearly.
\see setGraph, setInterpolating
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setGraphKey( double key )
{
mGraphKey = key;
}
/*!
Sets whether the value of the graph's data points shall be interpolated, when
positioning the
tracer.
If \a enabled is set to false and a key is given with \ref setGraphKey, the
tracer is placed on
the data point of the graph which is closest to the key, but which is not
necessarily exactly
there. If \a enabled is true, the tracer will be positioned exactly at the
specified key, and
the appropriate value will be interpolated from the graph's data points
linearly.
\see setGraph, setGraphKey
*/
void QCPItemTracer::setInterpolating( bool enabled )
{
mInterpolating = enabled;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemTracer::selectTest( const QPointF& pos, bool onlySelectable, QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectable )
return -1;
QPointF center( position->pixelPoint() );
double w = mSize / 2.0;
QRect clip = clipRect();
switch( mStyle )
{
case tsNone:
return -1;
case tsPlus:
{
if( clipRect().intersects(
QRectF( center - QPointF( w, w ), center + QPointF( w, w ) ).toRect() ) )
return qSqrt(
qMin( distSqrToLine( center + QPointF( -w, 0 ), center + QPointF( w, 0 ), pos ),
distSqrToLine( center + QPointF( 0, -w ), center + QPointF( 0, w ), pos ) ) );
break;
}
case tsCrosshair:
{
return qSqrt( qMin( distSqrToLine( QPointF( clip.left(), center.y() ),
QPointF( clip.right(), center.y() ), pos ),
distSqrToLine( QPointF( center.x(), clip.top() ),
QPointF( center.x(), clip.bottom() ), pos ) ) );
}
case tsCircle:
{
if( clip.intersects( QRectF( center - QPointF( w, w ), center + QPointF( w, w ) ).toRect() ) )
{
// distance to border:
double centerDist = QVector2D( center - pos ).length();
double circleLine = w;
double result = qAbs( centerDist - circleLine );
// filled ellipse, allow click inside to count as hit:
if( result > mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99 && mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush &&
mBrush.color().alpha() != 0 )
{
if( centerDist <= circleLine )
result = mParentPlot->selectionTolerance() * 0.99;
}
return result;
}
break;
}
case tsSquare:
{
if( clip.intersects( QRectF( center - QPointF( w, w ), center + QPointF( w, w ) ).toRect() ) )
{
QRectF rect = QRectF( center - QPointF( w, w ), center + QPointF( w, w ) );
bool filledRect = mBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && mBrush.color().alpha() != 0;
return rectSelectTest( rect, pos, filledRect );
}
break;
}
}
return -1;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemTracer::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
updatePosition();
if( mStyle == tsNone )
return;
painter->setPen( mainPen() );
painter->setBrush( mainBrush() );
QPointF center( position->pixelPoint() );
double w = mSize / 2.0;
QRect clip = clipRect();
switch( mStyle )
{
case tsNone:
return;
case tsPlus:
{
if( clip.intersects( QRectF( center - QPointF( w, w ), center + QPointF( w, w ) ).toRect() ) )
{
painter->drawLine( QLineF( center + QPointF( -w, 0 ), center + QPointF( w, 0 ) ) );
painter->drawLine( QLineF( center + QPointF( 0, -w ), center + QPointF( 0, w ) ) );
}
break;
}
case tsCrosshair:
{
if( center.y() > clip.top() && center.y() < clip.bottom() )
painter->drawLine( QLineF( clip.left(), center.y(), clip.right(), center.y() ) );
if( center.x() > clip.left() && center.x() < clip.right() )
painter->drawLine( QLineF( center.x(), clip.top(), center.x(), clip.bottom() ) );
break;
}
case tsCircle:
{
if( clip.intersects( QRectF( center - QPointF( w, w ), center + QPointF( w, w ) ).toRect() ) )
painter->drawEllipse( center, w, w );
break;
}
case tsSquare:
{
if( clip.intersects( QRectF( center - QPointF( w, w ), center + QPointF( w, w ) ).toRect() ) )
painter->drawRect( QRectF( center - QPointF( w, w ), center + QPointF( w, w ) ) );
break;
}
}
}
/*!
If the tracer is connected with a graph (\ref setGraph), this function updates
the tracer's \a
position to reside on the graph data, depending on the configured key (\ref
setGraphKey).
It is called automatically on every redraw and normally doesn't need to be
called manually. One
exception is when you want to read the tracer coordinates via \a position and
are not sure that
the graph's data (or the tracer key with \ref setGraphKey) hasn't changed
since the last redraw.
In that situation, call this function before accessing \a position, to make
sure you don't get
out-of-date coordinates.
If there is no graph set on this tracer, this function does nothing.
*/
void QCPItemTracer::updatePosition()
{
if( mGraph )
{
if( mParentPlot->hasPlottable( mGraph ) )
{
if( mGraph->data()->size() > 1 )
{
QCPDataMap::const_iterator first = mGraph->data()->constBegin();
QCPDataMap::const_iterator last = mGraph->data()->constEnd() - 1;
if( mGraphKey < first.key() )
position->setCoords( first.key(), first.value().value );
else if( mGraphKey > last.key() )
position->setCoords( last.key(), last.value().value );
else
{
QCPDataMap::const_iterator it = mGraph->data()->lowerBound( mGraphKey );
if( it != first ) // mGraphKey is somewhere between iterators
{
QCPDataMap::const_iterator prevIt = it - 1;
if( mInterpolating )
{
// interpolate between iterators around mGraphKey:
double slope = 0;
if( !qFuzzyCompare( (double)it.key(), (double)prevIt.key() ) )
slope = ( it.value().value - prevIt.value().value ) / ( it.key() - prevIt.key() );
position->setCoords( mGraphKey,
( mGraphKey - prevIt.key() ) * slope + prevIt.value().value );
}
else
{
// find iterator with key closest to mGraphKey:
if( mGraphKey < ( prevIt.key() + it.key() ) * 0.5 )
it = prevIt;
position->setCoords( it.key(), it.value().value );
}
}
else // mGraphKey is exactly on first iterator
position->setCoords( it.key(), it.value().value );
}
}
else if( mGraph->data()->size() == 1 )
{
QCPDataMap::const_iterator it = mGraph->data()->constBegin();
position->setCoords( it.key(), it.value().value );
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "graph has no data";
}
else
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "graph not contained in QCustomPlot instance (anymore)";
}
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the
item is not selected
and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemTracer::mainPen() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
/*! \internal
Returns the brush that should be used for drawing fills of the item. Returns
mBrush when the item
is not selected and mSelectedBrush when it is.
*/
QBrush QCPItemTracer::mainBrush() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedBrush : mBrush;
}
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//////////////////// QCPItemBracket
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
/*! \class QCPItemBracket
\brief A bracket for referencing/highlighting certain parts in the plot.
\image html QCPItemBracket.png "Bracket example. Blue dotted circles are
anchors, solid blue discs are positions."
It has two positions, \a left and \a right, which define the span of the
bracket. If \a left is
actually farther to the left than \a right, the bracket is opened to the
bottom, as shown in the
example image.
The bracket supports multiple styles via \ref setStyle. The length, i.e. how
far the bracket
stretches away from the embraced span, can be controlled with \ref setLength.
\image html QCPItemBracket-length.png
<center>Demonstrating the effect of different values for \ref setLength, for
styles \ref
bsCalligraphic and \ref bsSquare. Anchors and positions are displayed for
reference.</center>
It provides an anchor \a center, to allow connection of other items, e.g. an
arrow (QCPItemLine
or QCPItemCurve) or a text label (QCPItemText), to the bracket.
*/
/*!
Creates a bracket item and sets default values.
The constructed item can be added to the plot with QCustomPlot::addItem.
*/
QCPItemBracket::QCPItemBracket( QCustomPlot* parentPlot )
: QCPAbstractItem( parentPlot )
, left( createPosition( "left" ) )
, right( createPosition( "right" ) )
, center( createAnchor( "center", aiCenter ) )
{
left->setCoords( 0, 0 );
right->setCoords( 1, 1 );
setPen( QPen( Qt::black ) );
setSelectedPen( QPen( Qt::blue, 2 ) );
setLength( 8 );
setStyle( bsCalligraphic );
}
QCPItemBracket::~QCPItemBracket() {}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the bracket.
Note that when the style is \ref bsCalligraphic, only the color will be taken
from the pen, the
stroke and width are ignored. To change the apparent stroke width of a
calligraphic bracket, use
\ref setLength, which has a similar effect.
\see setSelectedPen
*/
void QCPItemBracket::setPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the pen that will be used to draw the bracket when selected
\see setPen, setSelected
*/
void QCPItemBracket::setSelectedPen( const QPen& pen )
{
mSelectedPen = pen;
}
/*!
Sets the \a length in pixels how far the bracket extends in the direction
towards the embraced
span of the bracket (i.e. perpendicular to the
<i>left</i>-<i>right</i>-direction)
\image html QCPItemBracket-length.png
<center>Demonstrating the effect of different values for \ref setLength, for
styles \ref
bsCalligraphic and \ref bsSquare. Anchors and positions are displayed for
reference.</center>
*/
void QCPItemBracket::setLength( double length )
{
mLength = length;
}
/*!
Sets the style of the bracket, i.e. the shape/visual appearance.
\see setPen
*/
void QCPItemBracket::setStyle( QCPItemBracket::BracketStyle style )
{
mStyle = style;
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
double QCPItemBracket::selectTest( const QPointF& pos,
bool onlySelectable,
QVariant* details ) const
{
Q_UNUSED( details )
if( onlySelectable && !mSelectable )
return -1;
QVector2D leftVec( left->pixelPoint() );
QVector2D rightVec( right->pixelPoint() );
if( leftVec.toPoint() == rightVec.toPoint() )
return -1;
QVector2D widthVec = ( rightVec - leftVec ) * 0.5f;
QVector2D lengthVec( -widthVec.y(), widthVec.x() );
lengthVec = lengthVec.normalized() * mLength;
QVector2D centerVec = ( rightVec + leftVec ) * 0.5f - lengthVec;
return qSqrt( distSqrToLine( ( centerVec - widthVec ).toPointF(),
( centerVec + widthVec ).toPointF(), pos ) );
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
void QCPItemBracket::draw( QCPPainter* painter )
{
QVector2D leftVec( left->pixelPoint() );
QVector2D rightVec( right->pixelPoint() );
if( leftVec.toPoint() == rightVec.toPoint() )
return;
QVector2D widthVec = ( rightVec - leftVec ) * 0.5f;
QVector2D lengthVec( -widthVec.y(), widthVec.x() );
lengthVec = lengthVec.normalized() * mLength;
QVector2D centerVec = ( rightVec + leftVec ) * 0.5f - lengthVec;
QPolygon boundingPoly;
boundingPoly << leftVec.toPoint() << rightVec.toPoint() << ( rightVec - lengthVec ).toPoint()
<< ( leftVec - lengthVec ).toPoint();
QRect clip = clipRect().adjusted( -mainPen().widthF(), -mainPen().widthF(), mainPen().widthF(),
mainPen().widthF() );
if( clip.intersects( boundingPoly.boundingRect() ) )
{
painter->setPen( mainPen() );
switch( mStyle )
{
case bsSquare:
{
painter->drawLine( ( centerVec + widthVec ).toPointF(),
( centerVec - widthVec ).toPointF() );
painter->drawLine( ( centerVec + widthVec ).toPointF(),
( centerVec + widthVec + lengthVec ).toPointF() );
painter->drawLine( ( centerVec - widthVec ).toPointF(),
( centerVec - widthVec + lengthVec ).toPointF() );
break;
}
case bsRound:
{
painter->setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
QPainterPath path;
path.moveTo( ( centerVec + widthVec + lengthVec ).toPointF() );
path.cubicTo( ( centerVec + widthVec ).toPointF(), ( centerVec + widthVec ).toPointF(),
centerVec.toPointF() );
path.cubicTo( ( centerVec - widthVec ).toPointF(), ( centerVec - widthVec ).toPointF(),
( centerVec - widthVec + lengthVec ).toPointF() );
painter->drawPath( path );
break;
}
case bsCurly:
{
painter->setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
QPainterPath path;
path.moveTo( ( centerVec + widthVec + lengthVec ).toPointF() );
path.cubicTo( ( centerVec + widthVec - lengthVec * 0.8f ).toPointF(),
( centerVec + 0.4f * widthVec + lengthVec ).toPointF(),
centerVec.toPointF() );
path.cubicTo( ( centerVec - 0.4f * widthVec + lengthVec ).toPointF(),
( centerVec - widthVec - lengthVec * 0.8f ).toPointF(),
( centerVec - widthVec + lengthVec ).toPointF() );
painter->drawPath( path );
break;
}
case bsCalligraphic:
{
painter->setPen( Qt::NoPen );
painter->setBrush( QBrush( mainPen().color() ) );
QPainterPath path;
path.moveTo( ( centerVec + widthVec + lengthVec ).toPointF() );
path.cubicTo( ( centerVec + widthVec - lengthVec * 0.8f ).toPointF(),
( centerVec + 0.4f * widthVec + 0.8f * lengthVec ).toPointF(),
centerVec.toPointF() );
path.cubicTo( ( centerVec - 0.4f * widthVec + 0.8f * lengthVec ).toPointF(),
( centerVec - widthVec - lengthVec * 0.8f ).toPointF(),
( centerVec - widthVec + lengthVec ).toPointF() );
path.cubicTo( ( centerVec - widthVec - lengthVec * 0.5f ).toPointF(),
( centerVec - 0.2f * widthVec + 1.2f * lengthVec ).toPointF(),
( centerVec + lengthVec * 0.2f ).toPointF() );
path.cubicTo( ( centerVec + 0.2f * widthVec + 1.2f * lengthVec ).toPointF(),
( centerVec + widthVec - lengthVec * 0.5f ).toPointF(),
( centerVec + widthVec + lengthVec ).toPointF() );
painter->drawPath( path );
break;
}
}
}
}
/* inherits documentation from base class */
QPointF QCPItemBracket::anchorPixelPoint( int anchorId ) const
{
QVector2D leftVec( left->pixelPoint() );
QVector2D rightVec( right->pixelPoint() );
if( leftVec.toPoint() == rightVec.toPoint() )
return leftVec.toPointF();
QVector2D widthVec = ( rightVec - leftVec ) * 0.5f;
QVector2D lengthVec( -widthVec.y(), widthVec.x() );
lengthVec = lengthVec.normalized() * mLength;
QVector2D centerVec = ( rightVec + leftVec ) * 0.5f - lengthVec;
switch( anchorId )
{
case aiCenter:
return centerVec.toPointF();
}
qDebug() << Q_FUNC_INFO << "invalid anchorId" << anchorId;
return QPointF();
}
/*! \internal
Returns the pen that should be used for drawing lines. Returns mPen when the
item is not selected and mSelectedPen when it is.
*/
QPen QCPItemBracket::mainPen() const
{
return mSelected ? mSelectedPen : mPen;
}
Reference in new issue View Git Blame Copy Permalink